o " ° „ 1 
 
 
 
 
 o. .rr,-' .0 
 
 '^■P 
 
 r ..r 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 ■«>. .9^ 
 
 
 
 
 >^v 
 
 
 
I ■ » ^ ■v>' 
 
A NEW 
 
 Wk^ttm of €it0fiv»»^t^ 
 
 ANCIENT AND MODERN, 
 
 FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS 5 
 
 ACCOMPANIED WITH AN ATLAS, 
 
 ADAPTED TO THE WOKK. 
 
 BY JEDIDIAH MORSE, D.D. 
 
 II 
 
 AKD 
 
 SIDNEY EDWARDS MORSE, A.M. 
 
 i:totrtB=Sii:tfi IBmion. 
 
 NEW- YORK : 
 PUBLISHED BY COLLINS k BANNA V, 
 
 •J. & J. Harper, Printers. 
 
 1828. 
 

 DISTBICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, to wit : 
 
 District eierWs Office, 
 
 BE IT REMEMBERED, that on the twenty-fifth day of November, A. D. 
 1822, and in the forty-Beventh year of the Independence of the United States 
 of America, Jedidi^h Morsg, D. D. and Sidney Edwards Morse, A. M. 
 of the said District, have deposited in this Ofiice the title of a Book, the right 
 whereof they claim as Authors, in the words following, to wit : 
 
 *' A New System of Geography, Ancient and Modern, for the Use of 
 Schools, accompanied with an Atlas, adapted to the work. By Jedidiah 
 Morse, D. O. and Sidney Edwards Morse, A. M. Twenty-third Edition." 
 
 In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, 
 " An Act for the encouragement of Learning, hy securing the Copies of Maps, 
 Charts, and Books, to the Authors and Proprietors of su'ch Copies, during the 
 times therein mentioned :" and also to an Act, entitled, "An Act supplement* 
 ary to an Act, entitled, "•' An Act for the encouragement of Learning, by se- 
 eqriug the copies of Maps, Charts, and Books, to the Authors and Proprietors 
 of such copies during the times therein mentioned ; and extendmg the benefits 
 thereof to the Arts of Designiag, Engraving, and Etching Historical antl 
 other prints." 
 
 JOHN W. DAVIS, 
 Clerk ef the District of Metssachusdis. 
 
 
PREFACE, 
 
 The first edition of this work, which was the first book 
 of geography of any kind ever printed in America, was 
 prepared by the senior author, (now no more) and pub- 
 lished at New Haven, in the year 1784. Previous to that 
 date, the study of geography, we believe, was unknown in 
 our common schools, except where the teacher himself 
 prepared a manuscript text-book for the use of his pupils. 
 Such a text-book was prepared by the senior author for 
 the use of the literary institution in which he was at that 
 ^ime an instructor ; and it was the inconvenience and loss 
 of time to which his pupils were subjected in copying his 
 ananuscript, that suggested to him the thought of publish- 
 ing this work, — a work, that proved to be merely the first 
 of a series of geographical publications, which, collectively, 
 it is beheved, have been more extensively circulated than 
 the geographical works of any other individual, in any age 
 or country ; not less than 500,000 volumes having been 
 sold, principally in this country, but partly in England, 
 Scotland, Ireland, France, and Germany, in all which 
 countries some of his larger works have been reprinted. 
 
 At the time when Dr. Morse commenced his labours, 
 the preparation of a system of geography, in which a de- 
 scription of the United States must hold a prominent place, 
 was no easy task. There were then no maps, no books of 
 
PHBFACE. 
 
 (ravels, no state gazetteers, no printed descriptions of im- 
 portant institutions, which so much diminish the labour 
 ©f the geographer at the present day. To obtain the 
 materials for his works, he was under the necessity of 
 visiting, in person, every state in the union, of making 
 himself acquainted every where with gentlemen of intelli- 
 gence, and of supporting for a long time an extensive cor- 
 respondence. In this way he obtained volumes of informa* 
 tion, which, till then, had not been communicated in any 
 iorm to the public. The task was Herculean, and it 
 was performed amid a pressure of professional and other 
 cares, sufficient of themselves to have exhausted the 
 powers of an ordinary man. To say that works prepared 
 under such circumstances were imperfect, is only to say 
 that one man could not perfectly perform the work of ten. 
 That they were greatly in advance of what the country 
 had a right to expect, is evinced by the fact, that fov 
 thirty years they were without a rival. During this 
 long period, they were the only works extensively used 
 in our colleges, academies and schools ; and where, we 
 may ask, is the country, in which the mass of the popula- 
 tion were, at that time, better informed on the subject of 
 geography than the citizens of the United States ] That 
 there have been recently introduced some important im- 
 provements in the art of teaching this science, partly of 
 European and partly of American origin, is cheerfully ac- 
 knowledged ; but when the question is tried, " to whom 
 are the public most indebted for the progress of geogra- 
 phical knowledge in this country," justice will not with- 
 hold the wreath from him by whom it was so hardly won— ^ 
 the Father of American geography. 
 
 The first important advance upon the old method of in« 
 
PBEFAC£. 
 
 struction was made in 1808, when the late Mr. Cummings, 
 to whom the public are indebted for several valuable im- 
 provements in books for children and youth, published his 
 School geography. This work was, professedly, on the 
 plan of Guy and Goldsmith, and, like their geographies, 
 was accompanied with an Atlas, and questions on the 
 maps. In these points, Mr. Cummings made no claim to 
 originality. He had the merit, however, of being the first 
 to introduce from abroad this valuable improvement, an^ 
 his work received on that account, as it deserved, an ex- 
 tensive patronage. Since the appearance of Cummings' 
 geography, many others have been published, several of 
 which are well planned and neatly executed ; and the 
 authors of all, we believe, have followed the example of 
 Mr. Cummings, in accompanying their works with Atlas- 
 es and Questions on the maps, after the manner generally 
 |)ractised in Europe. 
 
 The name of the junior author was for the first time as- 
 sociated with this work in the twenty-second edition, which 
 was published in 1820. At that time he undertook the task 
 of re-writing the volume on a new plan, the prominent feature 
 of which was, " General and comparative views" of the va- 
 rious subjects treated of in the volume, accompanied with 
 Remarks and Questions, designed to assist the memory and 
 strengthen the judgment of the pupil, by teaching him to com- 
 pare and CLASSIFY pacts. This plan was believed by the 
 author at the time to be an important improvement, and his 
 opinion has been confirmed by the fact, that other school 
 geographies, into which it has since been introduced, have 
 received the most decisive marks of public favour. The first 
 edition of Mr. Woodbridge's small geography, which was^^ 
 
 A2 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 published near the close of the year 1821, has the same 
 plan, with several new features ; and in the larger geo- 
 ;5raphy of Mr. Woodhridge and Mrs. Willard, the first 
 edition of which was published in 1822, the same princi- 
 ple is applied on an extensive scale to a great variety of 
 subjects, with an industry and ingenuity, which havebecH 
 highly and deservedly praised. 
 
 In thus introducing the names of two authors, for whonj 
 ^e entertain the highest respect, we feel bound in justice 
 to them to state, that they also claim the merit of originatingi 
 and of originating independently of each other, the plan to 
 which we have alluded. Each of them also claims to have 
 made the invention at a date previous to the publication oi 
 our work. This is certainly a aingular coincidence, and 
 most persons will probably be disposed to think that it could 
 not have happened, unless the plan of one of the parties had 
 in some way been communicated to the others. We feel a 
 pleasure in saying, that we entertain no such suspicions of 
 our fellow-claimants ; and for ourselves, we can affirm that 
 the plan was purely the result of our own reflections, un^ 
 aided by a single hint or suggestion from any individual, and 
 without the slightest knowledge that any thing in the re* 
 motest degree resembling it, had ever before been con^ 
 templated. 
 
 The advantages of the new plan will be best illustrated 
 by a few examples. 
 
 Take, for instaace, the subject of Commerce. Formerly, the in- 
 ibrmation under this head was usually a dry catalogue of the arti- 
 cles of export or import in each country — Maine exports lumber, 
 ashes, beef, and pork ; New-Hampshire exports lumber, ashes, beef, 
 pork, and flax-seed ; Massachusetts exports fish, beef, pork, lumber, 
 and oil ; and so on. — Now how is the mind of a child to dispose of so 
 
FBBPACE, Til 
 
 many insulated facts ? How irksome the task of committing such 
 lists to memory ! and how unprofitable ! for even if the mind retains 
 them, vrhat valuable knowledge is obtained of the commerce of the 
 country? — Turn now to p. 248, and observe how this subject is 
 treated on the new plan. We have^ in the first place, a table of the 
 principal articles of export arranged m the order of their value ; — > 
 next, we have remarks assigning each article to its appropriate dis- 
 trict ; — the cotton is referred to one large section of the country ; the 
 wheat, to another ; and the tobacco, to a third. Reasons also are 
 assigned why particular articles belong to particular districts — the 
 rice to the Carolinas and Georgia, because of their swampS — the beef 
 and hides to New-England, because of her pastures — the fish and 
 oil to Massachusetts, because of the fisheries, carried on from her long 
 line of populous sea-coast. — Thus the pupil is taught to reason on 
 the subject, and when facts are once connected togeiher by a process 
 of reasoning, they are indelibly fixed in the memory. 
 
 So also, in the general view of the eommerce of the world, p. 271^ 
 after giving a list of the various countries, with the exports from 
 each, we make brief remarks, designed to teach the pupil to classify 
 the facts in the table, and reason upon them. — Manufactured goods 
 come from thickly settled countries ; because in such countries, only a 
 portion of the population cau be employed in tilling- the ground, and 
 the rest naturally derive their subsistence by manufacturing various 
 articles, and carrying them to the people of thinly settled countries, 
 from whom they receive in exchange the produce of their agricul- 
 ture, mines, forests, or fisheries. By going over the table with this 
 remark in his mind, the pupil perceives that he is not under the ne- 
 cessity of learning a long list of unconnected names, but that in almost 
 every case he can form associations which will entirely relieve his 
 memory. 
 
 Take, for another exam pie, the subject of Religious denominations. 
 On the old plan, the only information under this head was usually a 
 bare enumeration of the different sects. In Maine, there are Bap- 
 tists and Congregationaiists ; in Connecticut, Congregationalists, 
 Baptists, Methodists, and Episcopalians; in New-York, all thescj 
 and Friends, Reformed Dutch, Roman Catholics, &c. We need 
 not repeat, that a child burdens his memory, and gets little profitable 
 i"nstruction, when he learns in this way. In our table on p. 247, we 
 show the comparative numbers of the different sects, and then, by 
 a few brief remarks, assign the boundaries of each. Thus we give, in 
 
Vm PEEPAGE. 
 
 a few lines, all the information which was communicated on the 
 old plan, and much more ; and we g-ive it m a way which renders it 
 easy for the memory to retain it permanently. 
 
 Take next the table of the Religions of the European states, oa 
 p. 263. By comparing' the different states we find, that with two or 
 three exceptions, all the northern countries are Protestant, and all 
 the southern, Catholic. With the aid of this single remark the 
 labor of the memory is reduced almost to nothing. A child of ordi- 
 nary capacity, who has merely learnt which countries are in the 
 north of Europe, and which in the south, will be able after a few 
 minutes' study of the table, to answer every question which can be 
 put to him on the subject. And here we would ask, of what use is 
 a chart exhibiting by emb'ema the religions, governments, and de- 
 grees of civilization in different countries, when the whole objec* 
 can be so much more effectually accoinplished by simple classiji- 
 cation ?* 
 
 But the "General and comparative views'' form on!} 
 one feature of our improvement. The vsrhole plan em- 
 braces three things. 1. Outline views of the globe and 
 its grand divisions. 2. Connected descriptions in detail ol 
 the different countries or parts of each outline. And 3. 
 Recapitulatory, or general and comparative views. Thif^ 
 is the plan which the mind requires in order to the easy per- 
 formance of its task. — After having described very briefly 
 the shape and size of the earth, and its relations to other 
 parts of the universe, the pupil should be presented witli 
 a brief outline of the surface of the whole globe ; consisting 
 
 * If a Table were made of the religions, governments, and degrees of civili- 
 zation of the principal countries of the world, in the style of the tables in thi^ 
 volume, remarks might be added, in a few lines, so classifying the facts, that a 
 pupil would acquire nearly all the information on these subjects contained iu 
 Mr. Woodbridge's ingenious chart, in less than half the time necessary to 
 acquire it from that chart J^and when thus acquired, the imjtression on the 
 mind would be beyond comparison more durable and more satisfactory. Th: 
 truth is, classification is the true method of assisting the memory, and wherever 
 the subject admits of this method, all other contrivances, however ingcnioas 
 iwe of no real value. 
 
PREFACE^ IX 
 
 / 
 
 of little else than the names and relative position of its 
 oceans, continents, and grand divisions. He is then pre- 
 pared to commence immediately the study of some one of 
 these divisions — North America, for example — and here, 
 he should be presented with another outline, exhibiting 
 the prominent features of the country, such as the moun- 
 tain ranges, the great river lines, the principal bays and 
 gulfs, the long chain of lakes, &c. in describing all which, 
 care should be taken to introduce no names which will not 
 be immediately intelligible to the pupil. Such a view will 
 prepare him to rotYie with advantage to the study of the 
 descriptions of particulai; countries, and any further intro- 
 duction to these descriptions, we conceive to be entirely un- 
 necessary. The plan of beginning elementary treatises of 
 geography, with general views of the animal, mineral, and 
 vegetable kingdoms, of the various races of men, degrees 
 of civilization of different nations, &c. we conceive, is 
 wholly wrong, because, in giving such views, there is a con- 
 stant use of the names of countries, people, and places, 
 with which the pupil has not yet been made acquainted. 
 The object of every introductory view, in an elementary 
 treatise, should be to make the succeeding pai'ts of the 
 work more intelligible. It is, therefore, highly improper 
 to insert here what cannot be understood, till the pupil has 
 arrived at the close of the volume. 
 
 The same observations apply to the second head of 
 our plan — the descriptions in detail of different countries. — 
 Here also, there is an order to be observed, there is a con- 
 nection and dependence of the various heads, which make 
 it proper that they should follow each other in a particular 
 succession. This has been heretofore much neglected by 
 all geographical writers. Towns, rivers, mountainSj cb,^ 
 
PREFAeB. 
 
 nais, &c. are thrown together without any reference to 
 the proper order of description, and thus the student is 
 compelled to go over the account again and again, before | 
 he can get a connected view of the whole country. We |j 
 have endeavoured to avoid this error. For example, in. !i 
 the account of Spain, p. 183, after naming the boundaries, ;; 
 divisions and capes, we give a connected view of the great j 
 mountain ranges, showing how they all spring from the 
 Pyrenees, and diverge into different parts of the peninsiila. 
 The rivers are desciibed after the mountains and in refer- 
 ence to them, because the course in which they run is de-» 
 termined by the ridges, each great river draining the coun- 
 try between two of the mountain ranges. Cities come 
 after rivers, because in describing the position of some of 
 the cities, we have occasion to name the rivers on which I 
 they stand. Thus, instead of a mass of names and things, i 
 having no perceptible connection with each other, the pupil l 
 linds that he can put them together in a regular series, and 
 often, that he can reason from one to the other. Thus 
 natural associations are formed, which aid the memory, P 
 and the acquisition of knowledge in this way becomes i 
 easy and delightful. 
 
 The Junior Author. 
 New-York, Nov. 1827. 
 
 Remarks to Teachers. 
 
 in yecitingthe tables included in the general and comparative views, the pnpil 
 gliould be allowed at first to answer the questions which are asked, and such 
 Others as the teacher may see fit to add, with the table before him. The same 
 remark is applicable to quetitions on the maps. 
 
 In asking the questions on the maps we have often used the elliptical style. 
 The words to be supplied, however, will generally be found in Italics at the 
 ^mmencement of the paragraph. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Astronomy 13 
 
 Globes 18 
 
 Maps 25 
 
 Earth 26 
 
 America 2i 
 
 North America 29 
 
 Greenland 33 
 
 Russian Settlements 34 
 
 British America 35 
 
 Newfoundland 35 
 
 Nova Scotia 36 
 
 New-Brunswick 37 
 
 Lower Canada. 38 
 
 Upper Canada 40 
 
 United States 44 
 
 Eastern States ..... 46 
 
 Maine 47 
 
 New-Hampshire 49 
 
 Vermont 51 
 
 Massachusetts 53 
 
 Rhude Island 57 
 
 Connecticut 59 
 
 Middle States 63 
 
 New- York 63 
 
 New-Jersey 70 
 
 Pennsylvania .." 74 
 
 Delaware 79 
 
 Maryland 80 
 
 District of Columbia 83 
 
 Southern States 84 
 
 Virginia 85 
 
 North Carolina 91 
 
 South Carolina 94 
 
 Georgia 97 
 
 Alabama 100 
 
 Mississippi 102 
 
 Louisiana 105 
 
 Western States 109 
 
 Tennessee 109 
 
 Kentucky 113 
 
 Ohio 115 
 
 Indiana 118 
 
 Illinois 119 
 
 Missouri, 120 
 
 Michigan Territory 122 
 
 Northwest Territory 123 
 
 Arkansas Territory 123 
 
 Missouri Territory .... ..... 124 
 
 Florida 125 
 
 Mexico or New Spua 127 
 
 Guatimala 130 
 
 Weat Indies 131 
 
 Bermudari Islands < 133 
 
 South America ... 134 
 
 Republic of Colombia 135 
 
 Guiana 133 
 
 Peru 139 
 
 Brazil 140 
 
 Buenos Ayres 142 
 
 Republic of Bolivia 145 
 
 Chill 145 
 
 Patagonia 147 
 
 Europe 147 
 
 England and Wales 149 
 
 Scotland 154 
 
 Ireland 157 
 
 Lapiand 158 
 
 Norway 1 59 
 
 Sweden 160 
 
 Den>hark I6l 
 
 Kussia in Europe 16S 
 
 Prussia 165 
 
 Austrian Empire ... 167 
 
 Germany . . ^ 169 
 
 Saxony , . . . 172 
 
 Hanover 17S 
 
 Bavaria 173 
 
 Wirtemburg , 174 
 
 Baden 174 
 
 Poland 174 
 
 Switzerland 17S 
 
 Netherlands 177 
 
 France 18O 
 
 Spain 18s 
 
 Portugal 186 
 
 Italy 187 
 
 Ionian Republic i^o 
 
 Turkey in Europe 190 
 
 Asia 194 
 
 Turkey in Asia 196 
 
 Russia in Asia 199 
 
 Arabia 2OI 
 
 Persia , . 2O3 
 
 Cabul and Beloocbistan 204 
 
 Independent Tartary 206 
 
 Hindoostan 2O6 
 
 Farther Iiidia 21I 
 
 Chinese Empire 214 
 
 Japan... 2I8 
 
 Asiatic Islands 219 
 
Xu 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Isles of Sunda 219 
 
 Borneo 220 
 
 Philippine Isles 221 
 
 Celebes > 221 
 
 Spice Islands 221 
 
 Australasia 221 
 
 Polynesia 223 
 
 Africa 224 
 
 Egypt 226 
 
 Barbary States 228 
 
 Tripoli and Tunis 230 
 
 Altyiers 230 
 
 Morocco 331 
 
 West Africa 232 
 
 South Africa 233 
 
 East Africa 235 
 
 Nubia 335 
 
 Abyssinia 235 
 
 ( -entral Africa 237 
 
 African Islands 23S 
 
 GENERAL AND COMPARATIVE VIEWS. 
 
 I. Of the Unites States. 
 Extent and population.... 241 
 Increase of population... 242 
 Origin of inhabitants... . 243 
 
 Canals 244 
 
 Rivers and roads 245 
 
 Boundary lines 246 
 
 Navy, &c. 246 
 
 Religious denominations.. 247 
 Rfclig. Charita. Societies,. 247 
 
 Articles of export ^48 
 
 Destination of exports . .. 249 
 Increase and decrease of 
 
 exports 249 
 
 Exports and Shipping 250 
 
 Imports of each state .... 251 
 
 Navigation ..» 251 
 
 Articles imported 252 
 
 Imports and exports .... 253 
 
 Revenue and Debt 254 
 
 Expenditures 255 
 
 Population and shipping of 
 
 cities 255 
 
 Colleges and Theol. Sem. 256 
 Representa. in Congress 257 
 
 Occupations 258 
 
 Increase of U. States. . . . 260 
 
 Of America. 
 
 Extent and Population . . . 260 
 
 11 
 
 Population of cities. ...... 
 
 Settlements 
 
 III. Of Europe. 
 
 Extent and population... . 
 Religion and government 
 
 Armies and navies 
 
 Cities 
 
 Revenue and debt 
 
 Universities and libraries 
 Foreign posses^^ions 
 
 IV. Of Asia. 
 
 Extent, population, and 
 
 cities 
 
 V. Of the World. 
 
 Extent and population... . 
 
 Missionary and Bible so- 
 cieties, &.C 
 
 Religions 
 
 Mountains 
 
 Commerce 
 
 Volcanoes, &c 
 
 State of society 
 
 Metals and minerals 
 
 Vegetable kingdom 
 
 Animal kingdom 
 
 Winds and currents 
 
 Temperature 
 
 QtrSSTIONS ON THH SIAPS. 
 
 261 
 261 
 
 364 
 265 
 
 265 
 
 267 
 
 267 
 
 26S 
 269 
 270 
 271 
 272 
 273 
 274 
 275 
 27C 
 277 
 278 
 
 270 
 
 ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 Ancient World 1 Grecian Islands 13 
 
 Burope 1 Remainder of Europe 14 
 
 Italy 1 AsiaMinor ,15 
 
 Italian Islands 5 Syria 17 
 
 Britain 6 Palestine 17 
 
 Spain 
 
 7 Remainder of Asia. 19 
 
 Gaul 8 Africa. 
 
 Germany 9 Egypt. 
 
 Greece 
 
 10 Questions on the Maps . 
 
 21 
 

 ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 Geography is the science which treats of the Earth and it^ 
 inhabitants. 
 
 AsTROTs^oMY is the science which treats of the Sun, StarB, 
 Planets, and other heavenly bodies. 
 
 These two sciences are so intimately connected, that a com- 
 petent knowledge of Geography is unattainable without some 
 previous acquaintance with Astronomy. We shall commence 
 this w^ork, therefore, with a biief, popular vi6w of 
 
 ASTRONOMYo 
 
 The world which we inhabit is a great globe or ball, about 
 §000 miles in diameter, and 25,000 in circumference. It turns 
 round upon its own axis once every day, and moves round the 
 Sun once every year. 
 
 Astronomy teaches us that the sun, moon, and stars are alsrt 
 great globes or worlds. Most of them are thousands of times 
 larger than our earth ; and, like the earth, each of them turns 
 on its axis, and moves round a larger world as its centre. 
 
 i 
 
 SOLAR SYSTEM* 
 
 The ancients supposed that the earth was immoveably fixed 
 in the centre of the Universe, and that the sun, moon, and stars 
 moved round it once in twenty-four hours. This system was 
 supported by Ptolemy, and called the Ptolemaic system, and 
 has long since been univv?rsally rejected by the learned. 
 
 The Copemican system is the true Solar System. It supposes 
 that the sun is in the centre ; that the earth and the other pla-" 
 nets move round the sun, at various distances, and with differ- 
 ent degrees of velocity ; and that the apparent motion of the 
 heavenly bodies round the earth is occasioned by a real rotation 
 of the earth on its axis. 
 
 The Solar System is composed of the ^n, the planets, sa» 
 tellites, asteroids and comets. 
 
 B 
 
^^^ f%% BLEI^EI^^S 
 
 OR G 
 
 liiS^^ 
 
 !HY. 
 
 ^ ^ plat^l^s a body whii^^^noves round the 
 
 sun in an orbit 
 
 ngmy ciiijcmar.^ / ^ ' .- 
 
 ** A satellite or moon is a body moving round a planet, and in 
 
 company with the planet round the sun. 
 
 Asteroids are very small planets, sometimes called telescopic 
 planets. 
 
 Cornets are bodies moving round the sun in very elliptical 
 orbits. 
 
 The orbit of a planet is the path which it describes iii moving 
 round the sun. 
 
 • The planets are retained in their orbits by the joint action 
 of two forces. One, called the centripetal force, or the attrac- 
 tion of gravitation^ if it acted alone, would draw them directly 
 into the sun ; the other, called the centrifugal force, if it acted 
 alone, would drive them out of their orbits, and out of the Solar 
 System, in infinite straight lines. Between the two, they can 
 do neither. They cannot be drawn into the sun, on account, 
 of the centrifugal force, nor be driven out of the system, on ac- 
 count of the centripetal force ; but are compelled to move con- 
 tinually round the sun. 
 
 The Sun. The Sun is the source of hght and heat to all 
 the bodies in the Solar System. It is more than a million times 
 larger than the earth. 
 
 Planets. There are commonly reckoned seven planets, the 
 names of which, in the order of their distance from the sun., 
 are. Mercury, Venus, the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, and 
 Herschel. 
 
 The following table contains a view of the magnitude of tlie 
 sun and the planets, the distances of the planets from the sun. 
 and the time which each employs in turning round its axis, and 
 in moving round the sun. 
 
 
 LZ 
 
 Diameter 
 
 Mean distances from 
 
 Rotation on 
 
 Time of moving 
 
 
 2 S 
 
 in miles. 
 
 the sun in miles. 
 
 their axis. 
 
 lound the sun. 
 
 
 o % 
 
 
 
 d. h. m: 
 
 y. d. h. 711* 
 
 Sun 
 
 
 
 883,246 
 
 
 25 14 08 
 
 
 Mercury 
 
 ^ 
 
 3,224 
 
 36,000,000 
 
 unknown. 
 
 87 23 15 
 
 Venus 
 
 ? 
 
 7,687 
 
 68,000,000 
 
 23 22 
 
 224 16 49 
 
 Earth 
 
 © 
 
 7,928 
 
 94,000,000 
 
 23 56 
 
 1 
 
 Mars 
 
 ^ 
 
 4,189 
 
 144,000,000 
 
 1 00 39 
 
 1 321 22 13 
 
 Jupiter 
 
 U 
 
 89,170 
 
 491,000,000 
 
 9 65 
 
 11 315 !4 39 
 
 Saturn 
 
 ^ 
 
 79,042 
 
 901,000,000 
 
 10 16 
 
 29 164 7 21 
 
 Herschel 
 
 W 
 
 35,112 
 
 1803,000,000 
 
 unknown. 
 
 83 294 8 39 
 
 Moon 
 
 D 
 
 2,180 
 
 94,000,000 
 
 29 12 44 
 
 1 
 
ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 15 
 
 The time employed by any planet in turning once upoij its 
 axis is called its day^ and the time of moving once' round the 
 sun is called its year. 
 
 From the last column in the above table it appears, that the 
 further a planet is from the sun, the longer is its year. Mer- 
 cury's year is less than three of our months, while Herschel's 
 year is nearly one of our centuries. 
 
 Mercury is the smallest of the planets, and being the nearest 
 to the sun, is also the swiftest, moving in its orbit at the rate 
 of 1 11, 000 miles in an hour. It is supposed that the heat under 
 the equator of this planet is so great, that water would continu- 
 ally boil. To an inhabitant of Mercury the sun appears seven 
 times as large as it does to us. 
 
 Venus is next to Mercury. It very much resembles the 
 earth. It is about the same size, and performs the revolution 
 on its axis in about the same time. Neither Venus nor Mer- 
 cury has any moon ; of course, they have no light after sunset 
 but star-light. 
 
 The Earth is next in order to Venus. As to size, it is in 
 the middle of the seven planets, there being three larger and 
 three smaller. It turns on its axis once in twenty-four hours, 
 from west to east, which causes the heavenly bodies to appear 
 to move round the earth in the same time, from east to west. 
 The figure of the earth is spherical ; as is proved by the fact 
 that many persons have sailed round it. It is not, however, a 
 perfect sphere ; but is elevated at the equator, and flattened at 
 the poles. The equatorial diameter is longer than the polar 
 diameter by thirty-four miles. 
 
 Mercury and Venus are called inferior planets in relation to 
 the earth ; because they are beloio the earth ; that is, nearer 
 to the sun or centre of the system. Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, and 
 Herschel are called superior planets, because they are above 
 the earth : that is, farther from the centre of the system. 
 
 Mars is the smallest of the planets except Mercury. His 
 day is about as long as ours, but his year is nearly twice as 
 long. Mars has no moon. 
 
 Jupiter is by far the largest of the planets, his bulk being 
 nearly 1500 times that of the earth. He revolves very rapidly 
 upon his axis, so that his days are very short, being not quite 
 ten of our hours ; but his years are very long, being nearly 
 twelve of our years. Jupiter has four moons, These must 
 fiflTord a very pleasing spectacle to the inhabitants, for sometimes 
 
IQ ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 they all rise together, and sometimes they are all together on 
 the meridian, ranged one under another. The ecHpses of 
 Jupiter's moons are of great use in solving problems in astro- 
 nomy. 
 
 Saturn is about 1000 times larger than the earth. His day 
 is only ten of our hours ; but his year is equal nearly to thirty 
 of our years. Saturn is surrounded by a broad ring. This 
 ring must appear to the inhabitants like an immense luminous 
 arch in the heavens. Besides the light which he receives from 
 the sun, and from the reflection of his ring, Saturn is assisted 
 hy the light of seven moons. 
 
 Herschel^ the most distant of the planets, was discovered by 
 Dr. Herschel in ITSU In bulk it is about eighty times as 
 large as the earth ; yet, owing to its immense distance, it is 
 but just visible to the naked eye. Its motion round the sun is 
 very slow, so that its year is more than 83 of our years, A 
 man would have gray hairs long before he was one year old, if 
 he lived in Herschel. Six moons have already been discovered 
 moving round this planet. To an inhabitant of Herschel, the 
 diameter of the sun appears only twice as large as that of the 
 planet Jupiter does to us. 
 
 Satellites. There are 18 satellites in the Solar System. 
 The earth has one, called the Moon; Jupiter 4, Saturn 7, and 
 Herschel 6. 
 
 The Moon is much nearer to the earth than any of the other 
 heavenly bodies. It is only 24 ,000 miles distant ; so that, 
 with the help of the telescope, its mountains can be distin- 
 guished. The earth is about fifty times larger than the moon 
 in bulk. 
 
 The moon and planets do not shine with their own light, 
 but borrow all their Hght from the sun. Only one-half of the 
 moon, or of any of the planets can be illuminated at a time ; 
 and the illuminated half must always be that which is towards 
 the sun. When the sun and moon are on opposite sides of the 
 earth, the whole illuminated half of the moon is then presented 
 towards the earth, and it is full moon ; but when the sun and 
 moon are on the same side of the earth, the dark half is then 
 presented towards the earth, and it is new moon. 
 
 An eclipse of the moon is caused by its entering into the 
 earth's shadow. It can never happen except when the earth 
 is directly in a line between the sun and moon. Of course the 
 ipoon can never be eclipsed except at the time offuU moon. 
 
ELEMExNTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 An eclipse of the su?i is caused by the interposition of the 
 moon between the earth and the sun. It can never happen 
 except when the moon is directly in a line between the earth 
 and the sun. Of course the sun can never be eclipsed except 
 at the time of netv moon. 
 
 The very hour and minute when an eclipse is to happen, 
 can be accurately calculated years beforehand. This shows 
 the wonderful regularity and exactness with which the heavenly 
 bodies perform their revolutions. 
 
 Asteroids. There are four asteroids, or telescopic planets, 
 Ceres., Pallas^ Juno, and Vesta. > Their orbits are all included 
 between those of Mars and Jupiter. 
 
 Comets, The number of comets belonging to the solar 
 system is unknown. In 1811, the number of those whose ele- 
 ments had been calculated was 103. 
 
 The comets come from far distant parts of the universe, with 
 prodigious velocity, approach very near to the sun, and then 
 fly oft* with equal rapidity, and frequently do not return again 
 till after the lapse of centuries. Sometimes they appear bright 
 and round, sometimes with fiery tails, and sometimes emitting 
 b'eams on all sides like hair. These blazing bodies frequently 
 cross the orbits of the planets, and it is by no means impossible, 
 that at some future day, a comet in its furious course may strike 
 against our earth and dash it to pieces. 
 
 Fixed Staes. Those stars which always appear in the 
 same situation with respect to each other are caWedJixed stars. 
 They are easily distinguished from the planets by their twink- 
 ling. 
 
 The number of the fixed stars is not known. About 3,000 
 are visible to the naked eye ; but by the help of a telescope 
 we can discover many millions, and the number continually in- 
 creases in proportion to themagnifyingpower of the telescope, 
 so that it is impossible to set any limits to the number. 
 
 The distance of the fixed stars from our earth is immeasura- 
 ble and almost inconceivable. A cannon ball, moving at the 
 rate of 500 miles an hour, would not reach the nearest of them 
 in seven hundred thousand years. If the earth, which moves 
 round the sun at the rate of a million and a half miles a day, 
 were to fly towards the fixed stars with the same velocity, it 
 would not reach the nearest of them, after taking all the time 
 which has elapsed since the creation of the w^orld. 
 
 The magnitude of the fixed stars is unknown, Some prO" 
 B 2 
 
IS ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 bably are much larger than others. But all of them must be 
 many thousand times larger than the earth, or we should be un- 
 able to see them at such an immense distance. 
 
 The magnitude of the fixed stars, and the circumstance 
 Ihat they shine by their own light, give reason to suppose, that 
 they are all suns to other worlds, and that each one of them, 
 like our sun, is. encompassed'by a complete system of planets. 
 There is reason to believe too, that all these innumerable 
 worlds are inhabited by living, intelligent beings. How won- 
 derful are the works of God ! 
 
 Compared with this universe of stars and worlds, our sun and 
 all the planets that move around him are as nothing. To an inha- 
 bitant of any of these distant worlds our sun appears no big- 
 ger than a little glimmering star ; and the planets are too small 
 to be seen at all. The Earth is so small, that it cannot be 
 seen even from many parts of the Solar System. If it #ere 
 to be struck out of existence, the event might never be known 
 to the inhabitants of Jupiter, Saturn, or Herschel. Well may 
 we exclaim, " When we consider the heavens, the work of thy 
 hands, the moon and the stars which thou hast ordained, what 
 is man that thou art mindful of him !" 
 
 A Constellation is a group or collection of several neigh- 
 bouring stars, and derives its name commonly, from some ani- 
 mal or other object which it is supposed to resemble. 
 
 The galaxy or milky way is a broad circle in the heavens, 
 of a white and lucid appearance, and obvious to the naked eye. 
 The appearance is occasioned by numerous clusters of very 
 small stars. 
 
 GLOBE S. 
 
 Asphereor globe is a round body, the surface of which is every 
 where equally distant from a point within, called the centre. 
 A hemisphere is a half globe. 
 
 There are two kinds of artificial globes, the terrestrial and 
 the celestial. 
 
 The terrestrial globe exhibits a picture of the countries, 
 seas, and places on the surface of the earth, in precisely the 
 same relative situation in which they actually appear in nature. 
 
 The celestial globe exhibits a picture of the fixed stars in 
 precisely the same relative situation in which they actually ap- 
 pear in the heavens. 
 
 The axis of the earth is an imaginary straight line passing 
 
ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 19 
 
 through the centre, and around which it revolves. It is termi- 
 nated at each end by the surface. The poles of the earth are 
 the two extremities of the axis. One is called the north pole, 
 and the other the south pole, and -each of them is 90"" from the 
 equator. 
 
 Chreat circles are those which divide the globe into two equal 
 parts. The equator or equinoctial^ the horizon^ the meridians^ 
 the ecliptic^ and the two colures are great circles. 
 
 Less circles are those which divide the globe into two une- 
 qual parts. The two tropics and the two polar circles are 
 less circles. 
 
 Every circle is divided into 360 equal parts, called degrees; 
 each degree is divided into 60 minutes ; and each minute into 
 60 seconds. They are marked thus 32° 14' 26" ; that is, 32 
 degrees, 14 minutes, and 26 seconds. 
 
 The equator is an imaginary great circle passing round the 
 earth frotn east to west at right angles with its axis. It is equi- 
 distant from the poles, and divides the earth into northern and 
 southern hemispheres. 
 
 Meridians are imaginary great circles passing through the 
 poles of the earth and cutting the equator at right angles. The 
 meridian of ai* place is the meridian that cuts the horizon of 
 that place in the north and south points. The^rs^ meridian is 
 that from which longitude is reckoned. It divides the equator 
 into two equal parts of 180° each. 
 
 On the artificial globe the meridian is represented by a bra- 
 zen circle. This circle is divided into four equal parts, of 90° 
 each, two numbered from the equator tO' the poles, and two 
 from the poles to the equator. The graduated side of this 
 brazen circle serves as a meridian for any point on the surface 
 of the earth, the globe being turned about till that point comes 
 under it. 
 
 There are drawn on the artificial globe 12 meridians, which 
 divide it into 24 equal parts, each containing 16°, being the 
 distance which the earth moves in one hour in its daily revolu- 
 tion ; so that those who live as far east or west of each other, 
 as from one of these lines to another, have a dilFerence of one 
 hour in time. 
 
 The horizon is either sensible or real. The sensible horizon 
 is the small circle which limits our prospect, where the sky and 
 land or water seem to meet. The real horizon is a great cir- 
 cle, parallel to the former, which divides the earth into upper 
 andlower hemispheres. 
 
20 
 
 ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 The horizon is divided into four equal parts, of 90° each, by 
 the four cardinal points, East^ West^ Norths and South. 
 
 On the artificial globe the horizon is represented by a hroad^ 
 Jlat^ wooden circle. It is commonly divided into 3 parts. The 
 innermost is marked with all the points of the compass ; the 
 next with the names, characters, and figures of the twelve 
 signs ; aiid the third is a calendar of months and days, corres- 
 ponding with the twelve signs. 
 
 The point of the heavens directly over our heads is called 
 the Zenith ; and the opposite point, or that directly under our 
 feet, is called the Nadir. The straight line connecting these 
 two, passes through the centre of the horizon and is called its 
 axis, ['he zenith and nadir of any place, therefore, are the 
 poles of its horizon. 
 
 The eclip.'ic is an imaginary great circle in the heavens, in 
 the plane of which the earth performs her annual revolution 
 round the sun. It is called the echptic because all eclipses 
 happen when the sun, moon, and earth are in the plane of this 
 circle. 
 
 The ecliptic is drawn on the artificial globe obliquely to tlie 
 equator, and makes with it an angle of 23° 28'. 
 
 The twelve signs are the 1 2 equal parts into which the eclip- 
 tic is divided, each consisting of 30°. 
 
 The zodiac is a broad circular space or belt in the heavens, 
 16° broad, extending 8° on each side of the ecliptic, and con- 
 tains the 1 2 constellations, or clusters of stars which are called 
 the 1 2 signs. 
 
 The names and characters of the 12 signs and the time of 
 the sun's enterincr them are as follows : 
 
 Latin. 
 
 English. 
 
 Characters 
 
 1. Aries 
 
 The Kam 
 
 op 
 
 2. Taurus 
 
 The Bull 
 
 }i 
 
 3. Gemini 
 
 The Twins 
 
 u 
 
 4. Cancer 
 
 The Crab 
 
 S5 
 
 5. Leo 
 
 The Lion 
 
 a 
 
 6. Virgo 
 
 The Virgin 
 
 n 
 
 7. Libra 
 
 The Scales 
 
 sCh 
 
 8. Scorpio 
 
 The Scorpion 
 
 m. 
 
 9. Sagittarius 
 
 The Archer 
 
 t 
 
 10. Capricornus 
 
 The Goat 
 
 i^ 
 
 11. Aquarius 
 
 The Waterman 
 
 rm 
 
 12. Pisces 
 
 The Fishes 
 
 K 
 
 Time. 
 March 20th 
 April 20tli 
 May 21st 
 June 21st 
 July 23d 
 August 23d 
 September 23d 
 October 23d 
 November 22d 
 December 22d 
 January 20 th 
 February 19thv 
 
ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 21 
 
 The first six are called northern signs, the last six southern. 
 
 The colures are two circles, one passing through the equi- 
 noctial points, Aries and Libra, and called the equinoctial colure; 
 the other passing through the solstitial points, Cancer and Cap- 
 ricorn, and called the solstitial colure. — The two colures are 
 drawn only on the celestial globe. 
 
 The tiopics are two less circles drawn parallel to the equator 
 at the distance of 23"^ 28', one north of the equator, called 
 the tropic of Cancer ; the other south, called the tropic of 
 Capricorn. 
 
 The polar circles are two less circles described round the 
 poles at the distance of 23° 28' ; that around the north pole 
 is called the arctic circle ; that around the south pole, the ant" 
 arctic circle. 
 
 Zones are the divisions of the earth's surface, formed by the 
 tropics and polar circles. There are five zones ; one torrid^ 
 two temperate^ and two frigid zones. 
 
 The torrid zone is that part of the earth's surface included 
 between the two tropics ; the temperate zones are included 
 between the tropics and the polar circles^; and the frigid zones 
 between the polar circles and the poies. 
 
 In every part of the torrid zone the sun is vertical, or directly 
 over the heads of the inhabitants, twice every year, and the 
 days and nights are always nearly equal. 
 
 In the temperate zones, the sun is never vertical, but rises 
 and sets every 24 hours, the days and nights are unequal, 
 and their inequality increases as you approach the poles. 
 
 In the frigid zones, the sun never sets for a certain number 
 of days in summer, and never rises for an equal number in win- 
 ter. At the poles, the sun is 6 months above and 6 months be- 
 low the horizon ; of course he rises only once in a year. 
 
 The inhabitants of the different zones may be distinguished 
 by the direction in which their shadou^s fall at noon. — Those 
 who inhabit the torrid zone, have their shadows one part of the 
 year north, and the rest of the year south of them at noon day ; 
 but when the sun is vertical, which is twice every year, they 
 have no shadow at noon. 
 
 In the temperate zones, the shadows at noon always fall one 
 way ; in the northern temperate zone they always fall towards 
 the north, and in the southern always towards the south. 
 
 At the poles, the sun for six months moves round without set- 
 ting, and the shadows are in ©very 24 hours of that period, 
 successively cast towards every point of the horizon. 
 
£2 ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 The latitude of a place is its distance from the equator mea- 
 sured in degrees on the meridian. If the place lies north of 
 the equator, it is in north latitude ; if south of the equator, in 
 south latitude. A parallel of latitude is any less circle paral- 
 lel with the equator. 
 
 The longitude of a place is its distance from the first meri- 
 dian, either east or west, reckoned in degrees on the equator. 
 It can never exceed 180°. 
 
 The inhabitants of the earth are sometimes distinguished ac- 
 cording to the several meridians and parallels under which they 
 live. 
 
 1. Those who live in the same latitude, and same hemi- 
 sphere, but under opposite meridians. — Their seasons are the 
 same, as also the length of their days and nights ; but when it 
 is mid-day with one, it is midnight with the other. 
 
 2. Those who live in the same latitude, and under the same, 
 meridian, but in opposite hemispheres. — These have noon and 
 midnight at the same time ; but the longest day with the one 
 is the shortest with the other ; consequently when it is midsum- 
 mer with one it is midwinter with thex)ther. 
 
 3. Those who live in the same latitude, but in opposite 
 hemispheres, and under opposite meridians. — These are called 
 Antip^-o-des. When it is raid-day with one it is midnight with 
 the other ; the longest day with one is the shortest With the 
 other ; and consequently when it is midsummer with the one it 
 is midwinter with the other. 
 
 The hour circles are described round the poles, and divided 
 into 9,\ hours. They are sometimes represented by a brazen 
 circle attached to the meridian, and sometimes described on the 
 globe itself 
 
 The quadrant of altitude is a thin slip of brass, divided into 
 90 degrees corresponding exactly in extent with those on the 
 equator. It is used to measure the distance of one place from 
 another. 
 
 Tht folloiving Prohlems^ may easily be solved with a terrestrial 
 globe furnished with the proper apparatus, 
 
 Pkoblem I. To find the latitude of any place. 
 
 Bring the given place to the graduated edge of the brazen 
 meridian 5 and the degree immediately over it. on the meridian 
 
ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 23 
 
 is the latitude ; if the place is north of the equator, it is north 
 latitude ; if south of the equator, it is south latitude. 
 
 Thus Philadelphia is in about 40 degrees north latitude ; 
 and Cape Horn in about 56 degrees south latitude. 
 
 What is the latitude of Boston ? of New- York ? of Wash- 
 ington ? of London ? of the Cape of Good Hope ? 
 
 Problem H. To find the longitude of any place. 
 
 Bring the place to the brazen meridian, and the degree on 
 the equator under the meridian, shows the longitude from Lon- 
 don. 
 
 Thus the longitude of Boston is 71 degrees west ; of Paris 
 about 2 degrees east. 
 
 What is the longitude of Quebec? of Jerusalem? of Gib- 
 raltar ? of Lisbon? of Madras ? 
 
 Problem HL To find any place whose longitude and latitude 
 are given. 
 
 Find the longitude on the equator and bring it to the meri- 
 dian ; then find the latitude on the meridian, and under it is the 
 place sought. 
 
 Thus, the place whose longitude is nearly 71° west and whose 
 latitude is 42^^ 23' north, is Boston ; and the place whose lon- 
 gitude is 18|- east and whose latitude is 34 soutli, is the Cape 
 of Good Hope. 
 
 What places are those which have the following longitudes 
 and latitudes ? 
 
 Long. 6 W. Lat. 16 S. 
 Lon^. 30 E. Lat. 31 N. 
 
 Long. 131 E. Lat. 51 N, 
 Long. 18 E. Lat. 59 N. 
 
 Problem IV. To find the difference of latitude between two 
 places. 
 
 If the places are both on the same side of the equator, sub" 
 tract the latitude of one from that of the other ; if on opposite 
 isides, add the latitude of one to that of the other. 
 
 Problem V. To find the difference in longitude between two 
 places. 
 
 Briag one of the places to the meridian, and mark its longi- 
 tude on the equator ; then bring the other to the meridian, and 
 
ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 the number of degrees on the equator between its longitude 
 and the first mark is the difference. Thus the difference of 
 longitude between Boston and Mexico is 18°. 
 
 What is the difference of longitude between Boston and 
 Dublin ? — between Paris and Calcutta ? 
 
 Problem VI. To find the distane of any two given places on 
 the globe. 
 
 Lay the graduated edge of the quadrant of altitude over both 
 places, and the degrees between them, multiplied by 69i will 
 give the distance in English miles. Thus the distance between 
 London and Jamaica is 4700 miles. 
 
 What is the distance between Boston and London ? between 
 Calcutta and Cape Horn ? between Cape Horn and the Cape 
 of Good Hope ? 
 
 Pkoelem VH. The hour at any place being given^ to find ivhat 
 hour it is at any other place. 
 
 Bring th6 place where the hour is given to the meridian, and 
 set the index of the hour circle to that hour ; then turn the 
 globe till the place where the hour is required comes under the 
 meridian, and the 'index will point to the hour at that place. 
 
 Or it may be found by calculation thus : Find the difference 
 of longitude between the two places according to Problem V. 
 and set it clown. Multiply the number of degrees in this dif- 
 ference by 4 and it will give you the difference of time be- 
 tween the two places in minutes ; which may be reduced to 
 hours by dividing the minutes by 60. If the place where the 
 hour is required hes east of the other, the time will be later by 
 the difference ; if loest., it will be earlier by the difference.* 
 
 * The reason of this rule will be obvious from a little reflection. It is 
 noon at any place when the Sun comes to the meridian of that place. 
 Now every place on the surface of the earth revolves once round the axis 
 of the earth, that is 360 degrees, every 24 hours, which make i5 >grees 
 every hoar or 1 degree every 4 minutes. Of course, if the difference of 
 longitude between two places is I degree, that is, if the meridians of the 
 two places are 1 degree apart, the Sun will come to the meridian of one 
 4 minutes before it will come to that of the other, and of course it will 
 be noon at one place 4 minutes before it is at the other ; and if the dif- 
 ference of longitude is 15 degrees, it will for the same reason be nooa at 
 one place one hour before it is at the other ; If the difterence Is 30 de- 
 grees, 2 hour?, &c. 
 
ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 25 
 
 Thus suppose that it is 1 2 o'clock at London, and it is required 
 to find the hour at a place 15 degrees west of London. The 
 difference of longitude is 15 degrees, which reduced to min- 
 utes gives 60 minutes, or one hour, for the difference of time 
 between the two places. The place being west of London the 
 time is earlier than at London by one hour ; that is, when it is 
 12 o'clock at London it is 11 at the place where the hour is 
 required. 
 
 When it is 8 o'clock at Boston what is the time at London ? 
 Dublin ? Mexico ? and Lisbon ? 
 
 When it i& midnight at London, what is the time at Boston ? 
 Dublin ? Lisbon ? and Mexico ? 
 
 MAPS. 
 
 A map is a representation of the earth's surface, or some 
 part of it on a plane. 
 
 The top of the map is north; the bottom is south; the 
 right hand side is east^ and the' left hand west. 
 
 The lines drawn from the top to the bottom represent me- 
 ridians or lines of longitude ; those drawn from side to side 
 represent parallels of latitude. 
 
 The figures along the top and bottom express the degrees 
 of longitude from the principal meridian. If the figures in- 
 crease from right to left, the longitude is west ; if, from left to 
 right, the longitude is east. 
 
 The figures along the sides of the map express the degrees 
 of latitude. If they increase upward the latitude is north ; if 
 downward it is south. 
 
 Rivers are represented on maps by black lines bending irre- 
 gularly, and are wider towards the mouth, than towards the 
 head or spring. Mountains are represented as on a picture ; 
 forests by small shrubs ; sandy deserts and shallows in the 
 ocean by clusters of small dots ; depth of water in harbours is 
 sometimes expressed by figures, representing fathoms. 
 
 Towns are represented by an *^ or a small house ; and road^s 
 usually by double lines. 
 
 Distances are measured by a scale of miles, placed in a 
 corner of the map. Where the map embraces only a small 
 portion of country, the scale of miles is usually inserted ; in 
 other cases it is commonly omitted, 
 
 C 
 
m ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY, 
 
 THE EARTH. 
 
 Extent. The surface of the globe is estimated to cont^n 
 197,000,000 square miles, of which more than 60,000,000, or 
 one quarter of the whole, is land. 
 
 Natural Divisions. The ^re;it natural division of the earth's 
 surface is into Land and Water. „ 
 
 1. The land consists of continents, islands, peninsulas, isth- 
 muses, capes, mountains, hills, dales, and coasts. 
 
 A continent is a great extent of land, no where entirely se- _ 
 parated by water. There are two continents; the Eastern 
 and the fVestcrn. The Eastern continent is subdivided into 
 Europe Asia dml Africa ; the Western, into North America 
 and iSoutk America 
 
 An island is a portion of land entirely surrounded by water ; 
 as Great Bnfa''n^ Newfoundland., Cuba., Madagascar. 
 
 A peninsula is a portion of land almost surrounded by wa- 
 ter, as Spain. Florida. 
 
 An isthmus, is the narrow neck of land which joins a penin- 
 sula to the main land ; as the isthmus of Darlen, the isthmus 
 of Suez. 
 
 A cape is a point of land projecting into the sea ; as Cape 
 Cod., Cape Horn. 
 
 A mountain is a portion of land elevated to a great height 
 above the surrounding country. When the land rises to a 
 small height it is called a hill. The spaces between hills are 
 called dales or valleys. A volcano is a burning mountain 
 which emits smoke and flame. ^ 
 
 A coast or shore is the margin of land bordering on the sea. 
 
 2. The water is composed of oceans, lakes, seas, sounds^ 
 bay^ or gulfs, harbours, roads, straits, rivers, friths, and swamps. 
 
 The largest collections of water on the globe are called 
 oceans. There are five oceans ; the Indian ocean, lying 
 between Africa and New-Holland ; the Atlantic, between 
 America on one side and Europe and Africa on the other ; 
 the Pacijic, between America on one side, and Asia and New- 
 Holland on the other ; the Northern or Arctic, around the 
 north pole ; the SoutJiern, around the South pole. 
 
 A lake is a collection of water, in the interior of a country* 
 as lake Superior, lake Erie. 
 
 A sea is a large collection of water communicating with an 
 ocean, as the Mediterranean sea, the Baltic. 
 
ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 27 
 
 A sound is a small sea so shallow that it may be sounded ; 
 tis Long Island Sound. 
 
 A gulf or bay is a part of an- ocean, sea, or lake, extending 
 up into the land. 
 
 A harbour or haven is a part of the sea, almost surrounded 
 by land, where vessels may anchor with safety. 
 
 A road is a place at some distance from the shore, where 
 ships may safely ride at anchor. 
 
 A strait is a narrow channel connecting two large bodies 
 of water ; as the strait of Gibraltar. 
 
 A river is a large stream of inland water ; small streams 
 are called brooks. 
 
 A frith or estuary is the part of a river towards its mouth 
 which is affected by the tide. It may be considered as an arm 
 of the sea. 
 
 Grand Divisions. Geographers have commonly considered 
 the world under four grand divisions, America^ Europe^ Asia^ 
 and Africa. Besides these there are three clusters of islands, 
 which form separate divisions, the West India islands, Aus- 
 tralasia^ and Polynesia. 
 
 Political Divisions. An empire consists of several large 
 countries under the dominion of one man, usually called an 
 emperor. 
 
 A kingdom consists of a single country subject to one mon- 
 arch, called a king. 
 
 A dutchy^ a grand dutchy., and a principality^ are smaller 
 portions of country subject severally to a duke, a grand duke, 
 and a prince, who are themselves subject to the sovereign power. 
 
 Provinces.^ counties.^ departments., cities., toums., parishes^ 
 hundreds., &lc. are still smaller subdivisions of countries. 
 
 Governments. There are but three simple forms of govern- 
 ment, »»owarc%, aristocracy, and democracy 
 
 1. A simple monarchy is a government in which the sove- 
 reign power is exercised by one man. 
 
 If the power of the monarch is limited by law it is called a 
 Hmited ^nonarchy ; if not, it is an absolute monarchy. In an 
 absolute monarchy, there is no law but the will of the sove- 
 reign ; and if he is cruel he is called a despot, and his govern- 
 ment a despotism. 
 
 % An aristocracy is a government administered by a few 
 jgnen, usually styled tlie nobility. 
 
28 ELEMENTS OF GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 3. A democracy is a government exercised by the great body 
 of the people. 
 
 A republic is a government administered by a number of 
 men chosen by the people for a limited time. 
 
 AMERICA. 
 
 Situation and Extent. America is bounded on the north 
 by the Arctic ocean ; on the east, by the Atlantic, which sepa- 
 rates it from Europe and Africa ; on the west, by the Pacific, 
 which separates it from Asia. Towards the south, it termi- 
 nates in a point, called Cape Horn. It is more than 9000 
 miles long, ant^, on an average, about 1500 broad. 
 
 History of its Discovery America was unknown to the civil- 
 ized world till about 3'jO years ago. It was discovered in . 492, 
 by Christopher Columbus, a native of Genoa. From long 
 study of geography, Columbus became deeply impressed with 
 the belief, that there was a new continent in the west. To de- 
 termine this point, he resolved upon a voyage ; and applied 
 successively to the governments of Genoa, Spain, and Portu- 
 gal, for the necessary assistance ; but his apphcations were re- 
 jected. 
 
 At length, Ferdinand and Isabella, the sovereigns of Cas- 
 tile and Arragon, listened to his proposal ; a squadron of three 
 small vessels was fitted out, victualled for twelve months, fur- 
 nished with 90 men, and Columbus was appointed admiral. 
 
 He left Spain in August, and steered his course for the Ca- 
 nary Islands ; and thence sailed due west, for more than 2000 
 miles, into an unknown ocean, without seeing land. His men 
 now became impatient, and began to mutiny, and Columbus 
 was forced to promise that he would return, if land was not 
 discovered in three days. 
 
 Favourable indications soon appeared. On the 11th of Oc- 
 tober, a little before midnight, Columbus from the forecastle 
 descried a light ; and shortly after, the cry of land! land! re- 
 sounded from the Pinta, the headmost ship 1 he morning 
 light confirmed the report. One of the West-India islands 
 was directly before them. The crews of all the ships with 
 shouts of joy then gave praise to God ; and throwing them- 
 selves at the feet of Columbus, implored his forgiveness for 
 their increduUty and disobedience. 
 
NORTH AMERICA. 29 
 
 On the return of Columbus to Spain, the news of his suc- 
 cess was soon spread abroad ; others were inspired with the 
 same spirit of enterprise ; expeditions were fitted out from va- 
 rious parts of Europe ; and, in a few years, the whole conti- 
 nent was discovered from Labrador to Cape Horn. 
 
 Inhabitants. The number of inhabitants in America is com- 
 monly estimated at 35,000,000. They may be divided into 
 three classes. 1. Whites They are the descendants of Eu- 
 ropeans, who have migrated to America, at various periods 
 since its discovery. 2. Negroes. They are the descendants 
 of Africans, who were forced from their native country, and 
 sold as slaves to the white men. 3. Indians ; of a copper 
 complexion ; they are the descendants of the Aborigines, or 
 those who occupied the country at the time of its discovery. 
 
 Of the whole number, about 1 8,000,000 are whites, 4,000,- 
 000 negroes, and the remainder Indians. The whites and ne» 
 gToes are rapidly increasing ; the Indians are diminishing. 
 
 Mountains. There is a rahge of mountains which runs 
 through the whole length of the continent, a distance of more 
 than 1 1 ,000 miles, and is the longest range of mountains on 
 the globe. 
 
 Beginning at the southern extremity of the continent, in lat. 
 54** S. it runs along the whole western coast of South Ameri- 
 ca, and, crossing the isthmus of Darien, passes into Mexico in 
 North America. After leaving Mexico, it continues in a course 
 west of north, and terminates, it is supposed, on the Frozen 
 Ocean, in about lat 70° N. 
 
 The different parts of this range are called by different 
 names. The part in South America is called the Andes ; the 
 part in Mexico, the Cordilleras of Mexico ; and the part north 
 of Mexico, the Rocky Mountains. The highest parts of this 
 range are in South America and Mexico. There are many 
 summits from 15,000 to 20,000 feet in height, and several of 
 the loftiest are volcanoes. 
 
 Divisions. America is divided by the isthmus of Darien into 
 North and South America. Between these two divisions Sire 
 the West India islands. 
 
 NORTH AMERICA. 
 
 Situation. North America is bounded on the E. by the At- 
 lantic Ocean ; on the S. E. it is separated from South America 
 
 C2 
 
3i) NORTH AMERICA. 
 
 by the isthmus of Darien ; on the W. is the Pacific Ocean. 
 The southern extremity is in N. lat 1^ 30^. The limits to- 
 wards the north have never been fully ascertained. From the 
 recent discoveries of Capt. Parry, however, it is rendered pro- 
 bable that it does not extend much beyond 75*^ north latitude, 
 and that it is washed for nearly 2000 miles by the Polar sea. 
 Divisions. The three great divisions of North America are, 
 
 1 . British America, in the north ; 
 
 2. The United States, in the middle, and 
 
 3. Spanish America, in the south. 
 
 These three include the whole of North America, except 
 the Russian settlements, in the northwest. Greenland, which 
 was formerly reckoned a part of North America, is now gene- 
 rally believed to be an island. 
 
 Climate. The climate on the eastern side of North America 
 is much colder than in the same latitudes in Europe 
 
 Mountains- There are two great ranges of mountains in 
 North America, the western and the eastern. The western 
 comes from South America, over, the isthmus of Darien, and 
 after passing through the whole length of Spanish America, 
 proceeds in a direction west of north, till it terminates on the 
 Frozen Ocean, in about lat. 70*^ N. In its general course, it is 
 parallel with the coast of the Pacific Ocean, from which it is 
 several hundred miles distant. The part of this range which 
 is in Mexico, is called the Cordilleras oj Mexico., and the 
 part north of Mexico, the Rocky Mountains. 
 
 The eastern range is wholly within the United States. It 
 runs from southwest to northeast, and in its general course is 
 parallel with the Atlantic coast, from which it is 200 or 300 
 miles distant. It is called the Alleghany range. 
 
 Bays or Gulfs The five largest bavs in North America are 
 Boffins Bay Hudson s Bay the Gulf of St Lawrence.^ the 
 Gulf of Mexico, and the Cfulf of California 
 
 Islands. The most important islands are Greenland, New- 
 foundland, Cape Breton, and St. John's in the Gulf of St. Law- 
 rence ; Nantucket and Long-Island, on the coast of the United 
 States ; and the Bermuda islands, in lat. 32 N. 
 
 Lakes. There are more large lakes in N. America than in 
 any other part of the world. The seven largest are Slave lake, 
 lake Winnipeg, lake Superior, lake Michigan, lake Huron, lake 
 JSrte, and lake Ontario The last five are very near each other, 
 and form a regular chain, by means of short rivers or straits, 
 which run from one to the other. 
 
NORTH AMERICA. 31 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers of North America are Macken- 
 sie's -Ve/so»'s, the St. Lawrence^ the Mississippi, the Missouri, 
 the Rio del Xorie. the Colorado^ and the Columbia. 
 
 Mackenzie, s river empties itself into the Frozen Ocean in lat. 
 70 N. This river is the outlet of Slave lake. Its most dis- 
 tant sources are, Unjigah or Peace river, and Athapescow, or 
 Elk river ; both of which rise in the Rocky mountains. The 
 Athapescow, after passing through Athapescow lake, unites 
 with the Unjigah, and forms Slave river, which empties itself into 
 Slave lake From Slave lake to the ocean, the river is called 
 Mackenzie's river. 
 
 JVelson's river discharges itself into Hudson's Bay. It is the 
 outlet of lake Winnipeg. Its most distant branch is Saskatcha- 
 wine river, which rises in the Rocky mountains, and flows east 
 into lake Winnipeg. From lake Winnipeg to Hudson's Bay 
 it is called Nelson's river. 
 
 The St. Lawrence empties itself into the Gulf of St. Law- 
 rence, in lat. 50 N. It is the outlet of the five great lakes, Su- 
 perior, Huron, Michigan, Erie, and Ontario. Its general course 
 is from S. W. to N. E. 
 
 The Mississippi empties itself into the gulf of Mexico. It 
 rises near the west end of lake Superior, and flows south. The 
 branches of the Mississippi are mighty rivers. The branches 
 are very numerous, and spread out widely, from the Alleghany 
 mountains on the east, to the Rocky mountains on the west. 
 
 The Missouri is a western branch of the Mississippi. It 
 empties itself in about lat. 38 N. It rises in the Rocky moun- 
 tains, and flows southeast. From its source in the Rocky 
 mountains, to the mouth of the Mississippi, in the Gulf of Mex- 
 ico, is more than 4,600 miles. 
 
 The Rio del JVbrte empties itself into the Gulf of Mexico 
 in lat. 26 N. It rises in the Rocky mountains in about lat. 40 
 N. and its general course is southeasterly. 
 
 The Colorado empties itself into the gulf of California. It 
 rises on the west side of the Rocky Mountains, and its general 
 course is southwesterly. 
 
 Columbia river empties itself into the Pacific Ocean in lat. 
 46° N; Its sources are in the Rocky Mountains. 
 
 Indians. When North America was discovered, in 1492, 
 there was not one white man in it. The whole continent was 
 in the possession of Indians, who generally hved a wandering 
 life, and gained their subsistence by hunting and fishing. 
 
52 NORTH AMERICA. 
 
 When the whites first came over, they made a few small 
 settlements on the Atlantic coast. As they increased in num- 
 bers, they began to advance into the interior, either purchasing 
 the land of the Indians, or driving them off by force. The 
 whites have now been increasing and advancing for more than 
 three centuries, and the Indians have been diminishing and re- 
 treating. 
 
 At the present time, the whites are in possession of more 
 than one quarter of North America. They occupy the south- 
 eastern part. If we begin on the coast of the Pacific Ocean, 
 and draw a fine along the parallel of .30*^ N. lat. till it strikes 
 the Mississippi river, then up the Mississippi to its source near 
 lake Superior ; then down lakes Superior, Huron, Erie, and 
 Ontario, and down the river St. Lawrence to its mouth ; this 
 line would divide North America into two parts. The whites 
 possess nearly all the continent south and east of this line, and 
 the Indians nearly all north and west of it. In other words, 
 the Indians still own all the northern part of Spanish America, 
 the western part of the United States, and the whole of British 
 America, except a narrow strip along the shores of the great 
 lakes, and of the river St. Lawrence. 
 
 The whites are now increasing more rapidly than ever. 
 Their settlements are continually advancing towards the west 
 and north. The Indians are fast melting away before them ; 
 and in the course of a few centuries, probably, there will be 
 »few wandering Indians left in America. 
 
 The country occupied by the Indians, which embraces about 
 three quarters of the continent, is very imperfectly known. 
 Many parts of it were never^explored by a white man. We 
 know, in general, that it is inhabited by Indians, who five en- 
 tirely by hunting and fishing, and of course, that it is in a state 
 of nature, wild and uncultivated. Even the names of the In- 
 dian tribes which inhabit this vast country are, in many in- 
 stances unknown. 
 
 Arrangement. In describing North America we shall begin 
 in the north, with Greenland and the Russian settlements, and 
 then proceed to the three great divisions, British America, the 
 United States, and Spanish America. 
 
GREENLAND. 33 
 
 GREENLAND. 
 
 Situation. Greenland belongs to Denmark. It is bounded 
 by the Atlantic ocean on the east, and is separated from the 
 northern part of North America by Davis's straits on the west. 
 How far it extends north has never been ascertained. To- 
 wards the south, it terminates in a point, called Cape Fare- 
 well. 
 
 Climate. Greenland is one of the coldest countries on the 
 globe. The eastern coast is generally inaccessible, on ac- 
 count of the ice, with which it is lined all the year round. 
 The summers are short ; the winters are long and gloomy. 
 In a severe winter, many of the inhabitants are commonly 
 frozen to death. 
 
 Face of the country. The face of the country is very 
 dreary. It is principally made up of naked, barren mountains, 
 whose tops are covered with everlasting ice. The interior is 
 wholly inaccessible on account of the ice. 
 
 Productions. In the southern parts of the country there 
 are a few miserable trees and shrubs, of a small stinted growth. 
 There is no wood of a size fit for building houses, and that 
 which is used for fuel is principally drift wood, which floats in 
 great quantities near the shore, and is picked up by the boats. 
 
 The food of the Greenlanders is derived principally from 
 seals, birds, and fishes. Sometimes they are reduced to the 
 necessity of living on sea-weed and train oil ; and in very 
 severe winters, many of them starve to death. 
 
 Population, The whole population is about 14,000, and is 
 confined to the sea-coast. The Danes and Norwegians have 
 settlements along the coast, which contain in all about 6,000 
 or 7,000 souls. The number of the natives, 60 or 70 years 
 ago, was estimated at 20,000. It does not now, probably, 
 exceed 7,000. The population has been diminishing for many 
 years. This is owing to several causes, but especially to the 
 vast accumulation of ice on their coasts. 
 
 Religion, The natives were formerly pagans, but through 
 the instrumentality of the Moravian missionaries, they have, to 
 a considerable extent, been converted to Christianity. The 
 missionary settlements are at New Herrnhut, Lichtenfels, and 
 Lichtenau. 
 
 Character and Manners. The natives are of a low stature;, 
 
34 RUSSIAN SETTLEMENTS, 
 
 brawny, and inclined to corpulency. They are indolent, and 
 slow of apprehension, but very quiet and good natured. They 
 are extremely filthy in their mode of living. In winter, they 
 live in huts, made of stone or turf, and several families usually 
 occupy the same building. These huts are warmed by burn- f 
 ing train oil and moss in a species of lamp. 
 
 The only employments of the Greenlanders are fishing and 
 hunting. They can never live by agriculture ; the climate is 
 too cold, and the soil too sterile. 
 
 Before the Moravian missionaries laboured among them, the 
 Greenlanders were barbarians. They frequently buried their 
 old women alive, to get rid of the trouble and expense of 
 maintaining them. Children have been known to bury their 
 own parents in this way. But this and other savage customs 
 are now abolished, and the nation are to a considerable extent 
 a Christian people. 
 
 Animals, The quadrupeds are rein-deer, foxes, hares, dogs, 
 and white bears. The dogs are used as beasts of burden ; 
 and draw the sledges of the (jreenlanders, 70 miles a day. 
 
 Sea fowl, eagles, ravens, and other birds of prey are very '^ 
 numerous. Whales, porpoises, and other fish abound on the 
 coast. Greenland is valuable principally on account of its 
 fisheries. 
 
 But the animal of most importance to the Greenlander 
 is the seal. It is every thing to him. The flesh of the seal is 
 his principal food ; the oil is instead of wood for fuel ; out of 
 the skin he makes his boat, tent and clothes ; the fibres of the 
 sinews answer for thread ; even the bones and entrails are 
 found to be valuable. Catching seals is the principal employ- 
 ment of the inhabitants. 1 1 is a diflicult and dangerous business ; 
 and to excel in it is the highest pride of the Greenlander. The 
 man who cannot catch seals is looked upon with contempt. 
 
 RUSSIAN SETTLEMENTS. 
 
 The Russian settlements in North America are on the north- 
 west coast. They extend from Cape Prince of Wales, at 
 Behring's straits, near lat. 65° N. to Portlock harbour, near 
 lat. 68°. They contain, in all, about 1000 white inhabitants. 
 The number of Indians tributary to the Russians, is more than 
 60,000. The principal employment of the Indians is fishing 
 and hunting for the Russians, who pay them for their furs iq 
 ^eiads and tobacco. The mode of living and character of these 
 Indians, in many points, resemble those of the Greenlanders, 
 
NEWFOUNDLAND. 33 
 
 BRITISH AMERICA. 
 
 Situation. British America comprehends all that part of 
 North America, which lies north of the United States, except- 
 ing Greenland and the Russian settlements. 
 
 Divisions. Not more than one-tenth part of this vast comi- 
 try is in the possession of the whites. This part is in the 
 southeast, along the banks of the St. Lawrence and the five 
 great lakes, and embraces the island of Newfoundland^ and the 
 four following provinces. 
 
 1. Nova Scotia* 
 
 2. New- Brunswick. 
 3 Lower Canada. 
 4. Upper Canada. 
 
 All British America, not included in the abovementioned 
 divisions, is generally called New Britain^ and is in the pos- 
 session of the Indians. 
 
 Govemment. The whole country is subject to the king of 
 Great Britain, who appoints the governors and deputy govern- 
 ors of the different provinces. 
 
 NEWFOUNDLAND. 
 
 Situation. Newfoundland is an island, ?80 miles long, 
 separated from Labrador by the straits of Bellisle. It is 
 bounded by the Gulf of St. Lawrence on the west, and on all 
 other sides by the Atlantic. . 
 
 Face of the country. The country is hilly, and the soil bar- 
 ren ; the coasts are high and bold, and abound with fine har- 
 bours. The interior of the* island has never been explored. 
 
 Fislieries. Newfoundland owes all its importance to the 
 fisheries, which are carried on near its shores, and upon the 
 banks, which lie to the southeast of the island. The Grand 
 Bank lies 100 miles from the southeast extremity of the island. 
 It is 300 miles long, and 75 broad. East of this is Green 
 Bank, 240 miles long, and 120 broad. No less than 3000 
 sail of small crafl, belonging to Great Britain, France, and the 
 United States, are employed in these fisheries. They are an 
 excellent nursery for seamen. 
 
 Town^. All the principal towns are on the southeast side 
 of the island, in the neighbourhood of the fisheries. 
 
36 NOVA SCOTIA. 
 
 St. John's is the capital. It contained in 1816 about 12,000 
 inhabitants, but three dreadful fires, in the winters of 1 8 1 6 and 
 1817, laid nearly the whole of the town in ashes. Placentia 
 and Bonavista are next in size and importance. 
 
 Population. The population is very fluctuating. It depends 
 upon the state of the fisheries. In 1813, when the fisheries 
 were most prosperous, it amounted to nearly 70,000. The 
 largest portion of the settlers has usually been from Ireland. 
 
 Religion. More than three quarters of the inhabitants are 
 Roman Catholics. The rest are Protestants, of various de- 
 nominations. 
 
 NOVA SCOTIA. 
 
 Situation. Nova Scotia is a narrow peninsula, more than 
 300 miles long, stretching from southwest to northeast. It is 
 bounded on the north by the Gulf of St. Lawrence : on the 
 west by the Bay of Fundy ; on the northwest by the province 
 of New-Brunswick : and on all other sides by the Atlantic 
 Ocean. 
 
 History. No settlements, of any consequence, were made 
 in this country till the year 1749. In that year, the English 
 government sent out a colony of about 3000 persons, who 
 settled at Halifax. For several years they were much disturbed 
 by the French from Canada, and the Indians ; but the conquest 
 of Canada by the Enghsh in 1 760, put an end to these trou- | 
 bles ; and the colony has ever since advanced rapidly in wealth I 
 and population. | 
 
 Divisions. Nova Scotia is divided into 9 counties, which ! 
 are subdivided into 37 townships. ! 
 
 Counties. Chief Towns, j 
 Shelburne, Shelburne. j 
 Queen's, Liverpool. 
 Lunenburgh, Lunenburgh. j 
 Sydney, Manchester. 
 
 Annapolis, Annapolis. | Cumberland, Cumberland. ! 
 
 Population. The population is estimated at more than 
 100,000. The great body of the people are of English i 
 origin ; principally emigrants from New-England. After 
 these, the- Scotch and Irish settlers are most numerous. The 
 Mickmack Indians were the aborigines of the province, and 
 still inhabit the shore east of Halifax, They are diminishing 
 in numbers. 
 
 Counties. Chief Towns. 
 
 XT rr ^ Halifax, 
 
 Halifax, ^ T^^^^_ 
 
 Hants, Windsor. 
 
 King's, Cornwallis, 
 
NEW BRUNSWICK. 
 
 Religion and learning. The established religion is that of 
 the Church of England. There is one bishop, whose diocess 
 includes Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, and the islands of Cape 
 Breton and Prince Edward. . 
 
 There is a college at Windsor, which has a valuable library, 
 and several scholarships. Schools are established in all the 
 villages. 
 
 Chief Towns. Halifax, the capital, is situated on Che- 
 bucto Bay, in the centre of the peninsula. It has a spacious 
 and commodious harbour, of a bold and safe entrance, and is 
 the principal naval station belonging to Great Britain, in 
 North America. The population is 15,000. 
 
 Liverpool is on the Atlantic coast, 45 miles S. W. of Hali- 
 fax, and has considerable trade. Pictou, on the Gulf of St. 
 Lawrence, 100 miles N. E. of Halifax, has a fine harbour. 
 Great quantities of timber are exported from Pictou to Great 
 Britain. 
 
 Commerce. Fish and lumber are the staple commocfities, 
 and are exported in great quantities to Great Britain and the 
 West Indies. Plaster of Paris of a fine quality is also exported 
 to the United States. 
 
 Soil, The N. E. part of the peninsula presents a gloomy 
 and barren aspect ; but the counties to the S. W. of Halifax, 
 and along the Bay ofFundy, have a rich soil, and produce 
 good crops of grain. 
 
 Bays. The bays and harbours on the coast of Nova Sco- 
 tia are very numerous. The Bay of Fundy is remarkable for 
 its tides, which rise in some parts to 40 feet, and in some to 60. 
 The rise of the tide is so rapid, that cattle feeding on the shore 
 are often suddenly overtaken by it, and drowned. 
 
 Islands. Prince Edward's island, formerly called St. John's, 
 is more than 100 miles long. It is in the Gulf of St. Law- 
 rence, west of Cape Breton, and near the northern coast of 
 Nova Scotia. The principal town is Charlottetown. The 
 population is about 800. 
 
 NE W-BRUNS WIC K. 
 
 Situation. ' New-Brunswick is bounded on the N. by Lower 
 Canada; on the E. by the Gulf of St. Lawrence ; on the S. 
 E. by Nova Scotia, and the Bay of Fundy ; on the W. by 
 Maine and Canada. 
 
 D 
 
3B LOWER CANADA. 
 
 
 Chief Towns. Frederickton is the capital. It is on St. ' 
 John's river, about 80 miles from the mouth, at the head off 
 sloop navigation. 
 
 The city of St. John is the largest town. It is near the [ 
 mouth of St. John's river. The population in 1 822 was esti^ 
 mated at 8,000. 
 
 Population. The population of the province is estimated 
 at more than 60,000. 
 
 Bays. The principal bays are Passamaquoddy bay, border- 
 ing on Maine ; the bay of Fundy ; Chignecto bay, which is an 
 arm of the bay of Fundy ; Merramichi and Chaleur bays, 
 which communicate with the Gulf of St. Lawrence. 
 
 Rivers. St. John^s river is the principal river in the pro- 
 vince. It rises in Maine, and empties itself into the Bay of 
 Fundy. It is navigable for sloops 80 miles, and for boats 200. 
 The common route from the city of St. John fo Quebec is up 
 this river. 
 
 Merramichi river discharges itself into Merramichi bay. It 
 abounds with salmon. 
 
 Soil and Productions. Tlie lands on the rivers, especially 
 on St. John's river, and its branches, are very rich and fertile. 
 The pines on this river are the largest in British America, and 
 afford a considerable supply of masts for the British navy. 
 
 The timber, with -which the uplands are covered, and the cod- 
 fish, salmon, and herring, which abound in the rivers, and 
 near the coasts, are the principal productions of the country, 
 and are exported in considerable quantities. 
 
 LOWER CANADA. 
 
 Situation. Lower Canada lies on both sides of the river 
 St. Lawrence, from its mouth to Lake St. Francis. It is bound- 
 ed N. by New Britain ; E. by the Gulf of St. Lawrence ; S. E. 
 and S. by New Brunswick, Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont^ 
 and New York ; S. W. and W. by Upper Canada. 
 
 Divisions. Lower Canada is divided into districts, which 
 are subdivided into counties. The counties are divided into 
 townships, seignories, and parishes. 
 
 Chief Towns. Quebec, the capital of Lower Canada, and 
 of all British America, stands on the north side of the St. Law- 
 rence, at its confluence with the river St. Charles, about 350 
 miles from the sea. The town is divided into Upper and Lower. 
 
LOWl^R CANADA. 39 
 
 The Upper town, which is built on a high, steep rock, is 
 a place of great natural strength, and is extremely well fortified. 
 — The I ower town is much the smallest part, and is inhabited 
 principally by tradesmen and sailors. It is situated at the foot 
 of the rock ; and from the fortifications of the Upper town, 
 you look down upon it as from a very high steeple. When the 
 cannon of the fortifications are discharged, the balls fly far 
 . above the tops of the highest houses. The population of the 
 city, in 1820, was 18,000. The country around Quebec pre- 
 sents much sublime and beautiful scenery. 
 
 Montreal is situated on the east side of an island in the St. 
 Lawrence, at the head of ship navigation. It is 1 80 miles above 
 Quebec, and 200 below lake Ontario. The population, in 
 1825, was estimated at 23,000. The commerce of the city is 
 extensive ; the principal branch is the fiar trade. 
 
 Trois Rivieres^ or Three Rivers is pleasantly situated, on 
 the north side of the St. Lawrence, half way between Quebec 
 and Montreal, 90 miles fi-om each. It was formerly the seat 
 of, the French government". It contains about 2,600 inhabit- 
 ants. 
 
 Population. .The number of inhabitants, in 1825, was 
 430,879, a majority of whom were of French origin. The 
 principal settlements are along the banks of the St. Lawrence. 
 
 Religion. A majority of the inhabitants are of the Roman 
 Catholic religion ; but Presbyterians, Baptists, Methodists, and 
 other Protestant sects are fast increasing in numbers. 
 
 History. This country was originally settled by the French, 
 and remained in their possession until 1759, when an English 
 army, under General Wolfe, took Quebec ; and, soon after, 
 the whole province surrendered to the British. 
 
 At the commencement of the American revolution, in 1775, 
 this province was invaded by the American troops ; — Montreal 
 was taken, and an attack was made upon Quebec, but it fail- 
 ed; General Montgomery was slain, and his troops routed. 
 
 Commerce. The commerce of this province has been ra- 
 pidly increasing for many years. The principal articles of ex- 
 port are furs, lumber, pot-ashes, grain, pork, arid beef. The 
 produce of Upper Canada is brought down the St. Lawrence 
 and exported from Montreal. 
 
 Climate. The winters are long, and the cold intense. The 
 ice on the rivers is usually two feet thick. The summer h 
 Yery warm, and vegetation remarkably rapid. 
 
40 UPPER CANADA. 
 
 Face of the Country^ &c. Several ranges of mountains J 
 run from the coast into the interior, in parallel ridges. The | 
 valleys between the ranges, have a fertile soil, yielding grass 
 and grain in abundance. The greater part of the country is ' 
 still covered with forests. 
 
 Rivers. The St. Lawrence runs through this province, from 
 southwest to northeast, and empties itself into the gulf of St. 
 Lawrence. 
 
 The Outawas river empties itself into the St. Lawrence, 
 near Montreal. It rises in the' high lands, between lake Hu- 
 ron and Hudson's bay. — The Sorelle and the St, Francis Qow 
 into the St. Lawrence from the south, between Montreal and 
 Quebec. The Sorelle is the outlet of lake Champlain. — The 
 Chaudiere comes from the south, and enters into the St. Law- 
 rence near Quebec. 
 
 Natural Curiosities. The celebrated falls of Montmorency 
 are near the mouth of a river of the same name, w^hich enters 
 into the St, Lawrence, 9 miles below Quebec. The river pours 
 over a precipice, and instantly falls perpendicularly to the as- 
 tonishing depth of 246 feet, presenting a scene of wonderful 
 beauty and grandeur. These falls are in full view as you sail 
 up and down the St. Lawrence. 
 
 Island. The island of Cape Breton^ in the Gulf of St, 
 Lawrence, is attached to this province. It lies northeast of 
 Nova Scotia, from which it is separated by a narrow strait, 
 called the Gut of .Canso. In 1743, when this island belonged 
 to France, the fisheries on its shores were very productive, and 
 employed no less than 27,000 seamen. At present, the prin- 
 cipal employment of the inhabitants is the working of the coal 
 mines. The population of the island is about 3,000. 
 
 UPPER CANADA. 
 
 Situation. Upper Canada is that peninsulated tract of 
 country, which lies between the river Outawas and lakes Onta- 
 rio, Erie, and Huron. It is bounded on the east, south, and 
 west by the United States, from which it is separated by the St. 
 Lawrence and the Lakes ; on the northeast by Lower Canada. 
 from which it is separated by Outawas river ; on the northwest 
 by New Britain. 
 
 Divisions. The settled part of this province i'? diri^pd infr 
 
UPPER CANADA, 
 
 41 
 
 8 districts, which are subdivided into 24 counties, and these 
 are again divided into 156 townships. 
 
 Districts. 
 
 Eastern, 
 
 Johnstown, 
 
 Midland, 
 
 Newcastle, 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 Cornwall. 
 Prescott, 
 Kingston. 
 Newcastle. 
 
 Districts. 
 
 Home, 
 
 Niagara, 
 
 London, 
 
 Western, 
 
 Chief Tovms. 
 York. ^ 
 Queenstown. 
 
 Sandwich. 
 
 Population. Upper Canada is a new country, and the popu- 
 lation increases with great rapidity. In 1783, it was estimated 
 at 10,000 ; in 1825, it was 157,741. It will probably con- 
 tinue to increase rapidly for many years. The settlements, at 
 present, are confined to the neighbourhood of the St. Law- 
 rence, and the shores of the great lakes ; but they are fast ex- 
 tending into the interior. The settlers are principally emigrants 
 from the United States. 
 
 Face of the country^ soil^ &c. The country on the St. 
 Lawrence and the lalves is a fine level country, with a rich soil, 
 well adapted for cultivation. There is a great quantity of fer- 
 tile land, at present unoccupied, in this province, but the settle- 
 ments are fast extending over it. Pvluch of the interior has 
 never been explored. 
 
 Chief Towns. York is the seat of government. It is re- 
 gularly laid out, on the northwest side of lake Ontario, has a 
 beautiful and commodious harbour, and about 3,X300 inhabit- 
 ants. 
 
 Kingston stands at the egress of the St. Lawrence from lake 
 Ontario, It is the most flourishing town in the province, and 
 contains about 2,000 inhabitants. It has an excellent harbour, 
 and, in time of war, is the principal station for the British ship- 
 ping on lake Ontario. 
 
 Newark is at the mouth of Niagara river, w^here it enters 
 lake Ontario. Queenstoivn is on the same river, 7 miles from 
 Newark. Chippeivay is on the same river, 10 miles above 
 Queenstown, and 3 above Niagara falls. Fort Erie is at the 
 head of Niagara river, at its egress from lake Erie. Maiden 
 and Sandwich are south of Detroit, on the river which connects 
 lake St. Clair with lake Erie. 
 
 Lakes. Besides the great lakes, Ontario^ Erie^ and Huron^ 
 which are on the boundary of the province, there is a chain of 
 small lakes stretching from lake Huron to lake Ontario. The 
 first is lake Simcoe. which empties itself through Severn river 
 
NEW BR!TAlx\. 
 
 into lake Huron. Near lake Simcoe are the Shallow lakes, 
 which are united by a short river with Rice lake. Rice lake 
 discharges itself through Trent river into the bay of Quinti, 
 which opens into Lake Ontario near Kingston. Lake Nepi- 
 sing is a large lake, which empties itself into the north side ol 
 lake Huron, through French river. 
 
 Rivers. The following rivers make a part of the boundary 
 of the province : Outmvas river, which separates it from Low- 
 er Canada ; the St. Lawrence^ which separates it from New- 
 York ; the Niagara river, which connects lake Erie with lake 
 Ontario, and separates the province from New-York ; the river 
 St. Clair., which ^connects lake Huron with lake St. Clair, and 
 separates the province from Michigan territory. 
 
 Grand river is a large stream which runs into lake Erie, near 
 its eastern extremity. The land for six miles on each side of 
 this river, from its mouth to its source, is in the possession of 
 the Six Nations of Indians. 
 
 The Tkamesrises near the sources of Grand river, and flows 
 southwest into lake St. Clair. 
 
 Bay. The bay of Quinti is a long narrow harbour, at the 
 northeast end of lake Ontario, It is 70 miles long, and from 
 1 to 6 broad, and affords safe navigation through its whole 
 length. 
 
 Commerce. The principal exports are wheat, pot and 
 pearl ashes, and other agricultural productions, which are 
 chiefly carried down the St. Lawrence to Montreal. 
 
 Canal. A canal, called the Welland canal, which is to con- 
 nect lake Erie with lake Ontario, is now in progress. It com- 
 mences on lake Erie near the mouth of Grand river, and pro- 
 ceeding in a N. E. direction, terminates near the mouth of 
 Niagara river. It is to be sufficiently large for the passage of 
 sloops. 
 
 Climate. The province is in a more southern latitude than 
 Lower Canada, and the climate is much warmer. 
 
 NEW-BRITAIN. 
 
 Situation. New-Britain comprehends all that part of Bri- 
 tish America, which lies north and northwest of Upper and 
 Lower Canada. It is a vast country, extending from the At- 
 lantic Ocean on the east, to the Pacific on the west ; and from 
 Canada and the United States on the south, to the Frozen 
 Ocean on the north. 
 
NEW BRITAIN. 43 
 
 Divisions. Hudson's Bay divides this country into two 
 parts. The eastern and the western. The eastern is subdi- 
 vided into Labrador and East Main; and the western into Neiv 
 South Wales and JVew North Wales. 
 
 Face of tJie country. This is a dreary, desolate country. 
 The surface, to a great extent, is naked rock, or covered with a 
 soil so thin, that nothing but moss, and shrubs, or stinted trees 
 can grow upon it. There are innumerable lakes and ponds of 
 fresh water scattered over the whole country. 
 
 Bays. The two principal bays are Baffiyi's and Hudson's. 
 The southern part of Hudson's bay is called James bay. 
 
 Lakes. The small lakes are too many to be enumerated. 
 The three largest are Slave lake, Athapescoio lake or lake gf 
 the hills, and lake Winnipeg.. 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers are Mackenzie's river, which 
 is the outlet of Slave lake, and Nelson^ s river, which is the 
 outlet of lake Winnipeg. Unjigah and Athapescow rivers ar^ 
 the remote .sources of Mackenzie's river ; and the Saskatcha- 
 wineis the remote source of Nelson's river. 
 
 Churchill and Severn rivers flow into Hudson's bay. Albany ^ 
 Moose., and Rupert rivers discharge themselves into James bay. 
 
 Productions. The climate is so cold, and the soil so barren, 
 that nothing of the vegetable kind can flourish here. Wild 
 animals are abundant. The principal are beavers, bears, deer, 
 raccoons, and musquashes. 
 
 Fur Trade. On all the principal lakes, and at the mouths 
 and forks of nearly all the considerable rivers, there are trading 
 houses, established by the English. Here the Indians bring 
 the furs of the animals which they kill in hunting, and sell 
 them for blankets, guns, powder, beads, &c. 
 
 The fur trade is carried on by two companies of merchants ; 
 the Hudson's Bay Company, and the JVorthwest Company. 
 The trade of the former is confined to the neighbourhood of 
 Hudson's bay ; that of the latter extends from lake Winnipeg 
 to the Rocky mountains and the Frozen Ocean. The North- 
 west Company is composed of Montreal merchants. 
 
 3Iode of tr.avelling. The only mode of travelling in this 
 desolate country, is in birch bark canoes. With these the in- 
 habitants pass up and down the rivers and lakes, and when 
 they meet with a rapid, or wish to pass from one river to 
 another, they get out of the canoe and carry it on th^ir 
 
44 
 
 UNITED STATES. 
 
 shoulders. In this wa)', the men engaged in the fur trade 
 travel thousands of miles, and carry all their goods. 
 
 Settlements. The Moravian missionaries have 3 small set- 
 tlement^ among the Esquimaux Indians, on the coast of La- 
 brador, viz. Okkak^ Nain, and Hopedale. These and the forts 
 and houses established by those engaged in the fur trade, are 
 the only settlements of white men. The principal forts are 
 Fort Chepewyan^ on Athapescow lake, Churchill^ at the mouth 
 of Churchill river, and YorJc^ at the mouth of Nelson's river „ 
 
 Inhabitants. The Esquimaux Indians inhabit the coast of 
 Labrador, and the shores of the frozen. Ocean. They are of 
 the same race with the Greenlanders. Like them, they live 
 principally on seals and whales, and confine themselves to the 
 sea coast. The interior is inhabited by various tribes of 
 Knisteneaux and Chepewyan Indians. Their number is m\^ 
 known. 
 
 UNITED STATES. 
 
 Situation. The United States is the great middle division 
 of North America. It extends from British America on the 
 north, to Spanish America on the south ; and from the Atlantic 
 Ocean on the east, to the Pacific on the west. 
 
 Civil Divisions. This extensive country is divided into 24 
 States^ 6 Territories^ and 1 District. The states are divided 
 into eastern^ middle^ southern, and western. The names of the 
 states and their capital towns are given in the following table. 
 
 Eastern 
 
 States, 
 
 or 
 
 New 
 England. 
 
 Middle. 
 States. 
 
 1,2: 
 
 In. 
 
 States. 
 
 1. Maine, 
 
 2. New-Hampshire, 
 
 3. Vermont, 
 
 4. Massachusetts, 
 
 5. Rhode Island, 
 
 6. Connecticut, 
 
 7. New-York, 
 
 8. New- Jersey, 
 Pennsylvania, 
 Delaware, 
 Maryland, 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 Portland. 
 
 Concord. 
 
 Montpelier. 
 
 Boston. 
 i Providence and 
 I Newport. 
 i Hartford and 
 I New Haven. 
 
 Albany. 
 
 Trenton. 
 
 Harrisburg. 
 
 Dover. 
 
 Annapolis. 
 
UNITED STATES. 
 
 45 
 
 _ 
 
 States. 
 
 Chief Tomns. 
 
 
 12. Virginia, 
 
 Richmond. 
 
 
 13. North Carolina, 
 
 Raleigh. 
 
 
 14. South Carohna, 
 
 Columbia. 
 
 Southern 
 
 I'^TATES. 
 
 15. Georgia, 
 
 Milledgeville. 
 
 16. Alabama, 
 
 Cahawba. 
 
 
 17. Mississippi, 
 
 Monticello. 
 
 
 l18. Louisiana, 
 
 New-Orleans. 
 
 
 ' 19. Tennessee, 
 20. Kentuckv, 
 
 Nashville. 
 
 
 Frankfort. 
 
 Western 
 States. 
 
 21. Ohio, 
 
 Columbus. 
 
 22. Indiana, 
 
 Indianopolis. 
 
 
 23. Illinois, 
 
 Vandalia. 
 
 
 ^24. Missouri, 
 
 Jefferson city. 
 
 
 \ Michigan, 
 
 Detroit. 
 
 Territo- 
 
 1 Northwest, 
 Missouri, 
 
 
 ries. 
 
 Arkansas, 
 
 Arkopolis. 
 
 
 LFluxida, 
 
 Tallahassee. 
 
 District of 
 
 Columbia, 
 
 Washington. 
 
 Lakes. Lake Michigan and lake Champlain are the largest 
 lakes which lie wholly within the United States. Lakes Onta- 
 riOt Erie^ Huron^ and Superior are oh the boundary between 
 the United States and British America. 
 
 Mountains. The two principal ranges of mountains are, the 
 Rocky mountains in the w^st, and the Alleghany mountains in 
 the east. The Rocky mountains come from Spanish America, 
 and running northwest, nearly parallel with the coast of the 
 Pacific ocean, at the distance of several hundred miles, pass 
 into British America. The Alleghany mountains run parallel 
 with the Atlantic coast, from Georgia through Tennessee, Vii- 
 ginia, and Pennsylvania to New-York. 
 
 Rivers. Among the principal rivers are 1. Connecticut 
 river, which divides Vermont from New Hampshire, and pass- 
 ing through Massachusetts and Connecticut, runs into Long 
 Island sound, 2. Hudson^ which rises near lake Champlain, 
 and running south empties itself into the Atlantic below New- 
 York city. 3. Delaware^ which separates New-Jersey from 
 Pennsylvania, and runs into Delaware bay. 4. Potomac.^ which 
 .separates Maryland from Virginia, and empties itself into Che- 
 
46 EASTERN STATES, OR NEW ENGLAND. 
 
 sapeak bay. 5. Savannah^ which separates South Carohna 
 from Georgia, and empties itself into the Atlantic. 6. The 
 great river Mississippi, which rises near lake Superior, and 
 running south empties itself into the gulf of Mexico. 7. The 
 Ohio, which rises near lake Erie, and separating the states of 
 Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois, from Virginia and Kentucky, emp- 
 ties itself into the Mississippi. 8, 9, and 10. Missouri, Ar~ 
 Tcansas, and Red rivers, all of which rise in the Rocky moun- 
 tains, and run southeast into the Mississippi. 11. Columbia 
 river, which rises west of the Rocky mountains, and empties 
 itself into the Pacific ocean. 
 
 Natural divisions. The most important natural division is 
 made by the Mississij^ river. This river runs from north to 
 south, through the whole length of the United States, and di- 
 vides it into two parts. The western part is chiefly a wilder- 
 ness, inhabited by Indians ; the eastern is, to a great extent, a 
 cultivated country, inhabited by white men. 
 
 In the part of the United States lying east of the Mississippi, 
 a natural division is made by the Alleghany mountains. The 
 states lying wholly west of these mountains are called Western 
 States* Those on the cast of the mountains, generally border 
 on the Atlantic ocean, and are called Atlantic States. 
 
 The rivers Hudson and Potomac divide the Atlantic States 
 into three parts. Those east of the Hudson are called Easterni 
 States, or New-England ; those between the Hudson and the 
 Potomac, are called Middle States ; and those south of the Poto- 
 mac, including the three which border on the gulf of Mexico, 
 are called Southern States. 
 
 Shape. The part of the United States east of the Missis- 
 sippi, is narrow in the south, and grows wider as you proceed 
 north. It resembles the trunk of a tree, with two short thick 
 branches, New-York and the Eastern States make one branch, 
 and the Michigan and Northwest Territories make the other. 
 The rest of the States constitute the trunk. The parallel of 
 36° 30' north lat. which is the boundary between Kentucky and 
 Tennessee, and between Virginia and North Carolina, cuts 
 the trunk into two nearly equal parts. 
 
 EASTERN STATES, OR NEW-ENGLAND. 
 
 Situation. The Eastern States are fliose which lie east of 
 Hudson river, viz. — Maine, New- Hampshire. Vermont.. Masm-^ 
 C'husetts, Rhode Island^ and Connecticut. 
 
MAINE. 47 
 
 Seacoast. New-England has a long bold seacoast, abound- 
 ing with fine harbours. 
 
 Face of the country. The western part is mountainous ; 
 and the rest is chiefly hilly. 
 
 Mountains. The Oreen mountain and White mountain 
 ranges run from north to south through the whole length of 
 New-England. The Green mountains commence near the Ca- 
 nada line, and padsiiig through Vermont and Massachusetts, 
 terminate at New-Haven, in the southern part of Connecticut. 
 The White mountain range commences also near the Canada 
 line, and running in a southerly direction through New-Hamp- 
 shire into Massachusetts, divides a little below Northampton 
 into two branches. The western branch, called the Mount 
 Tom range, crosses Connecticut river, and running ahttle west 
 of south, terminates at New-Haven, about two miles from the 
 southern extremity of the Green mountain range. The eastern 
 branch runs directly south, and terminates at Lyme, which is 
 situated on the east bank of Connecticut river, at its mouth. 
 
 Climate. In the spring of the year, cold and piercing east 
 winds prevail, which are very disagreeable ; the climate, not- 
 withstanding, is healthful, except to those who have pulmonary 
 complaints. 
 
 River. The Connecticut is the great river of New-England. 
 It rises near the Canada line, separates Vermont from New- 
 Hampshire, and passes through Massachusetts and Connecti- 
 cut into Long Island sound. 
 
 MAIM2. 
 
 Situation. Maine is in the northeast extremity of the Uni- 
 ted States. On the north and east are the British provinces of 
 Lower Canada and New-Brunswick ; on the south is the At- 
 tantic, and on the west, New-Hampshire. It has more sea- 
 coast, and more good harbours, than any other state in the 
 Union. 
 
 Divisions. The state is divided into nine counties, viz. > 
 
 York, Cumberland, Lincoln, Hancock, Washington, Oxford, 
 Kennebeck, Somerset, and Penobscot. The five first named 
 border on the seacoast. 
 
 Bays. The principal bays are Casco, Penobscot, French- 
 man's and Passamaquoddy. 
 
 Rivers. The Penobscot rise? from the lakes in the north 
 
4S MAINE. 
 
 west part of the state, and after running in a circuitous course^ 
 flows into Penobscot bay. It is navigable 30 miles, to Ban- 
 gor, for large vessels, and for boats, 60 miles further. 
 
 The Kennebeck rises also from the lakes in the northwest, 
 and enters the ocean 16 miles below Bath. It is navigable 45 
 miles, to Augusta. The Androscoggin is a branch of the Ken- 
 nebeck, and joins it near its mouth. 
 
 Saco river rises among the White mountains in New-FIamp- 
 shire, and running in a southeast direction, falls into the ocean 
 a little west of Portland. Piscataqua viver forms apart of 
 the boundary between Maine and New-Hampshire. The St. 
 Croix forms the boundary between the United States and New- 
 Brunswick. 
 
 Lakes. TJmhagog lake lies partly in Maine, and partly in 
 New-Hampshire. Moosehead lake, in the northwest part of 
 the state, is the largest lake in New-England. It is the source 
 of the eastern branch of the Kennebeck. There are several 
 other large lakes in the north and northwest, but very little 
 is known about them, the country around not having yet been 
 explored. 
 
 Small lakes abound in every part of the district. 
 
 Chief Toivns. Portland, the capital, and much the largest 
 town, is built on a peninsula in Casco bay. The harbour 
 is deep, safe, capacious, and seldom frozen over. In 1815, it 
 was the eighth town in the United States in amount of ship- 
 ping. Population, in 1820, 8,581. 
 
 Bath is on the western side of the Kennebeck river, 16 miles 
 from the sea, at the head of winter navigation. A very large 
 amount of shipping is owned here. Brunswick is on the An- 
 droscoggin, near its mouth. 
 
 Wiscasset is on the Sheepscot, a few miles east of the Ken- 
 nebeck, and 12 miles from the sea. The river here is naviga- 
 ble for the largest vessels. 
 
 Hallowell lies on both sides of the Kennebeck, 40 miles 
 from its mouth. — Augusta lies on the same river, directly 
 above Hallowell. /ork., near the southwest corner of the 
 state, is one of the oldest towns in the United States. It was 
 settled in 1630. 
 
 Population. This state contained, in 1820, 298,335 inha- 
 i>itants. The part near the seacoast is the most populous ; 
 particularly in the southwest. The northern half of the state 
 is vet uninhabited, a^nd almost unexplored. There is so mucli 
 
.XE W-H AMPSHIHE. 4 '^ 
 
 \'acant fertile land, that the population of Maine will doubtless 
 increase rapidly for many years. 
 
 Education. Bowdoin College, in Brunswick, is a flourishing 
 institution. It has a large property in lands, which in time will 
 be very valuable. 
 
 A Theological Seminary, supported by Congregation alists, 
 has been estabhshed at Bangor, and another, supported by 
 Baptists, at Waterville. 
 
 Religion. The Congregationalists and Baptists are the 
 prevailing denominations. 
 
 Government. Maine was formerly miited with Massachu- 
 setts, under the title of the DistHet of Maine^ but in 1820, 
 the union vv^as amicably dissolved, and Maine was erected into 
 an independent state. 
 
 Soil and productions. Along the seacoast, the land is poor. 
 In the heart of the state, between the Kennebeck and Penob- 
 scot, there is a fine, fertile soil, yielding grass, and grain in 
 abundance. The eastern and western parts of the state are 
 less productive ; the northern half is a wilderness, about 
 which little is known. 
 
 Commerce. A large portion of this state is yet uninhabited, 
 and covered with forests. This is the case around the heads 
 of all the principal rivers. Hence lumber., at present, is the 
 great article of export. It is brought down all the principal 
 rivers in large quantities. 
 
 Maine is finely situated for commerce. It has an extensive 
 sfea-coast, abounding with good harbours. In amount of ship- 
 ping, it is already the fourth state in the Union. 
 
 NEW-HA]»IPSHIREs 
 
 Situation. New-Hampshire lies between Maine on the east, 
 and Connecticut river, which divides it from Vermont, on the 
 west. On the north, it touches Lower Canada, and on the 
 south, Massachusetts. On the south-east, it borders on the 
 ocean for 18 miles. 
 
 Shape. It is narrow in the north, and grows wider as you 
 proceed south, resembling a fan, with its handle towards the 
 north. 
 
 Divisions. This state is divided into 7 counties ; viz. 
 Kockingham, Strafford, Hillsborough, Merrimack, Cheshire, 
 Oldffon, and Coos. 
 
 Faee of ili.c country, nmintdins^ S^'c, Near the sea-cOast the 
 
 E 
 
LQ NEW-HAJyPSHmE. 
 
 land is leTel. In the west and north it rises into lofty moun- 
 tains. The White mountains, in the north, are the highest in 
 the United States. Mount Washington^ the loftiest peak, is 
 nearly 7,000 feet high. 
 
 Lakes. Winnipiseogee lake is near the centre of the state. 
 It is 23 miles long. Umbagog is in the north-east, and lies 
 partly in Maine. Squam lake is a few miles north of Winnipi- 
 seogee. Sunapee lake is in the west, and empties itself through 
 Sugar river into the Connecticut. 
 
 Rivers, Connecticut river divides this state fro'n Vermont. 
 It is navigable to Bath, a few miles above Haverhill. The 
 Merrimack rises iif the White mountains, near the sources of 
 the Saco, and running south through the centre of the state- 
 passes into Massachusetts. It receives the waters of Win- 
 nipiseogee lake from the east. The Piscataqua flows into the 
 ocean at Portsmouth. It forms part of the boundary between 
 this state ar»d Maine. 
 
 Chief Towns. Portsmouth., the largest town in the state,. 
 is on the sea-coast, at the mouth of Piscataqua river. The 
 harbour is one of the best on tlie continent, being sufficiently 
 deep for vessels of any size ; protected from every wind ; never 
 frozen ; and so well fortified by nature, that only a small ex- 
 pense is necessary to render it impregnable. Population, in 
 1820, 7,327. 
 
 Exeter is about 15 miles S. W. from Portsmouth. Phillips 
 Exeter Academy is in this town. 
 
 Concord., the seat of government, i^ a flourishing town on 
 the Merrimack. By means of the Merrimack and the Middle- 
 sex canal, there is a boat communication between this town 
 and Boston. Much of the trade of tlie upper country centres 
 here. Population, in 1820, 2,838. 
 
 Hanover., the seat of Dartmouth College, is on Connecticui: 
 river. Haverhill is" a flourishing town on the same river above 
 Hanover. 
 
 Education. Dartmouth college, at Hanover, is one of the 
 oldest, and most respectable colleges in the United States. 
 There is a medical school connected with the college. 
 
 Phillips Academy, at Exeter, is the best endowed Academy 
 in New-England. It has funds to the amoujit of 80,000 doliarS:. 
 a library oi 700 volumes, and a mathematical apparatus. 
 
 Population. New-Hampshire contained, in 1820, 244,163 
 inluibitants. The %rent ni55s of tlie .Ttdnulatioji is in. the so^itl; 
 
VERMONT: 51 
 
 ern half of the state. North of Winnipiseogee lake there are 
 •very few mhabitants, except on Connecticut river. 
 
 Religion. The Baptists and Congregationahsts are the 
 prevailing denominations. 
 
 Commerce. New-Hampshire has but one sea-port. Boston, 
 in Massachusetts, is the centre of trade for the greater part of 
 this state. The Middlesex canal, in Massachusetts, connects 
 Merrimack river with Boston harbour, and opens a water com- 
 munication between that town and all the country on the Mer- 
 rimack, and lake Winnipiseogee. 
 
 Curiosity. The Notch or Gap m the White Mountains is a 
 great curiosity. It is a deep and narrow defile. The moun- 
 tain appears as if it were cloven down quite to its base, perpen- 
 dicularly on one side, and on the other, at an angle of 45 de- 
 grees. The road which has been made through this pass, is 
 crossed by the river Saco, which here forms a succession of 
 beautiful cascades. The scenery is strikingly grand and 
 picturesque. 
 
 VERMONT. 
 
 Situation^ Vermont is bounded north by Lower Canada ; 
 east by New-Hampshire, from which it is separated by Con- 
 necticut river ; south by Massachusetts ; and west by New- 
 York, from which it is separated in part by lake Champlain. 
 
 Shape. Vermont is broad in the north, and grows narrow as 
 you proceed south. It resembles a fan, with its handle toward 
 the south. New-Hampshire and Vermont, taken together, 
 form quite a regular four-sided figure. 
 
 Divisions, Vermont is divided into 13 counties ; viz. 
 Eennington, Windham, Rutland, Windsor, Addison, Chitten- 
 <len, Frankhn, Orange, Caledonia, Essex, Orleans, Washing- 
 ton, and Grand Isle. 
 
 Face of the country^ mountains^ S^c. Vermont is a moun- 
 tainous country. The Green mountains run from north to 
 south, through the whole length of the state, and pass into 
 Massachusetts. The two highest summits of this range are 
 CameVs rump^ about half way between MontpeUer and Lake 
 Champlain, and Mansfield mountain, a few miles north of the 
 Camel's rump. They are each more than '* 000 feet high. 
 jl^c'M^ne?; mountain, near Windsor, is more than 3,000 feet high. 
 
 Lakes. Lake Champlain is the boundary between this state 
 and I^ew-York. It is 100 miles long, and fr(Jm 1 to 25 broad. 
 It discharges ifself, at it5 nortltern ■etxfreniity, thf ough the rivej: 
 
vejimont. 
 
 Sorelle into the St. Lawrence. Lake Mempkremagog is partly 
 in this state, but principally in Lower Canada. 
 
 Rivers. Connecticut river is the boundary between Vermont 
 and New-Hampshire. The principal rivers which flow into 
 Lake Champlain are Onion river, which rises in the eastern 
 part of the state, and passing by Montpelier, joins the lake 
 near Burlington ; Otter Creek^ which rises in the south, and 
 passing by Rutland, Middlebury, and Vergennes, empties itself 
 south of Onion river, and Lamoille and Missisque^ both of 
 which are north of Onion river. The rivers which discharge 
 themselves into the Connecticut are numerous, but small. 
 None of these rivers are navigable, except for a few miles from 
 their mouths, but they abound with valuable mill-seats, especially 
 Otter Creeh. 
 
 Chief Towns. Montpelier is the seat of government. It is 
 on Onion river, a Httle north of the centre of the state. 
 Population, in 1820, 2,300. 
 
 Bennington^ near the south-west corner of the state, is one 
 of the oldest towns. It is famous for the battle of August, 
 1777, in which the American militia, under General Stark, 
 defeated the British. Population, 2,600. 
 
 Windsor is .a beautiful town, on the bank of Connecticut 
 river. It is a place of considerable business. The Vermont 
 3tate Prison is in this town. Population, 3,000. 
 
 Middlebury is pleasantly situated on Otter creek, at the falls, 
 20 miles from the mouth of the river. A considerable num- 
 ber of mills and factories are established near the falls. — There 
 is an extensive quarry of marble in this place, and a mill has 
 been erected, where it is sawed into slabs. 
 
 Burlington stands on a beautiful harbour, on lake Cham- 
 plain, near the mouth of Onion river. It is on elevated ground, 
 commanding a noble view of the lake and the adjacent coun- 
 try. Almost all the vessels which navigate the lake, are owned 
 here. Pojmlation, 3,100. 
 
 St. Albans is a flourishing town, on lake Champlain, near 
 the north-west corner of the state. 
 
 Education. There is an institution at Burlington, called 
 the Vermont University., which has been liberally patronized by 
 the state ; and a flourishing college at Middlebury.^ which has 
 been supported chiefly by private bounty. 
 
 Population. Vermont contained in 1820, 235,764 inhabit- 
 ants. About half this population was in the four southeiEL 
 (jQUKties. The northern part of the state js thinlv settled. 
 
MASSACHUSETTS ^3 
 
 Religion. The Baptists and Congregationalists are the 
 prevailing denominations. 
 
 Soil and productions. The soil is fertile, yielding grass and 
 ^rain in abundance. The mountainous country is good grazing 
 land, and large numbers of cattle are raised there. 
 ^ Trade. In the northern part of the state, the people carry 
 their produce to Montreal ; in the eastern, to Boston and 
 Hartford ; and in the western, to New-York. The exports 
 consist of live cattle, beef, pork, pot and pearl ashes, and 
 agricultural produce. 
 
 Curiosities. In Clarendon, near Rutland, in the south- 
 "western part of the state, there is a remarkable cave in a 
 mountain. The entrance is a narrow passage, 2 or 3 feet in 
 diameter, and 30 feet long, which opens into a spacious room 
 20 feet long, 12 wide, and 18 or 20 feet high. At the end of 
 this room, there is another narrow passage leading down to a 
 second room, larger than the first. There are other caves 
 equally remarkable at Dorset and Danby in the same neigh- 
 bourhood. 
 
 MASSACHUSETTS^ 
 
 Situation, Massachusetts is bounded north by Vermont and 
 Tvew-Hampshire ; east by the Atlantic ; south by Rhode- 
 Island and Connecticut ; and west by New- York. It has a 
 very large extent of sea-coast. 
 
 Divisions . Massachusetts is divided into 14 counties; viz. 
 Essex, Middlesex, Suffolk, Norfolk, Plymouth, Barnstable, 
 Bristol, Dukes, and Nantucket, on the coast; Worcester, in 
 the centre of the state ; Franklin, Hampshire, and Hampden, 
 en Connecticut river ; and Berkshire, at the western extremity 
 of the state. 
 
 Mountains. There are several ranges of mountains in the 
 western part of the state, which come from Vermont and 
 New-Hampshire, and run across the state into Connecticut. 
 The principal are the Green mountain., and Mount Tom ranges. 
 
 Peninsula. The county of Barnstable is a peninsula, commonly 
 called the peninsula of Cape Cod, Its shape is that of a man's arm , 
 bent inwards, both at the elbow and wrist. This peninsula is 
 sandy and barren, and in many places, wholly destitute of vegeta- 
 tion ; yet it is quite populous. The inhabitants derive their sup- 
 port almost entirely from the ocean : the men being constantly 
 employed at sea ; and the boys, at a vdry early a^e, are ptit on 
 ■ •' ■ • E2 
 
34 MASSACHUSETTS. 'l 
 
 board the fishing boats. In consequence of the violent east 
 winds, it is supposed that the cape is gradually wearing away. 
 
 Bays. Massachusetts bay lies between Cape .Cod and 
 Cape Ann. Barnstable bay is the southern part of Massachu- 
 setts bay. Buzzard's bay is on the south-west side of the 
 peninsula of Cape Cod, and separated from Barnstable bay 
 by a narrow isthmus. 
 
 Rivers. The Housatonic rises in the western part of the 
 state, and passes into Connecticut. Stockbridge and Sheffield 
 are on its banks. 
 
 Connecticut river comes from the north, and passes through 
 the western part of the state into Connecticut. 
 
 Merrimack river, in the north-east, comes from New-Hamp^ 
 shire, and passing by Haverhill, empties itself into the ocean 
 at Newburyport, 
 
 Charles and Neponset rivers are small streams which flow 
 into Boston harbour. Taunton river discharges itself into 
 Narraganset bay in Rhode- Island. 
 
 Face of the country., soil, ^c. The part of the state west 
 of Connecticut river is mountainous ; east of that river the 
 country is hilly, except in the south-eastern counties, where it 
 is level. On the sea-coast, particularly in the southrcastern 
 counties, the land is poor ; in the rest of the state there is 
 generally a strong good soil, well adapted to grass and grain. 
 
 Chief Towns. Boston, the capital of the state, and the 
 largest town in New-England, is pleasantly situated on a 
 peninsula, at the head of Massachusetts bay. The harbour is 
 deep, safe, capacious, and easily defended. Boston owns more 
 shipping than any city in the United States, except New- York. 
 In 1826, it contained 68,000 inhabitants, and was the fourth 
 town of the Union in point of population. There are probably 
 tew cities in the world where there is so much wealth, in pro- 
 portion to the population, as in Boston. The number of 
 literary and well educated men is also unusually large. 
 
 Among the pubhc buildings, are a state-house, and 30 
 houses of public worship, many of them elegant. The country 
 ill the immediate vicinity is fertile and populous, and connected 
 with the capital by fine roads, while the Middlesex canal opens 
 a water communication with the interior of New-Hampshire. 
 
 Charlestoum is directly north of Boston, and connected 
 with it by Charles river bridge. An United States' navy yard 
 is in this town. Among ihe {Public buildings are the Mass^t- 
 
MASSACHUSETTS. 56 
 
 chusetts' State prison, a marine hospital, and a hospital for the 
 insane. The memorable battle of Bunker hill was fought in 
 this town, June 17th, 1775. In 1820, Charlestown contamed 
 6,591 inhabitants. 
 
 Salem^ the second town in New-England in wealth, and 
 population, is 13 miles north-east of Boston. In amount of 
 shipping, Salem is the sixth town in the United States. Her 
 merchants are very extensively engaged in the East-India trade. 
 The population in 1820, was 12,731. 
 
 Beverly is the next town to Salem on the north. It is 
 largely concerned in the fisheries. Population, in 1820, 4,283, 
 
 Ma>rblehead is on a peninsula, 4 miles southeast of Salem. 
 The inhabitants arc employed almost exclusively in the fishe- 
 ries. Population, in 1820, 5,630. 
 
 Newbm^ort is a beautiful town, 33 miles northeast of 
 Boston, situated on. the south bank of Merrimack river, 3 miles 
 from its mouth. The harbour is safe, large, and deep, but dif- 
 licult.to enter. Population, in 1820, 6,852. 
 
 JVew Bedford is 52 miles south of Boston. It is on a branch 
 of Buzzard's bay, and has a safe and convenient harbour. In 
 2820, there were 3,947 inhabitants. They are largely con- 
 cerned in the whale fishery. 
 
 Plymouth^ 36 miles southeast of Boston, is the oldest town 
 in New England, having been planted in 1620^ by the first com- 
 pany of Puritan exiles which came over to America. Lynn is 
 between Salem and Boston. It is celebrated for the manufac- 
 ture of shoes. Worcester is 37 miles west of Boston, and con- 
 nected with it by a fine turnpike road. The principal towns 
 on Connecticut river are JVbrthamjJton and S^ningfield. 
 
 Islands. A'^antucketisls.ndis 15 miles long. The inhabitants 
 are, principally, robust, enterprising seamen, extensively engaged 
 in the whale fishery, and have the reputation of being the most 
 skilful and adventurous seamen in the world. The people of 
 Nantucket are principally Friends, or Quakers, and hold their 
 lands in common. All their cows, amounting to about 500, 
 feed together in one herd ; all their sheep, 14,000, in onepas^ 
 ture. Population of the island in 1820, 7,266. 
 
 To the southeast of this island are the Nfintucket shoals, 
 where many vessels have been shipwrecked. They extend 
 about 60 miles in length and 45 in breadth. 
 
 Marthas Vineyard^ west of Nantucket, is about 20 miles 
 i'on^. The western point of the island is called Qoyhcad. 
 
SQ 3VIASSACHUSETTS. 
 
 Elizabeth islands lie in a row, of about 18 miles in length., 
 northwest of Martha's Vineyard, and southeast of Buzzard's 
 "bay. 
 
 Roads and Canals. The roads in this state are remarkably 
 fine. Excellent turnpikes proceed from Boston in every direc- 
 tion ; the principal are those to Providence, Worcester, New- 
 buryport, and Salem. 
 
 There are canals around the falls in Connecticut river at 
 South Hadley. Middlesex Canal is wholly in the county of 
 Middlesex. It is 30 miles long, and connects Boston harbour 
 with Merrimack river. A canal to connect Barnstable bay 
 with Buzzard's bay has been a long time in contemplation. 
 
 Minerals. Iron ore is found in large quantities in Bristol 
 and Plymouth counties. Quarries of marble have been opened 
 in Stockbridge, and in other towns of Berkshire county. 
 
 Population. Massachusetts contained in 1820, 523,287 
 inhabitants. It has on an average 72 persons to every square 
 mile, and is the most thickly settled state in the Union. The 
 population does not increase very rapidly, owing to emigration 
 to other states. 
 
 Religion. The Congregationalists are far more numerous 
 than any other religious denomination. Next to them are the 
 Baptists. 
 
 Education. Harvard College, or, as it is now called, the 
 Zfniversity at Cambridge, is the most ancient, wealthy, and 
 respectable hterary institution in America. It was founded in 
 1638, in less than 20 years after the. first settlement of New 
 England. A Law School, a Medical School, and a Theolo- 
 gical Seminary form a part of the institution. There are, in all 
 departments, 20 professors. The philosophical and chemical 
 apparatus are complete. The library is the largest in Ame- 
 rica, containing 25,000 volumes, and is annually increasing. 
 The number of students is about 300. The colleges are 3 
 miles northwest of Boston. 
 
 Williams College in Williamstown, in the northwest cornej? 
 of the state, was established in 1793, and is a respectable 
 institution. A college was established at Jimhersf, near Nortli- 
 ampton, in 1821*, was incorporated in 1824, and has now up- 
 wards of 100 students. 
 
 The Theological Seminary at Anddier, 20 miles north of 
 Boston, was founded in 1808. It has 4 professors, and more 
 tlian 100 !5tudients. It js very richly entlQ^ed, entirely by f>ri^ 
 
KHODE-ISLAND. 57 
 
 vate bounty. Within the first ten years after its estabhshment, 
 it received more than 300,000 dollars in donations, fi-om seven 
 individuals, besides considerable sums from others. 
 
 Phillips Academy^ also in Andover, is the most flourishing 
 academy in the state. Its funds amount to more than 50,000 
 dollars. This Academy and the Theological Seminary are 
 under the same board of Trustees. 
 
 The other academies and high scl^iools are too numerous to 
 be mentioned. In no state in the union is the standard of edu- 
 cation so elevated as in Massachusetts. 
 
 History. This state is one of the oldest in the Union. The 
 first settlement was made at Plymouth in 1620. The original 
 settlers were Puritans, who were persecuted in England on 
 account of their religion, and fled to this country, then a wil- 
 derness, as an asylum. For many years they endured severe 
 trials from sickness, famine, and wars with the Indians. 
 
 While a colony, Massachusetts was always forward in 
 resisting the oppression of the mother country ; and in the 
 revolutionary war, which commenced in 1775, and issued in 
 the independence of the United States, she took a highly dis- 
 tinguished part. The first battles of that war were fought in 
 this state, at Lexington and Charlestown. 
 
 Fisheries. The inhabitants of many towns on the seacoast, 
 are employed in the cod fishery, and whale fishery. A very 
 numerous class of the population derive their subsistence en- 
 tirely from these employments. 
 
 Manufactures. Manufacturing establishments are numerous. 
 The principal manufactures are cotton goods, shoes, ardent 
 spirits, hats, glass ware, furniture, &c. 
 
 Commerce. A large portion of the inhabitants live upon the 
 seacoast, and depend for their support entirely on commerce 
 and the fisheries. They own about one quarter of the shipping 
 of the United States. 
 
 The produce of the western part of the state is carried prin- 
 cipally to the New- York market. A large portion of the pro- 
 duce of Vermont and New-Hampshire, on the other hand, is 
 brought to Boston. The exports are fish, pot and pearl ashes^ 
 beef, pork, &c. 
 
 RHODE-ISLAND. 
 
 Situation. Rhode-Island is bounded north and east by 
 Massachusetts ; south by the Atlantic ; and west by Connec* 
 ticut. It iB the smallest state in the Union. 
 
58 BHODE-ISLANB. 
 
 Divisioiis. The state is divided into 5 counties ; viz. Pro^ 
 vidence, Newport, Washington, Kent, and Bristol. 
 
 Bay9, JVarraganset bay divides this, state into two partS;» 
 It sets up between point Judith on the west, and point Seaco- 
 net on the east. It is about 35 miles long, and 1 5 broad^ and 
 Embraces several considerable islands. The northeast extrc 
 mity of Narraganset bay is called Mount-Hope bay ; the north- 
 west extremity is called Greenwich bay ; and the northern ex- 
 tremity, Providence bay. 
 
 Rivers. Pautucket river rises in Massachusetts, where it is 
 called the Blackstone, and after entering Rhode-Island it di^^ 
 charges itself into Providence river one mile below the town of 
 Providence. Pautuxei river empties itself about 5 miles below 
 the town. They are both small rivers, and abound with falls,, 
 which furnish fine situations for mill-seats and manufacturing 
 establishments. There are about 40 cotton factories on the 
 PautuXet. 
 
 Face of the country, ^c. The northern part of the state is 
 iiilly, the rest is chiefly level. About one tenth part of the state 
 is covered by the waters of Narraganset bay. A large portioa 
 of the soil is lean and barren. 
 
 Islands. The principal inlands are Rhode-Island^ from which 
 the state takes its name, Canonnicut and Prudence islands, all 
 of which are in Narraganset bay : and Block island, which lies 
 in the ocean, about seven miles from the shore. 
 
 Population. The population, in 1820, was 83,059. The 
 state is very thickly settled, and many hundreds emigrate every 
 year to other states. 
 
 Chief Towns. Providence is in the northeast pari of the 
 state, on Providence river, about a mile above the mouth of 
 the Pautucket. Ships of almost any size can come up to the 
 town. It has an extensive commerce, principally with the East 
 Indies, and the Southern States. In 1820, Providence was the 
 third town in New-England in point of population, containing 
 11,767 inhabitants. Within a few years, the commerce and 
 population have increased very rapidly, owing to the establisii- 
 ment of a great number of cotton manufactories in the neigh- 
 bourhood. Among the pubhc buildings are three very elegant 
 churches. 
 
 Newport is about 30 miles south of Providence, near the 
 southern extremity of the island of Rhode-Island. Its harbour 
 is one of the finest in the world ; bting safe and easy of -access; 
 
COiSNECTICUTV 5^ 
 
 sufficiently capacious to contain whole fleets, and deep enough 
 for vessels of the largest size. It is defended by three forts. 
 The fisheries in the neighbourhood are very valuable. There 
 is probably no market in the vrorld that affords a greater variety 
 Of fine fish. Population, in 1820, 7,319. 
 ' Bristol is ti wealthy commercial town, on the east shore of 
 iVarraganset bay, about half way between Providence and New- 
 port. Population, in 1820, 3,197. 
 
 Pautuckei village, in the town of North Providence, is built 
 around the falls of Pautucket river, about 4 miles northeast of 
 Providence. It is one of the most flourishing manufacturing 
 villages in the United States. 
 
 Indians. In Charlestown are the remains of the once 
 famous Narraganset tribe of Indians. They are now reduced 
 to about 100 souls, and are a miserable, degiaded race of 
 beings. 
 
 Religion' The Baptists are much the most numerous deno- 
 mination. Religion is not supported by law in Rhode-Island. 
 The clergy are maintained by the voluntary contributions of 
 their people. 
 
 Education. Brown University in Providence is a very 
 respectable institution. It has eight professors, and the library 
 contains about 6,000 volumes. The charter of this institution 
 requires that the President, and a majority of the Trustees 
 should be Baptists. 
 
 Manufactures. In no state in the Union, is so large a por- 
 tion of the population and capital employed in manufactures, 
 as in Rhode-Island. The principal article is cotton goods, 
 which are manufactured in large quantities in Providence, and 
 the vicinity. Linen goods, hats, &c. are also manufactured 
 extensively, and exported. 
 
 CONNECTICUT. 
 
 Situation. Connecticut is bounded N. by Massachusetts ; 
 E. by Rhode-Island ; S. by Long-Island Sound ; and W. by 
 INiew-York. It is very regular m its shape ; the boundaries on 
 the west, north, and east, being almost straight lines. 
 
 Divisiom. Connecticut is divided into 8 counties, viz. 
 New London, Middlesex, New-Haven, and Fairfield, on th& 
 coast ; and Litchfield, Hartford, Tolland and Windham, iv> the 
 ipten&r, 
 
 Wri*7ii}^i% Tire c'<5as>. is eveey wli^^ M^nitd. .with Inf- 
 
60 CONNECTICUT. 
 
 bours, many of which are safe and commodious. The prin- 
 cipal are those of New-London, New-Haven, and Bridgeport. 
 
 Face of the country. Connecticut is a hilly country. The 
 hills are generally of a moderate size, and occur in quick suc- 
 cession, presenting a beautiful and constantly varying prospect 
 to the traveller. 
 
 Soil and Productions. The great body of the state is excel- 
 lent land. The county of Fairfield, and the interval land on 
 Connecticut river, especially, are of a very superior quality. 
 Indian corn, rye, grass and potatoes, are among the most im-» 
 portant productions. Connecticut is also famous for pump- 
 kins and onions. 
 
 Rivers. Connecticut river comes from Massachusetts, and 
 running first south and then southeast, discharges itself into 
 Long-Island Sound. It is navigable to Hartford, fifty miles 
 from its mouth. 
 
 The Housatonic rises in the western part of Massachusetts, 
 and after passing by Stockbridge and Sheffield, enters Connec- 
 ticut, and running southeast, enters Long-Island Sound, at 
 Stratford, a few miles west of New-Haven. 
 
 The Thames is in the eastern part of the state. It enters 
 Long-Island Sound at New-London, and is navigable 14 miles, 
 to Norwich. 
 
 Chief Towns. There are five incorporated cities, Hartford, 
 New-Haven, New-London, Norwich, and Middletown. Hart- 
 ford and New-Haven are the capitals. 
 
 Hartford stands on the west bank of Connecticut river, 
 50 miles from its mouth, at the head of navigation. It is in 
 the midst of a very pleasant and fertile country. Among the 
 public buildings are a handsome state house, an asylum for 
 the deaf and dumb, and an asylum for the insane. The popu- 
 lation in 1820, was 6,901. 
 
 New-Haven is on a bay which sets up from Long-Island 
 Sound. The harbour is well defended from the winds, but is 
 extremely shallow, and is gradually fiUing up with mud. The 
 city is built on a plain, which is surrounded on three sides by 
 high hills and mountains. Among the public buildings are the 
 colleges, and three elegant churches, one for the Episcopalians, 
 and two for Congregationalists. There is a burying-ground 
 on a new plan in the no^th part of the town : it is regularly 
 laid out, and planted with trees. The population of the town 
 in 1820, was 8,327. 
 
CONNECTICUT. el 
 
 NetD-London is near the south-east corner of the state, on 
 the Thames, about 3 miles from its mouth. Its harbour is the 
 best in Connecticut. Population, in 1820, 3,330. 
 
 JSorudch is 14 miles north of New-London, on the Thames, 
 at the head of navigation. Middletown is pleasantly situated 
 on the west bank of the Cowiecticut, 15 miles south of Hart- 
 ford. The country around Middletown is uncommonly 
 beautiful. 
 
 Weathersfield is on the Connecticut, between Hartford and 
 Middletown. Litchfield is about 30 miles west of Hartford. 
 Saybrook^ one of the oldest towns in the country, stands at the 
 mouth of Connecticut river. 
 
 Education. Yale College^ in New-Haven, is one of the 
 oldest and most respectable colleges in the United States, tt 
 was founded in 1701, and the Ubrary contains about 8,000 
 volumes. The chemical and philosophical apparatus are very 
 handsome and complete. In 1811, the two noblest collections 
 of minerals ever opened in the United States, were deposited 
 here. There are 10 professors, including 4 professors in the 
 medical institution, which is connected with the college. The 
 number of students, including medical and theological students, 
 is nearly 500. 
 
 Washington College was estabhshed at Hartford in 1824. 
 The American literary, scientific^ and fnilitary academy, which 
 was established by Capt. Partridge, at Norwich, in Vermont, 
 in 1820, was removed to Middletown in this state in 1824. 
 
 Bacon Academy, in Colchester, has a large fund and many 
 students. The Episcopal Academy, at Cheshire, is a flourish- 
 ing institution. There are also academies at Plainfield, Litch- 
 field, and almost all the principal towns in the state. There 
 has been for many years a respectable law school at Litchfield, 
 
 In 1816, an asylum for the deaf and dumb was established in 
 Hartford. It is a very interesting and useful institution. 
 
 Common schools are very liberally supported in Connecticut. 
 The state has a fund of more than 1,700,000 dollars, the income 
 of which is, by law, forever applied to the support of common 
 schools. 
 
 Religion. In 1822, the Congregationalists had 212 con- 
 gregations ; Episcopalians, 74 ; Baptists, 60 ; Methodists, 53. 
 There were very few of any other denomination. 
 
 Population. The population, in 1820, was 275,258. The 
 population does not increase rapidly, owing to the emigratiois 
 
 F 
 
CONNECTICUT. 
 
 of so many of the inhabitants to the western country. There 
 is no state in the Union whidi is so thickly settled as Connecti- 
 cut, except Massachusetts. 
 
 Bridges and Roads* There is a very handsome bridge over 
 Connecticut river, at Hartford. The bridges on this river are 
 frequently carried away by freshets, in the spring of the year. 
 
 There are many turnpike roads in this little state. The most 
 expensive is that from Hartford to New-Haven. 
 
 Canal. A canal, called the Farmington Canal^ commences 
 at New-Haven, and passes through Farmington to the north 
 line of the state. Thence it is to be continued to the Connecti- 
 cut river, which it will meet at Northampton, in Massachusetts. 
 The whole work will probably be finished in 1828. 
 
 Mineral Waters. The medicinal springs at Stafford, 24 
 miles north-east of Hartford, are more celebrated than any 
 others in New-England. These waters are an effectual and 
 speedy cure for salt-rheum, and other cutaneous affections, and 
 are much resorted to in* the summer season. 
 
 Natural Curiosities. Between Canaan and Salisbury, near 
 the north-west corner of the state, the Housatonic is precipi- 
 tated perpendicularly over a ledge of rocks, about 60 feet in 
 height, forming the finest cataract in New-England. 
 
 Manufactures. The manufacture of tin into culinary ves- 
 sels is carried on to a very great extent. The ware, thus made, 
 is taken by pedlaJ-s, and sold in all parts of the United States, 
 and Canada. Berlin, near Hartford, is the principal seat of 
 the tin manufacture. 
 
 Near New-Haven, there is an extensive gun factory, where 
 large quantities of fire arms are made. — Nails, glass, hats, but- 
 tons, wooden clocks, and many other articles are also among 
 the manufactures. Connecticut has a larger portion of its 
 population engaged in manufactures than any other state except 
 Rhode-Island. 
 
 Commerce. The exports consist of butter and cheese, cider, 
 Indian corn, beef, pork, &c. Much of the produce of the 
 western parts of Connecticut is carried to New- York, and of 
 the eastern parts to Boston and Providence. 
 
NEW-YORK. 63 
 
 MIDDIiE STATES. 
 
 Situation, This division includes the five states which lie 
 between the Hudson and the Potomac, viz. New- York, New- 
 Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, and Maryland. 
 
 Productions. The principal production is wheat. Indian 
 corn, rye, barley, and oats are also extensively cultivated ; and, 
 in Maryland, tobacco. 
 
 Climate. The chmate is healthful. The winters are not so 
 severe as in New-England, and the east winds in the spring are 
 not so piercing and disagreeable. The weather, hawever, is 
 more liable to frequent and sudden changes. 
 
 NEW-YORK. 
 
 Situation. New- York extends fi-om the Atlantic ocean to 
 the great lakes. It is bounded on the N. by Lower Canada ; 
 on the E. by Vermont, Massachusetts, and Connecticut, from 
 the former of which it is separated by lake Champlain ; on 
 the S. by New- Jersey, and Pennsylvania ; and on the' W. and 
 N. W. by Upper Canada, fi-om which it is separated by lake 
 Erie, lake Ontario, and the river St. Lawrence. 
 
 Divisions. The state is divided into 56 counties, viz. Suf- 
 folk, Queen's, and King's, an Long-Island; Richniond, on 
 Sfaten Island; New- York, Westchester, Putnam, Duchess, 
 Columbia, Rensselaer, Washington, Warren, Saratoga, Albany, 
 Greene, Ulster, Orange, and Rockland, on the Hudson ; Essex, 
 and Clinton, on lake Champlain ; Franklin, on the Canada 
 line; the St. Lawrence, on the St. Lawrence river; Jeflferson, 
 Oswego, Cayuga, Wayne, Monroe, Orleans, and Niagara, on 
 lake Ontario ; Erie and Chatauque, on lake Erie ; Cattarau- 
 gus, Alleghany, Steuben, Tioga, and Broome, on the Pennsyl- 
 vania line; Delaware and Sullivan, on tlw Delaware river; 
 Genesee, Livingston, Ontario, Yates, Seneca, Tompkins, Cort- 
 landt, Onondaga, Madison, and Chenango, in tlie interior of 
 the Western District ; Oneida, Herkimer, Montgomery, and 
 Schenectady, on the Mohawk ; Otsego, and Schoharie, in the 
 interior, south of the Mohawk ; and Hamilton and Lewis, in 
 the interior.) north of the Mohaxvk, 
 
04 NEW-YORK. 
 
 Chief Towns. There are five incorporated cities in this 
 state ; New-York, Albany, Hudson, Troy, and Schenectady. 
 
 Albany is the seat of government, and, in population, 
 wealth, and commerce, is the Second city in the state. It is 
 on the W. bank of the Hudson, 150 miles north of New -York. 
 It was founded by the Dutch in 1623. A large portion of the 
 inhabitants are of Dutch origin. Albany is finely situated 
 for commerce. It is near the head of sloop navigation on the* 
 Hudson, and is connected by canals with lake Champlain and 
 lake Erie. The city is supplied with excellent water from a 
 spring 5 miles distant, by an aqueduct, which conveys it to 
 every house. Among the public buildings are a stone state 
 house, an arsenal, and 1 1 houses for public worship. Popu- 
 lation in 1820, 12,630. 
 
 New- York, the first commercial city in America, is on the 
 S. end of Manhattan Island, on a large bay, or harbour, formed 
 by the union of Hudson river with the strait of Long Island 
 Sound, called East river. It is admirably situated for com- 
 merce, on an excellent harbour, at the mouth of a noble river, 
 with an extensive, fertile, and populous back country. It im- 
 ports most of the foreign goods consumed in the state of New- 
 York, the northern half of New-Jersey, the western parts of 
 New-England, and a considerable portion of the southern At- 
 lantic states ; and exports the produce of the same districts. 
 This city owns more than twice as much shipping as any other 
 in the Union, and more than half as much as the city of Lon- 
 don. 
 
 The growth of the city has been remarkably rapid. In 
 1790, the population was 33,131 ; in 1800,60,439 ; in 1810, 
 93,914; in 1820,123.706; and in 1825, 168,932. The 
 inhabitants are from many different nations. More than one 
 third are of New-England origin. After these, the most nu- 
 merous are the Dutch and Scotch, and then the English, Irish, 
 and French. 
 
 Among the public buildings are the state prison, the hospi- 
 tal, more than 100 houses for public worship ; the city hall, a 
 magnificent building of white marble, which cost half a million 
 of dollars ; and the merchants' exchange, a spacious and hand- 
 some building, completed in 1827. The principal street is 
 Broadway, which runs nearly in a straight line through the centre 
 of the city, a distance of three miles. The houses in this street 
 are well built, and in gome parts are ver^ splendid. 
 
NEW-YORK. 65 
 
 Rochester^ on the Genesee river, 7 miles from its mouth, at 
 the falls, and at the point where the river is crossed by the 
 Erie and Hudson canal, has grown up with astonishing rapidity. 
 In 1815 it had but 331 inhabitants; in 1820, 1602; and in 
 1826, 7669! It has seven churches, and four newspapers, 
 one of which is issued daily. 
 
 Hudson stands at the head of ship navigation, 'On the E, 
 bank of Hudson river, 120 miles N. of New- York, and 30 S. 
 of Albany. Population in 1820, 6,310. Catskill Rnd Athens 
 are in the vicinity of Hudson, on the opposite side of the river. 
 
 Troy^ Lansinghurg^ and Waterford^ are flourishing towns 
 on the Hudson, near the mouth of the Mohawk. Pough- 
 keepsie is on the E. bank of the river, halfway between New- 
 York and Albany ; and Newburg is on the W. bank, a few 
 miles below Poughkeepsie. 
 
 Plattsburg is on lake Champlain ; Ogdensburg on the St. 
 Lawrence ; SackeVs Harbour on lake Ontario ; and Buffalo 
 on lake Erie. Cherry Valley^ Cazenovia, Auburn^ Geneva^ 
 and Canandaigua are on the great western turnpike, which 
 leads from Albany to Buffalo. 
 
 Schenectady is on the Mohawk, 16 miles N. W. of Albany ; 
 Utica and Rome are on the same river, in Oneida county. 
 
 Brooklyn is on Long Island, opposite the city of New- York. 
 Sagg Harbour is on the east side of the same island. 
 
 Education. The state possesses a fund of more than 
 § 1 ,300,000, the income of which is appropriated to the sup- 
 port of common schools. The legislature has also been very 
 liberal in its patronage of colleges. 
 
 Columbia College., in the city of New- York, has a president, 
 5 professors, about 140 students, a library of 3,000 or 4,000 
 volumes, and a valuable philosophical apparatus. 
 
 Union College is in Schenectady. It is handsomely endowed, 
 has a president and 4 professors, a library of more than 5,000 
 "volumes, and a complete chemical and philosophical apparatus. 
 
 Hamilton College is near the village of Clinton, in the town 
 of Paris, 10 miles west of Utica. It was established in 1812, 
 and has been Hberally patronized by the legislature, and by 
 individuals. There are 4 professors. 
 
 The Presbyterians have a Theological Seminary at Auburn^ 
 
 with 4 professors and more than 60 students. The Baptists 
 
 have a Theological Seminary at Hamilton^ 30 miles S. S. W. 
 
 Of Utica, which has also about 60 students. The General 
 
 ' F 2 
 
m NEW-YORK. 
 
 Theological Seminary of the Episcopal Church is in the city 
 of New-York, and is handsomely endowed. 
 
 Population. The population of New- York has increased 
 with astonishing rapidity during the last 70 years. In 1756, 
 it was 110,000 ; in 1790, 340,000 ; in 1820, 1,372,812, and 
 in 1826, 1,616,458. The Dutch were the original settlers of 
 the state, and their descendants constitute still a respectable 
 portion of the population ; but probably two-thirds of the 
 present inhabitants are emigrants from New-England, or their 
 immediate descendants. 
 
 Religion. The denominations are General Assembly Pres- 
 byterians, Associate Reformed Presbyterians., Reformed Dutch 
 Presbyterians, Episcopahans, Baptists, Methodists, Friends, 
 Lutherans, &c. Rehgion is not supported by law ; the 
 ministers are maintained by the voluntary contributions of the 
 people. 
 
 Language. The English language is spoken by the people 
 generally throughout the state, but the- Dutch continues to be 
 used in some places, particularly in the neighbourhood of Al- 
 bany, Poughkeepsie, and New- York. 
 
 Indians. There are about 6,000 Indians, in this state. 
 They are the remains of the Iroquois, or Six Nations, a pow- 
 erful confederacy of Indians, who formerly occupied a great 
 part of the state. The principal tribes were the Mohawks, the 
 Senecas, and the Oneidas. The Mohawks now live in Upper 
 Canada, the Senecas on the rivers in the western part of this 
 state, and the Oneidas a little west of Utica, in Oneida county. 
 
 Roads. The turnpike roads are too numerous to be men- 
 tioned. The most important is the great western turnpike, 
 leading from Albany to Buffalo on lake Erie, a distance of 
 nearly 400 miles. 
 
 Canals. The Erie and Hudson canal, the greatest work of 
 the kind executed in modern times, extends from Albany on 
 the Hudson to Buffalo on lake Erie, a distance, by the canal, 
 of 350 miles. It is 40 feet wide, on the surface, and 4 feet 
 deep. It was commenced in 1817, and finished in 1826, at 
 an expense of about §8,000,000. 
 
 The Champlain and Hudson canal extends from Whitehall, 
 at the southern extremity of lake Champlain, to Fort Edward 
 on the Hudson. It is 22 miles long, 40 feet wide and 4 feet 
 deep. 
 
 The Delaware and Hudson canal commences on the Hudson 
 
NEW-YOHK. GJ 
 
 river just below Kingston, and proceeds in a southwesterly di- 
 rection to the Delaware. Through this canal coal will be 
 brought to New- York from the mines in Pennsylvania. 
 
 Manufdctures. At Salina, in Onondaga county, about 30 
 miles W. of Utica, are the celebrated salt springs and salt 
 works. These works produce about 800,000 bushels of salt 
 annually, and the manufacture may be extended to any desired 
 quantity. The Erie and Hudson canal passes directly by 
 these works. In 1810, New- York was the second state in the 
 Union in the value of its manufactures. 
 
 Lakes. Lake Ontario^ lake Erie<^ and lake Champlain are 
 partly in this state. Lake George lies south of lake Cham- 
 plain, and is connected with it by a short stream which pro- 
 ceeds from its northern extremity. It is 37 miles long, and 
 from I to 7 broad. On each side it is skirted by lofty moun- 
 tains. Its water is so transparent that the bottom is visible at 
 almost any depth. It embosoms more than 200 beautiful 
 islands. 
 
 Oneida lake Hes about 20 miles from the S. E. extremity of 
 lake Ontario, into which it discharges its waters through Oswego 
 river. Onondaga, Skeneateles, Owasco, Cayuga, Seneca, 
 Crooked, and Canandaigua lakes are in the Western District, 
 south of lake Ontario, into which their waters are discharged 
 through Seneca and Oswego rivers. 
 
 Rivers. Delaware river forms part of the boundary between 
 this state and Pennsylvania. Niagara river connects lake 
 Erie with lake Ontario, and forms part of the western boun- 
 dary. The St. Latirence separates New- York from Upper 
 Canada. 
 
 The Hudson is the great river of this state. It rises in the 
 jiorthern part of the state, in the mountains which form the 
 height of land between lake Champlain and the river St. Law- 
 cence, and running in a southerly direction, discharges itself 
 into the Atlantic, below New- York city. It is navigable for 
 the largest ships to Hudson, and for sloops to Albany. There 
 are many flourishing towns upon its banks. This river is now 
 connected by navigable canals with lake Erie and lake Cham- 
 plain. 
 
 The Mohawk is the principal branch of the Hudson. It 
 rises a httle to the northeast of Oneida lake, and flowing south 
 of east, discharges itself into the Hudson about nine miles 
 north of Albany. By means of a short canal between this 
 
68 NEW-YORK. 
 
 river and Wood creek, which runs into Oneida lake, a boat 
 navigation has been opened into lake Ontario. 
 
 The rivers running into lake Ontario are Gemsee^ Oswego^ 
 and Black rivers. Genesee river rises in Pennsylvania, and 
 flows in a northerly direction across the western part of the 
 state till it joins the lake. There are four great falls in this 
 river, two of them within five or six miles of its mouth, and 
 the other two about 70 miles further up. Oswego river is the 
 outlet of Oneida lake. It enters lake Ontario at Fort Oswego. 
 Seneca river, the outlet of Canandaigua, Seneca, Cayuga, and 
 several other lakes in the Western District, unites with Oswego 
 river at Three-river point. Black river rises near the sources 
 of the Mohawk, and enters lake Ontario, near Sacked s Har- 
 bour. 
 
 The rivers running into the St. Lawrence are, the OswC' 
 gatchie^ which joins it at Ogdensburg, and Grass^ Racket, and 
 St. Regis rivers, all of which discharge themselves near the 
 town of Sti Regis, on the northern boundary of the state. 
 
 The principal river which runs into lake Champlain is the 
 Saranac, which discharges itself at Plattsburg. 
 
 The rivers which rise in this state and run into Pennsylvania 
 are, the Delaware, the Susquehannah, and its branches, and 
 the Alleghany. The Tioga and Chenango are branches of the 
 Susquehannah. 
 
 Bay. New- York harbour is a bay, which extends 9 miles 
 south of the city, and is from 1 to 6 miles broad. The Hud- 
 son flows into it from the N. and East river from the N. E. 
 It has Long Island on the East, Staten Island on the South, 
 and New-Jersey on the West. It communicates with Long 
 Island Sound by East river, and with the Atlantic by a passage 
 called the Narrows. 
 
 Mountains, The Catskill mountains, in Green county, west 
 of the 'Hudson, are the principal range. The highest peak is 
 Round Top, which is 3,804 feet above the level of the sea. 
 
 Minerals. Iron ore is found in many places in abundance. 
 Plaster of Paris, slate, marble and lead, have been met with in 
 various parts of the state. Salt springs abound in the Western 
 District. 
 
 Mineral Waters. The Saratoga and Ballston springs are 
 the most celebrated in America. Saratoga is 30 miles N. of 
 Albany, and a few miles west of the Hudson j Ballston is a 
 
NEW-YOHK. 09 
 
 few miles S. W. of Saratoga. These Springs, during the sum- 
 mer months, are the resort of the gay and fashionable, as well 
 as of invahds, from all parts of the United States. Large 
 houses of entertainment, with neat bathing houses, are erected 
 for the convenience of visiters. The waters afford relief in 
 many obstinate diseases. 
 
 New Lebanon springs, 29 miles S. E. of Albany, are visited 
 for bathing. 
 
 Face of the Country. The face of the country between 
 the Hudson and the Chenango is mountainous. In the north- 
 ern part of the state it is hilly, and between lake Champlain 
 and the St. Lawrence it rises in some places into mountains. 
 In the west, the country is level. 
 
 Soil and Productions. The soil of this state generally, is 
 good, and a large proportion very fertile. The country between 
 the Susquehannah and the Genesee, particularly on the rivers 
 Chenango and Genesee, and between Seneca and Cayuga lakes, 
 is excellent. The lands on the Mohawk and on Black river are 
 very rich. The counties of Duchess and Westchester, which 
 lie between the Hudson and the state of Connecticut, are well 
 cultivated and fertile. An extensive tract lying west of Mas- 
 sachusetts has a poor soil. 
 
 Wheat is the staple production. Indian corn, oa1;s, flax, 
 peas, &:-c. are extensively cultivated. Rye is chiefly raised for 
 the distilleries, and barley for the breweries. Apples are 
 raised in abundance. 
 
 Natural Curiosities. The falls of Niagara are perhaps the 
 most wonderful natural curiosity in the world. They are in 
 Niagara river, about halfway between lake Erie and lake On- 
 tario. This immense river here rushes over a precipice, and 
 falls perpendicularly to the depth of l^Sfeet. The tremendous 
 roar of the waters can sometimes be heard at the distance 
 of 40 miles; and the vapour, which continually rises in clouds 
 from below, can be seen at the distance of 70 miles. 
 
 In the Mohawk river, about two miles from its mouth, are 
 the falls called the Cahoes. The river here descends in one 
 sheet, nearly 70 feet. At a httle distance below, a bridge is 
 thrown across the river, from which there is a fine view of this 
 sublime and beautiful cataract. 
 
 Commerce. New-York is the first commercial state in the 
 Union. Its exports are more than those of any other state*, 
 
NEW-JERSEY. 
 
 In the amount of shipping it is surpassed only by Massachu- 
 setts. 
 
 The principal exports are wheat, pot and pearl ashes, Indian 
 corn, rye, beef, pork, lumber, &c. The produce of the western 
 parts of New-England, of nearly the whole of New-York, and 
 of the eastern parts of New- Jersey, is exported from this state ; 
 and the canal from lake Erie to the Hudson being now com- 
 pleted, the commerce of a great part of Ohio, Upper Canada, 
 and the country bordering on the great lakes, will probably 
 centre in the city of New- York. 
 
 Islands. Long Island is separated from Connecticut by 
 the Sound ; from Manhattan island by the East river ; and 
 from Staten island by the Narrows. The Atlantic ocean 
 washes it on the south. The island is long and narrow like 
 a fish, and the eastern end opens hke a shark's mouth. The 
 most eastern point is a cape, well known to mariners, called 
 Montauk point. 
 
 Indian Corn is raised on the south side of the island ; the 
 eastern part furnishes wood for the city of New- York. The 
 island is divided into 3 counties, Suffolk, Queens, and Kings. 
 
 Staten island forms the county of Richmond. It is sepa- 
 rated from Long Island by the Narrows, and from the Jersey 
 shore by a narrow strait, called Staten island Sound. New- 
 York bay is on the northeast, and Amboy bay on the south. 
 
 Manhattan island, on which the city of New- York stands, 
 is separated from New- Jersey by the Hudson, and from Long 
 Island by East river. 
 
 History, The first discovery of this state was made in 
 1609, by Henry Hudson, an Englishman in the service of the 
 Dutch. He was thq first white man who sailed upon the river 
 which bears his name. The first settlement was made by the 
 Dutch in 1614, on the island of Manhattan, The Dutch re- 
 tained possession of the country till 1664, when it was taken 
 by the English. 
 
 NEW JERSEY. 
 
 Situation. New- Jersey is bounded N. by N. York ; E. by 
 the Atlantic, and by Hudson river, which separates it from 
 New- York ; S. by Delaware bay ; and W. by Delaware river, 
 which separates it from Pennsylvania. 
 
 In shape it bears some resemblance to an hour-glass, being 
 narrow in the middle, and broad at the two ends. 
 
NEW-JERSEY. 11 
 
 Divisions. New- Jersey is divided into 14 counties, viz. 
 Sussex, Warren, Hunterdon, Burlington, and Gloucester, on 
 Delaware river ; Salem, Cumberland, and Cape May, on Dela- 
 ware bay ; Monmouth, Middlesex, Essex, and Bergen, on the 
 iastern shore oj the state ; and Morris and Somerset, in iht 
 interior' 
 
 Bays. Delaware bay, in the south, separates New-Jersey 
 from Delaware. Ainhoy bay lies directly south of Staten 
 Island. Newark bay is directly north of Staten island. 
 
 Newark bay communicates with New- York bay on the east, 
 through a narrow strait called the Kills ; and with Amboy bay 
 on the south, through a long and narrow strait, caHed Staten 
 island Sound. 
 
 Capes. Sandy Hook is a noted point of land, southeast of 
 Staten island. A hght-house is erected upon it. Cape May 
 is the southern extremity of the state, and one of the capes of 
 Delaware bay. 
 
 Rivers. Delaware river, on the west, separates New-Jersey 
 from Pennsylvania. It is navigable for the largest vessels to 
 Philadelphia, 55 miles, and for sloops to Trenton, 35 miles 
 farther. There are falls at Trenton, which obstruct the navi- 
 gation. 
 
 Hudson river, on the east, separates New-Jersey from New- 
 York. Raritan river rises in the western part of the state, and 
 flowing in an easterly direction -Empties itself into Amboy bay, 
 at the southern extremity of Staten island. It is navigable for 
 sloops to New Brunswick, 15 miles. 
 
 The Passaic is a small river in the northern part of the 
 state, which discharges itself into Newark bay. There are 
 falls in this river, in the town of Patterson, which are much 
 celebrated for their beauty and grandeur. Hackensack river 
 flows into Newark bay, a httle east of the Passaic. 
 
 Chief Towns. All the principal towns in this state are on 
 the great road between New- York and Philadelphia. 
 
 Trenton is the seat of government. It is situated near the 
 bend of Delaware river, at the fails, about 30 miles above Phi- 
 ladelphia. Steam boats ply regularly between Trenton and 
 Philadelphia. The celebrated battle of Trenton was fought at 
 this place, in December, 1776. Population, in 1820, 3,942. 
 
 New Brunswick is on the Raritan, 15 miles from its motttli. 
 Steam boats from New- York ascend the Raritan as far as 
 Shis place. About one half of the inhabitants are of Dutch 
 
';2 NgW-JERSEY. 
 
 origin. Rutgers College and the Theological Seminary of 
 the Reformed Dutch Church are in this town. Population, in 
 1820, 6,764. 
 
 Princeton is a pleasant village on the great road between 
 New- York and Philadelphia, 62 miles from the former and 42 
 from the latter. The College of New-Jersey, and the Theo- 
 logical Seminary of the Presbyterian Church are in this place. 
 
 Newark is on the Pa,ssaic, about 9 miles west of the city of 
 New- York. It is celebrated for its cider, and is the seat of ex- 
 tensive manufactures of shoes and leather. It is one of the 
 most beautiful towns in the United States. Population in 
 1820, 6,607. 
 
 Elizabethtown^ 5 miles south of Newark, is pleasantly situ- 
 ated in the midst of a fertile country. It is within two miles 
 of Newark bay. Steam boats regularly ply between this town 
 and New- York. Population, in 1820, 3,516. 
 
 Burlington is on the Delaware, between Trenton and Phi- 
 ladelphia. Perth Amboy^ on Amboy bay, at the mouth of the 
 Raritan, has one of the best harbours on the continent. 
 
 Education, The College of New Jersey^ at Princeton, is 
 one of the oldest and most respectable in the United States. 
 The library contains about 8,000 volumes. The philosophical 
 apparatus is large and well selected, and there is a valuable 
 cabinet of mineralogy and natural history. 
 
 A Theological Seminary was established at Princeton in 
 1812, under the direction of the Genferal Assembly of the 
 Presbyterian church. There are 3 professors, and, in 1 826, the 
 number of students was 105. The term of study is 3 years. 
 
 Queen^s College was established at New Brunswick, by the 
 ministers of the Dutch Reformed Church, in 1770. For some 
 time the institution languished for want of funds, and its ex- 
 ercises were at length suspended ; but in 1826 it was revived 
 under the name of Rutgers College, It has now a president 
 and 4 professors. 
 
 The 'Theological Seminary of the Reformed Dutch Church 
 is also at New Brunswick. It has two professors and about 
 20 students. The term of education is three years. 
 
 Canals. The route of the contemplated Delaware and 
 Raritan Canal commences on the river Delaware a few miles 
 below Trenton, and proceeds in a N. E. direction to New 
 Brunswick on the Raritan. It is to be 60 feet wide and 8 
 feet deep, and when completed will open the navigation for 
 sloops firom Philadelphia to New- York. 
 
liJEW-JEESEY. 
 
 The Moi'ris canal commences on the Delaware, nearly op- 
 posite to Easton in Pennsylvania, and proceeds in an easterly 
 direction through the county of Morris to Patterson on the 
 Passaic, and thence to Newark. It will open a channel through 
 which the city of New- York, and the extensive iron manufac- 
 turing establishments of New-Jersey may be supplied with 
 coal. It is not yet completed. 
 
 Population. In 1820 the population was 277,575. The 
 northern part of the state is the most populous. New-Jersey 
 is one of the old states, and many of the inhabitants emigrate 
 every year to new settlements. The population, of course^ 
 does not increase rapidly. 
 
 Religion. The largest portion of the inhabitants are Pres- 
 byterians. Besides these there are Friends, Reformed Dutch, 
 Baptists, EpiscopaHans, &-c. 
 
 Face of the country. The northern part of the state is 
 mountainous ; the southern is flat and sandy ; the middle is 
 agreeably diversified with hills and valleys. 
 
 Soil and Productions. The northern part of the state has 
 generally a strong soil, and is a fine grazing country. The 
 farmers there raise cattle, in great numbers, for the markets of 
 New-York and Philadelphia. Wheat, ryei, Indian corn, pota- 
 toes, &c. are also raised in abundance. 
 
 Orchards abound in all the northern half of the state ; and 
 the cider of New-Jersey, particularly that of Newark, is in high 
 reputation. Pears, peaches, plums, cherries, strawberries, and 
 other fruits arrive at great perfection, and are fiirnished in 
 large quantities for the New- York and Philadelphia markets. 
 
 The southern half of the state, with few exceptions, is sandy 
 and barren. It produces little else besides shrub oaks and 
 yellow pines. 
 
 Mountains. A ridge of the Alleghany mountains comes 
 from Pennsylvania and crosses this state into New- York. It 
 embosoms such amazing quantities of iron ore, that it may not 
 improperly be called the Iron mountain. 
 
 Minerals. Iron ore abounds in this state. Among the 
 mountains in the north, the mines are very numerous. In the 
 single county of Morris there are no less than 7 rich iron mines, 
 from which might be taken ore enough to supply the whole 
 United States. The southern counties also furnish large qiiaa- 
 titles of bog iron are. 
 
 G 
 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
 
 Manufactures, The principal manufacture is iron. Fur- 
 naces and forges are established in various parts of the state^ 
 particularly in the county of Morris, and a very large quantity 
 of iron is annually manufactured. 
 
 In Trenton, Newark, and Elizabethtown, are many valuable 
 tanneries, where a large quantity of excellent leather is made. 
 Shoes are made in great numbers at Newark. 
 
 Commerce. Almost all the foreign goods consumed in this 
 state are imported at New- York and Philadelphia, and the pro- 
 duce of the state is principally carried to those cities for ex-^ 
 portation. 
 
 PENNSYLVANIA* 
 
 Situation. Pennsylvania is bounded N. by New-Y'ork ; E. 
 by New- York and New-Jersey, from which it is separated by 
 Delaware river ; S. by Delaware, Maryland, and Virginia ; 
 W. by Virginia and Ohio. On the N. W. it touches upon 
 lake Erie. 
 
 It is very regular in its shape ; the northern and southern 
 boundaries being parallels of latitude, and the western boundary, 
 a line of longitude. 
 
 Divisions. Pennsylvania is divided into 51 counties, viz. 
 Delaware, Philadelphia, Bucks, Northampton, Pike and Wayne, 
 on the Delaware; Susquehannah, Bradford, Tioga, Potter, 
 McKean and Warren, on the northern boundary ; Erie, ofi 
 lake -Bne ; Crawford, Mercer, Beaver and Washington, on 
 the western boundary; Greene, Fayette, Somerset, Bedford, 
 Frankhn, Adams, York, Lancaster and Chester, on the southern 
 boundary ; Venango, Jefferson, Clearfield, Cambria, Indiana, 
 Armstrong, Butler, Alleghany and Westmoreland, in the inte- 
 rior^ west of the Alleghany mountains ; Huntington, Centre, 
 Union, Mifflin, Perry, and Cumberland, in the interior., between 
 the Susquehannah river and the Alleghany mountains ; Lyco- 
 ming, Northumberland, Columbia and Luzerne, in the interio}'^ 
 und on the branches of the Susquehannah ; Schuylkill, Lehigh, 
 Montgomery, Berks, Lebanon and Dauphin, in the interior, 
 east of the Susquehannah. 
 
 Name. The name of this state is derived from Penn, the 
 original proprietor, and sylva^ a Latin word, signifying wood, 
 or forest. 
 
 Rivers. The three principal rivers are, the Delaware, the 
 Sus^ehaTinah, and the ^^lleghany^ all of which rise in Nen'^ 
 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
 
 York, and pass through Pennsylvania on their way to the 
 south. 
 
 The Delaware is the eastern boundary, separating Pennsyl- 
 vania from New-Jersey. In its course it resembles the letter 
 W. The SchuylMU, a branch of this river, joins it near Phi- 
 ladelphia ; the Lehigh^ another branch, joins it at Easton ; 
 and the Lackawaxen creek^ a small stream, at a point still far- 
 ther north. 
 
 The Susquehannah^ the great river of Pennsylvania, comes 
 from New- York, and making a circular sweep to the east, 
 and then another to the west, passes into Maryland, It' is 
 composed of two branches, the East branch, and the West 
 branch. The East branch is the principal stream and 
 comes from New- York ; the West branch is wholly in Penn- 
 sylvania. They unite at Northumberland. The Tioga is a 
 branch of the East branch. Its course is almost wholly in 
 New- York. It unites with the East branch of the Susque- 
 hannah near the boundary line. The Juniatta is a western 
 branch of the Susquehannah, and unites with it a few miles 
 above Harrisburg. 
 
 In the western part of the state, the Alleghany river from 
 New- York, and the Monongahela from Virg*mia,meet atPit^- 
 burg, and form the Ohio. 
 
 Chief Towns. Philadelphia., the largest town in Pennsyl- 
 vania, is regularly laid out, between the Delaware and the 
 Schuylkill, 5 miles above their confluence. It is 110 miles 
 from the ocean, by the river and bay. The Delaware is navi- 
 gable as far as this city, for ships of any size. 
 
 Philadelphia has a very extensive commerce. In amount 
 of shipping, it is the fourth city in the Union. It imports fo- 
 reign goods for the greatest part of Pennsylvania, for Delaware, 
 and half of New- Jersey ; and is contending with New- York, 
 New-Orleans and Baltimore, for the commerce of the western 
 states. In the variety and extent of its manufactures, Phila- 
 delphia is the first city in America. 
 
 Among the pubhc buildings are an hospital, a state prison, 
 and 60 houses for public worship. The bridge over the 
 Schuylkill, opposite to Market-street, is superb. The water 
 used in the city is derived from the Schuylkill. It is raised 
 from the river by machinery, and conveyed in pipes wherever 
 * rs wanted. 
 
'n PENNSYLVANIA. 
 
 Peal's museum, in this city, contains the largest collection of 
 natural curiosities in America. The literary and humane soci- 
 eties are too numerous to be mentioned. Philadelphia is 90 
 miles S. W. of New- York, and 137 N. E. of Washington. Po- 
 pulation, in 1820, 108,116. 
 
 Lancaster., 60 miles west of Philadelphia, is finely situated, in 
 the midst of a fertile and highly cultivated country. The in- 
 habitants are principally of German descent. Their number, 
 in 1820, was 6,633. 
 
 Pittsburg., in the western part of the state, is very advanta- 
 geously situated, at the point where the Alleghany and Monon- 
 gahela unite to form the Ohio. By means of Alleghany river, 
 Pittsburg has a water communication with the western part of 
 New- York, and can approach within a few miles of lake Erie. 
 By the Monongahela and a good turnpike road, it is connected 
 with Baltimore. By the Ohio, it has an easy intercourse with 
 the western states. It is also connected with Philadelphia by 
 an excellent turnpike road. These circumstances have made 
 Pittsburg the centre of a great commerce. 
 
 All the country in the neighbourhood of the city abounds 
 with coal. Hence it is admirably situated for such manufac- 
 turing establishments as require the use of fuel. Many such 
 establishments have been erected here, and Pittsburg bids fair 
 to become, at some future day, one of the largest manufacturing 
 cities in the world. The distance of Pittsburg from Philadel- 
 phia is about 300 miles, and from New Orleans, by the course 
 of the rivers, 2,000. Population, in 1820, 11,629. 
 
 Harrishurg^ the seat of government, is on the east bank of 
 the Susquehannah, about 100 miles west of Philadelphia. It is 
 regularly laid out, and handsomely built. An elegant bridge is 
 erected across the Susquehannah, at this place. Population, 
 in 1820, 2,990. 
 
 Easton is on the Delaware, at the mouth of the Lehigh. 
 Reading is on the Schuylkill, 54 miles N. W. of Philadelphia. 
 It is celebrated for the manufacture of hats. Wilkesharre is 
 on the east branch of the Susquehannali. JVorthumberland is 
 at the forks of the Susquehannah. Carlisle is 15 miles W. of 
 Harrisburg. For& is about 20 miles south of Harrisburg, on 
 the Codorus creek, a western branch of the Susquehannah. 
 Meadville is about 30 miles from lake Erie, on French creek, 
 5, branch ©f the Alleghany. Bethkhm is on the Lehigh. 1^ 
 
PENNSYLVANIA. 
 
 iniles from Easton ; and JVtazareth is a few miles north of Beth- 
 lehem. Washington is 25 miles S. W. of Pittsburg. Canons- 
 hnrg is 6 miles north of Washington. 
 
 Education. The University of Pennsylvania^ established in 
 Philadelphia, embraces 4 departments, viz. law, medicine, the 
 arts,, and natural science. There are, in all departments, 17 
 professors. The medical department is the most flourishing 
 institution of the kind in the United States, and is hardly ex- 
 celled by any in Europe. It consists of 7 professorships, and 
 has had more than 500 students. 
 
 The other colleges are Dickinson college, at Carlisle ; Jef- 
 ferson college, at Cannonsburg ; Mleghany college, at Mead- 
 ville ; and Washington college, at Washington. These insti- 
 tutions are yet in their infancy. 
 
 The Moravians have flourishing schools at Bethlehem and 
 Nazareth, in the eastern part of the state. Provision has been 
 made by the legislature for establishing an academy in every 
 county. 
 
 Population. In 1820, Pennsylvania contained 1,049,458 
 inhabitants. The great mass of the population is in the south, 
 particularly in the southeast, near the banks of the Susquehan- 
 nah and Delaware rivers. The northern half of the state, in 
 1S20, did not contain one fifth part of the population. The 
 population increases with considerable rapidity, though not so 
 fast as in the western states. 
 
 The inhabitants are of several different nations. About one 
 half are of English origin ; one fourth, German ; and one 
 eighth, Irish. The remainder are Scotch, Welsh, Swedes and 
 Dutch. 
 
 Language. The language commonly spoken is the Eng- 
 lish. But the Germans, Dutch and Irish, generally retain their 
 6wn language, and many of them cannot speak English. 
 
 Religion. There are many different denominations of Chris- 
 tians in Pennsylvania. A few years since the Presbyterians, 
 German Calvinists, Gerjnan Lutherans, Friends ' or Quakers, 
 and Baptists, had each nearly 100 congregations. Besides 
 these, there were Methodists, EpiscopaUans, Scotch Presbyte- 
 rians, Moravians, &c. 
 
 Roads. There are good turnpike roads leading from Phila- 
 delphia in various directions. The principal is from Philadel- 
 phia through Lancaster to Pittsburg. 
 
 Canals. The SchiiylkUl canal opens a still water navigaticdi 
 G2 
 
FENNSYLVAMA. 
 
 between the city of Philadelphia and the flourishing borough of 
 Reading on the Schuylkill. The Union^ canal commences on 
 the Schuylkill, near Reading, and proceeds in a westerly di- 
 rection to the Susquehannah, a few miles above Harrisburg. 
 
 Climate. The cHmate of Pennsylvania is more temperate 
 than that of New-England. The winters are never so severe, 
 and the summers are generally warmer. Snow lies on the 
 ground only for a short period, and sleighs are but little used. 
 
 Mountains. The Alleghany mountains pass through the 
 centre of the state from S. W. to N. E. There are many 
 smaller ranges on each side of the Alleghany range, and par- 
 allel with it. 
 
 Face of the Country, The central parts of the state arc 
 mountainous. In the south-east and north-west, I'he country 
 is either level or moderately hilly. 
 
 Soil and productions. The land in a great portion of the 
 Btate is good ; and much of it, excellent. The richest tract is 
 in the south-east, on both sides of the Susquehannah. This 
 part of the state has been settled for a long time, and is finely 
 cultivated. The tract between lake Erie and Alleghany river 
 has also a very superior soil, but it is as yet very thinly in- 
 habited. 
 
 Wheat is by far the most important production, and arrives 
 here at great perfection. The article next in value is Indian 
 corn. Rye, barley, buck- wheat, oats, hemp, and ilax, are also - 
 extensively cultivated. 
 
 Minerals. Coal is found in abundance in the western parts 
 of the state. The country around Pittsburg is one great bed 
 of bituminous coal, and the hills within sight of the town are 
 full of that mineral. The anthracite or hard coal is found in 
 inexhaustible quantities on the banks of the Lehigh, Schuyl- 
 kill, and Lackawaxen, in the eastern part of the state. Iron 
 ore also abounds in the same vicinity, and in other parts of the 
 state. 
 
 Manufactures. In value and variety of manufactures, Penn- 
 sylvania is the first state in the Union. Among the principal 
 articles are cotton goods, iron, glass, and paper. Philadelphia 
 and Pittsburg are the seats of the principal manufactories. 
 
 Commerce. Most of the foreign goods consumed in this state, 
 Delaware, and the western part of New- Jersey, are imported at 
 Philadelphia. Goods to a large amount are also transported 
 in waggons fi-om Philadelphia to Pittsburgh, and thence dis- 
 
DELAWARE. Z'O 
 
 tributed through the western country. In amount of shipping, 
 Pennsylvania is the jfifth state in the Union. 
 
 History, This state was first settled by the Swedes, in 
 1627. They held it till 1654, when it was conquered by the 
 Dutch ; and ten years afterwards, the Dutch surrendered it to 
 the Enghsh. — In 1681 Charles II. granted it to William Penn, 
 who soon after came over from England, with a colony of 
 Friends, and laid the foundation of Philadelphia. 
 
 DELAWARE; 
 
 Situation. Delaware is bounded N. by Pennsylvania ; E. by 
 Delaware river and bay ; S. and W. by Maryland. It is the 
 smallest state in the Union, except Rhode-Island. 
 
 Divisions. It is divided into 3 counties ; viz. Newcastle in 
 the north ; Kent, in the middle ; and Sussex, in the south. 
 
 Rivals. Delaware river and bay separate this state from 
 New- Jersey. Brandytvine creek, which rises in Pennsylvania, 
 and Christiana creek which rises in Maryland, unite in the 
 northern part of the state, and run into Delaware river. They 
 afford an uncommon number of excellent seats for mills and 
 manufactories. 
 
 Swamp. Cypress swamp, between this state and Ma'ryland*^ 
 is 12 miles long and 6 broad. ' / 
 
 Cape. Cape Henlopen, one of the capes of Delaware hay, 
 is in this state. 
 
 Chief Towns. Wilmington is in the northern part of the 
 state, between Brandywine and Christiana creeks, one mile 
 above their confluence. Both streams are navigable to the 
 town. Wilmington is celebrated for the manufacture of flour. 
 There are many mills on the Brandywine, within half a mile of 
 the town. Population, about 6,000. 
 
 Newcastle is on Delaware river, 5 miles S. of Wilmington, 
 and 33 below Philadelphia. It carries on a brisk trade with 
 Philadelphia and Baltimore. 
 
 Dover ^ the seat of government, is 36 miles S. of Newcastle, 
 on Jones' creek, a small stream which runs into Delaware bay. 
 
 Lewistotcnis a few miles from XVpe Henlopen. Here are 
 salt works, in which salt is manufactured from sea-water^ h^ 
 the sun. ~ 
 
 A new city, called Delaware city., was laid out in 1826.^ at 
 the eastern extremity of the Delaware and Chesapeake canal, 
 6 miles from Newcastle. 
 
 Reunion, The Presbyterians are the most numeroiis d'eno- 
 
m IVrAK,YLAND. - 
 
 mination. There are besides, Episcopalians, Methodists, Bap- 
 tists, Friends, &c. 
 
 Population, In 1 820, Delaware contained 72,749 inhabit- 
 ants. About one quarter of this number are negroes, and 
 one quarter of the negroes are slaves. 
 
 Canal. A canal called the Chesapeake and Delaware canal^ 
 across the isthmus which separates the Chesapeake from Dela- 
 ware bay, was commenced some time since, and will probably 
 soon be completed. It is to be 14 miles long, Qij feet wide, 
 and 10 feet deep, and will admit of the passage of sloops. 
 
 Face of the country^ soil-, &c. The northern part of the 
 state is hilly ; the rest is generally level and low. The soil in 
 the north, and along the Delaware is generally a rich clay ; in 
 the middle, there is a considerable mixture of sand ; and in the 
 south, sand predominates. 
 
 Productions. Wheat is the staple production of the state- 
 It grows here to very great perfection. Indian corn, rye, oats, 
 6lc. are also cultivated. 
 
 Manvfactnres. The flour mills on Brandywine creek, near 
 Wilmington, are the finest collection in the United States. 
 Gunpowder, and cotton and woollen goods are also manufac- 
 tured to a great extent, in the same neighbourhood. There 
 are extensive salt works at Lewistown, near Cape Henlopen. 
 
 ULIRYLAND. 
 
 Situation. Maryland is bounded N. by Pennsylvania ; E , 
 by Delaware, and the Atlantic ; S. and W. by Virginia, iron: 
 which it is separated, principally, by the Potomac. 
 
 Chesapeake bay runs through the state from N. to S. dividing 
 it into two parts. The part east of the bay is called the easi- 
 tern shore, and the part west of the bay the western shore. 
 
 Divisions. Maryland is divided into 1 9 counties ; 1 1 of 
 which are on the western, and 8 on the eastern shore. 
 
 The counties on the western shore are, Harford, Baltimore, 
 Ann Arundel, Calvert, and St. Mary's, bordering on the Che- 
 sapeake; and Charles, Prince George, Montgomery, Frede- 
 yick, Washington, and Alleghany, bordenng on the Potomac. 
 
 The counties on the eastern shore, beginning in the norths 
 are Cecil, Kent, Queen Ann, Talbot, Caroline, Dorchester, 
 Somerset, and Worcester. 
 
 Bays. Chesapeake bay lies principally within the boundaries 
 of Maryland. Ther6 are many sjnall bays which are merely 
 brancTies cff Ch^^apeake bSy. Several of the principal rivers 
 
MARYLAND. SI 
 
 are very broad near their mouths, and may be regarded., for 
 some distance, as bays. 
 
 Rivers. The Potomac rises in the Allegliany mountains^, 
 and discharges itself into Chesapeake bay. During its whole 
 course, it is the boundary between Maryland and Virginia. It 
 is navigable for large vessels, .300 miles, to the city of Wash- 
 ington. Above this city, there are several falls, around which, 
 however, canals have been made, so that the river is now navi- 
 gable for boats, to Cumberland, nearly 200 miles beyond 
 Washington. 
 
 The Susquehannah comes from Pennsylvania, and runs into 
 Chesapeake bay at its head. 
 
 The rivers which enter Chesapeake bay from the western 
 shore are, the Patapsco, on which Baltimore stands ; the Severn^ 
 on which Annapolis stands ; and the Paiuxent, between the 
 Severn and the Potomac. 
 
 The rivers on the eastern shore are, Elk river, on whicli 
 Elkton and Frenchtown stand ; Chester river, on which is Ches- 
 tertown ; and the Ch&ptank, JVanticokey Vficomico, and Pocp- 
 wio&e, all of which rise in Delaware. 
 
 Chief Towns. Baltimore., the largest town in Maryland, and 
 in population the third in the United States, is built around a 
 harbour at tlie head of Patapsco bay, which sets up 18 miles 
 northwest from Chesapeake bay. The strait which connects 
 the harbour with Patapsco bay is very narrow, scarcely a pistol- 
 shot across, and is well defended by Fort M'Henry. 
 
 The growth of this city has been remarkably rapid. In 1770 
 there were only 300 inhabitants ; in 1820 there were 62,738. 
 
 Baltimore is well situated for commerce. It is connected by 
 good turnpikes with various parts of Pennsylvania, and with 
 the navigable waters which run into the Ohio. It possesses 
 the trade of Maryland, and of some parts of Pennsylvania, and 
 the western states. It is the third city in the Union in amount 
 of shipping. The number of tons in 1816 was 101,960. 
 
 Among the public buildings are a penitentiary ; a hospital ; 
 a theatre ; and a spacious exchange. The Washington monu- 
 ment is a superb structure of stone, 163 feet high ; on the 
 summit is the statue of Washington. Another monument of 
 stone has been erected, called the battle monument, t© com- 
 memorate the defeat of the British, in their attack upon this 
 city on the 13th of* September, 1814. 
 
 Annapolis, the p^at of govermnentv is on th.e Severn, 2 niil§s 
 
MARYLAND. 
 
 firom its mouth, 30 miles south of Baltimore, and 40 east of 
 Washington. Population, 2,260. 
 
 FredmicJctown is a flourishing inland town, 45 miles W. of 
 Baltimore, and 43 N. of Washington. It is situated in the 
 midst of a fertile country, and has oonsiderable trade. Popula 
 tion, in 1820, 3,640. 
 
 Magerstown, or Elisabethtown-, is near the Potomac, in a, 
 beautiful valley, 26 miles N. W. of Fredericktown. 
 
 Cumberland is on the Potomac, west of Hagerstowm, near 
 Ihe northwest corner of the state. Elkton is on Elk river, 
 near the northeast corner of the state. Snowhill^ on the Po- 
 comoke, near the southeast corner, owns a considerable amount 
 ©f shipping. 
 
 Education, The Vmvefsity of Maryland^ in the city of 
 Baltimore, is intended to embrace the departments of medicine, 
 the languages, arts, law, and divinity. The medical depart- 
 ment is already in operation, and is very respectable and 
 flourishing. 
 
 St. Mary's college, also in Baltimore, has a good library, a 
 philosophical and chemical apparatus ; and 8 professors. Bal- 
 iimore college is also a flourishing institution. 
 
 Roads and Canals. There is a good turnpike road from 
 Baltimore, through Cumberland on the Potomac, to Brown- 
 ville on the Monongahela in Pennsylvania. This is one of the 
 shortest and best communications between the tide-water of 
 the Atlantic, and the navigable western waters. 
 
 There are several canals around the falls and rapids in the 
 Potomac, which render the river navigable for boats, as higli 
 up as Cumberland. 
 
 Population. In 1820, Maryland contained 407,350 inhabi- 
 tants. More than one third of this number are negroes, and 
 more than three quarters of the negroes are slaves. The slaves 
 are most numerous in the southern half of the state. In the 
 counties bordering on Pennsylvania, there are eight white men 
 where there is one slave. 
 
 Religion. The Roman Catholics were the first settlers of 
 Maryland, and are the most numerous denomination. I'he 
 other denominations are, Episcopalians, Baptists, Presbyte- 
 rians, Friends, &c. 
 
 Face of the Country. On the eastern shore, the land is leve! 
 and low, and in many places covered with stagnant water. On 
 t^m we-s.tern ^qre, {he- land jieia'r the b^y i^ level, but a5 vcu 
 
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA. 83 
 
 proceed into the interior, it becomes uneven and hilly, and ia 
 the western part of the state is mountainous. The Alleghany 
 mountains and the Blue Ridge cross the western part of the 
 state, on their way from Virginia to Pennsylvania. 
 
 Sail and Productions. 1'he soil is generally good. Wheat 
 and tobacco are the principal productions. Some cotton is 
 raised, but it is of an inferior quality. The other productions 
 are Indian corn, hemp, and flax. Peaches, apples, and other 
 fruit are in great plent^. The forests abound with nuts, on 
 which vast numbers of swine are fed. 
 
 Manufactures. Furnaces have been erected in various 
 places for the manufacture of iron, and iron waire. Glass, 
 )paper, and whiskey are also made in considerable quantities ; 
 but the principal manufacture is flour. 
 
 Commerce. Flour and tobacco are the principal exports. 
 Baltimore is the centre of commerce. Maryland is the third 
 state in the Union, in amount of shipping. 
 
 History. This territory was considered as a part of Vir- 
 ginia, till 1632, when it was granted to Cecilius Calvert, lord 
 of Baltimore in Ireland. The first settlement Avas made bj » 
 colony of Roman Catholics, 
 
 DISTRICT OF COJLUaiBlA. 
 
 Situatio7t. This district is a tract of country, 10 miles 
 square, lying on both sides of the Potomac, at the head of the 
 tide. It was ceded to the United States by the states of Ma- 
 ryland and Virginia in 1790, and in 1800 became the seat of 
 the General Government. The district is under the immediate 
 government of Congress. 
 
 Divisions. The district is divided into 2 counties ; viz. 
 "VVashington and Alexandria. 
 
 Population. In 1820 the population of the district was 
 33,339, of whom 6,377 were slaves. 
 
 Chief Towns. Washiwgton, the principal town in the 
 District, and the seat of government of the United States, is 
 on the Maryland side of the Potomac, on a point of land 
 formed by the junction of the Eastern branch. It is on the 
 main post road of the United States, about equally distant froiH 
 the northern and southern extremities of the Union. 
 
 The city is laid out on a regular plan, combining conve- 
 nience, elegance, and a free circulation of air. It is divided, 
 info gqirares by s^padcra^ sfreTJtSj rmftiiDg' N. «ifd B. ime^Celfe.d 
 
SOUTHERN^ STATES. 
 
 by others at right angles* The streets extend for 2 or 3 miles 
 along the rivers. When they shall be occupied with fine build- 
 ings, Washington will be one of the handsomest, and most 
 commodious cities in the world. At present, the houses, 
 though elegant, are few, and scattered. The population of 
 the city in 1820 was 13,247. 
 
 Among the public buildings are, 1 . The Capitol, situated 
 on an eminence, commanding a fine prospect. It is a mag- 
 nificent building of white free stone, with two wings. 2. The 
 Presidents House, an elegant edifice of stone, 2 stories high. 
 3. Four spacious brick buildings, near the President's house, 
 containing offices for the Heads of Department. 4. The 
 General Post-Office. 5. The Navy Yard. 
 
 Georgetown is on the Maryland side of the Potomac, 3 miles 
 W. of Washington. It is pleasantly situated, and is a place of 
 considerable trade. Population, 7,360. 
 
 Alexandria is 3k commercial town, 6 miles S. of Washington, 
 on the Virginia side of the Potomac. Population, 8,218. 
 
 Education. There is a Roman Catholic College at George- 
 town. It has about 150 students, a library of 7000 volumes, 
 end a valuable philosophical apparatus. 
 
 SOUTHERN STATES. 
 
 Situation- The Southern States are those which lie soutli 
 of the Potomac, and which border either on the Atlantic Ocean, 
 or the Gulf of Mexico. 
 
 Names. They are 7 in number, viz. Virginia, North Carolina, 
 South Carolina, Georgia, Alabama, Mississippi, and Louisiana. 
 The first four are on the Atlantic ; the last three on the Gull 
 of Mexico. 
 
 Face of the country. The tract of country along the sea- 
 coast of this whole section, is a low sandy plain, elevated but 
 little abov-e the level of the ocean. The width of this tract in 
 some places is 1 30 miles. Back of this, the country rises into 
 hills, and at Isist into mountains. The flat country on the coast 
 i*s commonly called the Low country; and the back country, 
 the Upper country. 
 
 SqU- The low country is chiefly a sandy pine-barren. The 
 principal exception is the banks of the rivers which in many 
 instances ar,e fertile. The upper country has generally a good 
 soil. 
 
vmoiNiii. 
 
 ProducUons. In the northern part of this section, wheat 
 and tobacco are the principal productions ; 'm the southern 
 part, rice, cotton and sugar. 
 
 Climate. The winter is mild and pleasant ; but the sum- 
 mer, in the low country, is hot and unhealthy, and frequently 
 proves fatal to strangers. The months of July, August, and 
 Septemt)er, are called, in the low country, the sickly season. 
 
 Slaves. Almost all the slaves in the United States are 
 in this section. They are most numerous in the low country, 
 where the climate is so hot that white i3ieiiirec[uently cannot 
 labour with safety. 
 
 tiRGINIA, 
 
 Situation. Virginia is bounded on the N. by Pennsyl- 
 vania ; on the N. E. by Maryland, from which it is separated 
 by Potomac river ; on the E. by Chesapeake bay ; on tha 
 S. by North Carolina, from which it is separated by the pa- 
 rallel of 36° 30' N. latitude ; on the W. by Kentucky, 
 from which it is separated by Big Sandy river ; and on the 
 N. W. by Ohio, from which it is separated by the river Ohio, 
 
 Virginia is the largest state in the tJnion. It is as large- 
 as the six New England States, taken together* 
 
 Divisions. Virginia is divided into 102 counties, viz. 
 
 Hardy, Hampshire, Berkley, Jefferson, Loudoun, Fairfax* 
 Prince William, Stafford, King George, Westmoreland, and: 
 Northumberland, on the Potomac; Lancaster, Middlesex, 
 Matthews, Gloucester, York, Elizabeth city and Princess. 
 Anne, on the west shore of Chesapeake bay ; Accomack and 
 Northampton, on the east shore of Chesapeake bay ; Norfolk, 
 Nansemond, Southampton, Greensville, Brunswick, Sleek- 
 lenburg, Halifax, Pittsylvania, Henry, Patrick, Grayson^ 
 Washington, Scott and Lee, on the southern boundary ; Ru&=*' 
 sell and Tazwell, on the Kentucky boundary ; Cabell, Mason^^ 
 Wood, Tyler, Ohio, and Brooke on the Ohio river ; Monon^ 
 gahela, on the Monongahela ; Preston, Harrison, Randolph f 
 Lewis, Kenawha, Nicholas, Greenbriar, Giles and Monroe^ 
 in the interior, west of the Jilleghany mountains ; Frederick, 
 Shenandoah, Rockingham, Augusta,^PendIeton, Bath.^Rock- 
 bridge, Bottetourt, Montgomery and Wythe, in the interior ^ 
 hetwesn the Alleghany mountains and the Blue Ridge; Bedford^ 
 Campbell, Buckingham, Cumberland, Powhatan, Chester- 
 Md, Prince George, Surry, Isl^ of Wight, Sussex, Plii- 
 
 H 
 
B6 Virginia, 
 
 widdie, Amelia, Nottoway, Lunenburg, Charlotte, Prince 
 .Edward, and Franklin in the interior, south of James river ; 
 Amherst, Nelson, Albemarle, Fluvanna, Goochland, Hen- 
 rico, Charles city, James city, Warwick, New Kent, King 
 William, King and Queen, Essex, Richmond, Caroline, 
 Spotsylvania, Fauquier. Culpeper, Madison, Orange, Louisa 
 and Hanover, in the interior, north of James river. 
 
 Mountains. The Alleghany mountains pass through the 
 western part of the state, from S. W. to N. E. They con- 
 sist of several ranges. The main range passes between 
 the sources of James and Kenawha rivers. The Blue 
 Ridge is east of the main range, and parallel with it. The 
 peaks of Otter, in the Blue Ridge, are 4,000 feet high, and 
 are the highest land in the state. 
 
 JSTatural Division. The Blue Ridge passes from S. W. 
 to N. E. through the centre of the state, dividing it into two 
 parts, nearly equal, 
 
 Face of the country. The country west of the Blue Ridge 
 is high and mountainous. On the east of the ridge, it is at 
 first hilly, but soon spreads out into a low, flat country which 
 extends to the seacoast. 
 
 Rivers. The Potomac, on the N. E. is the boundary be- 
 tween Virginia and Maryland. The Ohio, on the N. W. 
 separates Virginia from the state of Ohio. The Big Sandy, 
 on the W. is the boundary between Virginia and Kentucky. 
 
 The principal rivers which run into Chesapeake bay, be- 
 sides the Potomac, are the Rappahannock, York, and James 
 rivers. The Rappahann.ock and York both rise on the east 
 of the Blue Ridge, and pursue a southeasterly course to 
 the Chesapeake. The James rises on the west side of the 
 Blue Ridge, and breaking through the mountains, pursues 
 a coKrse south of east, and empties itself into the southern 
 extremity of Chesapeake bay. 
 
 The principal rivers in the western part of the state are, 
 the Big Sandy, the Great Kenawha and the Liiile Kenawha, 
 all of which are branches of the Ohio. 
 
 The Shenandoah is a branch of the Potomac. It joins it 
 at Harper's ferry, 65 miles northwest of the city of Wash- 
 ington. The Appomatox is the principal southern branch of 
 James river. 
 
 ^voamp. The Dismal Swamp is south of Norfolk, near the 
 
VIRGINIA. 8t 
 
 southeast corner of the state. It is 30 miles long, and 1(X 
 broad, and extends into North Carolina. 
 
 Chief Towns. Richmond, the seat of government, is 
 beautifully situated, on the north side of James river, 150 
 miles from its mouth, just below the falls. It is well situated 
 for commerce, being on a great river, at the head of tide 
 water, and having an extensive back country, abounding 
 with tobacco, wheat, hemp and coal. A canal around 
 the falls has been opened, which makes the river navigable 
 for boats 220 miles above the city. 
 
 The growth of Richmond has been very rapid. In 1800, 
 the population was 5,739 ; in 1810, it was 9,735 ; and ia 
 1«20, 12,067. 
 
 Among the public buildings are the capitol, or state-house, 
 a penitentiary, an armory, and an elegant Episcopal church, 
 called the Monumental Church. This church was erected 
 on the ruins of a Theatre, which, in December, 1811, was 
 consumed by fire during an exhibition, and the governor of 
 the state, with 70 respectable citizens, perished in the flames. 
 
 JVbrfolk, near the southeast corner of the state, is on the 
 €ast bank of Elizabeth river, a few miles from its entrance 
 into Hampton Road. The harbour is safe, commodious, and 
 large enough to contain 300 ships, Norfolk has more foreign 
 commerce than any other town in the state. Population, in 
 1820, 8,478. 
 
 Petersburg, Slo miles S. of Richmond, is on the Appoma- 
 tox, below the falls, 12 miles from its mouth, at the head of 
 navigation for large vessels. It carries on a large commerce 
 in tobacco and flour, and is the emporium of a considerable 
 district in North Carolina, as well as of the southern part of 
 Virginia. Its population in 1820 was 6,690. 
 
 Fredericksburg is on the Rappahannock, below the falls, 
 110 miles from its mouth, at the head of navigation. Large 
 quantities of corn, flour, and tobacco are brought from the 
 surrounding country, and exported from this town. Popula- 
 tion, between 3 and 4,000. 
 
 Lynchburg is 120 miles W. of Richmond, on James river, 
 20 miles below the great falls, where the river breaks through 
 the Blue Ridge. From its situation, at the head of naviga- 
 tion, it has become the centre of commerce for the neigh- 
 bouring districts, and a large extent of country west of the 
 monntain^. Tobacco, flour, hemp, &<?. JtTfe brought here. 
 
TmmNiA. 
 
 in large quantities, and conveyed down the river in boats to 
 Kichmond. The population in 181 8 was estimated at 5,500. 
 
 Yorktown, or Yorh, on the south side of York river, 14 
 miles from its mouth, has the best harbour in Virginia. It 
 is famous as the place where L.ord OornwalUs and his army- 
 were captured, on the 19th of October, 1781, by the united 
 forces of France and America. 
 
 Mouni Vernon, the celebrated seat of General Washing- 
 ton, is pleasantly situated on the Potomac, 9 miles below 
 Alexandria. Monticdlo, the seat of the late Thomas Jef- 
 ferson, is about 80 miles K. W. of Richmond, on a branch 
 of James river. 
 
 Williomshw^g is 12 miles W. of Torktown. Gosport is on 
 Elizabeth river, a mile and a half south of Norfolk. It con- 
 tains an United States' Navy Yard, Jamestown is on an 
 island in James river, 32 miles from its mouth. It was for- 
 merly a place of importance, but is now in ruins. Lexing- 
 ton, the capital of Rockbridge county, is west of the Blue 
 Ridge, 38 miles N. W. of Lynchburg. Charlottesville, the 
 capital of Albemarle county, is 84 miles N. W. of Rich- 
 mond, on a branch of James river. Staunton is in the centre 
 of the state, 40 miles N. W. of Charlottesville. 
 
 Education. This state has a literary fund, the interest 
 of which is appropriated to the support of schools and col- 
 leges. The amount of the fund is more than <^ 1,000,000. 
 and the interest about §60,000 per annum. Of this sum, 
 ^45,000 have been appropriated by the legislature to the 
 support of comjnon schools, and g 15,000 to the support of 
 the University of Virginia. 
 
 The University of Virginia was incorporated in 1819, and 
 established at Charlottesville, in Albemarle county. Besides 
 the University, there are three colleges in this state ; Wil- 
 liam cmd Mary, at Williamsburg ; Washington college at 
 Lexington ; and Hampden Sidney, in Prince Edward county, 
 85 miles^ S. W. of Richmond. 
 
 Canals. In the southeastern part of the state there is a 
 canal, connecting Chesapeake bay with Albemarle Sound 
 in North Carolina. It passes through Dismal Swamp. 
 Canals have been made round the falls and rapids of the 
 Potomac, which have made it navigable to Cumberland, 
 nearly 200 miles above Washington. There are canals 
 around the falls, at the mouth ^ the vShenandoah. whien 
 
VIRGmiA. 89 
 
 jnake that river navigable for 200 miles. There is a canal 
 around the falls in the Appomatox, which has opened the 
 navigation on that river, for 80 miles above Petersburg. 
 
 Population. In 1820, Virginia contained 1,065, 366 in- 
 liabitants, of whom 459,753 were negroes. About three- 
 fourths of the population live east of the Blue Ridge. In 
 this part of the state the slaves are very numerous ; but 
 west of the Blue Ridge, there are seven white men where 
 there is one slave. 
 
 History. Virginia was settled earlier than any other of 
 the United States. The first permanent settlement was 
 made by an English colony, at Jamestown, in 1601. 
 In 1732, Washington was born. 
 
 Virginia was highly distinguished for the resistance she 
 made, when a colony, to the encroachments of the mother 
 •country. The revolutionary war terminated at Yorktown 
 in this state, by the surrender of the British army under 
 I^ord Cornwallis, to the united forces of France and America. 
 Religion. Virginia was first settled by Episcopalians^ 
 and for a long time they were the prevalent denomination. 
 They are still numerous among the old settlements in the 
 ^jastern part of the state. 
 
 The most numerous denominations at present are, Bap- 
 tists, Methodists, and Presbyterians. The Presbyterians 
 are principally west of the Blue Ridge. 
 
 Staie of Society. On the east of the Blue Ridge, the 
 inhabitants are principally planters. In this part of the 
 state each man commonly lives on his own plantation, in an 
 independent style, surrounded by liis slaves. On the west 
 of the ridge there are few slaves. Labour is there per- 
 formed by the whites, as in the northern states. 
 
 Mineral Springs. The Hot spring is in Bath county, about 
 50 miles S. W. of Staunton. — The waters, at some seasons, 
 are hot enough to boil an egg. Berkley springs, near the 
 Potomac, 110 miles N. W. of Washington, are much re- 
 sorted to by the gay and fashionable, as well as by invalids. 
 There are sulphur springs in Greenbrier county, Montgo- 
 mery county, and some other places. 
 
 JSTatural Curiosities. The JSTatur.al bridge over Cedar 
 creek, i^i Rockbridge county, 12 miles S. W. of Lexington, 
 is one of the most wonderful curiosities in the world. The 
 river at this place, runs through a gap or chasm in a hill. 
 
 H2 
 
90 VIRGINIA. 
 
 The chasm is 90 feet wide at the top and 250 feet deep, 
 and the sides are almost perpendicular. The bridge is l. 
 formed by a huge rock, thrown completely across this |j 
 chasm at the top. The rock which forms the bridge, is 60 |i 
 feet broad in the middle, and is covered with earth and ^| 
 trees. It forms a sublime spectacle, when you look up at it |i 
 from the margin of the river. 
 
 Blowing cave is in one of the ridges of the Alleghany 
 mountains. It is a bole, about 100 feet in diameter, in the 
 side of a hill, ^om which a current of air continually issues, 
 strong enough to prostrate weeds at the distance of 60 feet. 
 Madison's eave is near the centre of the state, a few miles 
 N. E. of Staunton. It is in the side of a hill, and extends 
 into the earth about 300 feet. There is another cave in the 
 northern part of the state, on the top of a mountain. Yoii 
 at first go down 30 or 40 feet as into a well, and then pro- 
 ceed horiarontally about 400 feet. The passage is from 20 
 to 50 feet wide, and 4 or 5 feet high. 
 
 The passage of the Potomac through the Blue Ridge, at 
 Harper's ferry, is celebrated as a beautiful and sublime spec- 
 tacle. 
 
 Soil, As respects soil, Virginia may be divided into 4 
 sections, viz. 
 
 1. The low country, in the eastern part of the state, is 
 sandy and barren, except on the banks of the rivers. 2. Be- 
 tween the low country and the Blue Ridge, the land is alter- 
 nately barren and fertile. 3. The country between the 
 Blue Ridge and the main range of the Alleghany mountains 
 is a fertile valley. 4. West of this, the land is wild and 
 broken, in some parts fertile, but generally barren. 
 
 ProdueUon^. The staple productions of Virginia are 
 wheat and tobacco. Indian corn, rye, hemp, flax, &c. arc 
 extensively cultivated. 
 
 Minerals. Coal, of an excellent quality, is found in abund- 
 ance, on the banks of James river, near Richmond. , Iron, 
 coal, lead and ,salt abound west of the Blue Ridge. 
 
 Manufactures. Guns, swords, and pistols are made at the 
 armory in Richmond, and iron works are established in vari- 
 ous parts of the state. 
 
 Commerce. Tobacco and flour are the principal exports. 
 Virginia owns very little shipping. The produce of hei 
 plantations is exported, to a considerable extent, in vessels 
 Belonging to the merchants of the northern states. 
 
:yORTH CAROLINA. 91 
 
 NORTH CAROLINA. 
 
 Situation. North Carolina is bounded N. by Virginia ; 
 E. by the Atlantic ; S. by South Carolina ; and W. by Ten- 
 'iiessee. 
 
 Divisions. The state is divided into 62 counties, viz. 
 
 Currituck, Camden, Pasquotank, Perquimans, Chowan. 
 Bertie, Washington and Tyrrel, on Albemarle sound; Hyde, 
 Beaufort, Craven and Carteret, on Pamlico Sound ; Onslow^ 
 New Hanover and Brunswick on the Atlantic coast ; Colum- 
 bus, Robeson. Richmond, Anson, Mecklenburg, Lincoln 
 and Rutherford, on the South Carolina boundary ; Haywood, 
 Buncombe and Ashe, between the Blue Ridge and the western 
 houndanj ; Surry, Stokes, Rockingham, Caswell, Person, 
 Oranville, Warren, Northampton and Gates, on the northern 
 boundary ; Lenoir, Wayne. Johnson and Wake, on the 
 JVeuse; Franklin, Nash, Halifax. Hertford. Martin, Edge- 
 combe, Pitt and Greene, in the interior, east of the JVeuse ; 
 Montgomery and Rowan, in the i Jerior, on the Yadkin ; 
 Cabarrus, Iredell, Wilkes and Burke, in the interior, west of 
 the Yadkin ; Bladen and Cumberland, in the interior, on Cape 
 Fear river ; Sampson, Duplin and Jones, in the interior, be- 
 tween the JVeuse and Cape Fear river ; Orange, Chatham, 
 Randolph, Guilford and Moore, in the interior, between the 
 Yadkin and the JVeuse. i. 
 
 Capes. The principal capes are cape Hatteras, cap* 
 Lookout and cape Fear. All of them are dangerous to 
 juariners, particularly cape Hatteras, where numerous ves- 
 sels have been shipwrecked. 
 
 Islands. The whole coast is lined with long narrow 
 islands, which greatly impede navigation. Between the 
 islands are inlets. 
 
 Inlets. The principal inlets are Currituck, Roanoke, and 
 Ocracoke ; the last is the only one through which vessels 
 pass. 
 
 Sounds. The principal sounds are Albemarle and Pamlico, 
 
 Sivamps. Great Dismal swamp is between Albemarle 
 sound and Chesapeake bay. It is 30 miles long and IQ 
 broad, and lies partly in this state, and partly in Virginia. 
 Little Dismal, or Alligator swamp is betwe«n Albemarle and 
 Pamlico sounds, 
 
NORTH CABOLINA, 
 
 Rivers. The Chowan rises in Virginia, and empties itself 
 into Albemarle sound. The Roanoke is formed by the 
 •union of the Dan and Staunton, both of which- rise in Vir- 
 ginia. It runs also into Albemarle sound. 
 
 Pamlico and JVeme rivers discharge themselves into 
 Pamlico sound. Cape Fear river discharges itself into the 
 ocean near Cape Fear. All these rivers have bars at their 
 mouths, which obstruct the navigation for large vessels. 
 
 The Yadkin rises in the western part of the state, and 
 passes into South Carolina, where it assumes the name of 
 the Pedee. The Catawba rises also in the west, and passes 
 into South Carolina, where it assumes the name of the 
 Wateree, which is the eastern branch of the Santee. 
 
 Face of the country. The lov/ country in North Carolina 
 extends about 80 miles from the sea. Beyond this, as you 
 proceed into the interior, it is first hilly, and afterwards 
 mountainous. The Alleghany mountains cross the state 
 aiear the western boundary. 
 
 Chief Towns. Raleigh, the seat of government, is plea- 
 santly situated, near the centre of the state, and contains a 
 state house, and 2,674 inhabitants. 
 
 JVewbern, on the Neuse, is the largest town in the state. 
 It has considerable commerce, and contained in 1820, 3,633 
 inhabitants. The river is navigable to this place for sea 
 "vessels. 
 
 Fayetteville, on Cape Fear river, near the head of naviga- 
 Ijtion, is a flourishing town, and well situated for commerce^ 
 Large quantities of tobacco, cotton, flour, &c. are brought 
 here from the back country, and carried down to Wilming- 
 ton in boats. Population, in 1820, 3,532. 
 
 Wilmington, on Cape Fear river, 35 miles from the sea, 
 exports more produce than any other town in the state. 
 Population, in 1820, 2,633. 
 
 Edenton is on Albemarle Sound, near the mouth of Chowaa 
 river. £?t7/s&oroMg/i is 30 miles N, W. of Raleigh. Plyinoutli 
 is near the mouth of the Roanoke. Salisbury is 5 miles W. 
 ^rf" Yadkin river, and more than 100 W. of Raleigh. Sahm 
 is 34 miles N. E. of Salisbury. 
 
 Harbours. There are no good harbours in this state; 
 their mouths are all obstructed by sand bars. The best are 
 Wilmigton, Newbern, and Edenton. 
 
 Education. The University of JVorth Carolina is a flour- 
 
JvORTH CAROLINA. 9a 
 
 ishing institution at Chapel Hill, 28 miles W. of Raleigh. 
 There is an academy for females at Salem, under the direc- 
 tion of the Moravians, which is in high repute. 
 
 Canals. There is a canal connecting the waters of Albe- 
 marle Sound with Chesapeake bay in Virginia. Canals 
 have also been made around the falls in Cape Fear river. 
 
 Mineral Springs. Mineral springs abound in the moun- 
 tainous country, in the western part of the state. They are 
 efficacious in the cure of many diseases. 
 
 Curiosities. Ararat, or Pilot mountain, near Salem, is a 
 curiosity. It rises gradually, like a pyramid, to the height 
 of several thousmd feet, and then shoots up suddenly like 
 a steeple, to the height of 300 feet, and terminates in a flat 
 surface, from which there is a noble view of the surrounding 
 country, for an immense distance. The diameter of the 
 steeple part of the mountain, at the bottom, is not more than 
 100 or 200 feet. 
 
 This mountain can be seen at the distance of 60 or 70 
 miles, overlooking the country below. It was called Pilot 
 mountain by the Indians, because it served them for a 
 beacon, by which they conducted their routes in the old In- 
 dian wars. 
 
 Population. In 1820, North Carolina contained 638,829 
 inhabitants; about one-third of whom were slaves. The 
 slaves are principally confined to the low country. In the 
 western or mountainous part of the state, the slaves are not 
 more than one-seventh part of the population. 
 
 Religion- The Methodists and Baptists are much the 
 most numerous denominations, especially in the low country. 
 The western part of the state was settled by Presbyterians 
 fronv Pennsylvania. 
 
 Soil. As in Virginia, the soil of the low country, except 
 on the banks of the rivers, is sandy and poor ; and that of 
 the hilly and mountainous districts is various, but generally 
 fertile. 
 
 Productions, Wheat, rye, barley, oats, and hemp, are 
 cultivated in the hilly couiitry ; and rice of a fine quality 
 is raised in the swamps. Tobacco and Indian corn are ex- 
 tensively cultivated. 
 
 All the low country is covered with forests of pitch pine. 
 This valuable tree yields pitch, tar, turpentine and boards, 
 ^^bich together constitute about half the exports of the ^tate. 
 
S4 SOUTH CAKOLtNA. | 
 
 Comfnerce. Much of the produce of North Carolina ig *k 
 ^exported from the neighbouring states. That of the 
 Horthern part goes to Lynchburg, Petersburg and Norfolk 
 in Virginia, and that of the western part to Charleston, 
 in South Carolina, 
 
 SOUTH CAROLINA. 
 
 SUuation. South Carolina is bounded N. and N. E. by 
 North Carolina ; S. . E. by the Atlantic ; and S. W. hj 
 ^l^eorgia, from which it is separated by Savannah river. 
 
 Divisions. The state is divided into 28 districts, viz. 
 
 Horry, Georgetown, Charleston, Colleton and Beauf6rtj 
 >Gn the cocbst ; Barnwell, Edgefield, Abbeville and Pendleton> 
 <>n the Savannah , Greenville, Spartanburgh, York, Lancas- 
 ter, Chestej-field, Marlborough, and Marion on the JSTorth 
 Carolina boundary ; Chester, Fairfield and Richland, in tJm 
 interior, between the Wateree and Congaree ; Kershaw, Dar- 
 lington, Sumpter and Williamsburgh, in the interior^ east of 
 the Waieree and Santee ; Orangeburg, Lexington, Newberry, 
 Laurens and Union, in the interior^ west of the Santee aitd 
 Congaree. 
 
 Face of the country. The country is divided into Lower 
 and Upper, as in North Carolina and Virginia. The 
 Ridge which divides them is about 140 miles from the sea. 
 The lower country is between the Ridge and the seacoast 
 It is principally an immense sandy plain, destitute of stones. 
 The upper country lies beyond the Ridge, and is at first 
 hilly, and afterwards mountainous. 
 
 Mountains. The Alleghany mountains cross the north- 
 western corner of the state. The highest summit is Table 
 mountain, which is estimated at 4,000 feet. 
 
 Rivers. The Savannah, on the west, separates South 
 Carolina from Georgia. It rises in the Alleghany moun- 
 tains, and its course is S. E. to the ocean. 
 
 The Pedee, in the eastern part of the state, discharges it- 
 self into Georgetown bay. It rises in North Carolina, 
 where it is called the Yadkin. It is navigable for boats, 
 jiearly to the boundary between the two states. 
 
 The Santee is the great river of South Carolina. It dis- 
 charges itself into the ocean a few miles from the mouth of 
 the Pedee. It is composed of two branehfrs, the Con-Carets 
 
^OUTH GAROLIiVA. 9^ 
 
 and the Wateree. The Wateree rises in North Carolraa» 
 where it is called the Catawba. 
 
 Coopei^ and Ashley rivers discharge themselves inter 
 Cliarleston harbour. Edisto river empties itself into the 
 ocean at Edisto island, 20 miles S. W. of Charleston. 
 
 Chief Towns. Charleston, the largest town in the state;, 
 is situated on a tongue of land, formed by the confluence 
 of the rivers Cooper and Ashley, 7 miles from the ocean. 
 The harbour is barred by a sand bank across the mouth, 
 which, however, at all times admits vessels drawing less 
 than 12 feet water. Charleston is a place of much wealth 
 and commerce. It imports most of the foreign goods con- 
 sumed in South Carolina, a considerable part of North 
 Carolina, and a part of Georgia. In 1816 it was the fifth 
 town in the United States, in amount of shipping. In 1820 
 the number of inhabitants was 24,780, of whom 14,124 
 were blacks. 
 
 The climate of this city is more healthy than that of the 
 low country generally. Hence, during the sickly season, 
 it is the resort of the planters from other parts of the state, 
 iind from the West Indies. There is much refined society 
 here, and the inhabitants have long been celebrated for their 
 hospitality. 
 
 Columbia, the seat of government, is on the Congaree^ 
 It is regularly laid out, on an elevated plain, and has had a 
 rapid growth. 
 
 Georgetown is on Georgetown bay, near the mouth of the 
 Pedee. Beaufort is on an island, 72 miles S. W. of Charles- 
 ton. Camden is at the head of navigation, on the Wateree^ 
 35 miles N. E. of Columbia. It is well situated for trade. 
 Qrangehurg is 40 miles S. of Columbia, on a branch of the 
 Edisto. Jacksonborough is on the Edisto, 33 miles W. of 
 Charleston. Mbevitle is 120 miles W. of Columbia. Winns- 
 horoifgh is 30 miles N. of Columbia. 
 
 Canal. There is a canal, 22 miles long, connecting Santee- 
 and Cooper rivers, by which the produce of a large section: 
 of this state, and of a part of North Carolina is brought ta 
 the city of Charleston. 
 
 Education. South Carolina CoUege, at Columbia, is liber- 
 ally patronized by the state. It has a very valuable chemi- 
 cal and philosophical apparatus, and a large library. There 
 are 4 professors, and more than 100 students. 
 
m SOUTH CAROLINA. 
 
 Colleges have been established in Abbeville district, in" 
 Beaufort, and in Winnsborough, but they have not taken a 
 higher rank than academies 
 
 The state has appropriated the sum of §30,000 annually 
 for the support of free schools, which are established in 
 every part of the state. There are societies also, with large 
 funds, for the education of poor children. 
 
 Religion. The Methodists and Baptists are the most 
 numerous denominations. Next to them are the Presbyte- 
 rians and Episcopalians. 
 
 Population, South Carolina contained in 1820, 502,741 
 inhabitants, of whom moVe than one half were blacks. 
 The blacks are principally confined to the flat country near 
 the coast. 
 
 State of Society. The mountainous districts are inhabited 
 by farmers, who have few slaves, but depend upon their own 
 exertions for support, as in the northern states. The low 
 country is inhabited by planters, who are supported by the 
 labour of their slaves. The planters have large incomes, 
 live at their ease, and possess much of the independent 
 character of English country gentlemen. Hunting is one 
 of their favourite amusements. 
 
 Climate. The climate of the upper country is healthy, 
 at all seasons of the year. In the low country, the sum- 
 mer months are sickly, particularly August and Septembero 
 and the climate, at this season, frequently proves fatal to 
 strangers . 
 
 Productions. Cotton and rice are the staples of Soutlr 
 Carolina. The climate and soil are well adapted to tobacco, 
 indigo, grain, &c. and these were formerly cultivated to a 
 great extent ; but since the invention, by Mr. Whitney, of 
 the machine to cleanse upland cotton from its seeds, thfe 
 cultivation of cotton has become so profitable, that almost 
 every thing else is neglected. 
 
 Manufactures. Very little attention is paid to manu- 
 factures in this state. Agriculture is so much more profita- 
 ble, that the inhabitants will probably continue, for many 
 years, to look to foreign countries for most of their manu- 
 factures. 
 
 Commerce. Cotton is the capital article of export. Rice 
 is now of secondary consequence. The other articles are 
 lumber, pitch, tar, turpentine, ^c. The state owns very 
 
GEORGIA. 97 
 
 little shipping A large part of the produce of South 
 Carolina is exported in ships, belonging to merchants 
 in the northern states, and manned, by New England sea- 
 men. 
 
 Islands. The seacoast is bordered with a fine chain of 
 islands, between which and the shore there is a very con- 
 venient navigation. Sullivan's island, James' island, and 
 John's island border on Charleston harbour Edtsfo island 
 and Hunting islands lie S. W. of Charleston. 
 
 GEORGIA. 
 
 Situation. Georgia is bounded N. by Tennessee ; N. Eo 
 by South Carolina, from which it is separated by Savan- 
 nah' river ; E. by the Atlantic; S. by Florida ; and W. by 
 Alabama. 
 
 Divisions. The eastern part of this state is settled by 
 the whites, and is divided into counties ; the western part 
 was till recently in the possession of the Indians ; but as the 
 government has recently purchased their lands, the white 
 settlements will probably soon extend over it. The part 
 occupied by the whites is divided into 51 counties, viz. 
 
 Camden, Glynn, M'Intosh, Liberty, Bryan and Chatham, 
 on the coast; Effingham, Scriven! Burke, Richmond, Co- 
 lumbia, Lincoln, Elbert and Franklin, on the Savannah; 
 Telfair, Pulaski, Laurens, Wilkinson, Twiggs, Bibb, Jones, 
 Baldwin, Putnam, Jasper, Morgan, Newton, Walton, Clark 
 and Jackson, in the interior, between the Oconee and Ocmulgee ; 
 Madison, Oglethorpe. Wilkes, Greene, Hancock, Warren, 
 Jefferson, Washington, Emanuel, Montgomery, Tatnall, 
 and Bullock, in the interior, between the Oconee and the coun- 
 ties on the Savannah ; Wayne, Appling, Irwin, Early, Dooly, 
 Houston, Crawford, Monroe, Pike, Henry and Fayette, 
 ivest of the Alatamaha and the Ocmulgee ; De Kalb, Gwin- 
 net, Rabun, Hall and Habersham, in the northern part of 
 the state on the' head waters of the Chatahoochee, Matamaha^ 
 and Savannah, 
 
 Face of the Country. The face of the country very much 
 resembles that of the Carolinas. The coast is lined with 
 islands. The low country is a flat, sandy ^ine barren, ex- 
 tending about 80 or 90 miles from the coast. Beyond this, 
 the country becomes hilly, and in the northwest corner ol^ 
 the state, rises into mountains. 
 
 1 
 
9a GEOllGIA. 
 
 Islands. The principal islands on the coast are Tyhee, 
 St Catharines^ Sapelo, St. Simon'' s, Cumberland^ and *dmeUa^ 
 
 Swamps. Okefonoco swamp is partly in this state^ and 
 partly in Florida. It is 180 miles in circumference, and i^ 
 lull of alligators, snakes, frogs, and swarms of moschetoes. 
 It is uninhabitable by any human being. Cy^eas swamp is 
 near the sources of Satilla river. 
 
 Rivers. Savannah river separates Georgia ixom Soutji 
 Carolina on the northeast. The Tennessee just tou<ehes the 
 state on the northwest. The Chatahoochee separates it from 
 Alabama on the southwest ; and the St. Mary's, from Florida 
 on the south. 
 
 The Savannah rises in the Alleghany mountains, and 
 runs in a southeasterly direction to the ocean. It is naviga- 
 ble for large vessels 18 miles, to Savannah, and for smaller 
 vessels to the falls at Augusta, 340 miles farther. Above 
 the falls, boats can go 60 miles without obstruction. 
 
 The Ogeechee empties itself into the ocean 15 miles S. 
 W. of Savannah. 
 
 The Alatamaha is a great river. It has two branches, the 
 Oconee from the east, and the Ocmulgee from the west. It 
 is navigable for vessels of 30 tons as far as Milledgevdle; 
 on the Oconee branch, 300 miles from the ocean. 
 
 Satilla river discharges itself into the Atlantic opposite 
 the northern extremity of Cumberland island. The St, 
 Mary's, which forms part of the boundary between Georgia 
 and Florida rises in Okefonoco swamp, and discharges it- 
 self into the Atlantic between Cumberland and Amelia 
 islands. It is navigable to its source, 150 miles. 
 
 Flint river joins the Chatahoochee in the southwest corner 
 of the state, and the united stream takes the name of Appa- 
 lachicola. 
 
 The Coosa and Tallapoosa rise in the northwest p^ii; of 
 the state, and pass into Alabama. 
 
 Chief Towns. Savannah is on Savannah* river, 18 miles 
 from the bar at the mouth. It is the centre of commerce 
 for a large section of country. Vessels drawing 14 feet 
 water can come up to the city ; larger vessels receive their 
 cargoes 3 miles below. Population, in 1827, about 7,000. 
 
 Augusta is on the Savannah, just belo^\ the falls, 127 
 miles, by land, north of Savannah. Large quantities of 
 cotton and other produce are brought to Augusta, from the 
 
GEORGIA, 0^ 
 
 feack country, and carried down the river to Savannah, 
 Population, in 1827, about 5,000. 
 
 MilUdgemlU, the seat of government, is on Oconee river, 
 near the centre of the state, and about 300 miles from the 
 o<;ean, by the course of the river. Boats of 30 tons can 
 ascend as far as this place. Population, in 1827, about 
 2,000. 
 
 JDaritn is on Alatamaha river, 12 miles from the bar at 
 its mouth. Sunhury, Brunswich and St. Mary's are on or 
 near the seacoast, S. W. of Savannah. Petersburg is on the 
 Savannah river, 63 miles above Augusta. Wctshington is 
 50 miles N. W. of Augusta. Athem is on the Oconee, about 
 70 miles N. of Milledgeviile. 
 
 Educaiion. There is a respectable college at Athens, 
 called Franklin college. Provision has been made by the 
 legislature, for the establishment of an academy in every 
 county in the state ; and a handsome sum has also been 
 appropriated to the establishment of free schools. 
 
 Curiosity. JVickajack cave is in the N. W. corner of the 
 state, within half a mile of Tennessee river. It commences 
 in a precipice of the Rackoon mountain, with a mouth 50 
 feet high, and 160 wide. It has a flat roof, formed of solid 
 limestone. The cave consists chiefly of one grand excavation 
 through the rocks, preserving for a great distance the same 
 dimensions as at its mouth. 
 
 What is more remarkable still, it forms for the whole 
 distance it has yet been explored, a walled and vaulted 
 passage for a stream of cool and limpid water, in some 
 places 6 feet deep, and 60 wide. Col. Ore, of Tennessee, 
 explored this cave a few years since. He followed the 
 course of the creek, in a canoe, for three miles within the 
 cave, and was prevented from proceeding farther by a fall 
 of water. 
 
 Religion. The Baptists and Methodists are much the 
 most numerous denominations. There are but few settled 
 ministers in the state. 
 
 Population. In 1820 Georgia contained 340,989 inhabi- 
 tants, and in 1824,400,930 of whom 175,882 were blacks. 
 This population is confined to the eastern part of the state, 
 the western part having been till very recently in posses- 
 sion of the Indians. The population of Georgia has in- 
 •Creased very rapidly, and as there is much unoccupied Jan^ 
 
100 - ALABAMA. 
 
 the increase will probably continue to be rapid for many- 
 years to come. 
 
 Indians. The Creek Indians, until very recently, occupied 
 the western part of this state, and the eastern part of Ala- 
 bama. They were about 20.000 in number, and were the 
 most warlike and powerful Indians east of the Mississippi. 
 In 1825, the government of the Unitt d States purchased their 
 lands, and provided them with a new country west of the Mis- 
 sissippi. The Chcrokees inhabit the northwest corner of this 
 state, and the adjacent parts of Alabama and Tennessee. 
 
 Soil. The soil of Georgia very much resembles that of 
 the Carolinas. The low country, which extends 80 or 90 
 miles from the coast, is principally sandy and barren. The 
 upper country has generally a strong, fertile soil. The islands 
 and the banks of the rivers have a rich soil. 
 
 Productions. Cotton is the principal production of 
 Georgia, It is of two kinds ; the black seed, or sea-island 
 cotton, which is raised on the islands, and near the coast; 
 and the green seed, or upland, which is raised in the upper 
 country. The sea-island is the best. 
 
 The other productions are rice, which is raised in the 
 swamps of the low country, tobacco, sugar, figs, oranges, 
 pomegranates, olives, lemons, &c. 
 
 Commerce. The great article of export is cotton. Savan- 
 nah and Darien are the principal ports. Georgia owns but 
 little shipping. Most of her produce is exported in ships 
 belonging to the merchants of the northern states. 
 
 ALABAMA. 
 
 Situation. Alabama is bounded N by Tennessee ; E by 
 Georgia ; S by Florida, and the gulf of Mexico; and W. 
 by the state of Mississippi. 
 
 Divisions. The state is divided into 33 counties, viz. 
 
 Lauderdale, Limestone, Madison, Decatur and Jackson, 
 between the Tennessee and the northern boundary ; Franklin, 
 Lawrence and Morgan an the south bank of the Tennessee ; 
 Mobile and Baldwin on the coast ; Conecuh, Covington and 
 Henry on the Florida boundary ; Monroe, Wilcox, Dallas, 
 Autauga and Montgomery on the Alabama river; Butler 
 and Pike between the counties on the Alabama and those on the 
 Florida boundary ; Washington, Clark. Marengo, Greene and 
 Pickins on the Tombi^bce ; Tuscaloosa, Jefferson and Blount 
 
ALABAMA. 101 
 
 on the Tuscaloosa ; Bibb, Shelby and St. Clair, on the Coosa ; 
 Marion, on the western boundary, between the Tuscaloosa and 
 Tombigbee ; and Perry, in the centre of the state, on the Co* 
 hawba. 
 
 Rwers. The Chatahoochee on the southeast, separates this 
 state from Georgia. The Tennessee enters the state at its 
 northeast corner, and bending round in a curve, leaves it at 
 the N. W. corner. 
 
 The Mobile is formed by the union of the Alabama and 
 the Tombigbee. After the junction of these two rivers, 
 the united stream pursues a southerly course for a few miles, 
 and then dividing, discharges itself through two channels 
 into Mobile bay. 
 
 The Alabama is the eastern branch of the Mobile. It is 
 formed by the union of the Coosa and Tallapoosa. It is 
 navigable for sea vessels to Fort Claiborne, and for large 
 boats through its whole extent. Its general course is south 
 west. The Coosa and Tallapoosa rise in Georgia, and flow 
 southwest. They are not navigable except for a few miles. 
 The Cahawba empties itself into the Alabama, a few miles 
 below the confluence of the Coosa and Tallapoosa. 
 
 The Tombigbee is the western branch of the Mobile. It 
 rises in the northern part of the state, near the Muscle 
 shoals in Tennessee river, and running south, joins the 
 Alabama, about 70 miles from the gulf of Mexico. It is 
 navigable for sloops to St. Stephens. The Black Warrior 
 is the principal eastern branch of the Tombigbee, and joins 
 it 80 miles above St. Stephens. It is navigable for boats 
 through the greater part of its course. 
 
 Population. Alabama has been but recently settled, and 
 the population is now increasing with wonderful rapidity. 
 In 1810, there were less than 10,000 inhabitants; in 1820, 
 127,901. 
 
 Indians. The Cherohees occupy the northeastern part of 
 the state, and the Choctaws the western. 
 
 Chief Towns. Mobile is on the west side of Mobile river, 
 at its entrance into Mobile bay. It is a place of considera- 
 ble trade, but the harbour is difiicult of access for large 
 vessels. 
 
 St, Stephens is on the Tombigbee, 120 miles above Mobile, 
 at the head of schooner navigation. 
 
 T2 
 
n^ MISSISSIPPI. 
 
 Cahawba is the seat of government. It is situated at the 
 junction of Cahawba river w^ith the Alabama. 
 
 Huntsville is pleasantly situated, about hn If way between 
 Tennessee river, and the northern boundary of the state. 
 The surrounding country is very fertile, and rapidly in- 
 Creasing in population. 
 
 Forts. Fort Stoddard is on Mobile river, about half way 
 between Mobile and St. Stephens. Fort Claiborne is on the 
 Alabama, at the head of schooner navigation, 26 miles E. of 
 St. Stephens. Fort Jackson is near the junction of the 
 Coosa and Tallapoosa. 
 
 Education. 1 wo, townships of land have been granted 
 by Congress for the support of a college, and a section of 
 land in every township, for the support of schools. 
 
 Roads and Canals. One twentieth part of the money 
 received from the sale of public lands in this state, is appro- 
 priated by Congress to making roads and canals, for the 
 benefit of the state. 
 
 Face of the Country. The land graduall- rises as you 
 proceed from the coast into the interior. On the coast it is 
 low and level ; in the middle it is hilly ; and in the north, 
 it is, in some places, mountainous. 
 
 Soil. The soil is generally fertile, particularly on the 
 banks of the rivers. The lands between the Torabigbee and 
 the Alabama, and those on the Tennessee, are among the 
 best in the state. The low lands in the southern part of the 
 state are well adapted to the cultivation of rice. 
 
 Productions. Cotton is the staple production. The 
 other productions are rice, corn, wheat, &c. The sugar 
 cane, the vine and the olive, it is supposed, may be cultivated 
 with success. 
 
 MISSISSIPPI. 
 
 Situation. Mississippi is bounded N by Tennessee ; E. 
 "by Alabama ; S. by the gulf of Mexico, and Louisiana, and 
 W. by Mississippi river, which separates it from Louisiana 
 and x'^i kansas Territory. 
 
 Divisions. ! he northern part of this state belongs to the 
 Chickasaw Indians ; the middle and largest portion, to the 
 Choctaws ; and the southern, to the whites. The part be- 
 longing to the whites is divided into 21 counties, viz 
 
 Warren, Claiborne, Jefterson, Adams and Wilkinson on 
 
MISSISSIPPI 103 
 
 the Mississippi ; HaDCock, Marion, Lawrence and Hinds 
 on Pearl river ; Pike, Amite and Franklin, between the coun- 
 ties on Pearl river and those on the Mississippi ; Jackson, 
 Greene, Wayne and Monroe ow the Alabama boundary ; and 
 Covington and Perry, between the counties on the eastern boun- 
 dary and those on Pearl river. 
 
 Rivers. The Mississippi is the western boundary, from 
 lat. 35° to 31*^. 1 he Yazoo rises in the northiern part of the 
 state, in the Chickasaw country, and running a little west 
 of south, joins the Mississippi, 140 miles above Natchez. 
 The Yalo Busha is an eastern branch of the Yazoo. Black 
 river rises in the Choctaw country, and running southwest, 
 empties itself into the Mississippi, about 50 miles above 
 jVatchez. 
 
 Pearl river rises in the Choctaw country, and running 
 south, empties itself into a narrow strait, which connects 
 lake Pontchartrain with lake Borgne South of lat. 31** 
 Pearl river is the boundary between Mississippi and Lou- 
 isiana. 
 
 Pascagoula river rises in the Choctaw country, and run- 
 ning south, enters the gulf of Mexico, 40 miles W. of 
 Mobile bay. It drains the country between the Tombi^bee 
 and Pearl rivers. Some of the western branches oi the 
 Tombigbee rise in this state. 
 
 Chi^ Towns. Natchez, in Adams county, is much the 
 largest town. It is on the Mississippi, 320 miles above 
 New Orleans, by the course of the river, and 156 by land. 
 It stands on a bluff, elevated more tlmn 1 50 feet above the 
 surface of the river. The surrounding country is fertile, 
 populous, and well cultivated, and produces great quantities 
 ^f cotton. Natchez is the commercial depot tor all the set- 
 .tlements in the western part of the state. Population, in 
 1820,2,184. 
 
 Washington is 6 miles E of Natchez. It has a very 
 pleasant, healthy situation, and is surrounded by a fine 
 country > 
 
 Smeldsborongh is on the bay of St Louis, about 40 miles 
 N. E. of New Orleans. It has a pleasant and healthy situa- 
 tion, and is a place of resort for the inhabitants of New 
 Oi leans, during he sickly season. Pascagoula is near thie 
 mouth of Pascagoula fiver. 
 
104 MISSISSIPPI, 
 
 Jackson, the seat of government, is a new town on Pearl 
 river, near the centre of the state. 
 
 Monticello is on Pearl river, about 90 miles E.of Natchez. 
 
 Elliot is a missionary station, in the Choctaw country. It 
 is on the Yalo Busha, about 30 miles above its junction with 
 the Yazoo, and has a w^ater communication with Natchez 
 and New Orleans. 
 
 Population, In 1810, this state had about 30,000 inhabi* 
 tants, exclusive of Indians ; in 1820, 76,448. More than 
 half the population is in the counties bordering upon the 
 Mississippi, between the mouth of the Yazoo and the southern 
 boundary. 
 
 Indians. The Chickasaws inhabit a fertile country, em- 
 bracing the northern part of this state, and the adjacent 
 parts of Tennessee. Their number is about 6,600. They 
 are friendly and hospitable, and considerably advanced in 
 many of the arts of civilized life. 
 
 The Choctaws inhabit the central parts of the state. Their 
 country extends from the Mississippi, on the west, to the 
 Tombigbee on the east ; and from the Chickasaw country 
 on the north, to about lat 32<*, on the south. 
 
 The number of the Choctaws is estimated at 20,000. 
 Within a few years, they have made great advances in 
 agriculture, and the arts. They now raise cattle, corn, and 
 cotton, and some of them spin and weave. They are 
 beginning to leave off the wild and savage life, and are 
 becoming civilized. The American Board of Commis- 
 sioners for Foreign Missions have sent several missionaries 
 and school-masters, to teach them to read, and instruct 
 them in religion. The Indians treat the missionaries very 
 kindly. 
 
 Education. A college has been incorporated at Washing- 
 ton, and another at Shieldsborough. 
 
 Roads and Canals. Congress have appropriated one 
 twentieth part of the money received from the sale of public 
 lands in this state, to making roads and canals for the benefit 
 of the state. 
 
 Face of the Country. The southern part of the state, for 
 about 100 miles from the Gulf of Mexico, is level. Farther 
 north it becomes agreeably uneven and undulating. Near 
 the banks of the Mississippi, the lands, in several places, artE^ 
 liable to annual inundation. 
 
LOUISIANA. 105 
 
 Soil. On the Mississippi and the Yazoo, the soil is 
 exceedingly rich and productive, and well adapted to the 
 cuRivation of cotton. The southeastern part of the state is 
 the least fertile. 
 
 Productions and Cormnerce. Cotton is the principal pro- 
 duction, and is raised in large quantities for exportation. 
 The climate and soil are well adapted to indigo, tobacco, 
 grain, &c but the raising of cotton is so much more profita- 
 ble, that they are neglected. Most of the flour and gcain 
 used in the settlements on the Mississippi is brought from 
 Kentucky, 
 
 LOUISIANA; 
 
 Name and Extent. The whole country between the 
 Mississippi river and the Pacific ocean, now belonging to 
 the United States, was once owned by France, and was 
 called Louisiana, in honour of Louis XIV In 1803, this 
 vast country was sold by France to the United States, for 
 $ 1 5,000,000. It has since been divided into 4 parts, viz. 
 1. Missouri Territory. 2. The state of Missouri. 3. 
 Arkansas Territory 4 The state of Louisiana. The 
 name Louisiana, is now applied only to the last of these 
 divisions. 
 
 Situation. Louisiana is bounded N. by Arkansas Terri- 
 tory ; E. by the state of Mississippi ; S. by the gulf of 
 Mexico ; and W. by the Spanish dominions. The state lies 
 principally on the west side of the Mississippi river; a 
 small part is on the east side. 
 
 Divisions. Louisiana is divided into 24 counties and pa- 
 rishes, viz. 
 
 Natchitoches, Ouachita, Rapide, Catahoula, Concordia, 
 Avoyales, in the northern part of the state ; Plaquemine, Of- 
 leans, St. Bernard, St. Charles, St. John Baptist, St. Jaques, 
 Ascension, Assumption, Lafourche interior, Iberville, West 
 Baton Rouge, Point Coupee, Feliciana, East Baton Rouge, 
 St. Helena, Washington, St Tamany, in the southeastern 
 part of the state, and Attakapas and Opelousas in the south- 
 west. 
 
 Rivers. Red river rises in the Spanish dominions, among 
 the Rocky mountains, and flowing southeast, enters this 
 state near the northwest corner, and joins the Mississippi in 
 about lat. SI*', after a course of more than 1200 miles. Th^e 
 
106 LOUISIANA. 
 
 navigation is interrupted in several places by trees, which 
 have floated down in immense numbers, and choked up the 
 channel. 
 
 The Ouachita rises in Arkansas Territory, and running^ 
 southeast joins Red river, near its mouth. It is navigable 
 for 600 miles. 
 
 The Mississippi is the eastern boundary of this state, 
 from lat. 33*» to 31^ Below lat 31<> its course is wholly in 
 this state. Before entering the gulf of Mexico, it divides 
 into several branches. The main stream passes by the city 
 of New Orleans, and discharges itself 100 miles below, by 
 several mouths. The Atchafalaya leaves the main stream 
 3 miles below the mouth of Red river, and running south, 
 nearly 200 miles, empties itself into Atchafalaya bay. The 
 Iberville leaves the main stream more than 100 miles below 
 the mouth of Red river, and running east, empties itself into 
 lake Maurepas. Lake Maurepas empties itself into lake 
 Pontchartrain, and lake Pontchartrain into lake Borgne, and 
 lake Borgne into the gulf of Mexico. 
 
 Pearl river, below lat. 31°, is the boundary between this 
 State and Mississippi It empties itself into the Rigolets, 
 a narrow strait running from lake Pontchartrain to lake 
 Borgne. 
 
 The Tecke joins the Atchafalaya, 16 miles from its mouth 
 in the gulf of Mexico. The Vermillion is west of the 
 Teche. and empties itself into Vermillion bay. The Met- 
 mentau, the Calcasiu, and the Sabine enter the gulf of 
 Mexico, west of the Vermillion. Before entering the gulf, 
 they all spread out into broad lakes, and then contract again 
 into narrow rivers. 
 
 Chief Towns. Nev7 Orleans, the capital of the state* 
 is on the east bank of the Mississippi, 105 miles from its 
 mouth, by the course of the river. It is admirably situated 
 for trade, near the mouth of a noble river, whose branches 
 extend for thousands of miles in opposite directions, and 
 open communications with the whole valley of the Missis- 
 sippi, the most extensive and fertile valley on the face of the 
 earth. This city is already one of the greatest emporiums 
 of commerce in America, and since steam-boat navigation 
 lias been successfully introduced on the Mississippi, it will 
 teobably become, at no distant day, one of the greatest cities 
 m the world. The population has increased with great ra 
 
LOUISIANiL . 107 
 
 pidity. In 1802, it was estimated at 10,000 ; in 1810; it wasr 
 17,242 ; and in 1820, 27,176, of whom 13,592 were bkcks. 
 
 JVatckitoches^ the largest town in the state west of the 
 Mississippi, is on Red river, about 200 miles above its june- 
 tion with the Mississippi. Alexandria is on Red river, 120 
 miles from its mouth, and 80 miles below Natchitoches. 
 Baton Rouge is on the east bank of the Mississippi, 140 
 miles above New Orleans. St. Franeisville is on the same 
 river, 30 miles above Baton Rouge. Madisonmlh is on the 
 N. side of lake Pontchartrain, 27 miles N. of New Orleans. 
 
 Island. The city of New Orleans stands on an island; 
 which is formed by the river Mississippi on one side* and 
 the Iberville, together with lakes Maurepas, Pontchartiain, 
 and Borgne on the other. It is 160 miles long. 
 
 History This country was originally owned and settled 
 by the French. While it remained in their bands, it was 
 in a languishing condition. The commerce, wealth, and 
 population were very inconsiderable. In 1 803, France sold 
 it to the United States, and it has ever since been very 
 flourishing. 
 
 In 1814, the British made an attack on New Orleans, but 
 were repulsed with great loss, by the American troops under 
 General Jackson. 
 
 Population. In 1820 there were 153;407 inhabitants, 
 about one half of whom were slaves. This population i& 
 settled principally on the banks of the Mississippi, above 
 and below New Orleans. For the distance of more tlian 
 100 miles along this river, the bank« present the appear- 
 ance of a continued village. In the other parts of the 
 state, the settlements are chiefly confined to the banks of 
 the rivers. 
 
 The population is increasing with great rapidity. It i& 
 made up of many diff"erent nations, French, English, Span- 
 iards, Germans, &c. A few years ago the French were far 
 the most numerous, but emigrants from the northern states 
 are flocking in very fast, and will soon outnumber the 
 French. 
 
 Language. A short time since the French language was 
 almost universal, but now the English predominates. 
 
 Religion. The Roman Catholic religion is the most 
 prevalent at pres^it. In 1812 there was not one Pnrte?- 
 
lOiJ LOUISIANA. 
 
 tant church, of any deuomi nation, in the state. Since that 
 time, many have been formed. 
 
 Eflucation. Till very recently education has been much 
 neglected. Many of the inhabitants are unable to read. 
 The government has now commenced the establishment of 
 schools and academies. 
 
 Face of tlie Country. The country on the gulf of Mexico, 
 from Pearl river to the Sabine, consists of low prairie, or 
 meadow land. About the mouths of the Mississippi, for 30 
 miles, it is one continued swamp. More than one fifth part 
 of the surface of this state is liable to be inundated, every 
 year, by the overflowing of the Mississippi and Red rivers. 
 Levees. Levees are banks erected along the sides of 
 rivers, to prevent the water from overflowing the planta- 
 tions, during the periodical floods. 'i here is a levee 
 along the Mississippi, above and below New Orleans, 130 
 miles long. When the waters burst through these levees, 
 as they sometimes do, they tear every thing before them, 
 destroying the crops, and buildings, and, frequently, ruining 
 the soil. 
 
 Soil. The parts of the state which are cultivated are, 
 almost exclusively, alluvial lands on the banks of the Mis- 
 sissippi, the Teche, Red river, the Wachita, and its branches. 
 The lands on Red river are considered the best in the United 
 States for the cultivation of cotton. 
 
 Productions. The staple productions are cotton, sugar, 
 and rice. Cotton succeeds best on the deep alluvial soil of 
 the rivers, but is very profitable also on the prairie land. 
 The principal sugar plantations are on the banks of the 
 Mississippi, Teche, and Vermillion, below lat. 31**. In 
 1817, there were 20,000,000 pounds of sugar made in this 
 state. There is a very large extent of country, admirably 
 adapted to the cultivation of rice. 
 
 Tobacco, indigo, w^heat, rye, peaches, oranges, figs, pome- 
 granates, plums, grapes, &c. would grow luxuriantly, but they 
 are not cultivated to any considerable extent. Cotton, sugar, 
 and rice yield larger profits to the planters, and engross all 
 their attention. 
 
 Cattle. The extensive prairie lands in the southwestern 
 part of the state, are admirably adapted to the rearing of 
 cattle, and are extensively used for this purpose. Many of 
 the farmers in this district count their cattle by the thousand. 
 
TENNESSEE. 109 
 
 Scdt, Salt springs abound between Red river and the 
 Wachita. Near Natchitoches, salt is made in sufficient quan- 
 tities for the supply of all the settlements on Red river. 
 
 Commerce. The Mississippi river, which terminates its 
 course in this state, is the natural outlet for all the country 
 from the Alleghany to the Rocky mountains, and from the 
 great lakes to the Spanish dominions. The produce of all the 
 cultivated parts of this immense valley is floated down the Mis- 
 sissippi, and exported from New-Orleans. 
 
 WESTERN STATES. 
 
 The western states are, 
 
 1. Tennessee, 
 
 2. Kentucky, 
 
 3. Ohio, 
 
 4. Indiana,' 
 
 5. Illinois, 
 
 6. Missouri 
 
 Situation. These states lie west of the Alleghany moun- 
 tains, between 35° and 42" N. lat. 
 
 Soil. The soil of this section is generally very fertile. 
 
 Productions. The productions are very various. The most 
 common are wheat, Indian corn, hemp, rye, oats, barley, &c. 
 
 Population. This section of the Union has been but re- 
 cently settled, and the population is increasing with wonderful 
 i-apidity. Emigrants are constantly pouring in like a tide, from 
 New-England, and all the old states. In 1790, the population 
 of this section was only 109,368 ; in 1800, it was 377,016 ; in 
 1810, 956,645 ; and in 1820, nearly 2,000,000. 
 
 Commerce. All the Western States lie o;i the Mississippi, 
 or its branches. Their produce is floated down the different 
 rivers, to the Mississippi, and down that river to New-Orleans. 
 The current of the Mississippi is so strong, that heretofore 
 boats could not ascend it, and the Western States were sup- 
 plied with foreign goods from Philadelphia and Baltimore. 
 But since steam boats have been used to stem the current 
 of the Mississippi, these states begin to receive foreign goods 
 from New-Orleans. 
 
 TENNESSEE, 
 
 Situation, Tennessee is bounded N. by Kentucky ; E. by 
 North Carolina ; S, by Geor^a^ Alabama, and Mississippi : 
 
 K 
 
IK) TENNESSEE. 
 
 anfid W. by Arkansas Territory, from which it is separated by 
 Mississippi river. 
 
 It is very regular in its shape, its northern and southern 
 boundaries being parallels of latitude. 
 
 Divisions. The Cumberland mountains, which cross^ the 
 state from S. W. to N. E. form a natural division. The part 
 east of these mountains is called East Tennessee, and the part 
 west of the mountains. West Tennessee. 
 
 West Tennessee is divided into 30 counties, viz. Bedford, 
 Carrol, Davidson, Dickson, Dyer, Franklin, Gibson, Giles, 
 Hardin, Hardemaw, Haywood, Henderson, Henry, Hickman, 
 Humphries, Jackson, Lawrence, Lincoln, Madison, Maury,, 
 M'Nairy, Montgomery, Obion, Overton, Perry, Robertson, 
 Rutherford, Shelby, Smith, Stewart, Sumner, Tipton, Warren^ 
 Wayne, Weakly, White, Williamson, Wilson. 
 
 East Tennessee is divided into 22 counties, viz. Anderson, 
 Bledsoe, Blount, Campbell, Carter, Claiborne, Cocke, Gran* 
 ger, Greene, Hamilton, Hawkins, Jefferson, Knox, Marion^ 
 M'Minn, Monroe, Morgan, Rhea, Roane, Sevier, Sullivan^ 
 Washington. 
 
 History. No white settlements were made in this state till 
 about the year 1775. Until 1790, it was a part of North Ca- 
 rolina. In 1796 it was admitted into the Union as an inde* 
 pendent state. 
 
 Rivers. The Mississippi is the western boundary. The 
 other great rivers are the Cumberland and the Tennessee^ both 
 of which form a junction with the Ohio, near its mouth. 
 
 The Cumberland rises in the Cumberland mountains, in the 
 southeast part of Kentucky, and running into Tennessee, 
 makes a circular bend, and passes into Kentucky again. It i^ 
 600 miles long, and is navigable for boats 600. 
 
 Tennessee river, properly speaking, rises in Virginia, under 
 the name of the Holston^ and runs southwest, through the state 
 of Tennessee into Alabama ; it then turns and runs northwest 
 tlirough Tennessee again, and empties itself in Kentucky, near 
 the mouth of the Ohio. Its course resembles the letter V. 
 It is navigable to the Muscle shoals, 260 miles, at all seasons 
 of the year. Here it spreads out, and becomes so shallow, that 
 h is difficult for boats to pass, when the water is low. Above 
 the shoals there is no obstruction for 260 miles, till you come 
 to the suck, or Whirl, where the river breaks thrdugh the Cum- 
 
TENNESSEE. tU 
 
 berland mountains. Here the stream is very rapid^ but boats 
 ascend without much danger or difficulty. 
 
 The principal branches of the Tennessee are, the Hlwassee^ 
 \yhich joins it near Washington, about 70 miles above the Suck; 
 the Clinch^ which rises in Virginia, and running S. W. joins 
 the Tennessee below Knoxville. French Broad river joins 
 the Holston at Knoxville. Duck river empties itself into the 
 Tennessee, about 80 miles W. of Nashville. 
 
 Ohian^ CMckamw^ Forked Dcer^ and Wolf are small rivers 
 \vhich flow into the Mississippi. 
 
 Mountains. The Cwrriberland mountains run from S. W. to 
 N. E. through the middle of the state, between Cumberland 
 and Tennessee rivers, and pass into Virginia, where they are 
 Called the Laurel mountains. 
 
 The Alleghany mountains are the eastern boundary of the 
 state, separating it from North Carolina. There are many 
 femall and parallel ridges between the Alleghany and Cumber- 
 land mountains. 
 
 Curiosities. The Whirl or Suck.^ in Tennessee river, 
 "where it breaks through the Cumberland mountains, is as great 
 a curiosity as the passage of the Potomac through the Blue 
 Ridge. It is about half way between Knoxville and Muscle 
 shoals, near the point where the southern boundary of the state 
 Crosses the Tennessee. 
 
 The river is here compressed to a width of about 70 yards. 
 Just as it enters the mountain, a large rock projects from the 
 northern shore, which causes a sudden bend in the river ; the 
 water is thrown with great violence and rapidity against the 
 southern shore, whence it rebounds around the point of the 
 rock, and produces the whirl. Boat« pass down the whirl with 
 great velocity, but without danger. 
 
 Chief Tmcns. Murfreeshorough., near the centre of the 
 state, 32 miles S. E. of Nashville, was the seat of government 
 till 1826, when it was removed to Nashville. 
 
 Knoxville is on the Holston, near the junction of French Broad 
 Hiver. Population, about 2,000. iVa^AtjiZZe, the largest town 
 in the state, is on the Cumberland, which is navigable to this 
 place for vessels of 30 or 40 tons. A steam boat passes be- 
 tween Nashville and New-Orleans, and a road is opened through 
 the Indian country to Natchez. It is in the midst of a popu- 
 lous and fertile country^ and has a flourishing trade. Popnla?' 
 Iron, about 4,500. 
 
113 TENNESSEE. 
 
 Clarhsville is on the Cumberland, 6U miles N. W. of Nash- 
 ville. Greenville is 75 miles E. of Knoxville. Washington is 
 near the Tennessee, 75 miles S. W. of Knoxville. Brainerd^ 
 a missionary station among the Cherokees, is 60 miles S. of 
 Washington, on a small stream which runs into the Tennessee. 
 
 Education. The two principal literary institutions are the 
 college at Knoxville, in E. Tennessee, and Cumberland college 
 at Nashville in W. Tennessee. 
 
 Population. In 1820, Tennessee contained 422,813 inhab- 
 itants, of whom 80,095 were slaves. The population has in- 
 creased with very great rapidity. In 1790 there were but 
 35,000 inhabitants. The most populous district in the state, 
 is the country for 30 miles around Nashville. This district 
 contained in 1810, more than one third of the whole popula- 
 tion. 
 
 Indians. The CJieroJcees own a large section in the south- 
 east corner of the state, on both sides of Hiwassee river. They 
 own also the neighbouring parts of Georgia and Alabama. 
 Their number is about 12.000. They are partially civilized. 
 Many of them own cattle, sheep, ploughs, mills, &C. There 
 is a missionary station at Brainerd, and schools in several other 
 places, where the children are taught to read and write, and 
 are instructed in religion. The nation is very rapidly improv- 
 ing under the instruction of the missionaries. 
 
 Religion. The principal denominations are Methodists, 
 Baptists, and Presbyterians. 
 
 Face of the Country. East Tennessee is mountainous. 
 West Tennessee is partly level and partly hilly. 
 
 Soil. In East Tennessee the mountains have a barren soil, 
 but the valleys between them are fertile. In West Tennessee 
 there is much fertile land. 
 
 Productions. Cotton is the staple production. Tobacco, 
 hemp, Indian corn, and wheat, are also cultivated to a consid- 
 erable extent. Cattle are raised, in large numbers, in East 
 Tennessee. 
 
 Commerce. The principal exports are cotton, tobacco, and 
 flour. These are carried down the Tennessee and Cumber- 
 land to the Ohio, and thence down the Ohio and IVlississippi to 
 New-Orleans. This course is very circuitous. It is expected 
 that a road or canal will soon be formed, connecting Tennessee 
 river with some of the branches of the Tombigbee, which will 
 -horten the dit-tance. to New-Orleans more than one hnff , 
 
KENTUCKY. 113 
 
 Foreign goods imported into the state have hitherto been 
 brought from Philadelphia and Baltimore to East Tennessee iii 
 wagons ; and to West Tennessee, principally by wagons as far 
 as Pittsburg, and thence by water down the Ohio, and up the 
 Cumberland. 
 
 KENTUCKY. 
 
 Situation. Kentucky is bounded on the N. by Illinois, In- 
 diana, and Ohio, from which it is separated by Ohio river ; E. 
 by Virginia, from which it is separated by Big Sandy river and 
 Cumberland mountains ; S. by Tennessee ; and W. by the 
 jMississippi. 
 
 Divisions. The state is divided into 75 counties, viz. — - 
 Hickman, Graves, Livingston, Union, Henderson, Davies, 
 Breckenridge, Mead, Bullet, Jefferson, Oldham, Gallatin^ 
 !Boone, Campbell, Pendleton, Bracken, Mason, Lewis and 
 Greenup, on the Ohio; Lawrence, Floyd, Pike, Perry and 
 Harlan, on the Virginia boundary ; Whitley, Wayne, Cumber- 
 land, Monroe, Allen, Simpson, Logan, I odd, Christian, Trigg, 
 and M'Crackin, on the Tennessee line ; Owen, Scott, Wood- 
 ford, Jessamine, Fayette, Clark, Montgomery, Bath, Fleming, 
 Nicholas, Bourbon, Harrison, and Grdint, in the interior, east cf 
 Kentucky river; Henry, Shelby, Franklin, Mercer, Garrard, 
 Madison^ Estill, Clay, Knox, Rockcastle, Pulaski, Lmcoln, 
 Casey, Adair, Greene, Hardin, Nelson, Hart, Barren, Grayson, 
 and Ohio, in the interior, between Kentucky and Green rivers ; 
 Warren, Butler, Muhlenburg, Hopkins, Caldwell, and Calla- 
 way, in the interior, on and west of Greenriver. 
 
 Rivers. Kentucky is almost surrounded by navigabfe waters. 
 The Ohio is the northern boundary. It flows along the borders 
 of the state for more than 600 miles. The Mississippi is the 
 "western boundary. The Big Sandy is the eastern boundary. 
 
 Cumberland river rises in the Cumberland mountains, and 
 passes into the state of Tennessee, where it makes a circular 
 bend, and returning to Kentucky, flows into the Ohio, 60 miles 
 from the Mississippi. The Tennessee joins the Ohio 1 2 miles 
 below the mouth of the Cumberland. 
 
 The other rivers which unite with the Ohio from this state 
 
 are Green, Kentucky, and Licking. These rivers are navigable 
 
 by boats for a considerable distance,, during the winter ifloodS) 
 
 but in the summer and autumn are much reduced in size. 
 
 Chief Towns. Frankfort, the seat of geveriunciit, Sa On 
 
 K S 
 
iX4 KENTUClCY 
 
 Kentucky river, 60 miles above its confluence with the Ohio. 
 When the river is high, steam boats of 300 tons come up as 
 far as this place. Population in 1820, 1,679. 
 
 Lexington^ the largest and wealthiest town in the state, is 
 pleasantly situated about 30 miles S. E. of Frankfort, in the 
 midst of a fertile and dehghtful plain, of 40 miles in diameter. 
 It has considerable commerce, and flourishing manufactures. 
 Its growth has been rapid. The site of the town was, not long 
 since, a mere forest ; the first tree was cut down in 1779 ; the 
 town was laid out in I78^i ; in 1810, it contained more than 
 4,000 inhabitants, and in 1820, 5,279. 
 
 Louisville^ situated at the rapids.of the Ohio river, 50 miles 
 W. of Frankfort, is the second town in the state in wealth and 
 consequence. A very extensive and active commerce is car- 
 ried on between this place and Natchez, New-Orleans, and St. 
 Louis. The great command of water power afforded by the 
 rapids of the river, and the other advantages of its situation, 
 \n\\\ probably make Louisville, at no distant day, a great man- 
 ufacturing town. Population, in 1820, 4,012. 
 
 Maysmlle^ on the Ohio, 60 miles N. E. of Lexington, has 
 considerable trade. Augusta is on the Ohio, 45 miles above 
 Cincinnati. Russehille is near the southern boundary, 55 
 miles N. of Nashville, in Tennessee. Smithjield is on the Ohio, 
 3 miles below the mouth of the Cumberland. Henderson is 
 on the Ohio, below the mouth of Green river. Newport is at 
 the mouth of Licking river, opposite Cincinnati in Ohio. Dan- 
 ville is 40 miles S. of Frankfort. 
 
 Education. Transylvania University.^ at Lexington, is a 
 flourishing institution. A college, has been recently estab- 
 lished at Danville, supported principally by Presbyterians, and 
 another at Augusta, supported chiefly Ijy Methodists. 
 
 Population. In 1820, Kentucky contained 564,3 17 inhab- 
 itants, of whom 126,732 were slaves. The population of this 
 state has increased with astonishing rapidity. The first settle- 
 ment by the whites was made in 1775. 
 
 Religion. The most numerous' denominations are Baptists^. 
 Presbyterians, and Methodists. 
 
 Face of the country. The eastern counties are mountain- 
 ous ; those on the Ohio river are hilly and broken ; the rest of 
 the state is partly level, and partly undulating. 
 
 Soil. Thfe eastern counties, and those on the Ohio, are the 
 poorest parts of the state. The interior is very fertile, espe? 
 
OHJb. 115 
 
 cially the country for 50 miles round Lexington, and the dis- 
 trict between Green river and the Cumberland. 
 
 The whole state, below the mountains, rests on an immense 
 bed of limestone, usually about 8 feet below the surface. 
 There are every where apertures in this bed of hmestone, 
 through which the waters of the rivers sink'into the earth. The 
 large rivers of Kentucky, for this reason, are more diminished 
 during the dry season, than those of any part of the United 
 States, and the small streams entirely disappear. 
 
 Productions, The principal productions are hemp, tobacco, 
 wheat, Indian corn, rye, &c. 
 
 Salt. Salt springs or licks abound, and salt is obtained 
 from them in sufficient quantities to supply, not only this state, 
 but a great part of Ohio and Tennessee. 
 
 Commerce. Hemp, tobacco, and wheat are the principal 
 exports. These are carried down the Ohio and Mississippi to 
 New Orleans, and foreign goods are received from the same 
 place in return. Louisville on the Ohio, at the rapids, is the 
 centre of this trade. 
 
 Ganal. A canal is about to be opened around the rapids 
 of the Ohio, at Louisville. The^e rapids are the only impor- 
 tant obstruction to the navigation of the Ohio from its moutli 
 to Pittsburg. 
 
 Curiosities. In the southwestern part of the state, between 
 Green river and the Cumberland, there are several wonderful 
 caves. One, called the Mammoth cai^e, is said to be 8 or 10 
 miles long. 
 
 The banks of the Kentucky and Cumberland rivers, are 
 great curiosities. In many places they are perpendicular pre- 
 cipices, 300 feet high, of sohd limestone. 
 
 OHIO. 
 
 Situation. Ohio is bounded N. by Michigan Territory and 
 lake Erie ; E. by Pennsylvania ; S. by Virginia and Kentucky, 
 from both of which it is separated by the river Ohio ; and W. 
 by Indiana. Its eastern and western boundaries are lines of 
 longitude. 
 
 Dimsions. The state is divided into 72 counties ; viz. 
 Hamilton, Clermont, Brown, Adams, Scioto, Lawrence, Gallia, 
 Meigs, Washington, Monroe, Belmont, and Jefferson, on tlw 
 Ohio; Columbiana, Trumbull, and Ashtabula, on the Pennsyh 
 mma line: Geauga, Cuyahoga, Loram, Hurom and Bah* 
 
11& OHIO. 
 
 dusky, on Icacc Erie; Wood, Henry, and Williams, on the ! 
 Michigan line ; Paulding, Van Wert, Mercer, Darke, Preble, f 
 and Butler, on the Indiana line; Portage, Medina, and Seneca, j 
 in the interior^ on the Connecticut Reserve ; Pike, Ross, Picka- i 
 way, Franklin, Delaware, and Marion, on the Scioto river^ and \ 
 its branches ; Richland, Wayne, Stark, Harrison, Tuscarawas, ! 
 Coshocton, Knox, Licking, Muskingum, Guernsey, Morgan, . 
 Perry, Fairfield^ Hocking, Athens, and Jackson, in the interior^ ' 
 east of the Scioto ; and Highland, Fayette, Madison, Union, \ 
 Hardin, Crawford, Hancock, Putnarn, Allen, Shelby, Logan, 
 Champaign, Miami, Montgomery, Clark, Oreen, Clinton, and 
 Warren, in the interior^ west of the Scioto. 
 
 Rivers. Ohio river runs along the whole southern border, 
 a distance of 420 miles, separating this state from Virginia an3 
 Kentucky. 
 
 The principal rivers which fall into the Ohio, beginning in 
 the east, are, the Muskingum^ the HocJchocJdng., the Scioto^ and 
 the Great Miami. 
 
 The principal rivers which fall into lake Erie, beginning in 
 the west, are the Miami of the lakes, or Maumee, the San-* 
 dusky^ and the Cuyahoga. 
 
 Canals, The navigable waters of the Muskingum and the 
 Cuyahoga approach within a few miles of each other, so that 
 if a short canal were cut, a water communication would be ' 
 opened between lake Erie, and Ohio river. The same object 
 might be effected by a canal between the Sandusky and the 
 Scioto. 
 
 Chief Towns. Cincinnati^ the largest town in Ohio, is 
 near the southwest corner of the state, on Ohio river, 20 miles 
 above the mouth of the Great Miami. Numerous and exten- 
 sive manufacturing establishments have been erected here, and 
 the commerce and population have increased with astonishing 
 rapidity. In 1810, the population was 2,540; in 1826, 16,230 
 
 Chillicotlie is on the Scioto, 70 miles from its mouth. Popu- 
 lation in 1820,2,426. 
 
 Columbus, the seat of government, is on the Scioto, near th© 
 centre of the state, 45 miles north of Chillicothe. It was laid 
 out in 1812, and in 1820 contained 1,500 inhabitants. The 
 surrounding country is pleasant and fertile. 
 
 Marietta, the oldest town in the state, is on the Ohio, at the 
 mouth of the Muskingum. The town is liable to annual inun- 
 dations ; an inconvenience which has much retarded its growth-. 
 
OHIO, 117 
 
 Ship-building has been carried on here to a considerable 
 extent. 
 
 Zanesville is on the Muskingum, 60 miles N. of Marietta. 
 Steubenville is on the Ohio, near the Pennsylvania boundary. 
 Portsmouth is on the Ohio, at the mouth of the Scioto. Athens 
 is on the Hockhocking, about 50 miles E. of Chillicothe. 
 Cleavela7id is on lake Erie, at the mouth of the Cuyahoga. 
 
 Education. The Ohio Vniversiti/^ at Athens, and the Cin- 
 cinnati college are the most respectable literary institutions. 
 They are in their infancy, but their prospects are promising. 
 
 Canals. A canal has been commenced at Cleaveland on 
 lake Erie, which is to proceed in a S. W. direction through the 
 heart of the state to the Ohio river at the mouth of the Scioto. 
 It is about 300 miles long, and the cost is estimated at between 
 two and three miUions of dollars. This canal will open a navi- 
 gable communication between the country on the great lakes 
 and the southern and western parts of the union. The Miami 
 canal from Cincinnati to Dayton is about 67 miles long. 
 
 Population, The increase of population in this state is 
 almost unexampled. In 1790 it was but 3,000 ; in 1800, 
 42,156 ; in 1810, 230,760 ; and in 1820, 581,43.4. There are 
 no slaves in Ohio. 
 
 Indians. In 1795, nearly the whole of the state was owned 
 by the Indians, but they have since ceded nearly all their lands 
 to the United States. The few that remain live in the north- 
 west part of the state. 
 
 Religion. The Presbyterians are most numerous, and next 
 to them are the Methodists. 
 
 Face of the Country. The southeastern part of the state is 
 hilly ; the rest is, generally, level. 
 
 Soil and Productions. The soil is generally fertile. The 
 counties on the Scioto and Great Miami are perhaps the best 
 in the state. Wheat is the staple production. Other kinds of 
 grain are also extensively cultivated. 
 
 Commerce. The principal exports are flour, pork, and 
 tobacco. These are carried down tliie Ohio and Mississippi to 
 New-Orleans, and foreign goods received from the same place 
 by the steam boats, and from Philadelphia and Baltimore, 
 across the Alleghany mountains. 
 
 Minerals. Coal abounds in the eastern part of the state, 
 near the Ohro. Salt springs are foutid ne^t Srioto and Mus- 
 
118 INDIANA. 
 
 kingum rivers. Iron ore and freestone abound on the banks of 
 the Hockhocking. 
 
 INDIANA. 
 
 Situation. Indiania. is bounded N. by Ilhnois, and Michiganf 
 Territory 5 E. by Ohio ; S. by Kentucky, from which it is sepa- 
 rated by the river Ohio ; W. by Illinois. 
 
 Divisions. The northern half of the state is in possession of 
 the Indians. The part occupied by the whites is divided into 
 51 counties; viz. Dearborn, Switzerland, Jefferson, Clark^ 
 Floyd, Harrison, Crawford, Perry, Spencer, Warwick, Vander- 
 burgh, and Posey on the Ohio ; Gibson, Knox, Sulliv,an. Viga^ 
 Parke, and Vermillion, on the Wabash; Allen, Randolph, 
 Wayne, Union, and Franklin, on the eastern boundary ; Daviess, 
 Greene, Owen, Monroe, Morgan, Johnson, Marion, and Hamil- 
 ton, on the west fork of White river ; Pike, Dubois, Orange, 
 Martin, Lawrence, Washington, Scott, Jackson, Jennings, 
 Ripley, Decatur, Bartholomew, Shelby, Rush, Fayette, Henry, 
 and Madison, between the counties on White river and those on 
 the Ohio; Putnam, Hendricks, and Montgomery, feef?zjee?i th^ 
 counties on White river and those on the Wabash. 
 
 Rivers. The Ohio is the southern boundary of the state, 
 from the mouth of the Greal Miami to that of the Wabash. 
 
 The Wabash rises in the riortheast part of the state, and 
 flowing southwest, empties itself into the Ohio 30 miles above 
 the mouth of the Cumberland. For the last half of its course 
 it is the boundary between Indiana and Illinois. It is more 
 than 600 miles long, and is navigable for keel boats 400 miles, 
 and for small boats nearly to its source. Tippecanoe river, in 
 the northern part of the state, is a branch of the Wabash. 
 
 White river, also a tributary of the Wabash, has two prin- 
 cipal branches, both of which rise in the eastern part of the 
 state, and running in a S. E. direction, unite about 20 miles 
 S. E. of Vincennes. 
 
 Whitewater river joins the great Miami, near the southeast 
 corner of the state. 
 
 Canal. The navigable waters of the Wabash approach 
 within a few miles of the navigable waters of the Maumee, 
 which flows into lake Erie. A canal connecting the two rivers 
 would open a communication between lake Erie and the Mis- 
 sissippi. 
 
 Chief Towns. Ttncenncs is on the Wabash, about 200 miles 
 
iLLlNOliS, 119 
 
 from its mouth. It was first settled by the French in 173Q. 
 The surrounding country is fertile. 
 
 Indianapolis, the seat of government, is nearly in the centre 
 of the state, on the east fork of White river. 
 
 Corydon, the former, seat of government, is 25 miles W. of 
 Louisville in Kentucky, on a small creek which empties itself 
 into the Ohio. 
 
 Vevay is a Swiss settlement, near the south-east corner of 
 the state, on the Ohio, 45 miles below Cincinnati. 
 
 Population. This is a new state and is becoming populous 
 very rapidly. In 1801 the white population was less than 
 5,000 ; in 1810 it was 24,520 ; and in 1820, 147,178. 
 
 Face of the country, <^c. Near the Ohio the country is hilly ; 
 further north it is level and abounds with extensive and fertile 
 prairies. The soil is rich, particularly on the Wabash and 
 White rivers, yielding Indian corn, wheat, and other grain in 
 abundance. The vine is cultivated by the Swiss settlers near 
 Vevay. 
 
 ILLIXOIS. 
 
 ^ittuxtion. Illinois is bounded N. by thie North-west Terri- 
 tory ; E. by lake Michigan, and Indiana ; S. by Kentucky, 
 from which it is separated by the Ohio river ; W. by the Missis^ 
 sippi, which separates it from Missouri. 
 
 Divisions. The northern part of the state belongs to the 
 Indians. The white settlements are in the south, and are divi- 
 ded into 45 coomties : viz. 
 
 Vermillion and Edgar mi the eastern boundary ; Clark, Craw- 
 ford, Lawrence, Wabash, Edwards, and White ow^^e Wdba^Ji ; 
 Gallatin, Pope, Johnson, and Alexander, on the Ohio ; Union, 
 Jackson, Randolph, Monroe, St. Clair, and Madison, on the 
 Mississippi ; Green, Morgan, and Sangamon, on the east side 
 of the Illinois ; Montgomery, Fayette, Bond, Clinton, Wash- 
 ington, Marion, Jefferson, Franklin, Hamilton, Wayne, and 
 Clay, in the interior, between the Illinois and the Wabash; 
 Calhoun, Pike, Schuyler, Fulton, Peoria, Putnam, Henry, 
 Knox, Mercer, Warren, Hancock, Adams, and M'Donough, 
 between the lUinms and Mississippi. 
 
 Rivers. The Mississippi, Ohio, and W(dfask are boundary 
 rivers on the west, south, and east, for more than 1,000 miles. 
 
 The principal branch of the Wabash is the Little Wabash 
 Which joins it near the S. K. corner of the state. Am Vase 
 
120 fflSSObitL 
 
 river empties itself into the Mississippi more than 30 miles 
 above the Ohio. 
 
 KaslmsJda iiver rises in the eastern part of the state, and 
 flowing S. W. joins the Mississippi 130 miles above the Ohio. 
 It is navigable for boats 130 miles. 
 
 Illinois river rises in Indiana, near lake Michigan, and pur- 
 suing a south-west course, joins the Mississippi 21 miles above 
 the Missouri. It is navigable through its whole extent. Its 
 head waters approach very near to the waters of lake Michigan, 
 and a canal is in contemplation to connect them. 
 
 Rock river rises near the northern boundary of the state, and 
 enters the Mississippi 160 mil^ above the Illinois. 
 
 CMef Towns. Vavdalia^ the seat of government, is on 
 Kaskaskia river, 70 miles E. N. E. of St. Louis. Kashaahia 
 is on Kaskaskia river, 1 1 miles from its mouth. It is a French 
 settlement, more than 100 years old. 
 
 Caholda is a French settlement, near the Mississippi, 5 miles 
 from St. Louis, on the opposite side of the river. Shavmeetown 
 is on the Ohio, 9 miles below the mouth of the Wabash. 
 Edwardsville is 15 miles N. E. of Cahokia. 
 
 Population. In 1810, the population was 12,282 ; in 1820, 
 S5,211, and in 1825, 67,656. The settlements are in the 
 south, near the banks of the great rivers. 
 
 Education. Congress have granted one section in every 
 township for the support of schools, and two townships for the 
 support of a university. 
 
 Face of the country .> <Sf€. Illinois is a flat country, abound- 
 ing with extensive prairies. The soil is generally very fertile, 
 particularly on the margin of the rivers. Corn is the staple 
 production. 
 
 Salt. There are extensive salt works belonging to the 
 United States, 12 miles W. of Shawneetown. Between 
 200,000 and 300,000 bushels of salt are annually made at these 
 works. 
 
 Situation. Missouri is bounded W. and N. by Missouri 
 Territory ; E. by the Mississippi, which divides it from Illinois 
 and Kentucky ; and S. by Arkansas Territory. 
 
 Divisions. The state is divided into 28 counties : viz. 
 
 New-Madrid, Scott, Cape Girardeau, Perry, St. Genevieve, 
 Jefierson, St. Louis, St. Charles, Lincoln, Pike, and Ralls, on 
 the Mrssusi[pi; Montgomery, Calllaway, BotJne-, liowarfl, 
 
MISSOURI. 121 
 
 Chariton, Ray, and Clay, north of the Missouri ; Lillard, 
 Saline, Cooper, Cole, Gasconade, and Franklin, on the smith 
 hank of the Missouri ; Wayne in the south-western part of the 
 state, and Washington, St. Francois, and Madison, in the south- 
 east. 
 
 Rivers. The Mississippi is the eastern boundary. Des 
 Moines river, a branch of the Mississippi, makes part of the 
 northern boundary. 
 
 The Missouri comes from the west, and passing through the 
 middle of the state, joins the Mississippi 20 miles below the 
 mouth of the Illinois. The principal branches of the Missouri 
 in this state, are the Gasconade^ Great Osage, and Jffwe rivers 
 from the south, and Grand river from the north. 
 
 The Merrimack empties itself into the Mississippi 14 miles 
 below St. Louis. It is navigable 350 miles. 
 
 Chief Towns. St. Louis is on the Mississippi, 14 miles by 
 land below the mouth of the Missouri. It is admirably situ- 
 ated for commerce, near the junction of the three great rivers, 
 Missouri, Mississippi, and Illinois. The population is increas- 
 ing very rapidly. In 1810, it was 1,600, and in 1820, 4,598. 
 
 Jefferson city, the seat of government, is on the south bank 
 of the Missouri, a little above the mouth of Osage river. 
 
 HerculaTieum is on the Mississippi, 30 miles below St. Louis. 
 It is the place of depot for the lead obtained fron* the rich 
 mines 46 miles west of the town. Here they manufacture 
 shot. 
 
 St. Genevieve is on the Mississippi, 64 miles below St. Louis. 
 Population 1,500. 
 
 St. Charles, is on the Missouri, 18 miles north-west of St. 
 Louis. Franklin is on the Missouri, 160 miles from St. Louis. 
 Cape Girardeau is on the Mississippi, 20 miles above the 
 mouth of the Ohio. New-Madrid is on the Mississippi, 75 
 miles below the mouth of the Ohio. 
 
 Population. . The population is increasing very rapidly. In 
 1810, it was only 20,000; in 1820, 66,586, and in 1825, 
 80,677, of whom 13,330 were slaves. The settlements are 
 principally along the banks of the Mississippi and Missouri. 
 
 Soil, 4*c. On all the rivers there are extensive alluvial 
 tracts which are very fertile, though in some places exposed to 
 inundation. A very extensive tract on both sides of the Mis- 
 souri, between the mouths of Osage and Kansas rivers, is very 
 lertile. The Drodiicfinn-' are Itidiiin rfsm. oMtf^n. wheat, rve. 
 
,1^, 
 
 im MlClllGAN TERRITORY. 
 
 Minerals. The famous lead mines of this country are near 
 the river Merrimack, 45 miles west of Hercularieum. The ore 
 is exceedingly rich, and the mines are extensive enough ta 
 supply the whole world. Salt springs abound, and salt is ob- 
 tained from them in great quantities. Coal is found in 
 abundance. 
 
 Commerce. The principal exports are lead and furs. A 
 large capital is employed in the fur trade with the Indians, up 
 the Missouri and Mississippi. St. Louis is the centre of com- 
 merce. Boats are continually passing between St. Louis and 
 New-Orleans. 
 
 MICHIGAN TERRITORY. 
 
 Situation. Michigan Territory is a peninsula, lying betweeit 
 lake Michigan on the west, and lakes Huron, St. Clair, and 
 Erie, on the east. On the S. are Ohio and Indiana. 
 
 Divisions. A considerable portion of this territory is still in 
 possession of the Indians. The part owned by the whites lies 
 principally in the S. E. along the banks of lakes Erie, Huron, 
 and St. Clair, and extending back about 80 miles. This part 
 is divided into 10 counties, viz.- — Brow^n, Crawford, Lenawee, 
 Macomb, Michilliraackinac, Monroe, Oakland, St. Marie, 
 Wayne, and Washington. 
 
 Lakes and Bays. Half of lakes MicJdgan^ Huron., and St. 
 Clair ^ and a small part of lake Erie., are in this territory, 
 Saganaw bay is a long deep bay, on the west side of lake 
 Huron. Traverse bay is on the N. E side of lake Michigan. 
 
 Rivers. The river or straits of Michillimackinac connect 
 lake Michigan with lake Huron. St. Clair rivef connects lake 
 Huron with lake St. Clair. Detroit river connects lake St, 
 Clair with lake Erie. Saganaw river discharges itself into 
 Saganaw bay. Grand river^ and many smaller streams, flow 
 into lake Michigan from the eastern shore. 
 
 Chief Towns. Detroii is on Detroit river, between lake 
 Erie and lake St. Clair. It has a fort and a garrison, and is 
 concerned in the fur trade. Population in 1820, 1422. 
 
 Mickillimackinac fort is on an island in the river or straits of 
 Michillimackinac, between lake Michigan and lake Huron. It 
 is the grand depot of the- Canadian fur traders. 
 
 History. This country was settled by the French more than 
 150 years ago. In 1759 it fell, with Canada, into the hands 
 of the British, ^ince n«S3, it has bcion.Q^ed to the United 
 
 I 
 
ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 123 
 
 Population. The white population in 1820 was 8,896. The 
 settlements are principalJy in the south-east, along Detroit 
 river, and lake Erie. 
 
 Indians. The number of Indians is about 6,000. The 
 names of the tribes are, Chippewas, Ottawas, Potowottamies, 
 Wyandots, Munsees, Shawanese, and Delawares. 
 
 Face of the country., <^c. The country is flat, and the soil 
 generally fertile, producing wheat, oats, barley, rye, fruits, &c. 
 
 Inland Navigation. This territory is almost surrounded by 
 navigable waters. Steam boats go regularly during the sum- 
 mer, from Detroit to Buftalo on the east end of lake Erie, and, 
 occasionally from Detroit to Michiliimackinac. The ice closes 
 the navigation for nearly 6 months of the year. 
 
 NORTHWEST TERRITORY. 
 
 Situation, This territory is bounded N. by the British pos- 
 sessions and lake Superior ; E. by Michigan Territory ; S. by 
 Illinois, and W, by the Mississippi. 
 
 Rivers. The Mississippi is the western boundary. 
 
 Fox river empties itself into the bottom of Green bay. 
 The Ouisconsin discharges itself into the Mississippi near the 
 south-west corner of the territory. The navigable waters of 
 these two rivers, at one place, are only 3 miles apart. The 
 common route from Green Bay to the Mississippi is up Fox 
 river ; then, across the portage to the Ouisconsin, and down 
 the Ouisconsin to the Mississippi. 
 
 Black river, the Chippeway^ and the *S^. C7^oix join the Mis- 
 sissippi above the Ouisconsin. 
 
 Indians. This territory is inhabited by the Winnebagoes, 
 Menominees, and other Indians, about whom very little is 
 jknown. 
 
 ARKANSAS TERRITORY. 
 
 Situation. This territory is bounded N. by Missouri ter- 
 ritory and state ; E. by the Mississippi ; S. by Louisiana, and 
 the Mexican territories ; W, by the Mexican territories. 
 
 Divisions. The territory is divided into 9 counties, viz. — 
 Arkansas, Clark, Crawford, Hempstead, Independence, Law- 
 rence, Miller, Phillips, and Pulaski. 
 
 Rivers. The Mississippi is the eastern boundary, and Red 
 river, the south-western. 
 
 The Arkansas^ from which the territory derives its name, 
 •■:?es in the Rockv mountains, and runninjy vS. E. more than 
 
Hi MISSOURI TERRITORY. 
 
 2000 miles, enters the Mississippi 400 miles above the mouth 
 of Red river. It is navigable almost to its source. 
 
 White river enters the Mississippi 20 miles above the Ar- 
 kansas. It waters a great extent of country, and is navigable 
 1000 miles. 
 
 The St. Francis rises in the state of Missouri, and flovi^ing 
 south, joins the Mississippi i07 miles above the mouth of the 
 Arkansas. The banks of this river and of White river are 
 annually overflowed, for 100 miles above their mouths. 
 
 The Wachita or Ouachita rises in this state, and passes intcy 
 Louisiana. 
 
 Soil^ S^c. The country on White river and its branches is 
 the best in the territory, and among the best in America. It 
 is well adapted to cotton On the other rivers the land is very 
 fertile, except on the Wachita where it is poor and stony. 
 
 Settlement. Arlwpolis^ formerly called Little Rock, on 
 Arkansas river, is the seat of government. Dwight is a mis- 
 sionary station, in the Cherokee country, near Arkansas river, 
 130 miles above Arkopolis. Arkansas^ on Arkansas siver, 65 
 miles from its mouth, is an old French settlement. Population 
 in 1820, 874. 
 
 Population. In 1810 the population was only 1062, and in' 
 1820, 14,273, exclusive of Indians. The Indians occupy 
 nearly the whole of this territory. A part of the Cherokee 
 tribe have lately removed across the Mississippi, and settled on 
 Arkansas river. 
 
 Animals. The country on the Arkansas furnishes fine 
 hunting grounds. It abounds with buffaloes, deer, elk, bears, 
 wolves, panthers, 6lc. Wild horses abound in the prairies 
 between the Arkansas and Red river. 
 
 MISSOURI TERRITORY. 
 
 Situation. All the territory of the United States west of the 
 Mississippi, not included in the states of Missouri, Louisiana, 
 and Arkansas territory, is called Missouri territory. It ex- 
 tends from the Mississippi on the E. to the Pacific ocean on 
 the W. and from the British possessions on the N, to the Span- 
 ish possessions on the S. 
 
 Mountains. The Rocky mountains run from S. E. to N, W. 
 across this territory, dividing it into two parts. The part west 
 of the Rocky mountains is sometimes called the territory of 
 Oroir«'>n, 
 
FLORIDA. 
 
 Rivers. The Mississippi is the eastern boundary. Its 
 principal branches from this territory are St. Peter's river, 
 which joins it near the falls of St Anthony, and Moines river, 
 which forms part of the northern boundary of the state of 
 Missouri, 
 
 The great river Missouri is almost wholly in this territory. 
 It rises in the Rocky mountains, and its general course is S. E. 
 The principal branches on the v/est side are Osage., Kansas^ 
 la Platte^ and Yellowstone ; and on the east side, Grand Sioux^ 
 and Jacque. 
 
 Columbia river is the great river west of the Rocky Moun- 
 tains. It rises in about lat. 55*^ N. and flows S. W. into the 
 Pacific ocean. It is navigable to the falls, about 200 miles. 
 The three principal branches are Multnomah., Leicis and Clark 
 rivers, all of which rise in the Rocky mountains, and Hov*^ west. 
 
 All the above mentioned rivers are great rivers. The 
 smallest of them is more than 500 miles long. Most of them 
 are navigable through the. greater part of their couj-s.e. The 
 Mississippi is navigable to the falls of St. Anthony, 2400 miles 
 from the gulf of Mexico. The Missouri is navigable to the 
 great falls, 4000 miles from the same gulf. 
 
 Settlement. There is a white settlement called Astoria., near 
 the mouth of Columbia river. The inhabitants carry on the 
 fur trade with the surrounding Indians. 
 
 Indians. The whole of this vast territory is inhabited by 
 numerous tribes of savages, or wandering Indians. The 
 principal tribes east of the mountains are the Sioux., in the 
 north-east, between the Missouri and Mississippi : the Osages^ 
 in the south-east,, on the Osage and Arkansas rivers : the 
 Kansas., on Kansas river, and the Pavmees., between the Pvlis- 
 souri and the Platte, V.ery little is known about the other 
 tribes. 
 
 Animals. Buflaloes abound, especially near Arkansas 
 river. They are hunted by the Indians, for their hides and 
 tallow. Bears, deer, elk, wolves, panthers, wild horses, and 
 other wild animals are very numerous. The country on the 
 Arkansas river is the paradise of hunters. 
 
 FLORIDA. 
 
 Situation. Florida is a peninsula, bounded N. by Alabama 
 and Georgia ; E. and S. by the Atlantic, and W. by the gulf 
 of Mexi^^o, 
 
12S FLORIDA. 
 
 Bays. The principal bays are on the gulf of Mexico. Chat- 
 ham bay is near the southern extreniity of Florida, between 
 cape Sable arid cape Roman. Proceeding north we come to 
 Charlotte harbour, Spiritu Santo bay, St, Joseph^ s^ Apalachy^ 
 and Pensacola bays. 
 
 Rivers. The Perdido is the western boundary, separating ' 
 Florida from Alabama. The St. John'' s is the largest river. 
 It runs in a northerly direction, and enters the Atlantic 30 miles 
 N. of iSt. Augustine. 
 
 The Appalachicola^ formed by the junction of the Chata- 
 hoochee and Fhnt rivers, empties itself into St. George's 
 sound, which is the western part of Apalachy bay. St. Marks 
 river also discharges itself into Apalachy bay, and the Conecuh 
 or Escambia into Pensacola bay. 
 
 Swamp. Okefonoco swamp lies between Florida and 
 Georgia. 
 
 Chief Towns. St. Augustine is on the Atlantic coast, 30 
 miles below the mouth of St. John's river. It has a good 
 harbour. 
 
 Tallahassee.) the seat of government, is a new town, beauti- 
 fully situated, about 18 miles N. of St. Marks. 
 
 Pensacola is on Pensacola bay, 60 miles E. of Mobile, It 
 has a cleep, safe, and capacious harbour. St. Marks is on 
 Apalachy bay, at the mouth of St. Marks river. 
 
 Population. The white population is estimated at 12,000. 
 A few years since most of the country was in the possession 
 of the Seminole Indians, but in their recent contest with the 
 United States, they were nearly exterminated. 
 
 Face of the country., <Sfc. Florida resembles the low country 
 of Georgia and the other southern states. It is level, and ex- 
 cept on the borders of rivers, swamps and lakes, is barren. 
 
 Productions. The. productions are rice, cotton, sugar, In- 
 dian corn, oranges, lemons, figs, &;-c. 
 
 Canal. It is proposed to open a canal for sloops and ships 
 across the isthmus of Florida, from the river Suwanee to the 
 river St. John, a distance of only 13 miles. The country is 
 level, and the work can be constructed at a trifling expense. 
 The advantages are immense. It would save the long and 
 dangerous navigation around the peninsula, and shorten the 
 Aistanee from New-Orleans to the Atlantic cities more than a 
 thous?ind miles. 
 
MEXICO, OR NEW SPAIN. 
 
 127 
 
 3IEXICO, OR NEW SPAIN. 
 
 Situation. This country is bounded N. by the United 
 States ; E. by the United States and the gulf of Mexico ; S, 
 E. by Guatimala ; and W. by the Pacific Ocean, 
 
 Dimsions. Much of the northern part of the country is 
 inhabited by savage Indians. The remainder is divided into 
 15 provinces or intendencies, as follows : 
 
 Pop 
 
 Northern Provinces. 
 
 Sq. Miles, 
 
 Old California, 
 
 55,880 
 
 New California, 
 
 16,278 
 
 Sonora, 
 
 146,635 
 
 Durango, 
 
 129,247 
 
 New-Mexico, 
 
 43,731 
 
 San Luis Potosi, 
 
 263, 109 
 
 Southern Provinces. 
 
 
 Guadalaxara, 
 
 73,638 
 
 Zacatecas, 
 
 18,039 
 
 Guanaxuato, 
 
 6,878 
 
 Valladolid, 
 
 26,396 
 
 Mexico, 
 
 45,401 
 
 Puebla, 
 
 20,651 
 
 Vera Cruz, 
 
 31,720 
 
 Oaxaca, 
 
 34,064 
 
 Yucatan or Merida, 
 
 45,7^4 
 
 Grand Total, 
 
 957,441 
 
 J. in 1803. 
 
 Chief Tmcns. 
 
 9,000 
 
 Loreto. 
 
 15,600 
 
 Monterey. 
 
 121,400 
 
 Arispe. 
 
 159,700 
 
 Duraugo. 
 
 40,200 
 
 Santa Fe. 
 
 334,900 
 
 St. Luis Polos: 
 
 630,500 
 
 Guadalaxara. 
 
 153,300 
 
 Zacatecas. 
 
 617,300 
 
 Guanaxuato. 
 
 376,400 
 
 Valladolid. 
 
 1,511,800 
 
 Mexico. 
 
 813,300 
 
 Puebla; 
 
 156,000 
 
 Vera Cruz. 
 
 534,800 
 
 Oaxaca. 
 
 465.800 
 
 Merida. 
 
 5,840,000 
 
 Population. The population was estimated in 1803, at 
 5,840,000 ; in 1808, at 6,600,000 ; and in 1827, at 7,000,000 • 
 more than one third of whom were civilized Indians. This 
 population is settled principally in the southern provinces, 
 below the parallel of 25° N. lat. The northern provinces 
 contain more than two-thirds of the territory, but only about 
 one-tenth part of the population. 
 
 Face of the country. The land on both the coasts is low, 
 but rises gradually as you approach the interior, till it has 
 attained the height of 6 or 8,000 feet above the level of the 
 ocean ; it then spreads out into broad plains, which are called 
 table land, presenting the strange spectacle, of a level country 
 on the top of a lofty range of mountain?. These plains or 
 table lands extend along the range from lat. 189 to lat. 409 
 N. a distance of 1700 mile?. 
 
20 MEICICO, OR NEW SPAIN. 
 
 Mountains A range of mountains passes llirough the whole 
 length of this country from south-east to north-west, called the 
 Cordilleras of Mexico. It is a part of the great chain which 
 runs through the American continent from cape Horn to the 
 Frozen oc6an. Its top, as we have already mentioned, consists 
 of extensive plains or table land. From these elevated plains 
 single mountains occasionally shoot up, whose summits are 
 covered with everlasting snow. Several peaks near the city of 
 Mexico are more than 15,000 feet high, and the loftiest are 
 volcanoes. 
 
 Climate. In the low plains, on both coasts, the heat is very 
 oppressive, and the climate unfavourable to Europeans ; but 
 when you advance into the interior, and begin to ascend the 
 mountains, it becomes more temperate, and at the elevation of 
 4 or 5,000 feet there reigns perpetually a soft spring tempera- 
 ture, which is very healthful. As you advance still higher the 
 climate becomes cooler, and at length, on the tops of some of 
 the loftiest mountains, you come to the region of perpetual 
 snow. Thus in the course of 2 or 3 days, the traveller may 
 enjoy all the variety of summer, spring, and winter. 
 
 Soil and Productions. The productions of this country are 
 as various as its climate. In the course of a few hundred miles, 
 you may meet with almost all the fruits of the temperate and 
 torrid zones. 
 
 The soil of the table land is remarkably productive. Maize 
 is the most important object of agriculture ; and in some 
 places, from 2 to 3 harvests are taken annually. Wheat, rye, 
 and barley are extensively cultivated. 
 
 Rivers. Arkansas and Red rivers rise in this country and 
 flow south-east into the United States. The Sabine is the 
 eastern boundary. Rio del Norte rises in the Rocky moun- 
 tains, and flowing south-east, empties itself into the gulf of 
 Mexico. It is 1800 miles long. The Colorado rises on the 
 west side of the mountains, and flowing south-west, empties 
 itself into the gulf of Cahfornia. It is 1000 miles long. 
 The Gila comes from the east, and joins the Colorado near its 
 mouth. It is 600 miles long. 
 
 Chief Towns. Mexico., the largest town in all Spanish 
 America, is in about lat. 20^^ on the high table land, half way 
 between the gulf of Mexico and the Pacific ocean. It is near 
 lake Tezcuco, in a delightful valley, 230 miles in circumfer- 
 ence, and elevated more than 7000 feet above the level of the 
 sea. The ?fropt« are broad, clean, irenerallv paved, and well 
 
MEXICO, OR NEW SPAIN. 129 
 
 lighted. This beautiful city is supplied with water by two 
 aqueducts ; and its vegetables are raised on the elegant float- 
 ing gardens of lake Tezcuco. It contains upwards of 100 
 churches and 137,000 inhabitants, of whom one-half are 
 whites, and the rest Indians, mulattoes, and mestizoes. 
 
 Guanaxuato is about 150 miles north-west of Mexico. 
 The inhabitants are employed principally in the gold and silver 
 mines, for which the city is famous. — Population 60,000. 
 
 Puebla is 70 miles south-east of Mexico. Population, 
 80,000. Zacatecas^ famous for its rich silver mines, is about 
 250 miles north-west of Mexico. Population, 3.3,000. 
 
 Vera Cruz^ on the gulf of Mexico, and Acapulco^ on the 
 Pacific ocean, are the principal sea-ports. The port of Aca- 
 pulco is the best on the western coast, but the place is ex- 
 tremely unhealthy. The population does not exceed 4,000, 
 and they are chiefly mulattos. 
 
 Santa Fe is the most northern town of any note. It is on 
 the Rio Bravo del Norte, in lat. 36 f» 30', about 1000 miles 
 north-west of New-Orleans. 
 
 Monterey^ the capital of the two Californias, is on the shore 
 of the Pacific ocean in lat. 36^ 20'. It is a mere village con- 
 taining 700 inhabitants. 
 
 Religion. The religion is the Roman Catholic. There are 
 in this country, 1 archbishop, 8 bishops, and 10,000 clergy. 
 
 Government. Mexico was formerly a colony of Spain, but 
 has now thrown off* the yoke, and its independence has been 
 recognised by Great-Britain and the United States. Its gov- 
 ernment is formed on a plan similar to that of the United States. 
 
 Education. There is a University in the city of Mexico, 
 and colleges are established in other places, but the bigotry of 
 those who conduct them renders them of little value. 
 
 Lakes. Lake Chapala is about 170 miles west of Mexico. 
 It is 90 miles long, and 20 broad. 
 
 There are four small lakes in the valley of Mexico. The 
 waters in these lakes used formerly to rise above their banks, 
 and inundate the city and the valley. In 1629 there was a 
 great inundation, which lasted for five years ; and during the 
 whole of that time, the streets of Mexico could be passed only 
 in boats. — To prevent the recurrence of this evil various means 
 were employed without eflfect. At first, a huge dike or mound 
 of stones and clay was erected, 70 miles long and 65 feet 
 broad ; but the waters burst through it and tore it away. A 
 3ubteTraaean passage was then dug through the mountains 
 
130 GUATIMALA. 
 
 which surround the valley, to let off the waters ; but the earth 
 caved in and filled up the passage. At length a drain, 12 
 miles long, and in some places 200 .feet deep, has been cut 
 through a gap in the mountains, and this seems to answer the 
 purpose. 
 
 Mines. The gold and silver mines of Mexico are the most 
 productive in the world. They are very numerous, especially 
 in the provinces of Guanaxuato, Zacatecas, and the southern 
 parts of Durango, and San Luis Potosi. 
 
 dUATIMALA, OR THE UNITED PROVINCES OF CEN- 
 TRAL AMERICA. 
 
 Situation. Guatimala extends from Mexico on the north- 
 west, nearly to the isthmus of Darien. On the E. hes the 
 Caribbean sea, and on the W. the Pacific ocean. 
 
 Divisions It is divided into 6 provinces, viz. Chiapa, Vera 
 Paz, Guatimala, Honduras, Nicaragua, and Costa Rica. 
 
 Bay. The bay of Honduras divides this country into two 
 peninsulas. 
 
 Mountains. The great American range of mountains passes 
 through the whole length of this country into Mexico. It 
 abounds with volcanoes. 
 
 Lakes. Nicaragua lake is about 300 miles in circumfe- 
 rence. It communicates with the gulf of Mexico by the Rio 
 St. Juan or Nicaragua river. Lake Leon lies west of lake 
 Nicaragua, and communicates with it by a narrow strait. 
 
 Population. The population has been estimated at 
 1,800,000. They are principally Indians, and very little is 
 known about them. 
 
 Chief Towns. Guatimala., the capital, is in lat. 14^ N. 
 near the coast of the Pacific ocean. It has a good harbour, 
 and contains a university, numerous convents, and about 
 30,000 inhabitants. The city has been twice destroyed ; in 
 1641 by a tempest, and in 1773 by an earthquake, which 
 swallowed up !J,000 families in an instant. 
 
 Leon., the capital of the province of Nicaragua, is on the 
 west side of lake Leon. Population, 12,000. Ciudad Real 
 is near the borders of Mexico, delightfully situated among the 
 mountains, almost eqidistant from the two oceans. Chiapa is 
 the largest Indian town in Guatimala. It is near Ciudad Real, 
 and contains 20,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Productions. The productions are, grain in abundance, 
 grapes, honey, cotton, fine wool, dye- v/oods, &c. The pto- 
 
WEST-INDIES. iji 
 
 vince of Honduras is particularly celebrated for logwood and 
 ij mahogany. The English have settlements in this province, 
 ' and carry on the trade in these articles. 
 
 WEST-INDIES. 
 
 Situation. The collection of islands between Florida and 
 South- America is called the West-Indies. Trinidad is the 
 farthest south ; Barbadoes, the farthest east ; Cuba, the far- 
 thest west ; and the Bahama islands the farthest north. 
 
 Divisions. The four largest islands, Cuba^ Hayfi^ (or St. 
 Domingo,) Jamaica and Porto Rico^ are called the Greater 
 Antilles. 
 
 All the islands north of Cuba and Hayti are called the 
 Bahamas. 
 
 Trinidad and all the islands north of it, till you come to 
 Porto Rico, are called Caribbean islands. 
 
 Population. The whole population of the West-India isl- 
 ands is more than 2,000,000, three-fourths of whom are negro 
 slaves. The names of the principal islands, with their popu- 
 lation and extent, is given in the following table. 
 
 
 Square Miles. 
 
 Whites. 
 
 Slacks. 
 
 IVhole Pop. 
 
 Cuba, 
 
 54,000 
 
 234,000 
 
 198,000 
 
 432,000 
 
 Hayti, 
 
 28,000 
 
 
 650,000 
 
 650,000 
 
 Jamaica, 
 
 6,000 
 
 40,000 
 
 350,000 
 
 390,000 
 
 Porto RicOy 
 
 4,140 
 
 94,000 
 
 6,000 
 
 100,000 
 
 Guadaloupe^ 
 
 670 
 
 13,000 
 
 88,000 
 
 101,000 
 
 Martinico, 
 
 260 
 
 10,000 
 
 78,000 
 
 88,000 
 
 Barbadoes, 
 
 166 
 
 16,000 
 
 65,000 
 
 81,000 
 
 Antigua, 
 
 93 
 
 2,100 
 
 33,000 
 
 35,100 
 
 Santa Cruz, 
 
 100 
 
 3,000 
 
 30,000 
 
 33,000 
 
 St. Christopher, 
 
 70 
 
 4,000 
 
 26,000 
 
 30,000 
 
 Dominica, 
 
 291 
 
 1,600 
 
 25,000 
 
 26,600 
 
 Trinidadi 
 
 1,600 
 
 2,000 
 
 23,000 
 
 25,000 
 
 Grenada, 
 
 109 
 
 1,100 
 
 20,000 
 
 21,100 
 
 St. Eustatia, 
 
 20 
 
 5,000 
 
 15,000 
 
 20,000 
 
 Tobago, 
 
 140 
 
 900 
 
 15,000 
 
 15,900 
 
 St, Vincent, 
 
 131 
 
 1,500 
 
 13,500 
 
 15,000 
 
 St. Lucia, 
 
 220 
 
 2,400 
 
 11,700 
 
 14,100 
 
 Margarita, 
 
 S50 
 
 8,000 
 
 6,000 
 
 14,000 
 
 The Bahama?, 
 
 5,000 
 
 3,000 
 
 11,000 
 
 14,000 
 
 NCTis, 
 
 20 
 
 1,000 
 
 10,000 
 
 11,000 
 
 Mdntserrat, 
 
 47 
 
 1,000 
 
 10,000 
 
 11,000 
 
 Tt^tal, 
 
 
 44:?,000 
 
 1.681000 
 
 2,126.000 
 
132 CUBA. 
 
 Possessors. Cuba and Porto Rico belong to Spain ; Guada- 
 loupe and Martinico to France; Santa Cruz to Denmark; St. 
 Eustatia to Holland ; Hayti is independent. Jamaica, the Ba- 
 hamas, and, in general, all the other islands belong to Great- 
 Britain. 
 
 Religion. In the islands settled by the Spaniard's and 
 French, the religion is* Roman Catholic ; in those settled by 
 the Dutch, Danes, and English, it is Protestant. In the English 
 islands the Methodists and some other denominations, have 
 missionaries, who have laboured among the slaves with very 
 good success. 
 
 - Climate. In summer the heat is very oppressive, and the 
 climate unhealthy. In winter the temperature is dehghtful ; 
 to the sick and aged during this season it is the climate of para- 
 dise. In autumn hurricanes are frequent. 
 
 Productions. Sugar, rum, and molasses are the great sta- 
 ples of the West-Indies. The other productions are cotton, 
 indigo, coffee, cocoa, ginger, cloves, cinnamon, &c. The 
 Iruits are oranges, lemons, limes, pine apples, figs, pomegra- 
 nates and many others. 
 
 THE BAHAMAS. 
 
 The Bahamas consist of several small islands, interspersed 
 with an immense number of sand banks and rocks, which 
 render the navigation extremely dangerous. Thousands of 
 vessels have been wrecked among these islands. The princi- 
 pal business of the inhabitants is rescuing ship- wrecked vessels 
 with their crews and cargoes from destruction. 
 
 CUBA, 
 
 Face of the country, ^c. A range of mountains runs from 
 east to west, through the whole length of the island. On the 
 coast the land is level and very fertile ; producing sugar, to- 
 bacco, and coffee in abundance. The tobacco of Cuba, from 
 which the Spanish cigars are made, is esteemed the finest in 
 the world. 
 
 Chief Towns. Havana., on the north coast, is the capital. 
 Its harbour is one of the best in the world, being very capa- 
 cious and secure, difficult of access, and strongly fortified. 
 The commerce of Havana is more extensive than that of any 
 other town in Soanish America. The populntion is aboM*- 
 'T'O.OOO. 
 
It 
 
 WEST-INDIES. 133 
 
 St Jago^ on the south-east side of the island, has a spacions 
 and secure harbour, and about 4O,O0U inhabitants. 
 
 HAYTl, OR ST. DOMINGO. 
 
 History. This island was formerly divided between France 
 and Spain ; but in 1791 there was an insurrection of the blacks 
 in the French part of the island, which issued in the expulsion 
 of the whites. The island is now wholly in the possession of 
 the blacks. 
 
 Chief Towns. Cape Henry^ formerly Cape Francois^ is 
 on the north side of the island, and has an excellent harbour. 
 It was the capital of the French colony. 
 
 Port au Prince is at the head of the large bay on the west 
 side of the island. St. Domingo is on the south-east side of 
 the island. Population, 12,000. 
 
 Soil, <Sfc. The soil is very fertile, producing sugar, coffee, 
 cotton, and indigo in abundance. 
 
 JAMAICA, 
 
 Soil^ i^c. The north side of the island is mountainous. 
 The south side has a deep, fertile soil, and is well cultivated, 
 producing sugar in abundance. Large numbers of cattle are 
 raised on the island. 
 
 Chief Towns. Kingston., the chief town, is on the south- 
 -east part of the island, on a beautiful harbour. It is a place 
 t)f great commerce, and contains more than 26,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Port Royal., on the south side of Kingston harbour, 10 miles 
 south of Kingston, was formerly the chief town, but it was 
 destroyed three times, first by an earthquake, then by a fire, 
 and afterwards by a hurricane. After the last calamity the 
 inhabitants removed and founded Kingston. Spanishtovm is 
 ^ miles west of Kingston. 
 
 PORTO RICO. 
 
 Porto Rico is the fourth island in size. Its capital, St. Juan., 
 ks on the north side of the island, and contains about 30,000 
 inhabitants. 
 
 BERMUDAS ISLANDS, 
 
 Tlie Bermudas islands are a cluster of small islands about 
 loco miles northeast of Cuba. They have a delightful climate 
 i^nd about 10,000 inhabitants. 
 
134 SOUTH AMERICA. 
 
 SOUTH AMERICA. 
 
 Situation, On the N. is the Caribbean sea, and the Atlan- 
 tic ; on the E. the Atlantic ; on the S. it comes to a point ; on 
 the W. is the Pacific ocean ; and on the N. W. it is connected 
 with North America by the isthmus of Darien. In shape it 
 resembles a,pear. 
 
 Divisions. South America is divided into the following coun- 
 tries. 1. The Republic of Colombia. 2. Guiana. 3. Peru. 
 4. Brazil. 5. Buenos Ayres, or the United Provinces of South 
 America. 6. The Republic of Bolivia. 7. Chili. 8. Pa- 
 tagonia. 
 
 Political condition. Colombia, Peru, Buenos Ayres, Boli- 
 via, and Chih, a few years since, were subject to Spain, but 
 they have recently declared themselves independent, and their 
 independence has been acknowledged by the government of 
 the United States. Brazil was a Portuguese colony but is now 
 an independent kingdom. Guiana is divided between the 
 English, Dutch, French, Portuguese, and the Republic of Co- 
 lombia. Patagonia belongs to the natives. 
 
 Mountains. The Andes run along the whole western coast 
 of South America, from cape Horn to the isthmus of Darien. 
 They are a part of the great American range, A range of 
 mountains, termed the Brazilian Andes^ runs along the eastern 
 coast from lat. 10° to lat. 30° S. 
 
 Rivers. The three greatest rivers are the Amazon.^ the La 
 Plata.^ and the Orinoco. 
 
 The Amazon, is the largest river in the world, and except the 
 Missouri, the longest, ft enters the Atlantic under the equa- 
 tor, by a mouth 1 50 miles wide, and the tide flows up 600 
 miles. All th^ rivers which rise on the east of the Andes, 
 from lat. 2° N. to lat. 20° S. are branches of the Amazon. 
 
 Its most distant source is the river Beni., which rises in the 
 Andes in lat 19° S. and running north, joins the Apurimac. 
 The united stream is then called the Paro or Ucayale. . The 
 Ucayale runs north, and joining the Maranon or Tunguragua 
 forms the Amazon. The course of the Amazon is then east to 
 the ocean. This mighty river is navigable for vessels of 500 
 tons, from its mouth to the very foot of the Andes, a distance 
 of 4,000 miles. 
 
REPUBLIC OF COLOMBIA. 135 
 
 The La Plata emj ties itself into the Atlantic on the south- 
 east side of the continent, in about lat. 35°. It is formed by 
 the Uruguay and the Parana, which unite a little above the 
 city of Buenos Ayres. The Paraguay^ the principal branch 
 of the Parana, empties itself into it near Corrientes. The Uru- 
 guay and Parana both rise in Brazil, and flow southwest. 
 
 The Orinoco empties itself on the north coast, opposite the 
 island of Trinidad, by 50 mouths. It drains Venezuela and 
 Spanish Guiana. 
 
 Religion. The religion of each province is the same with 
 that of the European country from which it was settled ; that 
 of the Spanish, Portuguese, and French .settlements is Roman 
 Catholic, that of the English and Dutch is Protestant. 
 
 Islands. Terra del Fuego is a large isleCnd in the south, 
 separated from the rest of the continent by the straits of Magel- 
 lan. Cape Horn, on the south side of the island, is the most 
 southern extremity of South America. Falkland islands are 
 northeast of Terra del Fuego. 
 
 The island of Juan Fernandez., nearly opposite Valparaiso 
 on the coast of Chih, is uninhabited. Alexander Selkirk, a 
 sailor, lived here 4 years in solitude. This circumstance gave 
 rise to the story of Robinson Crusoe. The Gallijjagos islands 
 are further north, on both sidey of the equator. 
 
 Indians. The Indians are of two classes, the unconquered 
 or independent, and the conquered or civiiizetL The former 
 occupy Patagonia and the interior of the continent ; and the 
 latter are mixed m with the whites, and many of theim are. 
 slaves. 
 
 REPLBLiIC OF COLOMBIA. 
 
 Situation. The Bepublic is bounded N. by the Caribbean 
 sea; E. by Guiana; S. by Peru; and VV. by the Pacific 
 ocean. 
 
 Lake and Bays. Maracayho lake, in the north, is 1 80 miles 
 long and 100 Su odd. In shape it resembles a decanter. It dis- 
 charges itself into the gulf of Maracaybo through a strait 10 
 miles wide. The hay oj Panama is on the south side of the 
 isthmus of Darien ; the gulf of Darien is on the north side of 
 the isthmus ; the gulf of Guayaquil is near the borders of 
 Peru. 
 ^ Mountains. The Andes come from Peru, and puss along 
 
136 REPUBLIC OF COT.OMBTA. 
 
 the coast of the Pacific ocean, through the whole extent of the 
 country. At Popayan the range divides into three branches ; 
 the western is the proper Andes, and runs into North America 
 across the isthmus of Darien ; the eastern^ called the chain of 
 Venezuela, runs along the northern coast, and terminates oppo- 
 site the island of Trinidad ; the middle branch runs north, 
 between the rivers Magdalena and Cauca, and terminates at the 
 junction of those two streams. 
 
 Rivers The Orinoco is the great river of this country. It 
 empties itself into the ocean near the island of Trinidad by 60 
 mouths, the two most distant of which are 180 miles apart. 
 The course of the river is very crooked, somewhat resembling 
 the figure 6. 
 
 The rivers which rise east of the Andes flow east into the 
 Orinoco and the Amazon ; those west of the Andes flow west 
 into the Pacific; those between the eastern and western 
 branches of the Andes flow north into the Caribbean sea. 
 
 The principal branches of the Orinoco are the Apures and 
 Meta^ both of which rise at the foot of the Andes and flow east. 
 The Orinoco is navigable 90 miles above the mouth of the 
 Meta, and 740 from the ocean. The Meta is navigable 370 
 miles. 
 
 The Magdalena rises among the Andes; near Popayan, and 
 running north, discharges itself into the Caribbean sea. It is 
 1000 miles long, and navigable about 600. The Cauca rises 
 also neaj Popayan. It is the great western branch of the Mag- 
 dalena, and runs parallel with it. 
 
 Face of the country. The northern and western parts are 
 mountainous. Below the mountains there are immense plains 
 which extend beyond the Orinoco. In the rainy season the 
 Orinoco overflows its banks, and these plains are inundated to 
 a vast extent. 
 
 Climate. In the lo^v country the climate is hot and un- 
 healthy ; but in the mountains every variety is experirdiced, 
 according to the elevation. On the highest summits you meet 
 with everlasting snow, while at Quito and some of the other 
 principal cities, the temperature is delightful throughout the 
 year. 
 
 Soil and productions. The soil is very fertile, and produces 
 in abundance cocoa, indigo, cotton, sugar, tobacco, and all the 
 fruits of tropical chmates. The plains furnish immense pas- 
 tures for numberless herds of cattle. The country is also ceie- 
 
REPUBTJC OF COLOMBIA. 137 
 
 bratvi j lo: is mineral productions, the mountains being rich in 
 gold, silver, and emeralds ; there are likewise animals of an 
 enormous size. The candor^ a large bird, has been known to 
 fly away with lambs. \ he jacu7nama^ au immense serpent, is 
 found in the plains east of the Andes, 11 or 12 feet long, and 
 a foot in diamt^ter. 
 
 CuUf Towns. Santa Fe de Bogota is on the small river 
 Bogota, a branch of the Magdalena. It is built on a spacious, 
 fertile plain, which is elevated more than 8,OuO feet above the 
 level of the sea. Population, 30,000. 
 
 Quito lies among the Andes, almost under the equator. It 
 is built on the side of a volcanic mountain, and is elevated more 
 than 9,000 fe©t above the level of the sea. The temperature 
 here is mild and pleasant throughout the year, but there are 
 frequently dreadful tempests of thunder and lightning. Popu- 
 lation, 65,000. Popayan is on the Andes near the sources of 
 the Cauca and Magdalena. 
 
 Caraccas is in a valley between the mountains, near the 
 northern coast, elevated 2,900 feet above the level of the sea. 
 In 1812 an earthquake destroyed a part of the city, and buried 
 12,000 persons in the ruins. La Guira, the port of Caraccas, 
 is 7 miles distant, and is more frequented than . any other port 
 on the coast. 
 
 The other principal places on the Caribbean sea are, Cu- 
 mana^ on the coast, east of Caraccas ; Maracaibo^ on the west 
 bank of the strait Avhich connects lake Maracaibo with the gulf; 
 Carthagena^ which has a safe and extensive harbour, and 
 20,000 inhabitants ; St. Martha, 130 miles N. E. of Cartha- 
 gena ; and Porto Bello. on the north side of the isthmus of 
 Darien. 
 
 The ports on the Pacific are Panama, on the south side of the 
 isthmus of Darien, opposite Porto Bello, and Guayaquil on a 
 river of the same name, which runs into the gulf of Guayaquil. 
 
 Natural Curiosities. About 70 or 80 miles south of Quito 
 13 the celebrated Chimborazo, the loftiest sun:mit of the Andes, 
 and the highest mountain in America. It is 21. 440 feet above 
 the level of the sea. Its enormous summit is covered with 
 snow,' and is finely contrasted w^th the deep azure blue of the 
 equatorial sky. 
 
 Cotopaxi, the highest volcano in the world, is about 40 miles 
 southeast of Quito. It is 18,898 feet above the level of the sea. 
 Its explosions are frequent and dreadful. When an eruption 
 
 M2 
 
.13& GUTANA. 
 
 takes place, the snow around the volcano is suddenly melted, 
 and a torrent of water is poured down from the mountain. 
 Ashes, fire, and rocks are then thrown forth with a dreadful 
 roaring noise, and spread desolation over the surrounding 
 plains. The roar of the volcano continues day and night so 
 long as the eruption lasts, and has been heard at the distance 
 of 600 miles. 
 
 The cataract of Tequendama is in the river Bogota near 
 Santa Fe. This river, after watering the elevated plain on 
 which that city stands, breaks through the mountains, and with 
 two bounds rushes down a precipice, to the astonishing depth 
 of 570 feet. The column of vapour, which rises like a cloud 
 from the shock, is seen from Santa Fe, 1 5 miles distant, re- 
 flecting the most beautiful colours of the rainbow. 
 
 Population. The population is estimated at about 2,500,000, 
 and is composed of whites, negroes, and Indians. The white 
 settlements are principally in the mountains, elevated several 
 thousand feet above the level of the sea. 
 
 Government. The government is republican, and under the 
 presidency of the celebrated Bolivar, it has been ably admi- 
 nistered. All religions are tolerated, and the most liberal mea- 
 sures have been adopted for the promotion of education, com- 
 merce, agriculture, and the arts. 
 
 Indians. Tribes of independent warlike Indians occupy 
 the country about the mouths of the Orinoco, the whole coast 
 from the Orinoco to the Essequebo, the country immediately 
 west of lake Maracaibo, and the whole interior of Spanish 
 Guiana. 
 
 GUIANA. 
 
 Situation. Guiana is the country between the Orinoco and 
 the Amazon, tt has the ocean on the N. E. ; Brazil on the 
 S. E. ; and the Republic of Colombia on the west and N. W. 
 
 The river Cassiquiari unites the Orinoco with the Negro, a 
 branch of the Amazon, making Guiana a real island, separated 
 by water from the rest of the continent. 
 
 Divisions. Guiana is divided between 5 different nations. 
 1. Spanish Guiana belongs to the Republic of Colombia. It 
 extends on the coast from the Orinoco to the Essequebo. 
 3. English Guiana extends from the Essequebo to the Coran- 
 tyn. 3. Dutch Guiana extends from the Corantyn to the 
 Maroni^ 4. French Guiana extends from the Maroni to the 
 
PERU. 139 
 
 Oyapok. 5. Portuguese Guiana extends from the Oyapok to 
 the Amazon. 
 
 The boundaries between these divisions in the interior are 
 not determined, and there is no necessity for determining them, 
 because the white settlements do not extend far from the sea 
 coast, the interior being occupied by warlike Indians, 
 
 Subdivisions. English Guiana is subdivided into the dis- 
 tricts of Essequebo^ Dcmarara^ and Berbice. Dutch Guiana is 
 sometimes called Surinam^ and French Guiana, Cayenne. 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers are Essequebo, Demerara^ 
 Berbice, Surinam^ and Maroni. 
 
 Chief Towns. Paramaribo^ the capital of Dutch Guiana, 
 is the largest town. It is on Surinam river, 15 miles from its 
 mouth, and has 20,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Cayenne, the capital of French Guiana, is on an island and 
 contains 6 or 8,000 inhabitants. Stahrook, the capital of Kng- 
 lish Guiana, is on Demerara river, near its mouth, and has 
 8,500 inhabitants. 
 
 Face of the country^ &c. The country is flat and unhealthy. 
 The soil is surprisingly fertile, yielding sugar, coffee, and cotton 
 in abundance. 
 
 Population, The population-may be estimated at 250,000, 
 exclusive of Indians. Spanish Guiana has 34,000, English 
 Guiana more than 70,000, Dutch Guiana 80,000, and French 
 Guiana 30,000. The mass of the population are negro slaves ; 
 there are less than 20,000 whites. 
 
 PERU. 
 
 Situation. Peru is bounded N. by the Republic of Colom- 
 bia ; E. by Brazil ; S. E. by Bolivia ; S. by the desert of Ata- 
 cama, which separates it from Chih, and VV. by the Pacific 
 ocean. 
 
 Divisions. Peru is divided into 7 intendencies, viz. Truxillo, 
 Tarma, Lima, GuancaVelica, Guamanga, Cusco,and Arequipa. 
 
 Face of the country. The Andes pass through the whole 
 length of Peru, parallel with the Pacific ocean. 
 
 There are two principal ridges called the eastern and western 
 Cordilleras. The country between them is an elevated plain 
 or table land, generally from 8,000 to 10,000 feet above the 
 level of the sea. The narrow tract between the western 
 Cordillera and the Pacific is a plain, principally sandy an<f 
 barren. 
 
140 BRAZIL. 
 
 Chief Towns. Lima^ the capital, is in the centre of a spa- 
 cious and delightful valley, on a small river which flows into 
 the Pacific ocean, it is the centre of the commerce of Peru. 
 Population, 52,627. Callao, the port of Lima, is 7 miles 
 distant. 
 
 Cusco^ an ancient and magnificent city, once the seat of the 
 incas, is among the Andes east of Lima, near the river Apu- 
 rimac, one of the sources of the Amazon. Population, 3^,000. 
 
 Truxillo is on the Pacific, 900 miles N. of Lima. Arica is 
 a seaport south of Lima. Arequipa is between Arica and 
 Lima, and about 20 leagues from the sea. 
 
 Population. I' he population is 1 ,079, 1 22, of which number 
 619,000 are civilized Indians, and the rest are whites, negroes, 
 mulattos, and mestizos. The white settlements are on the 
 high table land between the mountains, and on the sea coast. 
 They do not extend east of the Andes. 
 
 Climate. The lofty Andes are covered with eternal snow, 
 and the low country on the coast is hot and unhealthy, while 
 the intermediate table land enjoys a uniform and delightful cli- 
 mate. Earthquakes are common ; Lima has been repeatedly 
 almost ruined by them. 
 
 Mines. iTiere are 70 gold mines, 700 silver mines, and 4 
 of quicksilver, besides several of copper and lead. The annual 
 produce of the gold and silver mines is more than ^4,000,000. 
 
 Rivers. The Beni., the Apurimac, the Giiallaga., the Tun- 
 guragua., and several smaller head branches of the Amazon rise 
 in Peru. There are no rivers of any importance on the 
 western side of the Andes, all the streams which rise there 
 having but a short course from their sources to the ocean. 
 
 BRAZIL. 
 
 Situation. Brazil extends from the Amazon almost to the 
 La Plata. It is an immense country, embracing more than one 
 third of South America ; bounded N. by Guiana and the Atlan- 
 tic ; E. by the Atlantic ; on the S. it comes to a point ; on the 
 W. are Peru and Buenos Ay res. 
 
 Divisions. It is divided into 1 2 districts called capitanias. 
 
 Capitanias. Chief Towns. 
 
 Rio Janeiro, Rio Janeiro. 
 
 St. Paul, St. Paul. 
 
 St. Catheriua, St. Catherina, 
 
 Rjo Grande, Rio Grande, 
 
 Goyaz, Villa Boa. 
 
 Matto Grosso, Ciiiaba. 
 
 Capitanias. 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 Para, 
 
 Para. 
 
 Maranham, 
 
 St. Luis. 
 
 Seara, 
 
 Seara. 
 
 Pernambuco, 
 
 Pernambuco, 
 
 Bahia, 
 
 St. Salvador. 
 
 Minas Geraes, 
 
 Villa Rica. 
 
BRAZIL. 141 
 
 F^ice of the country. A ridge of mountains, termed the Bra- 
 zilian Andes, runs along the coast from lat. 10° to lat. 30° S. 
 The interior of the country is clothed with the most luxuriant 
 vegetation, and covered in many parts with an almost impene- 
 trable forest. 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers of Brazil are branches of the 
 Amazon and La Plata, i he ridge of inouatains along the 
 coast prevents their entrance into the ocean by a more direct 
 course. 
 
 . The St. Francisco and the Tocantins are the principal rivers 
 which discharge themselves directly into the ocean. 1 he St. 
 Francisco rises in lat 16°, and alter running in a northerly 
 direction along the western skirt of the mountains, for 1000 
 miles, turns to the east and enters the Atlantic north of St, 
 Salvador. The Tocantins rises near the sources of the St. 
 Francisco, and running north 1500 miles, empties under the 
 equator, near the mouth of the Amazon. The Araguaya is 
 the principal branch of the l^ocantins. 
 
 The Xingu and the Tapajos rise in the centre of South 
 America, and flowing north more than 1000 miles, discharge 
 themselves into the Amazon. The Madeira., the largest tribu- 
 tary of the Amazon, rises in the northern part of Buenos 
 Ayres, and running northeast, joins the Amazon after a course 
 of 1600 miles. 
 
 The Paraguay., the Parana., and the Uruguay., the great 
 branches of the La Plata, rise in the southern part of this 
 country and pass into Buenos Ayres. 
 
 Chief Towns. Rio Janeiro or St. Sebastian., the capital, is 
 the largest town in South America. . It has a noble harbour, 
 and a great commerce. The population is more than 100,000. 
 
 St. Salvador., or Bahia., is on the bay of All Saints, more 
 than 700 miles north of Rio Janeiro. It is large, rich, and 
 well built. The principal part of the city is on the top of a 
 hill which rises suddenly to the height of 400 feet. The situ- 
 ation is airy and healthful. The population exceeds 70,000. 
 
 Pernamhuco is a flourishing town, 450 miles N. E. of St. 
 Salvador. It has a great trade in cotton. Population 25,000. 
 Maranham or St. Luis., is a commercial town on the north 
 coast. Rio Grande is in a populous district near the southern 
 extremity of Brazil. 
 
 Villa Rica is in the interior, north of Rio Janeiro. Popu- 
 lation, 20,000. Tejuco^ the capital of the diamond district, 
 
142 BITENOS AYRES. 
 
 is north of Villa Rica. Cuiaba is in the western part of 
 Brazil, and has rich gold mines in its vicinity. Population, 
 30,000. 
 
 Population. The population is estimated at 2,000,000. It 
 is composed. of whites, negroes, Indians, mulattos, and mes- 
 tizos. 
 
 Government. Brazil was formerly a Portuguese colony, but 
 several years ago it threw off the yoke, and has ever since 
 formed a distinct kingdom. On the 20th of August, i825, 
 the independence of the new empire was acknowledged by 
 the king of Portugal. 
 
 Productions. The northern provinces produce cotton, sugar, 
 coffee, and tobacco ; the middle contain the gold and diamond 
 districts ; the southern produce wheat and cattle in abundance. 
 The forests abound with various kinds of wood useful for dyeing 
 and cabinet work. 
 
 Gold and diamonds. The gold and diamonds of Brazil are 
 found principally in the beds of the mountain torrents. The 
 bead waters of the Parana, of the Francisco, and of all the great 
 rivers which flow north into the Amazon, are productive of gold. 
 The principal diamond district is 400 miles N. of Rio Janeiro. 
 
 Commerce. The exports are cotton, sugar, coffee, and to- 
 bacco from Pernambuco, St. Salvador, and Maranham ; and 
 hides, tallow, and beef from Rio Grande. Wheat is shipped 
 from Rio Grande to all parts of the coast. The principal im- 
 ports are British manufactures. 
 
 BUENOS AYRES, OR UNITED PROVINCES OF SOUTH 
 AMERICA. 
 
 Name. This country was called the Viceroyalty of Buenos 
 Ayres., while under the dominion of Spain. Since the declara- 
 tion of Independence, it has assumed the name of the United 
 Provinces of South America. 
 
 Situation. It is bounded N. by Bolivia ; E. by Brazil ; S. 
 E. by the Atlantic ; S. by Patagonia, and W. by the Andes, 
 which separate it from Chili. 
 
 Divisions. The northern and central parts of this country, 
 embracing one-half the territory, are in the possession of the 
 Indians. The parts owned by the whites are divided into 
 provinces. 
 
BUENOS AYRES. 143 
 
 Provinces. Chief Towns. 
 
 Buenos Ayres, Buenos Ayres. 
 
 Banda Oriental, Montevideo. 
 
 Entre Rios, Santa Fe. 
 
 Cordova, Cordova. 
 
 Punta St. Luis, Punta St. Luis. 
 
 Mendoza, Mendoza. 
 
 St. Juan, St. Juan. 
 
 Rioja, Rioja. 
 
 Provinces. Chief Towns: 
 
 Catamarca, Catanaarca. 
 St. Jago del Estero, St. Jago. 
 
 Tucuman, Tucuman. 
 
 Salta, Salta. 
 
 Jujuy, Jujuy. 
 
 Chicas, Tupica. 
 
 iVlisque, Misque. 
 
 Paraguay, Assumption. 
 
 Rivers. This country is drained by the La Plata and its 
 branches. The La Plata is a very broad river formed by the 
 union of the Uruguay and the Parana. The Parana rises 
 among the mountains of Brazil, near Rio Janeiro, and running 
 southwest nearly 200U miles, joins the Uruguay a httle above 
 the city of Buenos Ayres. The Uruguay rises in the southern 
 part of Brazil. Its general course is southwest, and its length, 
 1200 miles. 
 
 The Paraguay is the principal branch of the Parana. It 
 rises near the centre of Brazil, and running south about 1500 
 miles, joins the Parana at Corrientes. The Pilcomayo and 
 the Vermejo are the two largest "western branches of the 
 Paraguay. They both rise in the Andes, and flowing southeast 
 about 1000 miles each, enter the Paraguay below the town of 
 Assumption. The Salado is the largest western branch of the 
 Parana. It rises in the Andes, and flowing southeast more 
 than 800 miles, joins the Parana at Santa Fe. 
 
 Numerous branches of the Madeira rise in the northern 
 part of this country, and flow north into Brazil. 
 
 Face of the country. The western provinces, bordering on 
 the Andes, are mountainous ; the territory east of the Paraguay 
 and Parana is a fine, waving, well-watered country; the inter- 
 mediate district, lying between the Paraguay and the mountains, 
 and extending from north to south through the whole length of 
 the country, consists of extensive plains. 
 
 West of the city of Buenos Ayres is a vast plain or pampa 
 extending south into Patagonia. It is 1500 miles long, and 
 from the ocean to the Andes 500 broad. 
 
 Indians. Independent tribes of Indians occupy the country 
 watered by the Salado., Vermejo^ and Pilcomayo. This tract 
 consists of vast plains extending from the Paraguay on the east 
 to the mountains on the west. 
 
 Productions. The vast plains and pampas are covered with 
 immense herds of horses, mules, and cattle. Raising cattle is 
 the principal business of the inhabitants, to the neglect of 
 
144 BUENOS AYRES. | 
 
 '. . ' '"' " ■ , , , , , , , " , ■ , r. r , l.', I " J1^3 |j 
 
 agriculture, although the soil is fertile and would yield wheat, 
 Indian corn, tobacco, &c. in abundance. 
 
 Population. The population, according to the official census, 
 is 370,000 without including the Indians, who amount probably 
 to more than 1,000,000. 
 
 Chief Toims. Buenos Ayres is on the west bank of the 
 La Plata, 1 80 miles from the ocean. The houses are built of 
 brick. The population is 60,000, one-half of whom are whites, 
 and the rest Indians, negroes, &c. The city is celebrated for 
 the pleasantness and salubrity of its climate. 
 
 Montevideo is on the east bank of the La Plata, 90 miles 
 from its mouth. Population, 10,000. Santa Fe is at the con- 
 fluence of the Salado with the Parana, and has 6000 inhabit- 
 ants. Corrientes is at the confluence of the Paraguay with 
 the Parana. Assumption \s on the east hank of the Paraguay, 
 a little above the mouth of the Pilcomayo, and about 1000 
 miles from the sea. Large vessels ascend from the ocean as 
 far as this place. 
 
 Salta is nearly in the centre of the country. It carries 
 on a great trade in mules with Peru. Tucuman is 160 
 miles S. of Salta. Mendoza is at the foot of the Andes, near 
 the southwest corner of the country. 
 
 Government. All religions are now tolerated, and the govern- 
 ment is administered in other respects on the most liberal prin- 
 ciples. Buenos Ayres formerly belonged to Spain. In 1816, 
 it declared itself independent, and established a republican 
 government. 
 
 Education. Previous to the revolution, education, and 
 . learrling were discouraged ; but now schools are established^ 
 and books imported without restriction. 
 
 Character. A large portion of the population are herds- 
 men, who lead a solitary life on the great plains, being con- 
 stantly employed in tending immense herds of cattle. They 
 are the most expert horsemen in the world. 
 
 Commerce. The principal exports are gold and silver, hides, 
 beef, and tallow. The imports are manufactured goods, prin- 
 cipally from Great Britain. The city of Buenos Ayres is the 
 seat of this commerce. 
 
 Mules in immense droves are collected every year at Saltri 
 from the southern provinces, and thence sent over the Ande? 
 to Peru, a distance of 1500 or 2000 miles. Almost all labouj 
 and transportation, in Peru as well as in Buenos Ayres, ar^ 
 performed by mule?- 
 
emu. Ui 
 
 BOLIVIA. 
 
 Situation. ' This new republic, which was formed in the 
 year 1826, out of territory formerly included within the hmits 
 of Buenos Ayres or the United Provinces of South America, 
 is bounded N. by Peru ; E. and S. by Buenos Ayres ; and 
 W. by the Andes, which separate it from the southern part of 
 Peru. 
 
 Divisions. The republic embraces five provinces, viz ; La 
 Paz., Cochabamba., Charcas^ Potosi and Santa Cruz. 
 
 Lake. Lake Titicaca is in the northwest corner of the 
 country between two ridges of the Andes. It is 240 miles in 
 circumference, and has several islands, one of which was the 
 residence of Manco Capac, the first of the incas, and the 
 founder of the Peruvian monarchy. 
 
 Chief Totvns. Potosi., famous for its rich silver mines, is 
 situated on the Andes, near the sources of the Pilcomayo, in 
 about 20° S. lat. It contains 70,000 inhabitants, besides 
 30,000 slaves employed in tiie mines. 
 
 Oi'opesa^ the capital of the province of Cochabamba, con- 
 tains 17,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Population. The population is about 500,000. 
 
 Mines. This country is famous for its gold and silver mines. 
 The richest is the silver mine of Potosi, which has been 
 wrought nearly 3 centuries, and yields several millions of dol- 
 lars annually. The Indians near Potosi, were formerly com- 
 pelled by the Spaniards to work the mines, which usually 
 destroyed them in the course of 10 or 12 months. For three 
 centuries whole nations perished in this way. This cruel cus- 
 tom is now abolished. 
 
 CHILI. 
 
 Situation. Chili is bounded N. by the desert of Atacama, 
 which separates it from Peru ; E. by the Andes, which sepa- 
 rate it from Buenos Ayres ; S. by Patagonia ; and W. by the 
 Pacific ocean. It is a long and narrow country. 
 
 Divisions. The southern part of the country, below lat. 
 37°, belongs to independent tribes of Indians. The remain- 
 der is divided into 22 districts. 
 
 Face of the Country. The lofty Andes run along the whole 
 eastcTn boundary of Chili. The country belov/ is made up to^ 
 
14^ QlilLl. 
 
 a considerable extent of detached valleys, separated from each 
 other by high ridges. The scenery is picturesque and grand. 
 
 Rivers. Few countries are so well watered as Chili. 
 The rivers are small, but very numerous. In some parts, 
 every valley, and almost every field, can be regularly irrigated 
 from a neighbouring stream. The principal rivers are the 
 Tolten^ the Biobio^ the Maypo., the Maule^ and the Quillota. 
 
 Soil and Productions. The southern part of the country 
 is a land flowing with wheat, wine, and oil ; cotton and hemp 
 are also cultivated, and cattle are numerous. The northern 
 districts have a dry and barren soil, but are rich in mines of 
 tin, copper, silver and gold. 
 
 Climate. In the northern districts it never rains, and never 
 thunders ; 'the dews are scarcely perceptible, the atmosphere 
 is without a cloud, and the temperature is delightful. Some 
 parts of this region are well watered by rivers from the Andes 
 and are very fertile. 
 
 Volcanoes and Earthquakes. Volcanoes occur among the 
 Andes, at every little interval, along the whole eastern boundary. 
 There are 14 which are in a state of constant eruption. Earth- 
 quakes usually occur 3 or 4 times in a year. 
 
 Chief Towns. St. Jago.> the capital, is on a branch of the 
 Maypo, in a beautiful and extensive plain. The houses are of 
 brick, and as in all the cities of Chih, are of only obc story, on 
 account of the earthquakes. The population is 46,000. 
 
 Conception is on a beautiful bay, which affords a commo- 
 dious harbour, near the mouth of the river Biobio. It has 
 been twice destroyed by earthquakes. Population, 13,000. 
 
 Valparaiso is on the coast, near the mouth of the Quillota, 
 about 100 miles west of St. Jago. It is the most commercial 
 city in Chili. Population, 6,500. 
 
 Valdivia is on a bay, 180 miles S. of Conception, Its har- 
 bour is the safest and most capacious on the western coast of 
 America. It is very strongly fortified. 
 
 Population. The population is 1,200,000, exclusive of 
 independent Indians. 
 
 Araucanian Indians. The Araucanian Indians occupy the 
 cowntry between the BiobiQ and the Token. They are brave, 
 warlike, generous, and enthusiastic lovers of liberty. The 
 Spaniards have tried in vain for nearly 3 centuries to subdue 
 them. 
 
 Government, Chili was formerly subject to Spain . 7n 1 8 1 8 
 
EUROPE. , 14'? 
 
 it declared itself independent, and has recently formed a 
 government resembling that of the United States. 
 
 Desert, The desert of Atacama lies between Peru and 
 Chili. It is a dry, sandy plain, 300 miles long-, without one 
 living^ thing upon it either vegetable or animal. 
 
 Islands. Chiloe island on the coast, near the southern 
 boundary, is 180 miles long. There are many small islan4s 
 near it. The island of Juan Fernandez is more thj^n 300 miles 
 west of Valparaiso. 
 
 PATAGONIA. 
 
 Situaiion. Patagonia is the southern part of South Ameriea. 
 It is bounded N. by ChiH and Buenos Ay res ; E. by the 
 Atlantic; S. by the straits of Magellan, which separate it from 
 Terra del Fuego ; and VV. by the Pacific. 
 
 Fac& of the country. The Andes pass through the western 
 part. The eastern part is level, consisting of immense parop&s 
 or plains which stretch north into Buenos Ayres. 
 
 Inhabitants. The country is inhabited by independent 
 tribes of Indians, about whom very little is known. Some 
 of the tribes are said tp be of a gigantic size. 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 Situation. Europe is bounded N. by the Frozen ocean ; 
 E. by Asia ; S. by the Mediterranean sea, which separates it 
 from Africa ; and W. by the Atlantic ocean. It is the smallest 
 general division of the globe. 
 
 Divisions. The principal countries in Europe are^ 
 
 Norway, 
 
 
 Great Britain, " 
 
 
 Sweden, 
 
 > in the north. 
 
 France, 
 
 
 Russia, 
 
 1 
 
 Netherlands, 
 
 
 
 
 Denmark, 
 
 in the 
 
 Portugal, 
 
 ] 
 
 Germany, 
 
 " middle. 
 
 Spain, 
 Italy, 
 
 S in the south. 
 
 Prussia, 
 Austria, 
 
 
 Turkey, 
 
 J 
 
 Switzerland, 
 
 
 Seas. The principal seas are, the Mediterranean, Marmora, 
 Black, Azof, North, Baltic, and White. 
 
 The Mediterranean sea lies between Europe, Asia, and 
 Africa. It is the largest sea in the world, being 2000 miles 
 long from east to west. The Black sea lies between Europe 
 
i48 EUROPE. 
 
 and Asia. It is northeast of the Mediterranean, and com- 
 municates with it through the sea of Marmora. The sea of 
 Azof is northeast of the Black sea, and communicates with it 
 through a narrow strait. 
 
 The North sea lies between Great Britain on the west, and 
 Denmark on the east. The Baltic lies between Sweden on 
 the west, Russia on the east, and Prussia and Germany on the 
 south. The White sea is in the northern part of Russia. It 
 opens into the Frozen ocean. 
 
 Channels. The English channel lies between England and 
 France. St. George's channel hes between England and Ire- 
 land. The Cattegat., between Denmark and Sweden, and the 
 Skager Rack, between Denmark and Norway, are the channels 
 through which the Baltic communicates with the German 
 ocean. 
 
 Straits. The straits of Gibraltar., between Spain and 
 Africa, connect the Mediterranean with the Atlantic. The 
 Dardanelles, between Europe and Asia, connect the Mediter- 
 ranean with the sea of Marmora. The straits of Constan- 
 tinople connect the sea of Marmora with the Black sea. The 
 straits of Jenikale connect the Black sea with the sea of Azof. 
 The straits of Dover, between England and France, connect 
 the North sea with the English channel. 
 
 Bays or Gulfs. The gulf of Venice is in the Mediterra- 
 nean, between Turkey and Italy. The bay of Biscay opens 
 into the Atlantic between France and Spain. The gulfs of 
 Bothnia, Finland and Riga, are arms of the Baltic sea. 
 
 Mountains. The Ural mountains, in the northeast, are part 
 ef the boundary between Europe and Asia. The Pyren£es^ 
 in the southwest, are the boundary between France and Spain. 
 The Alps are the loftiest mountains in Europe ; they separate 
 Italy from France, Switzerland and Germany. The Scan- 
 dinavian mountains separate Sweden from Norway. The 
 Carpathian mountains are in Austria ; they separate Hungary 
 from Gahcia. The Apennines run through the whole leng^ 
 of Italy. 
 
 Rivers. The Volga is the largest river. It drains the east- 
 ern and central parts of Russia, and discharges itself into the 
 Caspian sea in Asia. It is 2000 miles long. The Don empties 
 itself into the sea of Azof and the Dnieper and Dniester into the 
 Black sea. They drain the southern part of Russia. 
 
 The Danube is the second river of Europe, It tis^s in tfte 
 
ENGLAND AND WALES. 149 
 
 S. W. part of Germany^ and runs east through Hungary and 
 Turkey into the Black sea. It is 1600 miles long. The Rhine 
 rises in the Alps, in Switzerland, and running northwest, be- 
 tween France and Germany, discharges itself into the North 
 sea. The Elbe is wholly in Germany. It enters the North 
 sea, after a northwest course of 600 miles. 
 
 Islands. The principal islands are Sicily^ Sardinia^ and 
 Corsica^ in the Mediterranean ; Great Britain^ Ireland^ and 
 Iceland., in the Atlantic ocean ; and the uninhabited islands of 
 Spitsbergen and JSTova Zembla in the Frozen ocean. 
 
 Climate. Europe lies almost wholly within the northern 
 temperate zone, and enjoys a fine healthful climate. 
 
 Character. Europe is the abode of civilization, refinement, 
 wealth, science, learning, and the arts. This is pecuharly true 
 of Great Britain, France and Germany. 
 
 BRITISH EMPIRE. 
 
 The British Empire is composed of Great Britain, Ireland, 
 and the adjacent islands, together with extensive countries in 
 Asia, Africa, and America. 
 
 Great Britain is divided into England, Scotland, and Wales. 
 
 ENGLAND AND WALpS. 
 
 Situation. This country is bounded N by Scotland ; E. 
 by the North sea ; S. by the English channel and this straits of 
 Dover, which separate it from France ; W. by St. George's 
 channel, which separates it from Ireland. 
 
 Divisions. England is divided into 40 counties, viz : 
 
 Northumberland, Cumberland, Durham, Yorkshire, West- 
 moreland, Lancashire, in the north; Cheshire, Shropshire, 
 Herefordshire, Monmouthshire, feordermg 071 Wales; Notting- 
 hamshire, Derb)^ shire, Staffordshire, Leicestershire, Rutland- 
 shire, Northamptonshire, Warwickshire, Worcestershire, Glou- 
 cestershire, Oxfordshire, Buckinghamshire, Bedfordshire, in the 
 interior of the Jcingdom ; Lincolnshire, Huntingdonshire, Cam- 
 bridgeshire, Norfolk, Suflfolk, Essex, Hertfordshire, Middlesex, 
 in the eastern part of the kingdom ; Surry, Kent, Sussex, in tJte 
 southeast ; Berkshire, Wiltshire, Hampshire, Dorsetshire, in the 
 south ; and Somersetshire, Devonshire, and Cornwall, in the 
 southwest. 
 
 Wales is divided into 12 countries, viz : Flintshire, Denbigh- 
 N 2 ' 
 
,150 ENGLAND AND WALES. ■ 
 
 shire, Caernarvonshire, Anglesea, Merionethshire, Montgomery- 
 shire, in North Wales ; and Radnorshire, Cardiganshire, Pem- 
 brokeshire, Caermarthenshire, Brecknockshire, and Glamorgan- 
 shire, in South Wales. 
 
 Rivers. The four principal rivers are the Humber in the 
 northeast, the Thames in the southeast, the Severn in the south- 
 west, and the Mersey in the northwest. The general course 
 of the Thames is east ; of the Severn, south ; and of the Mersey, 
 west. • 
 
 The Ouse and the Trent are the two great branches of the 
 Humber. The Ouse drains the extensive county of Yorkshire. 
 It has many tributaries. The Trent rises near the centre of 
 England, and flows northeast. 
 
 The other rivers are the Tees., Tyne^ and Tti'eed^ which 
 empty themselves on the east coast, north of the Humber, and 
 the Dee., which empties itself on the west coast, near the 
 Mersey. 
 
 Chief Towns. The four principal commercial tov/ns stand 
 on or near the four principal rivers ; London^ on the Thames, in 
 the southeast ; Bristol., on the Avon, 4 miles from its junction 
 with the Severn, in the southwest ; Liverpool., on the Mersey, 
 in the northwest; and Hull^ on the Humber, in the northeast. 
 
 London., the capital of the kingdom, is on the Thames, 60 
 miles from its mouth. It is the most populous city in Europe ; 
 and in regard to commerce, wealth, manufactures, arts, litera- 
 ture, and charitable institutions, is the first city in the world. 
 It has more than a milhon inhabitants, and more than half a 
 million tons of shipping, 20 hospitals, 100 almshouses, and 
 between 3 and 400 churches. The houses are almost wholly 
 of brick. The principal public buildings are the majestic 
 cathedral of St. PauVs., the chief ornament of the city, and 
 Westminster Abbey, a grand gothic edifice, the sanctuary of the 
 illustrious dead. 
 
 Liverpool is the second city in commerce and wealth. Its 
 foreign trade is principally with the United States and the 
 West Indies. It is connected by canals with the principal 
 manufacturing towns in the interior. The growth of the city 
 has been very rapid. 
 
 Bristol is a very wealthy city and the rival of Liverpool in 
 the commerce with America and the West Indies. It is not so 
 extensively connected with the great manufacturing towns. 
 
 Hull is the fourth eity in the amount of shipping. It 1!=^ 
 
ENGLAND. Iql 
 
 largely concerned in the whale fishery, find in the trade to the 
 Baltic, and is extensively connected with the great manufactu- 
 ring towns in the interior, by means of the Trent and Ouse and 
 the canals communicating with them. 
 
 The following are the principal towns on the coast, Fal- 
 mouth is in the southwest, near the Land's end. Pacliets sail 
 regularly from this place to Spam and the West Indies ; Fly- 
 mouth is a little east of Falmouth ; Portsmouth^ east of the Isle 
 of Wight, is the principal naval station of Great Britain. Its 
 harbour is the best in the kingdom, and large enough to contain 
 the whole British navy. Harwich, on the east coast, is the 
 port from v/hich packets sail to Holland. Yarmouth, farther 
 north, is celebrated for the herring fishery. Benvick-upon- 
 Twced is on the borders of England and Scotland, and belongs 
 to neither. 
 
 The following are the principal towns in the northern coun- 
 ties. Newcastle is on the Tyne in the centre of the grand coal- 
 mines. York is on the Ouse, and in rank is the second city in 
 England. Leeds, on the Aire, a branch of the Ouse, is the 
 most celebrated town in the world for the manufacture of 
 woollen goods. Sheffield, on the Don, also a branch of the 
 Ouse, is famous for the manufacture of knives and files. Man^ 
 Chester, 32 miles east of Liverpool, is the most populous manu- 
 facturing town in England, and is especially famous for cotton 
 goods. 
 
 Coventry, celebrated for the mahufacture of ribbons, is in 
 the centre of the kingdom, and connected by canals with 
 the four great ports. Birmingham, a little west of Coventry, 
 is one of the first manufacturing towns in Europe. It is par- 
 ticularly famous for locks, hinges, buttons, guns and swords, 
 Bath, on the Avon, 12 miles east of Bristol, is famous for its hot 
 baths. It is the most elegant city in England, and one of the 
 most beautiful in the world. 
 
 The principal towns in Wales are Caermarthen in South 
 Wales, and Caemai-von in North Wales. 
 
 The following are the principal towns, arranged in the order 
 of their population. 
 
 Pop. 
 London, 1,225,000 
 
 Manchester, 134,000 
 
 Liverpool, 119,000 
 
 Birmingham, 107,000 
 
 Pop. 
 Bristol, 88,000 
 
 Leeds, 84,000 
 
 Plymouth, 61,000 
 
 Norwich^ 5<J,000 
 
iqS ENGLAND. 
 
 Canals. The river Trent is navigable to the centre of the 
 kingdom, and it is there connected by canals with the Mersey, [ 
 the Severn, and the Thames. An inland water communication. * 
 is thus opened between the four great ports of the kingdom. 
 London is connected with Liverpool, and Bristol with Hull. 
 There is, besides, a canal from the Severn to the Thames, con- 
 necting Bristol directly with London; and another from the 
 Mersey to the Severn, connecting Liverpool directly with 
 Bristol. The small canals are too numerous to be mentioned. 
 Several years since there were more than 260, intersecting the 
 island in every direction, and imparting life and activity to com- 
 merce and manufactures. 
 
 Population. The population of Great Britain is more than 
 14,000,000. The items at three different national enumera- 
 tions were as follows : 
 
 1801. 
 
 1811. 
 
 1821. 
 
 England, 8,331,434 
 Wales, 541,546 
 
 9,638,827 
 
 11,260,655 
 
 611,788 
 
 717,108 
 
 Scotland, 1,599,068 
 
 1,805,688 
 
 2,092,014 
 
 Army and Navy, 470,598 
 
 640,500 
 
 310,000 
 
 Great Britain, 10,942,646 
 
 12,596,803 
 
 14,379,677 
 
 Government. The government is a limited monarchy. The 
 supreme power is vested in a king and parliament. The par- 
 liament consists of two houses. Lords and Commons. Tjie 
 former are hereditary peers, and the latter representatives 
 chosen by the people. 
 
 Religion. The established religion is Episcopacy ; all others 
 are tolerated. The principal dissenters from the established 
 church are Roman Catholics, Independents, Baptists, Presby- 
 terians, Methodists, Quakers, and Unitarians. 
 
 Navy. During the late war in Europe, the British navy con- 
 sisted of more than 1000 vessels of war, manned by 180,000 
 seamen. Of the vessels, 254 were ships of the Hne. The 
 navy of Great Britain is her great bulwark and defence. It has 
 been very much reduced of late, but is still far superior to that 
 of any other nation on the globe. 
 
 Climate. The climate is moist, and liable to frequent and 
 sudden changes, but the extremes of heat and cold are less 
 than in other countries in the same latitude. 
 
 Face of the country. England is beautifully diversified with 
 hills and vales, whicL are covered at all seasons with a rich 
 verdure. Wales is mountainous. 
 
i ENGLAND. US 
 
 I Soil and Productions. The soil is rich in the southern and 
 j midland counties, and is under excellent cultivation. The 
 ^ principal productions are. wheat, barley, oats, rye, &c. 
 i Mineral Waters. The most, celebrated mineral waters are 
 i those of Bath, Bristol, Tunbridge, Buxton, Scarborough, Ep- 
 I som, and Harrowgate. 
 
 i Mines. The tin mines in Cornwall, in the southwest extre- 
 mity of the kingdom, are supposed to be the richest in the 
 world. The coal mines in the northern counties are a source 
 of much wealth and power to Great Britain. They have for 
 centuries furnished the east and south of England with fuel ; 
 and the transportation employs several hundred vessels and 
 many thousand seamen. Mines of rock salt are found near 
 Liverpool, which produce more 60,000 tons annually. 
 
 Manufactures. The manufactures of England are very ex- 
 tensive. They are supposed to employ more than 1,500.000 
 persons. The principal articles are woollen and cotton goods, 
 and articles of iron, tin, lead, and elegant earthen ware. 
 
 Commerce. The commerce of Great Britain extends to every 
 portion of the globe. The exports consist principally of manu- 
 factured goods. The number of merchant vessels in 1805 was 
 18,000, measuring more than 2,000,000 tons and manned by 
 137,000 seamen. 
 
 Debt and Revenue. In 1814 the national debt amounted to 
 more than 700,000,000/. and the annual interest was more 
 than 30,000.000/. The annual revenue for the last 10 or 12 
 years has been on an average about 60.000,000 /. and the ex- 
 penditure has usually exceeded that sum. 
 
 Paupers. The taxes for the support of the poor in England 
 amounted in 1815 to nearly 8,000 000/. and the number of 
 persons who received relief, in and out of workhouses, was more 
 than 1,000,000, about one ninth part of the whole population. 
 Universities. The universities at Cambridge and Oxford 
 are among the most celebrated in Europe. Cambridge uni- 
 versity consists of 1 6 colleges and halls, and has more than 
 2000 students. It is distinguished for mathematical learning. 
 Oxford has 25 colleges and halls, and is distinguished for clas- 
 sical learning. They are both very extensive establishments, 
 and richly endowed. Oxford is on the Thames, 50 miles west 
 ©f London. Cambridge is 50 miles N. of London. 
 
 Education. Great attention is paid to education by the 
 hio[her and middle classes ; but, till the estabhshment ief Soti- 
 
154 SCOTLAND. 
 
 day and Lancasterian schools, a few years since the education 
 of the lower classes was much neglected. 
 
 Charitable Institutions. The British and Foreign Bible 
 Society, established in 1804, has distributed more than 
 4,000,000 Bibles and Testaments, in upwards of ^0 different 
 languages. There are several Missionary societies, employe^ 
 jn introducing civilization and Christianity among the ignorant 
 lieathen, in almost every part of the world. 
 
 Islands. The isle of Wight is opposite Portsmouth on the 
 southern coast. The small isles of Alderney^ Guernsey^ and 
 Jersey are near the coast of France, southwest of the isle pf 
 Wight. The isles of Scilly are 30 miles west of the Land's 
 end. Anglesea is on the Welch coast. The isle of Man is 
 in the Irish sea, about equally distant from England, Ireland, 
 Scotland, and Wales. 
 
 SCOTIiAND. 
 
 Situation. Scotland is bounded W. and N. by the Atlantic ; 
 E. by the North sea ; and S. by England. 
 Divisions. There are 33 counties, viz. : 
 
 Southern Counties. 
 
 Middle Counties. 
 
 Northern Counties-. 
 
 Linlithgow, 
 
 Nairn, 
 
 Orkney and 
 
 Edinburgh, 
 
 Elgin, 
 
 Shetland, 
 
 Haddington, 
 
 Banff, 
 
 Caithness, 
 
 Berwick, 
 
 Aberdeen, 
 
 Sutherland, 
 
 Roxburgh, 
 
 Kincardine, 
 
 Ross, 
 
 Selkirk, 
 
 Forfar, 
 
 Cromarty, 
 
 Peebles, 
 
 Perth, 
 
 Inverness. 
 
 Dumfries, 
 
 Fife, 
 
 
 Kirkcudbright, 
 
 Kinross, 
 
 
 Wigtown, 
 
 Clackmannan, 
 
 
 Ay?, • 
 
 Stirling, 
 
 
 Lanark, 
 
 Dumbarton, 
 
 
 Renfrew. 
 
 Bute, and Argyle. 
 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers on the eastern coast, begin- 
 ning in the south, are the Tweed, which separates Scotland 
 from England, the Forth., the Tay., the Dee, the Spey, and the 
 Ness. The only river of consequence on the west coast is the 
 Clyde. 
 
 Friths. At the mouths of the principal rivers are broad 
 friths or estuaries, connecting them with the sea. The prin- 
 cipal on the eastern coast are the frith of Forth, the frith of 
 Tay,' and Murray f nth. On the western coast are the fritk 
 of Clyde, at the mouth of the Clyde, and Solway frith, which 
 separates Scotland from England. 
 
SCOTLAND. 155 
 
 Chief Towns. Edinburgh^ the capital and literary metro- 
 polis of Scotland, is about two miles from the frith of Forth. 
 It is on all sides surrounded by lofty hills except towards the 
 north. It is composed of two parts^ the Old town and the New 
 town. The houses in the old town are very lofty, and in some 
 instances 14 stories high. The New town is built entirely of 
 stone with great elegance and taste. Leith is the seaport of 
 Edinburgh. It is on the frith of Forth, 2 miles north of the 
 city. 
 
 Glasgow., on the Clyde, is the first city in Scotland in regard 
 to population, commerce, and manufactures. It is admirably 
 situated for a manufacturing and commercial town, being on 
 the borders of one of the richest coal districts in Great Britain, 
 and having the Atlantic open to it on one side, through the 
 Clyde, and the North sea on the other, through a canal con- 
 necting the Clyde with the Forth. Glasgow is distinguished 
 for its literary institutions. 
 
 St, Andrews is on the coast, between the frith of Forth and 
 tlie frith of Tay. Perth^ on the Tay, has extensive lineii 
 manufactures. Dundee is a manufacturing town on the frith 
 of Tay. Aberdeen^ the largest town in tiie north of Scotland, 
 is near the mouth of the Dee. Paisley^ celebrated for its 
 manufactures, is 8 miles west of Glasgow, on a branch of the 
 Clyde. Greenock is a flourishing commercial town on the Clyde, 
 west of Glasgow. Sterling., on the Forth, 23 miles N. E. of 
 Glasgow, was often the residence of the kings of Scotland. 
 
 The following are the chief towns arranged in the order of 
 their population. 
 
 Towns. Pop. Towns. Pop. 
 
 Glasgow, 147,Q0O j Dundee, 31,000 
 
 Eklinburgli, 138,000 J Greenock, 22,000 
 
 Paisley, 47,000 1 Perth, 19,000 
 
 Aberdeen, 45,000 { Dunfermliue, 14,000 
 
 Lakes and Canals. The north of Scotland abounds with 
 small lakes. They are too numerous to be mentioned. Lock 
 Lomond is the largest in Scotland, and most celebrated for its 
 romantic scenery. It is a httle north of the Clyde and dis- 
 charges its waters into that river. 
 
 There is a chain of long, narrow lakes running from Murray 
 iVith in a southwest direction, to the Atlantic. They are lock 
 Ness, loch Olch. loch Lochy.^ and loch Linne, A canal 2 
 
lit; SCOTLAND. 
 
 miles long, connects loch Oich and loch Lochy, and thus> 
 opens a water communication between the Atlantic ocean and 
 the North sea. This canal is called the Caledonian canal. 
 
 There is a canal from the Forth to the Clyde connecting 
 the Atlantic ocean with the North sea. It is on a much larger 
 scale than common canals. It admits vessels drawing 7 feet 
 &f water. 
 
 Mountains. The Grampian hills commence at loch Lo- 
 mond, near the mouth of the Clyde, and run northeast, com- 
 pletely across the country, to Aberdeen on the North sea. 
 They are the natural boundary between the Highlands and 
 Lowlands of Scotland. 
 
 The country north of the Grampian hills is intersected by 
 numerous mountains in various directions. Ben Nevis is 4,35U 
 feet above the level of the sea, and is the highest mountain in 
 Great Britain. It is noar loch Lochy. 
 
 Face of the country. The country north of the Grampian 
 hills, except a small district on the eastern coast, consists oi 
 barren hills and mountains, interspersed with numerous lakes. 
 The southern or Loivland counties have in many parts a fertile 
 soil- 
 
 Productions. Scotland feeds vast numbers of cattle and 
 sheep. Grass, oats, arid turnips are the principal agricultural 
 proiiuciions. Iron, coal, and lead are the principal minerals. 
 
 Religion. The established religion is Presbyterian. The 
 establishment is divided into 15 synods, which are subdivided 
 into 78 presbyteries. They, are all under the government of 
 the General Assembly. The number of ministers connected 
 with the establishment in 1803 was 938. 
 
 Population. The population in 1821 was 2,092,014. 
 
 Universities. There are universities, at St. Andrews, Aber- 
 deen, Edinburgh, and Glasgow. The University of Edinburgh 
 'h one of the most celebrated in Europe. It had in 1814, 27 
 professors and more than 2000 students. It is particularly 
 celebrated as a medical school. The library contains 50,000 
 volumes. Glasgou) University had in 1814, 16 professors and 
 more than 1400 students. 
 
 Education. Scotland is celebrated for its excellent system 
 of education. There is no country in Europe where the lower 
 classes are so universally taught to read and write. 
 
 Manufactures. The principal manufactures are cotton anrl 
 
Ireland. ibt 
 
 linen goods. Carron, in Sterlingshire, is the most celebrated 
 place in Europe for the manufacture of cannon. 
 
 Islands. Thef principal islands are the Hebrides^ or Westerri 
 islands, along the western coast ; the Orkney Islands on the 
 north coast, and the Shetland islands northeast of the Orkneys, 
 
 IRELAND. 
 
 Situation. Ireland is bounded on the east by the Irish sea 
 and St, George's channel, which separate it from England ; on 
 all other sides by the Atlantic. 
 
 Divisions. Ireland is divided into 4 provinces, viz. Ulster in 
 the northeast ; Connaught in the northwest ; Leinster in the 
 southeast, and Munster in, the southwest. These provinces are 
 subdivided into 32 counties. 
 
 Rivers. The Shannon is the principal river. It rises near 
 the north coast, and runs in a S. W. direction tiU it enters the 
 ocean. It is navigable almost to its source. The Barrow 
 rises west of Dublin, and running south empties itself into 
 Waterford harbour. The Liffy discharges itself into Dubhii 
 bay. The Boyne empties itself nortli of the hiffj. The 
 Banna is the outlet of Lough Neagh ; it runs in a northerly 
 direction, and discharges itself into the ocean near the north-^ 
 ern extremity of the island. 
 
 Chief Towns. Dublin^ the capital, is tlie second city in the- 
 United Kingdom. It is on the Liffy, at its mouth. It has ai 
 university and 187,939 inhabitants. Cork, in the south-west, 
 is the second city in Ireland. It has a noble harbour and 
 90,000 inhabitants. Limerick, on the Shannon, is the third 
 city in importance, and contains 50,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Galway is on Galway bay, on the west coast ; Sligo is on 
 Sligo bay, in the north-west ; Londonderry is in the north, 
 Belfast in the north-east, Wexford and Waterford in the 
 south-east. All these towns are on or near the coast. "Ar- 
 magh is an interior town in the north-east, and Kilkenny is on 
 the Nore, in the south-east. 
 
 University. The Univefsity at Dublin has 13 p?ofessors^ 
 and 1500 students. The library contains 70,000 volumes. 
 
 Education. The education of the lower classes has been- 
 much neglected in Ireland, but efforts are now makiag tc? 
 establish school:^ in all parts of the island. 
 
 O 
 
168 LAPLAND. 
 
 Religion. The established religion is that of the church oi 
 England, but more than three-quarters of the inhabitants are 
 Roman Catholics, and of the remainder a large portion are 
 Presbyterians. The Presbyterians are in the north of Ireland. 
 
 Population. The population in 1821 was 6,847,000. 
 
 Character. The Irish are robust, active, healthy and brave. 
 They make fine soldiers. Their food consists prmcipally of 
 potatoes and milk, and their houses are v^retched hovels of 
 mud. 
 
 Face of the country.^ S^c. The country is principally level 
 and fertile. One of the most striking features is the numerous 
 bogs which disfigure the surface. 
 
 Productions. Potatoes, oats, and grass are the principal 
 productions. Ireland is a fine grazing country, and supports 
 numerous herds of cattle. 
 
 Manufactures and Commerce. Linen is the principal manu 
 facture. The principal exports are linen, beef, hides, tallow. 
 and butter. 
 
 Curiosity. The GianVs Causetvay is on the north coast, 
 north-east of Londonderry. It consists of many thousand 
 columns of hard black rock, rising perpendicularly from 200 
 to 400 feet above the water. 
 
 LAPLAND. 
 
 Situation. Lapland is in the north-west of Europe ; ex- 
 tending from the gulf of Bothnia on the south, to the Frozen 
 ocean on the north, and from the White sea on the east, to the 
 Atlantic ocean on the west. 
 
 Divisions. The eastern part is called Russian Lapland ; 
 the middle, Swedish Lapland ; and the western, Norwegian 
 Lapland. The whole country belongs to Russia and Sweden. 
 
 Climate. Lapland is principally within the frigid zone, and 
 the winters are intensely cold. Snow covers the ground the 
 greater part of the year. The summers are short, but the 
 heat for a few weeks is excessive. 
 
 Face of the country. The country is made up of dreary 
 mountains, interspersed with numerous lakes and ponds. In 
 the northern parts there are no trees except the birch. 
 
 Population. The country is thinly inhabited, the population 
 being estimated at only 60,000. 
 
 Animals. The rein deer is the pride of Lapland. This 
 animal draAV3 tJi^ sledges of the Laplander 200 miles a day. 
 
NORWAY. 159 
 
 He feeds in summer on leaves, and in winter on moss. His 
 flesh and milk are used for food, his skin for clothing, and his 
 sinews and intestines for thread and cordage. Seals, whales 
 and other fish abound on the coast. 
 
 Character. The Laplanders are generally only four feet 
 high, with large heads, thick lips, and a swarthy complexion. 
 They are but little advanced in civilization. They profess Chris- 
 tianity, but unite with it many of their old Pagan superstitions. 
 
 NORWAY. 
 
 Situation. Norway is bounded E. by Sweden, and on all 
 other sides by the Atlantic ocean and the North sea. 
 
 Divisions. There are five })rovinces, viz. — Christiansand in 
 the extreme south; Christiania, Bergen and Drontheim in the 
 middle ; and Nordland, in the extreme north. 
 
 Chief Towns. Bergen., the capitaL has an excellent har- 
 bour, and considerable commerce. Drontheim., north of Ber- 
 gen, derives its importance fi-om its vicinity to the copper 
 mines. Christiania., in the south, is at the head of a bay 
 which runs up between Sweden and Norway. Christiansand 
 is on the coast south-west of Christiania. 
 
 Government. Norway belongs to Sweden, but has its own 
 legislature and a separate administration. 
 
 Religion and Population. The religion is Lutheran. The 
 population m 1825 was 1,000,162. 
 
 Face of tlie Country. The country is mountainous. A 
 range, called the Scandinavian range, commences near the 
 Naze, west of Christiansand, and runs north-east into Lapland. 
 Its length is more than 1000 miles, and some of the summits 
 are more than 7000 feet high. Most of Norway is covered 
 with forests of pine and fir. 
 
 Minerals. Iron, silver and cobalt are found in large quanti- 
 ties near the southern coast, at several places between Christi- 
 ania and Christiansand. There are rich copper mines near 
 Drontheim. 
 
 Commerce. The principal exports are timber, lumber, fish, 
 copper, and silver. The imports are corn and manufactured 
 goods. 
 
 Whirlpool. The Malstrom is a remarkable whirlpool in the 
 sea, near the southern extremity of the LofToden islands. The 
 roar of the waters can be heard many leagues off", and ships, 
 trees and whales, at the distance of 3 miles, are sometimes 
 irresistibly drawn in, and dashed to pieces against the bottom. 
 
160 SWEDEN. 
 
 SWEDEX, 
 
 Situatiam, Sweden is bounded N. by Norway ; E. by 
 Kussia and the Baltic ; S. by the Baltic ; and W. by Norway. 
 
 Divisions. Sweden is divided into four districts which are 
 subdivided into provinces. 
 
 Districts. Situation. Population. 
 
 Laplanil, in the north, 50,000 
 
 Norland, } . , .. „;.,«„ 238,000 
 
 Sweden, i in tbe middle, ^^^^^^^^ 
 
 Gotliland, in tlie south, 1,454,462 
 
 2,396,229 
 
 Finland., on the east of the gulf of Bothnia, formerly be- 
 longed to Sweden, but was ceded to Russia in 1808. 
 
 Population. The population in 1823 was 2,687,457, nearly 
 the whole of which is in the two southern districts. The 
 northern part of the country is very thinly inhabited. 
 
 Lakes. The three principal lakes are, Wener^ Wetter^ and 
 Meier. Lake Wener is in the south-west, and empties itself 
 into the sea at Gottenburg on the west coast. It is 80 miles 
 long and 50 broad. Lake Wetter^ further south, empties itself 
 into the Baltic. Lake Meier communicates with the Baltic 
 at Stockholm. '' 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers are the Gotka, Motala^ Dal 
 and Tomect. 
 
 The Gotha is the outlet of lake Wener, connecting it with 
 the Cattegat. The Motala is the outlet of lake AVetter, 
 connecting it with, the Baltic. The Dal empties itself about 
 60 miles N. of Upsal. The Tornea empties itself into the 
 northern extremity of the gulf of Bothnia, and is the boundary 
 between Sweden and Russia. 
 
 Chief Tonms. Stockholm, the capital, is on seven small 
 reeky islands, in the strait which connects lake Meier with the 
 Baltic. The situation is romantic. Population, 75,517, 
 GoUenbiirgh^ the second town in population and commerce, is 
 on the west coast, at the mouth of the Gotha. Population, 
 24,858. Nordkioping is a manufacturing town on the Motala, 
 22 miles from its mouth in the Baltic. Carlscrona, the princi- 
 pal station for the Swedish navy, is on a small island in th'^ 
 Baltic, in the south-east extremity of the kingdom. 
 
DENMARK. 161 
 
 Gejle is near the mouth of the Dal. Torned is at the head 
 of the gulf of Bothnia, at the mouth of the Tornea. Upsdl^ 
 formerly the capital of Sweden, is 40 miles N. of Stockholm. 
 Fahlun is in the inteMor, west of Gefle. Lund is at the south- 
 ern extremity of the kingdom. 
 
 Canal. A canal from lake Meier to lake Wener, connect- 
 ing Stockholm with Gottenburg and the Baltic with the North 
 sea, was commenced several years since, and will probably be 
 completed the present year (1828). 
 
 Education. There are two universities. The Upsal Uni- 
 versity has 21 professors, 1200 students, and a library of 
 40,000 volumes. The University at Lund has 21 professors, 
 300 students, and a library of 20,000 volumes Common 
 -chools are universally established, and the inhabitants gene- 
 rally can read and write. 
 
 Government. The government is a limited monarchy. 
 
 Religion. The religion is Lutheran. 
 
 Face of the country. The face of the country is moun- 
 tainous, especially in the northern districts. The mountains 
 are covered with immense forests of the Norway pine and 
 the fir. 
 
 Minerals. Near Fahlun is a great copper mine which has 
 been worked almost 1000 years. Sweden is also celebrated 
 for iron mines. 
 
 Commerce. The commerce of Sweden rests chiefly on the 
 export of her natural productions, iron, timber and copper. 
 The imports are corn, sugar, coffee, wine, &c. 
 
 Islands. The principal islands are Oldnd and Gothland. 
 The Aland isles between Sweden and Finland belong to 
 Russia. 
 
 DENMARK. 
 
 Situdtion. Denmark is a peninsula, bounded N. and E. by 
 the entrance of the Baltic. On the S. it extends to the Elbe, 
 which separates it from Germany. On the W. is the North 
 sea. 
 
 Divisions. Denmark is divided into the following terri- 
 tories. 
 
 Provinces. 
 
 Population. 
 
 Jutland, 
 
 400,000 
 
 Sleswick, 
 
 300,000 
 
 Hobtein, 
 
 350,000 
 
 I^ttenbnrg-, 
 
 35,000 
 
 
 02 
 
 Chief Toims. 
 Aalborg, Wiberg. 
 Sleswick. 
 Altona. 
 lAtienbar^. 
 
402 » DENMARK 
 
 Zealand, 343,000 Copknhagew. 
 
 Fwnen, ^ 175,000 Odensee. 
 
 1,603,000 
 
 Islinds. Zealdnd and Funen are the largest islands, and 
 there are many small islands adjacent. 
 
 Chief Towns. Copenlidgen stands on the east shore-of the 
 island of Zealand. It has a spacious, convenient, and well 
 fortified harbour and extensive commerce. It is the best built 
 city in the north of Europe. Population, 105,000. 
 
 Alfona is on the Elbe within gun-shot of Hamburg. It has 
 considerable commerce and 30,000 inhabitants. Kiel stands 
 at the bottom of a narrow bay of the Baltic, 47 miles N. of 
 Hamburg. It has a good harbour, and 8,000 inhabitants. 
 Elsinore^ 20 miles N. of Copenhagen, in the narrowest part of 
 the strait between Zealand and the Swedish shore, is the place 
 where all foreign ships that trade to the Baltic pay toll. 
 
 Canal. There is a canal on a large scale connecting the 
 Baltic with the North sea. It is in the narrowest part of the 
 peninsula, extending from the bay of Kiel to the river Eyder, 
 which empties itself into the North sea. It is 10 feet deep, 
 and admits vessels of 1 20 tons. 
 
 Universities. The University at Copenhagen has about 
 600 students, one of the best botanical gardens in Europe, and 
 a library of 60,000 volumes. The University at Kiel has 24 
 professors and 200 students. 
 
 Educdiion, Great attention is paid to the education of 
 children in Denmark. There arc common schools in every 
 parish, ^nd numerous Latin schools in every province. 
 
 Religion. The religion of Denmark is the Lutheran. 
 
 Government. The government is an absolute monarchy. 
 
 Face of the country^ <Sfc. Denmark is principally a level 
 country, and in the north is covered with forests. The s6il is 
 fertile and well cultivated, particularly in the south, an'd on the 
 island of Funen. Wheat is the staple production. 
 
 Commerce. Denmark has a large extent of seacoast, and is 
 well situated for commerce. The principal exports are grain 
 and cattle, . 
 
 Iceland, a large island belongihgto Denmark, lies far to the 
 northwest, in the Atlantic ocean, in lat 65° N. It is chiefly 
 celebrated for its volcanoes and spouting springs of hot water. 
 Mount Hekla is tlie principal volcano. It is 5000 feet high, 
 
RUSSIA. . 163 
 
 and sometimes throws out stones and lava to the distance of 
 160 miles. The country for 20 miles round was laid waste by 
 one eruption. The spouting springs throw up large columns 
 of boiling water, often to the height of 100 feet. 
 
 The inhabitants are about 50,000 in number. They live in 
 a cold climate, and on a barren soil, yet are strongly attached 
 to their country. They import their corn and part of their 
 wood from Denmark, and give in exchange fish, oil and eider 
 down. 
 
 The Faroe islands, about half way between Iceland and Nor* 
 way, belong also to Denmark. Population 5,209. 
 
 RUSSIA. 
 
 Extent. The Russian empire is the most extensive on the 
 globe. It embraces one half of Europe, and more than one 
 third of Asia, besides a portion of America. 
 
 RUSSIA IN EUROPE. 
 
 Situation. Russia in Europe extends from the Frozen ocean 
 on the north, to the Black sea on the south, and from Asia on 
 the east, to Sweden, the Baltic, Prussia, Austria, and Turkey 
 on the west. 
 
 Sea$. There are four seas bordering on Russia ; the White 
 sea on the north, the Baltic on the west, and the Black sea and 
 the sea of Azof on the south. 
 
 Gulfs. There are five large bays or gulfs. The gulf of 
 Bothnia, the gulf of Finland and the gulf of Riga are arms 
 of the Baltic. The bay of Onega.) and the bay of Archangel 
 are arms of the White sea. 
 
 Lahes. There are many lakes in the northwest, around the 
 gulf of Finland. The principal are lake Ladoga, east of the 
 gulf, and connected with it by the river Neva ; and/aA;e Onega., 
 east of lake Ladoga, and connected with it by the river Svir. 
 
 Rivers. The Volga, the great river of Europe, discharges 
 itself into the Caspian sea in Asia by many mouths. It rises be- 
 tween Petersburg and Moscow. Its general course is first 
 east and then south. It is more than 3000 miles long, and is 
 navigable nearly to its source. 
 
 The Don rises a little south of Moscow, near the centre of 
 European Russia, and flowing south 800 miles, empties itself 
 into the sea of Azof. The Dnieper rises west of Moscow, and 
 flows south 1200 miles into the Black sea. 
 
164 KUSSIA. 
 
 The Dniester empties itself into the Black sea west of the 
 Dnieper It rises in the Carpathian mountains and flows south- 
 east tiOO miles. 
 
 The Dwina rises near the sources of the Volga and the Dnie- 
 per, and flowing west discharges itself into the gulf of Riga. 
 The JVeua connects lake Ladoga with the gulf of Finland. The 
 Svir connects lake Onega with lake Ladoga. The Onega, 
 empties itself into the White sea at the town of Onega. The 
 northern Dwina empties itself into the White sea at Archangel, 
 after a course of 600 miles. 
 
 Chief Cities. St Petersburg^ the capital of the Russian em- 
 pire, is on the Neva, near its entrance into thegulf of Finland. 
 It was founded in 1703, by Peter the Great, and is now one 
 of the most magnificent cities in the world. Population 285,000. 
 Cronstadt^ the port of St. Petersburg, is 20 miles distant, on an 
 island in the gulf of Finland. It has an excellent harbour and 
 is the principal station for the Russian navy. Population, 
 40,000. 
 
 Moscow^ the ancient capital, is on the Moskva near the centre 
 of European Russia. It was burnt in 1812, when Buonaparte 
 invaded Russia. Previous to its destruction it contained 
 300,000 inhabitants. It has since been rebuilt. 
 
 The principal seaports are. Archangel on the White sea, 
 Cronstadt and Riga on the Baltic, and Odessa on the Black 
 sea. Jistrachan on the Caspian, at the mouth of the Volga, 
 is in Asiatic Russia. The principal towns in the west are 
 Warsaw^ on the Vistula, and Wilna^ northeast of Warsaw. 
 
 Face of the country. European Russia consists chiefly of 
 immense plains, covered in many parts with forests. The prin- 
 cipal mountains are the Ural mountains, in the northeast, which 
 separate it from Asia. 
 
 CanaL There is a canal uniting the river Neva with the 
 head waters of the Volga. This canal opens an inland water 
 communication between the Baltic and the Caspian. It is sup- 
 posed that 4000 vessels pass on this route annually between 
 St. Petersburg and Astrachan. 
 
 Pojmlation. The population of the whole Russian empire 
 according to Hassel, is 45,515,797, of whom about 42,000,000 
 are in European Russia. The southern and western provinces 
 contain the great mass of the population ; the northern and 
 eastern are very thinlv jnhabitecj. 
 
PRUSSIA. 165 
 
 The population of Russia is made up of many different 
 tribes and nations, speaking different languages,^ and having 
 different customs, and religions. Some are barbarians, some 
 are civilized^^and some half civilized. 
 
 Education. There are universities at St. Petersburg, War- 
 saw, Abo and several other places. Education has heretofore 
 been almost entirely neglected. An increasing attention is 
 now paid to it. 
 
 Religion. The established rehgion is that of the Greek 
 church, but all others are tolerated. Mahometans, Catholics, 
 Jews, Lutherans and Pagans are numerous. Bible societies 
 are now extensively established. They have published the 
 Bible in 25 different languages, and are distributing it in every 
 part of the empire. 
 
 Government.-^The government is a constitutional monarchy. 
 
 Commerce. Russia has an extensive commerce carried on 
 through the Baltic, Black, Caspian, and White seas. 
 
 Islands. J\'ova Zembla is a large uninhabited island or col- 
 lection of islands, in the Frozen ocean, northeast of Archangel, 
 The islands of Mand and Oesel in the Baltic belong to Russia, 
 The Crimea in the Black sea is a peninsula. 
 
 PRUSSIA, 
 
 Situation. The Prussian dominions consist of two territories, 
 entirely distinct and separate from each other ; one lying in the 
 cast, the other in the west of Germany. 
 
 The eastern division is much the largest, comprehending five 
 sixths of the whole, and is bounded N. by the Baltic ; E. by 
 Russia ; S. by the Austrian Dominions and Saxony ; W. by 
 several small German States. 
 
 The western division lies on both sides of the river Rhine, 
 and is bounded W, by the Netherlands, and on all other sides 
 by small German States. 
 
 Divisions. Prussia is divided into 10 provinces. 
 
 Provinces. 
 
 Population. 
 
 Chief Totons. 
 
 1. East Prussia, 
 
 855,244 
 
 Koiiigsberg. 
 
 2. West Prussia, 
 
 560,128 
 
 Dantzic. 
 
 3. Brandenburg, 
 
 1,191,121 
 
 Berlin. 
 
 4. Pomerania, 
 
 665,836 
 
 Stettin. 
 
 6. Silesia, 
 
 2,017,057 
 
 Breslau. 
 
 6. Posen, 
 
 544,641 
 
 Posen. 
 
 7, ^axonVj 
 
 1,148,041 
 
 Magdeburg, 
 
166 PRUSSIA. 
 
 Provinces. Population. Chief Towns. 
 
 8. Westphalia, 991,899 Munster. 
 
 9. Cleves and Berg, 908,185 Cologne. 
 
 10. Lower Rhine, 971,597 Aix-la-Chapclle. 
 
 9 853 749 
 Add Neufchatel in Switzerland, ' 60,800 
 
 9,904,649 
 
 The seven first named provinces are in the eastern division, 
 and the three last named in the western division. 
 
 Rivera. The four principal rivers are the Vistula, the Oder, 
 the Elbe, and the Rhine. 
 
 The Vistula rises in the south of Prussia, and empties itself 
 into the Baltic at Dantzic. The principal part of its course is 
 in the Russian dominions. The Oder is almost wholly in Prus- 
 sia. It rises near the sources of the Vistu}a,,and running north- 
 west 380 miles, empties itself into the Baltic. The Elbe rises 
 in the Austrian dominions, and running northwest 500 miles, 
 discharges itself into the North sea. About half its course is in 
 Prussia. 
 
 The Rhine runs through the middle of the Grand Dutchy of 
 Lower Rhine, dividing it into two parts. The small rivers are, 
 the HmeU a branch of the Elbe ; the Spree., a branch of the 
 Havel ; the Warta, a branch of the Oder ; the Memel and the 
 Pregel 
 
 Chief Towns. Berlin, the capital, is on the Spree. It is a 
 beautiful city, and has communication by canals with the Elbe 
 and the Oder. Population 182,387. Konigsberg is on the 
 Pregel, It is well situated for commerce. Population 63,000. 
 
 Dantzic, on the Vistula, near its mouth, is an opulent com- 
 mercial city. Thorn is on the Vistula, south of Dantzic. Posen 
 is on the Warta, south of Dantzic, and west of Warsaw. 
 
 Breslau, Frankfort, and Stettin are on the Oder. Breslau 
 has an extensive commerce. It is connected with Hamburg by a 
 canal, which joins the Oder with the Elbe. Magdeburg '\s on 
 the Elbe. It is strongly fortified, and is well situated for com- 
 merce. Halle, famous for its university, is south of Magde- 
 burg. 
 
 Cohlentz, Cologne, and Busseldorf are on the Rhine, in the 
 western division of Prussia, Cologne has 42,000 inhabitants 
 and considerable commerce. Aix-la Chapelle, once the fa» 
 vourite residence of Charlemagne, and famous for several trea- 
 ties made there, is west of Cologne, 
 
AUSTRIAN EMPIRE. 167 
 
 The following are the principal towns arranged in the order 
 of their population. 
 
 1. Berlin, 182,387 I 4. Cologne, 54,938 
 
 2. Breslau, 76,813 j 5. Dantzic, 52,821 
 
 3. Konigsberg, 63,000 | 6. Magdeburg, 35^448 
 
 Universities. The most famous universities are those of 
 Halle, Konigsberg, and Berlin. 
 
 Population. The population of the Prussian dominions is 
 9,904,549. 
 
 Language. The German language is the most prevalent. 
 
 Religion. The established religion is Lutheran, but all sects 
 are tolerated, and one third of the population are Roman Ca- 
 tholics. 
 
 Government. The government is an absolute. monarchy. 
 
 Face qftlie country, <S^c. A range of mountains runs along 
 the southern boundary, separating Silesia from the Austrian do- 
 minions. The rest of Prussia is a level country, and has gene- 
 rally a good soil, producing grass, grain, flax, hemp, fcc. 
 
 Island. The island of Rugen^ in the Baltic, belongs to 
 Prussia. 
 
 AUSTRIAN EMPIRE. 
 
 Situation. The Austrian empire embraces about one third 
 of Germany, nearly a quarter of Italy, a portion of ancient Po- 
 iarwl, the v/hole kingdom of Hungary, and several smaller 
 states. It is bounded N. by Saxony, Prussia and Russia ; E. 
 by Russia and Turkey ; S. by Turkey and the gulf of Venice ; 
 S. W. by several small ItaUan States ; and W. by Switzerland 
 and Bavaria. 
 
 Divisions. The following table exhibits the provinces and 
 population of this great monarchy. 
 
 1. Lower Austria, 1,850,000 
 
 2. Inner Austria, 795,000 
 
 3. Illyria, 1,170,000 
 
 I. German States, 4 4. Uoper Austria, 747,000 
 Bbhemia, 3,200,000 
 Moravia, 1,374,000 
 
 L7. Austrian Silesia, 346,000 
 
 II. Aofitrian Poland, or the kingdom of Galicia, 3,778,000 
 
 fl. Kingdom of Hungary, 7,515,000 
 
 2. Sclavonia, 528,000 
 
 III. Hungarian States. <( 3. Croatia, 660,000 
 
 j 4. Dalmatia, 305,000 
 
 [b. Transylvania, 1,700,000 
 
 TV Anctrion T*ol,. 5 ^' Government of Milan, 2,082,000 
 
 JV. Austrian Italy. ^ ^ Government of Venice, 1,932,000 
 
 Total, 27,972,000 
 
163 AUSTRIAN EMPIRE. 
 
 Rivers. The Danube is the principal river of Austria. It 
 rises in the southwest corner of Germany, near the borders of 
 France and Switzerland, and running from west to east through 
 the heart of the Austrian dominions, passes into Turkey, and 
 empties itself into the Black sea. The Dram and Sam are 
 branches of the Danube. They rise in the mountains north of 
 the gulf of Venice, and flow east. The Save empties itself at 
 Belgrade. It forms a part of the boundary between Hungary 
 and Turkey. The Teisse is the principal eastern branch of 
 the Danube. Its course is wholly in Hungary. 
 
 The river Po^ and the Tesino^ one of its branches which rises 
 in the Alps, are the boundary of Austria on the side of Italy. 
 The Po empties itself into the gulf of Venice. The Adige I 
 empties itself into the same gulf a little north of the Po. i 
 
 Chief Towns, Vienna.^ the capital of the Austrian domin- ' 
 ions, is on the Danube. It is one of the largest cities in Europe,- i 
 containing 240,000 inhabitants. Prague,, the capital of Bohe- 
 mia, is the next largest city. It is on the Mulda, a branch of I 
 the Elbe, and contains 80,000 inhabitants. Buda^ the capital 
 of Hungary, is on the Danube, 103 miles S. E. of Vienna. 
 Population, 22,000. Pest, on the same river, directly opposite 
 Buda, has 40,000 inhabitants, Fresburg is on the Danube 35 
 miles east of Vienna. l 
 
 Lembei'g,, the capital of Galieia, has 50,000 inhabitants, j 
 Brunn,) the capital of Moravia, is on a branch of the Danube. | 
 Population, 25,000. Gratz is on a branch of the Drave, 70 j 
 miles S. of Vienna. Hermanstadt,, the capital of Transylvania^ j 
 is near the southeastern extremity of the Austrian dominions, i 
 Trieste is a seaport on the gulf of Venice. 1 
 
 The principal towns in Austrian Italy are Milan, Venice, i 
 Verona, Mantua, and Padua. Milan is a walled city, and has | 
 230 churches, 40 monasteries, 50 nunneries, and 135,000 I 
 inhabitants. Venice is built on 72 islands at the head of the gulf | 
 of Venice. At a distance it seems to float on the sea, and has | 
 a very splendid appearance. Population, 109,000, Verona 
 is west of Venice, on the Adige. Population, 60,000. Man- \ 
 tua, the birth-place of Virgil, is on the outlet of a lake which j 
 empties itself into the Po. Padua,, the birth-place of Livy, is | 
 on the Brenta, 20 miles west of Venice. i 
 
 Universities. The principal universities are those of Vienna,- ', 
 Prague, Pest, Lemberg, and Padua. • j 
 
 Religion^ The Roman Catholic iB the esitablished religions- 
 
GERMANY, 169 
 
 but all others are tolerated. About three fourths of the inha- 
 bitants are Roman Catholics. In Hungary and Transylvania 
 the majority of the population are either Pi-otestants or adhe- 
 rents of the Greek church. 
 
 Government. The government £s an hereditary monarchy. 
 The empire is made up of many different coimtries, which are 
 governed by different laws. In some provinces the emperor 
 has much more power than in others. 
 
 Language. The languages are various. The principal are 
 the German, Sclavonic, Hungarian, and Italian. 
 
 Population. The number of inhabitants is nearly 28,000,000. 
 They are made up of many different nations, Sclavonians, Ger- 
 mans, Hungarians, Italians, &c. Their characters are as 
 heterogeneous as their language and their government. 
 
 Mountains. The Alps separate Austrian Italy from the 
 rest of the empire. The Carpathian mountains separate 
 Hungary from Galicia. Bohemia is almost surrounded by 
 mountains ; the Erzgebirge mountains separate it from Saxony 
 on the N. W. and the Sudetic chain divides it from Silesia, in 
 the Prussian dominions, on the N. E. 
 
 Minerals. The mountains of Austria are rich in valuable 
 minerals. Iron mines abound in the mountainous region near 
 the gulf of Venice. Quicksilver and lead are obtained there 
 also in large quantities ; but the principal mines are in the pro- 
 vinces of Hungary and Transylvania, bordering on the Carpa- 
 thian mountains. Here are numerous gold and silver mines ; 
 ,and copper, coal, and salt are found in various places. The 
 celebrated salt mines of Wielitska are in Galicia, 8 miles S« of 
 Cracow. In working these mines, pits have been sunk to a 
 great depth, and galleries and subterraneous chambers of 
 immense size have been formed. The principal mine is more 
 than a mile long, 1000 feet broad, and 743 feet deep. It has 
 been worked above 600 years and is apparently inexhaustible. 
 
 SoU and Productions. The soil is generally fertile, particu- 
 larly in Hungary and Austrian Italy. Among the productions 
 are corn and the vine, 
 
 GERMANY. 
 
 Name. Germany is the country united unde^ the Germanic 
 Confederation. It embraces the greater part of the Prussian 
 Dominions, about one third of the Austrian dominions, Hol- 
 'stein belonging to Denmark ; Luxemburg, a province of 
 
 P 
 
no 
 
 GERMANY. 
 
 the Netherlands ; the kingdom of Hanover, of which his Bri- 
 tannic majesty takes the title of king ; 30 independent states, 
 governed by native German princes, and 4 tree cities. 
 
 Situation. Germany is bounded N. by the North sea, Den- 
 mark and the Baltic ; E. by the eastern parts of the Prussian 
 and Austrian dominions ; S. by Italy and Switzerland ; and W. 
 by France and the kingdom of the Netherlands. 
 
 Divisions. Germany is divided into independent states^ 
 They may be classed in two divisions, the greater and smaller. 
 
 Population. Chief Towns. 
 9,482,227 Vienna. 
 
 Greater States, 
 Austrian dominions ) 
 
 in Germanj^, ) 
 Prussian dominions > 
 
 in Germany, ) 
 Kingdom of Bavaria, 
 Kingdom of Wirtemberg, 
 Kingdom of Hanover, 
 Kingdom of Saxony, 
 Grand dutchy ot Baden, 
 Small States. 
 Grand dutchy of Hesse, 
 Hesse Cassel, 
 Holstein and Lauenburg, 
 Luxemburg, 
 Brunswick, 
 
 Mecklenburg-Schwerin, 
 Mectjlenbnrg-Strelitz, 
 Nassau, 
 Saxe-Weimar, 
 Saxe-Gotha, 
 Saxe-Coburg, 
 Saxe-Meinungcn, 
 Saxe- H! Idbnrghaus en, 
 Oldenburg, 
 Anhalt-Dessau, 
 Anhalt-Bernburg, 
 Anhalt-Coihen, 
 Swartzburg-Sonderhausen, 
 Swartzburg-Rudolstadt, 
 Hohcnzolierri-Hechingen, 
 Hohenzollero-Sigmanngen, 
 Lictitenstein, 
 Waldeck, 
 Reuss-Greitz, 
 Reuss-Lobenstein, 
 Schauenburg-Lippe, 
 L^pe-Detmold, 
 
 Free Cities. 
 Hesse-Homburg, 
 Lubeck, 
 
 Frankfort on the Maine, 
 Bremen, 
 Hambiyg, 
 
 7,923,439 Berlin. 
 
 Total, 
 
 3,560,000 
 
 Munich. 
 
 1,396,463 
 
 Stuttgard. 
 
 1,303,351 
 
 Hanover. 
 
 1,200,000 
 
 Dresden. 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 ManUeim. 
 
 619,500 
 
 Mentz. 
 
 540,000 
 
 Cassel. 
 
 360,000 
 
 Kiel. 
 
 214,058 
 
 Luxemburg. 
 
 208,600 
 
 Brunswick. 
 
 358,000 
 
 Schwerin. 
 
 71,769 
 
 Strelitz. 
 
 302,767 
 
 Nassau. 
 
 201,000 
 
 Weimar. 
 
 185,682 
 
 Gotha. 
 
 80,012 
 
 Coburg. 
 
 54,400 
 
 Meiuungen. 
 
 27,706 
 
 Hildburghauseia. 
 
 217,769 
 
 OidenDurg. 
 
 52,947 
 
 Dessau. 
 
 37,046 
 
 Bernburg. 
 
 32,454 
 
 Cothen. 
 
 45,117 
 
 Soi)derhaiisen. 
 
 53,937 
 
 Rudolstadt. 
 
 14,500 
 
 Hecbingen, 
 
 35,360 
 
 Sigraaringen. 
 
 5,546 
 
 Lichtenstein. 
 
 61,877 
 
 Waldeck. 
 
 22,255 
 
 Greitz. 
 
 62,205 
 
 Lobenstein. 
 
 24,000 
 
 Schauenburg. 
 
 69,062 
 
 Detmold. 
 
 Population. Chief Towns. 
 
 20,000 
 
 Homburg. 
 
 40,650 
 
 Lubeck. 
 
 47,850 
 
 Frankfort. 
 
 48,500 
 
 Bremen. 
 
 129,800 
 
 Hamburg. 
 
 30.091,849 
 
 
GERMANY. 171 
 
 Situation of the greater states. The Prussian dominions are 
 in the N. E ; the Austrian dominions are in the S. E. ; Bavaria, 
 Wirtemberg, and Baden, in the S. W. ; and Hanover in the N. 
 W. Saxony is between the Prussian and Austrian dominions, 
 in the east ; and the western division of Prussia is south of 
 Hanover, in the west. 
 
 Situation of the smaller states. The smaller states are prin- 
 cipally in the north, between the two divisions of the Prussian 
 dominions. 
 
 Goiiernment. The German states are independent princi- 
 palities, but united under a Confederation for mutual defence 
 and protection. The Federative Diet consists of 17 plenipo- 
 tentiaries, and the General Assembly of 69 members. The 
 sessions are held at Frankfort on the Maine. 
 
 Population. The population is 30.091,849. 
 
 Religion. The Protestant religion prevails in the north of 
 Germany, and the Catholic in the south. The number of 
 Catholics, is 15 027.000 ; the remainder of the population are 
 principally Protestants. There are a few Jews. 
 
 Literature. The Germans have arrived to a high degree of 
 eminence in literature and the sciences, fn many branches 
 they surpass all otHer nations. There are about VO universities, 
 containing in all 9000 students. About 6000 new books are 
 published every year. There are large libraries in all the prin- 
 cipal towns, many of which are open to the public. 
 
 Language. The German language prevails in all the states. 
 \i is spoken in the greatest purity in Saxony. 
 
 Rivers. The Oder is wholly in Germany. It empties itself 
 into the Baltic. The Elbe rises in the east, and runs northwest 
 into the North sea. The Weser empties itself a little south of 
 the Elbe. It rises in the centre of Germany. The Rhine 
 rises in Switzerland. For some distance it forms the boundary 
 between Germany and Switzerland, and Germany and France ; 
 after which, it passes through the western division of the Prus- 
 sian dominions into the kingdom of the Netherlands, and 
 empties itself into the North sea. The Maine is a branch of the 
 Rhine. It rises on the confines of Bohemia, and flowing west, 
 empties itself at Mentz. 
 
 The Danube rises in Baden, near the southwest corner of 
 Germany, and flowing east through Wirtemberg, Bavaria, the 
 Austrian dominions, and Turkey, empties itself into the Black 
 
in SAXONY, 
 
 sea. The principal branches of the Danube are the her and 
 the Inn. 
 
 Free Cities. Hamburgh is a fortified city on the Elbe, 60 
 miles from its mouth. It is the first city in Germany in point 
 of commerce, and has been reckoned the third in Europe. 
 Lubec is northeast of Hamburg, near the mouth of a small riveir 
 which runs into the Baltic. Bremen is on the Weser, south- 
 west of Hamburg. Frankfort-on-the-Maine is the seat of the 
 Federative Diet. The successors of Charlemagne formerly 
 resided in Frankfort, and the emperors of Germany were usually 
 crowned there. 
 
 Face of the country. The northern part of Germany con- 
 sists chiefly of wide sandy plains ; the southern part is moun- 
 tainous. The soil is generally fertile. 
 
 SAXOIVY. 
 
 Situation. Saxony is in the east of Germany, between the 
 Prussian and Austrian Dominions. The Elbe runs through 
 the kingdom from S. E. to N. W. 
 
 Chief Towns. Dresden^ the capital, is on the Elbe. It m 
 one of the handsomest towns in Europe. It contains a mag- 
 nificent palace, furnished with a library of 150,000 volumes. It 
 has various manufactures, and 49,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Leipsic, west of Dresden, is a celebrated mart of German 
 literature. At the fairs, which are held here three times a year, 
 immense numbers of books are sold and bartered. The Uni- 
 versity at Leipsic is one of the most famous in Europe. Popu- 
 lation, 32.000. 
 
 Literature. Saxony is celebrated for its schools, and its lite- 
 rature. The German Language is spoken here in its greatest 
 purity, and many of the most celebrated writers in that language 
 received their education in Saxony. 
 
 Government. The government is monarchy, nearly absolute. 
 
 Religion. The religion of the great majority of the people 
 is Lutheran. 
 
 Productions. The land is. well cultivated, and produces all 
 kinds of grain and vegetables. The Erzgebirge mountains, 
 which separate Saxony from Bohemia, contain valuable mines 
 ,af silver, tin, lead, copper, and iron. 
 
BAVARIA. 173 
 
 HANQVER. 
 
 Situation, The kingdom of Hanover is in the northwest of 
 Germany, bounded N. by the North sea and the Elbe ; E. and 
 S. principally by the Prussian dominions; W. by the kingdom 
 of the Netherlands. 
 
 Chief Towns. Hanover, the capital, is on the [-♦eine, a branch 
 of the Weser. It has a magnificent palace, a large public 
 library, various manufactures, and 20,000 inhabitants. Gottin- 
 gen is on the I.eine, 60 miles S. of Hanover. Its university is 
 one of the most celebrated in the world. It has 65 professors, 
 a library of 200,000 volumes, and more than 1000 students. 
 Population 12,000. 
 
 Government. The king of Great Britain is king of Hanover, 
 The sfovernment is conducted by a council of regency. 
 
 Religion. The rehgion is Lutheran, About one tenth of 
 the inhabitants are Catholics. 
 
 BAVARIA. 
 
 Situation. Bavaria is bounded N. by several of the smaller 
 German states ; E. and S. by the Austrian dominions, and W, 
 by the kingdom of Wirtemberg, There is a small territory 
 lying wes^ of the Rhine which belongs to Bavaria. 
 
 Chief Towns. Munich^ the capital, is on the Iser, 200 miles 
 west of Vienna, it is one of the handsomest cities in Ger- 
 many. It has manufactures of velve^nd silk, and 60,000 
 inhabitants. Augsburg, 35 miles N. W?of Munich, has 29,000 
 inhabitants. Ratisbon, on the Danube, N. E. of Munich, has 
 22,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Government. The government is absolute monarchy. 
 
 Religion, The prevailing religion is Roman Catholic, 
 Only one-fifth of the inhabitants are Protestants. 
 
 Education. Education was formerly much neglected in Ba- 
 varia. The children are now generally instructed in the com- 
 mon branches of education. There are three universities, and 
 about twenty academies. 
 
 Face of the country. On the south, Bavaria is separated 
 from the Tyrol in Austria by rugged mountains, and on the 
 northeast, there is another range between Bavaria and Bohemia. 
 
 Rivers. The Danube^ Inn., Iser.^ and Jyiaine^ are the prin- 
 cipal river?. 
 
 P9 
 
174 POLAND. 
 
 WIRTEMBERG. 
 
 Situation. Wirtemberg lies between Bavaria on the east, 
 and Baden on the west. 
 
 River. The Neckar, a branch of the Rhine, is the princi- 
 pal river. It runs N. W. into Baden. 
 
 Chief Towns. Stuttgart^ the capital, is near the Neckar, 
 40 miles N. W. of Ulm. It has a large public library, a uni- 
 versity, a magnificent palace, various manufactures and 22,000 
 inhabitants. Tubingen is on the Neckar, 16 miles S. of Stutt- 
 gart. It has a university, and 6,700 inhabitants. 
 
 Religion. The religion is Lutheran. 
 
 BADEN. 
 
 Situation. Baden is in the southwest corner of Germany. 
 It has Wirtemberg on the E. ; Switzerland on the S. ; and the 
 Rhine, which separates it from France, on the west. 
 
 Chief Toivns. Manheim^ the largest town, is situated at the 
 confluence of the Neckar with the Rhine. It has 18,000 in- 
 habitants. Carlsruhe^ the residence of the grand duke, has 
 13,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Religion. A majority of the inhabitants are Lutherans. 
 
 POLAND. 
 
 Situation. Poland ^as formerly a powerful kingdom of 
 Europe, lying between^ussia, Prussia, and Austria. It com- 
 prehended the province of Galicia, now belonging to Aus- 
 tria ; the province of Posen, now belonging to Prussia; and 
 nearly all that part of Russia which lies between the Dwina on 
 the north, the Dnieper on the east, and the Dniester on the 
 south. 
 
 History. In 1773, Poland was distracted by internal dis- 
 sensions. This furnished Russia, Prussia, and Austria, with 
 a pretence for interference. They accordingly took possession 
 of a large portion of the country, and divided it between them. 
 In 1793 they interfered a second time, and dismembered a 
 second portion ; and in 1795 they divided the remainder, and 
 annihilated the kingdom. 
 
 The greater part of Poland is now under the dominion of 
 tlie emperor of Russia, who takes the title of king of Poland. 
 
SWITZERLAND. 
 
 175 
 
 Chief Towns. Warsaw^ the capital, and Wilna^ belong to 
 Russia ; Lemberg, to Austria ; and Posen to Prussia. Cracoiv^ 
 on the Vistula, is a free city. It has 25,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Universities. There are universities at Cracow, Wilna, 
 Posen, and Warsaw. 
 
 Religion. Most of the Poles are Roman Catholics. Jews 
 are very numerous. There are probably more Jews in Poland 
 than in any other country. 
 
 SWITZERI4AND. 
 
 Situation. Switzerland is bounded by Germany on the N. 
 and E. ; by Italy on the S., and by France on the W. 
 Divisions. Switzerland is divided into 22 cantons, viz. : 
 
 I. Bale, 
 ?. Soleure, 
 
 3. Argow, 
 
 4, Zurich, 
 
 6. Schaffhausen, 
 
 6. Thurgow, 
 
 7. Appenzell, 
 
 8. St. Galle, 
 
 9. Glarus, 
 
 10. Schweitz, 
 
 11. Zug, 
 
 12. Uri, 
 
 13. Underwalden, 
 
 14. Lucerne, 
 
 15. Berne, 
 
 16. Friburg, 
 
 17. Neufchatel, 
 
 18. Vaud, 
 
 19. Geneva, 
 
 20. Valais, 
 
 21. Tesino, 
 
 22. Grisons. 
 
 Lakes. Switzerland has many beautiful lakes. The prin- 
 cipal are, the lake of Constance in the northeast, and the lake 
 of Geneva in the southwest. Both these lakes are celebrated 
 for their picturesque scenery. , Lake Lucerne is in the centre 
 of Switzerland. The lakes of Zug *pd Zurich are small 
 lakes northeast of lake Lucerne. JST^chatel lake is in the 
 ivest, near the borders of France- The four last named lakes 
 ^discharge themselves through small rivers into the Aar, a 
 branch of the Rhine. 
 
 Mountains. The Alps overspread all the southern cantons, 
 Blount St. Gothard is in the centre of the chain. 
 
 Rivers. The Rhine rises in Mount St. Gothard, and flows 
 N. E. to lake Constance. After leaving that lake it first 
 jjuns west, separating Switzerland from Germany, and then 
 .jiorth, separating France from Germany ; and then N. W. 
 'through the western division of the Prussian dominions and 
 the kingdom of the Netherlands to the North sea. 
 
 The Rhone rises near Mount St. Gothard and runs west to 
 the lake of Geneva. After leaving that lake, it runs south- 
 '%vest to Lyons in France, and then south to the Mediterranean, 
 
376 SWITZERLAND. 
 
 The Aav and the Reuss rise near Mount St. Gothard, and 
 flowing north unite, and empty into the Rhine. 
 
 Chief Towns. Geneva ivS beautifully situated on the south- 
 ern extremity of the lake of Geneva, at the egress of the 
 Rhone. The surrounding country is remarkably picturesque. 
 The lakes, the hills, the distant Alps covered with eternal snow, 
 and Mont Blanc rearing its lofty head to the clouds, give a 
 wonderful beauty and subhmity to the prospect. Geneva is 
 celebrated as the residence of Calvin, and the asylum of the 
 reformed rehgion. Population, 26,000. 
 
 Bdle^ or Basil^'is in the northwest, on the Rhine. Popula- 
 tion, 15,000. Beime is on the Aar, south of Bale. Popula- 
 tion, 1 3,000. Sckaffhausen is east of Bale, near a celebrated 
 cataract in the Rhine. Lucerne^ Zug^ Zurich, and Constance 
 are on lakes of the same names, at their respective outlets. 
 
 Education. There is a university at Geneva, which has 22 
 professors, lOOO students, and a library of 60,000 volumes. 
 There is also a university at Bale, and colleges at Zurich, 
 Berne, Lucerne, and Schaffhausen. Common schools are 
 universally established. 
 
 Government. Each canton is an independent republic ; but 
 for the common security the cantons are united in a confede- 
 racy, governed by a general diet. 
 
 Religion. The inhabitants are either Calvinists or Catho- 
 lics. 1 he former are most numerous. 
 
 Populatioii. The population is 1,760,000. 
 
 Face of the countiim Switzerland, especially in the south, 
 is made up of high mountains and dee{> valleys interspersed 
 with beautiful lakes. It abounds with wild and picturesque 
 scenery. 
 
 Character. The Swiss are a people of simple manners, 
 industrious, brave, fond of liberty, and strongly attached to 
 their country. The absent soldier weeps wjien he thinks on 
 the lakes and the valleys, the brooks and the mountains, among 
 which he passed the happiest season of his life. 
 
 JVaiural curiosities. The summits and ridges of the Alps 
 are covered with glaciers, or fields of ice, of vast extent and 
 magnificence. They often reach down the sides of the moun- 
 tains, even to the borders of the cultivated valleys. These 
 immense masses resting in an inclined position, sometimes 
 slide down the declivity, and in a moment overwhelm the vil- 
 lasres below. 
 
NETHERLANDS. 177 
 
 The lAountains themselves are sometime^ undermined by 
 torrents, and precipitated into the valleys. In 1806 a part of 
 the Rosenberg mountain fell, and buried several populous 
 villages of the canton of Schweitz, with all their inhabitants. 
 
 Productions. Switzerland produces corn, wine, cattle, fcc. 
 
 NETHERIiANDS. 
 
 Situation. The kingdom of the Netherlands is bounded N. 
 and W. by the North sea ; E. by Germany, and S. by France. 
 Divisions. The kingdom is divided into 18 provinces. 
 
 Provinces. 
 
 Population. 
 
 Provinces. 
 
 Population. 
 
 1. Friesland, 
 
 176,000 1 10. Antwerp, 
 
 293,000 
 
 2. Groningen, 
 
 136,000 11. South Brabant, 
 
 427,000 
 
 8. Drenthe, 
 
 46,500 ; 12. West Flanders, 
 
 492,006 
 
 4. Overyssel, 
 
 147,000 ! 13. East Flanders, 
 
 600,000 
 
 6. Gelderland, 
 
 249,000 14. Hainault, 
 
 430,000 
 
 6. Holland, 
 
 748,000 
 
 15. Namur, 
 
 156,000 
 
 7. Utrecht, 
 
 108,000 
 
 1 16. Liege, 
 
 354,000 
 
 8. Zealand, 
 
 111,000 
 
 1 17. Limburg, 
 
 292,000 
 
 9. North Brabant, 
 
 294,000 
 
 18. Luxemburg, 
 
 214,000 
 
 
 2,015,500 
 
 
 3,258,000 
 
 The 9 provinces mentioned in the first column are in the 
 north, and constitute the country formerly called Holland. 
 Those in the last column are in the south, and are called 
 Belgic provinces, except Luxemburg, which is a part of 
 Germany. 
 
 Bay. The Zuyder Zee is a great bay of the North sea, 
 setting up from the north into the northern provinces. 
 
 Rivers. The Rhine comes from Germany, and divides into 
 several streams, one of which proceeds north, and empties 
 itself into the Zuyder Zee ; while the rest flow west into the 
 North sea. The Meuse rises in the east of France, and run- 
 ning north into the Netherlands joins the Rhine near its mouth. 
 The Moselle rises also in the east of France, and running 
 north-east through the Netherlands into Germany, joins the 
 Rhine at Coblentz. The Scheldt rises in the north-east of 
 France, and running N. into the Netherlands, enters the North 
 sea near the mouths of the Rhine. 
 
 Face of the cmmtry. The provinces on the sea-coast are 
 every where flat and sandy ; and so low, that the inhabitants 
 have been obliged to build dikes or mounds along a great part 
 of it to prevent inundations from the ocean. The general 
 face of the interior of these provinces is that of a large marsh 
 
178 NETHERLANDS. 
 
 that has been drained. Much of the surface is below the level 
 of the sea. 
 
 The interior provinces in the south are agreeably diversified 
 with hills and valleys, fertile and finely cultivated. 
 
 Canals. The canals in the flat country are innumerable. 
 They are almost as frequent as roads in other countries. In 
 the winter the inhabitants travel on them on skates. 
 
 Chief Towns Amsterdam., the largest, richest, and most 
 populous city is in the north, on an arm of the Zuyder Zee. 
 It is seated in a low marsh and is built on piles of wood. The 
 bouses are of brick or stone, and are universally neat and 
 cleanly. Among the public buildings is the stadthouse, which 
 is esteemed one of the finest structures in the world ; it is 
 built on 14,000 wooden piles. Amsterdam was once the 
 second city in Europe in point of commerce, but since the 
 French revolution, and the events which grew out of it, it has 
 much declined. Population, 230,000. 
 
 Brussels., the second city in the kingdom, amd one of the 
 most splendid in Europe, is on a branch of the Scheldt. It is 
 celebrated for its manufactures, particularly its lace, camlets 
 and carpets. Population, 80-000. 
 
 Antimrp., on the Scheldt, north of Brussels, about 250 years 
 ago, was the most commercial city in the world. The com- 
 merce is still considerable, and the manufactures extensive. 
 Population, 61,000. 
 
 The Hague is in the north, about half a league from the 
 coast. It was formerly the residence of the stadtholder, and 
 the seat of government for the northern provinces, and is now 
 one of the residences of the king of Netherlands and his 
 court. It is one of the most beautiful towns in Europe. 
 Population, 42,000. 
 
 Rotterdam., a few miles south of the Hague, has a conve- 
 nient harbour, and is a rich commercial city. It was the birth- 
 place of the celebrated Erasmus. Population, 56,000. 
 
 Ghent., on the Scheldt, south-west of Antwerp, has consi- 
 derable commerce and extensive manufactures of linen and silk. 
 Population, 56,000. 
 
 Leyden is near the coast, a few miles north of the Hague. 
 It has a celebrated university and 28,000 inhabitants. Utrecht 
 is 18 miles S. of Amsterdam. 
 
 Jdesre, on the Meuse, has 46.000 inhabitants. NaTMir. on 
 
NETHERLANDS. 1119 
 
 the same river, 25 miles S. W. of Liege, is one of tiie strong^ 
 est towns in Europe. 
 
 Ostend is a strongly fortified town on the sea-coast. Bruges, 
 12 miles east of Ostend, was the greatest commercial town in 
 Europe, in the 1 4th century. Its commerce and manufactures 
 are still considerable. Population, 32,000. Tour nay is near 
 the borders of France. Luxemburg is near the south-east 
 extremity of the kingdom. Louvain is a few miles east of 
 Brussels. 
 
 Universities. The universities at Louvain and Leydenha.Ye 
 been very celebrated. There are universities also at Utrecht, 
 Ghent, and various other places. 
 
 Government. The government ^s a limited hereditary mon- 
 archy. The provmce of Luxemburg is part of Germany, and 
 the king of the Netherlands, as Duke of Luxemburg, is a 
 member of the Germanic Confederation. The northern pro- 
 vinces were formerly independent republics, united under a 
 general government, administered by a Stadtholder and States 
 General. 
 
 Population. The population is 5,273,000. This country 
 is the most thickly settled of any in Europe. There are more 
 than 200 inhabitants on every square mile. The country is 
 crowded with cities, towns, and villages. The inhabitants of 
 the northern provinces are called Dutch, those of the southern 
 provinces are Flemings. 
 
 Agriculture, Manufactures and Commerce. In all these, 
 this country was once the most fa.iious in Europe. In agri- 
 culture it is now rivalled by England and Lombardy : many 
 branches of its manufactures have been transferred to Eng- 
 land ; and in commerce it is far surpassed by England and the 
 United States of America. 
 
 Religion. The Dutch are generally Calvinists ; the Flem- 
 ings are Catholics. 
 
 Character. The Dutch are noted for neatness, frugality, 
 industry, perseverance, ^nd a cool, phlegmatic temperament. 
 In proof of their industry we need only mention, that their 
 country has been redeemed from the ocean by great labour and 
 expense, and filled with beautiful and populous cities The 
 Dutch are much addicted to smoking tobacco ; and skatmg is 
 a favourite amusement. In winter the canals are covered with 
 men and women, who pass on skates with great rapidity from 
 one village to another. 
 
180 FRANCE. 
 
 FRANCE. 
 
 Situation. France is bounded on the N. W. by the English 
 channel ; on the N. E. by the Netherlands ; on the E. by Ger- 
 many, Switzerland, and Italy ; on the S. E. by the Mediterra- 
 nean ; on the S. W. by Spain ; and on the W. by the bay of 
 Biscay, and the Atlantic ocean. 
 
 Divisions. Before the revolution France was divided into 
 provinces. In the northeast, were French Flanders, Artois, 
 Picardy, Isle of France, Champagne, Lorraine, Alsace, Bur- 
 gundy, and Franche Compte ; in the northwest, Normandy, 
 Brittany, Maine, Anjou, Touraine, Orleanois, Berry, Nivernois, 
 Poitou, Marche, Limosin, Saintonge, Angoumois, and Bour- 
 bonnois ; in the soitthweat were Guyenne, Gascony, Rousillon, 
 Languedoc, Lyonnois, and Auvergne ; in the southeast, Pro- 
 vence, Avignon and Venaissin, Dauphiny and Corsica. 
 
 France is at present divided into 86 departments, which take 
 their names principally from the rivers on which they are 
 situated. 
 
 Rivers, The Rhine is the boundary between France and 
 Germany. The other principal rivers are the Rhone, the 
 Garonne, the Loire, and the Seine. The Rhone rises in Swit- 
 zerland, and running through the lake of Geneva, proceeds 
 S. W. to Lyons, whence, after receiving the Saone from the 
 north, it runs S. to the Mediterranean. The Garonne rises in 
 the south, in the Pyrenees, and running N. W. joins the Dor- 
 dogne about 12 miles below Bordeaux, and empties itself into 
 the bay of Biscay. The Loire rises in the south of France, 
 and runs north to the centre of the kingdom, and then west to 
 the ocean. The Seine rises in the northeast of France, and 
 flows northwest to the ocean. 
 
 The Rhone and its branches drain the southeast of France ; 
 the Garonne, the southwest; the Loire, the centre, and the 
 northwest ; the Seine, the northeast. 
 
 Mountains. The Pyrenees separate France from Spain ; the 
 Alps separate it from Italy, and the Mount Jura chain, from 
 Switzerland. The Vosges mountains run near the eastern 
 boundary, parallel with the Rhine. The Sevennes mountains 
 are west of the Rhone, and parallel with it. 
 
 Cities and Towns. Paris, the gayest and most splendid city 
 in Europe, is on the Seine, in the midst of an extensive and 
 delightful plain. It contains an immense number of magnifi- 
 
FRANCE. 181 
 
 cent public monuments and works of art, ancient and modern. 
 The royal palaces are the Louvre, the Tuilleries, and the 
 Luxembourg. The houses are generally from 4 to 7 stories 
 high, built of freestone taken from quarries underneath the 
 city, which have been so extensively excavated, that a slight 
 earthquake might easily bury the city. Paris is the seat of 
 several noble institutions for the promotion of science and the 
 elegant arts. The population is 7 1 5,000. 
 
 Lyons^ at the confluence of the Rhone and the Saone,is next 
 to Paris in population, and superior to it in commerce and 
 manufactures. It is particularly celebrated for its manufac- 
 tures of rich silks, and gold and silver stuffs. Population, 
 120,000. 
 
 Marseilles and Bourdeaux are the principal seaports. Mar- 
 seilles is on the Mediterranean, and is the centre of Ihe French 
 commerce on that sea. Population, 110,000. Bourdeaux is 
 in the southwest of France, on the Garonne, and carries on an 
 extensive trade with tiie East and West Indies, and the north of 
 Europe. Population. 92,000. Brcst^ on the western coast, 
 and Toulon on the Mediterranean, are the principal stations 
 for the French navy. 
 
 The other towns on the coast are Montpelier^ near the 
 mouth of the Rhone, celebrated for the salubrity of its air ; 
 Bayonne, on the bay of Biscay, near the southwest corner of the 
 kingdom ; Havre de Grace, at the mouth of the Seine ; Calais^ 
 on the straits of Dover ; and Dunkirk, near the boundary of 
 the Netherlands, celebrated for the strength of its fortifications. 
 
 The other celebrated towns in the interior are Toulouse, on 
 the Garonne, at the highest navigable point ; Nantes^ on the 
 Loire, one of the largest trading cities in France ; Rouen, on 
 the Seine, a large commercial and manufacturing town, and 
 the fifth in the kingdom in population; Versailles ^nedir Paris, 
 remarkable for its splendid palace and gardens. Lille, a 
 strongly fortified city, and Amiens, on the Somme, are north 
 of Paris, near the boundary of the Netherlands. 
 
 Canals. The most celebrated canal is the canal of Langue- 
 doc, which connects the Mediterranean with the bay of Biscay. 
 It begins on the coast of the Mediterranean and meets the Ga- 
 ronne near Tou'ouse. It is 180 miles long, and 6 feet deep. 
 There is a canal from the Loire, near Orleans, to a branch of the 
 Seine, connecting Paris with the westei-n departments: and 
 
 Q 
 
182 FRANCE. 
 
 another from the Oise, a branch of the Seine, to the Somme, 
 connecting Paris with the northern departments. 
 
 Papulation. The population of France is 29,290,370. 
 
 Religion. The estabhshed religion is the Roman Catholic, 
 but others are tolerated, and more than one tenth part of the 
 inhabitants are Protestants. 
 
 Language. The French language is more generally spoken 
 in Europe than any other, and a knowledge of it is now almost 
 necessary m a polite education. 
 
 Education. Royal colleges and academies are established 
 in the principal towns ; but the great mass of the people are 
 uneducated. Literary associations are numerous ; the principal 
 of these is the National institute at Paris, the most celebrated 
 scientific society in the world. 
 
 Government. 1 he government is a limited monarchy, resem- 
 bling that of lireat liritain. The legislative power is vested in 
 a king, a house of peers, and a iious'.^ of delegates. 
 
 Hmtory. tSince 1792 f'rance has been the theatre of won- 
 ^rfui revolutions, 'i he government had previously been an 
 absolute monarchy under the Bourbons. But in 1792 the 
 people threw off the government ; a National Convention was 
 formed, who condemned Louis XVL the reigning monarch, to 
 be beheaded. The bloody sentence was executed. Contending 
 parties then struggled for the ascendency. The most horrible 
 slaughter ensued, lievolution succeeded revolution, and mas- 
 sacre succeeded massacre, till the government settled in a mili- 
 tary despotism under iNapoleon Buonaparte 
 
 Under Buonaparte the French became a nation of soldiers, 
 and extended their conquests over nearly the whole of Europe. 
 In 1812 Buonaparte was marching at the head of 500,000 men 
 against Russia. But here he was checked in his career. After 
 taking Moscow, his army perished by thousands with cold and 
 hunger, and in their retreat were harassed and destroyed by the 
 Russians. 
 
 A new army was raised by Buonaparte to recover his power ; 
 but in vain : — the most powerful nations in Europe united 
 against him ; and after a series of disastrous battles, he at leist 
 surrendered himself to the Enghsh, and was sent a prisoner to 
 the island of St. Helena. The Bourbons are 'jow again on the 
 throne of France. 
 
 Character. The French are gay, lively, impetuous, fond of j 
 
SPAIN. 
 
 183 
 
 glory, and buoyant against adversity ; they are polite and ami- 
 able in their manners, always ready to oblige, and attentive to 
 the wants of others. They are wanting in stability. 
 
 Face of the country. In the southeast the country is moun- 
 tainous. In the rest of the kingdom the surface is undulating, 
 presenting every where new and interesting landscapes to the 
 traveller. 
 
 Climate. France has a fine climate, favourable to health, 
 and to the growth of the richest fruits. The south of France 
 is the resort of invalids from other countries. 
 
 Soil and Productions. A great portion of the country has 
 a very fertile soil, yet there are large tracts unfit for cultivation. 
 The principal productions are maize, vines, and olives. 
 
 Manufactures. France has long been celebrated for her 
 manufactures ; ps^rticularly silks, woollen goods, brandy, claret, 
 and other wines ; and these articles constitute her principal 
 exports. 
 
 Islands. Corsica is a large island in the Mediterranean. It 
 lies between the island of Sardinia, and the gulf of Genoa. The 
 Hyeres islands are on the coast near Toulon. The isle of 
 Oleron^ Bellisle^ and the isle of Ouessant are near the west 
 coast. 
 
 SPAIN, 
 
 Situation. Spain is bounded N. by the bay of Biscay and 
 France ; E. by the Mediterranean ; S. by the Mediterranean, 
 the strait of Gibraltar, and the Atlantic ocean ; W. by Portugal 
 and the Atlantic. 
 
 Divisions. Spain is at present divided into 3 1 provinces. 
 
 "Provinces. 
 
 Population. 
 
 Provinces. 
 
 Population. 
 
 I. SeviUe, 
 
 746,200 
 
 18. Zamora, 
 
 71,400 
 
 S. Granada, 
 
 69S,0()0 
 
 19. Toro, 
 
 97,400 
 
 3. Cordova, 
 
 225,000 
 
 20. Salamanca, 
 
 210,000 
 
 4. Jaen, 
 
 207,000 
 
 21. Burgos, 
 
 470,600 
 
 5. Marcia, 
 
 383,000 
 
 22. Soria, 
 
 199,000 
 
 6. Valencia, 
 
 826,000 
 
 23. Segovia, 
 
 164,000 
 
 7. Catalonia, 
 
 859,000 
 
 34. Avila, 
 
 118,100 
 
 8. Aragon, 
 
 657,400 
 
 26. Madrid, 
 
 228,500 
 
 9. Navarre, 
 
 221,800 
 
 26. Gnadalaxara, 
 
 121,100 
 
 10. Biscay, 
 
 IJ 1,400 
 
 27. Cuenca, 
 
 294,300 
 
 11. Guipuzcoa, 
 
 104,600 
 
 28. Toledo, 
 
 370,600 
 
 12. Alava, 
 
 67,600 
 
 29. La Mancha, 
 
 205,600 
 
 13. Asturia, 
 
 364,200 
 
 30. Estremadura, 
 
 428,600 
 
 14. Galicia, 
 
 1,142,600 
 
 31. Majorca, 
 
 187,000 
 
 15. Leon, 
 
 239,800 
 
 
 
 16. Palenria, 
 
 118,100 
 
 Total, 
 
 10,350,000 
 
 17. Valladolid, 
 
 187,400 
 
 
 V 
 
184 SPAIN. 
 
 Capes. The most noted capes are cape Ortegal and cape 
 Finisterre in the northwest, and cape Trajalgar in the south- 
 west. 
 
 Mountains. The Pyrenees separate Spain from France. Ail 
 the other ranges in Spain spring from the Pyrenees in the fol- 
 lowing manner. The Cantabrian chain rnns west, parallel 
 with the northern coast, and terminates at cape Finisterre, 
 Tho Iberian range springs from the middle of the Cantabrian 
 chain, and runs at first in a southeasterly, and afterwards in a 
 southerly direction till it terminates on the coast of the Mediter- 
 ranean. The mountains of Castile^ the mountains of Toledo and 
 the Sierra Morena all spring from the Iberian range, and run S. 
 W. into Portugal, parallel with each other ; the Castile moun- 
 tains in the north, the Toledo in the middle, and the Morena in 
 the south. The Sierra JVivada also springs from the Iberianrange, 
 near its southern extremity, and running in a southwesterly di- 
 rection terminates near the strait of Gibraltar. 
 
 Rivers. The great rivers are the Ebro, the Guadalquivir y 
 the Guadiana, the Tagus, and the Duero. The Ebro is in the 
 northeast ; it drains the country between the Pyrenees and the 
 Iberian range, and is the only great river which enters the Medi- 
 terranean. The Guadalquivir is in the south. It drains the 
 country between the Sierra Nivada and Sierra Morena. The 
 Guadiana drains the country between the Sierra Morena, and 
 the mountains of Toledo ; the Tagus drains the tract between 
 the mountains of Toledo and those of Castile ; and the Duero^ 
 the tract between the mountains of Castile and the Catabrian, 
 or great northern chain. The Guadiana, the Tagus, and the 
 Duero all run S. W, and empty themselves into the Atlantic in 
 Portugal. 
 
 Cities. JVLadrid., the capital, is in the centre of Spain, on a 
 branch of the Tagus. It has little trade, and prospers chiefly 
 by the presence of the court. The royal palace of Madrid is 
 one of the most magnificent in Europe. Population, 168,000. 
 
 Cadiz is in the southwest, half way between cape Trafalgar, 
 and the mouth of the Guadalquivir. It is the first commercial 
 city in Spain, and the centre of the trade with America and the 
 West Indies. Population, 70,000. 
 
 Barcelona is on the Mediterranean, in the northeast. It is 
 the second commercial city of Spain, and has extensive manu- 
 factures. Population, 140,000. 
 
 The other town^ on the Mediterranean coast are Valencia^ 
 
SPAIN. 185 
 
 which has extensive silk manufactures, and 1 00,000 inhabitants ; 
 Alicante^ south of Valencia ; Cartha^ena^ which has the best 
 harbour in Spain : and Malaga^ celebrated for its wines and 
 fruits. 
 
 The towns on the northern coast are, C tntnna, on the bay of 
 Corunna, in the northwest ; Ferrol, on the same bay, one of 
 the principal stations of the Spanish navy; and BUboa, the 
 principal commercial town in the north of Spain. 
 
 The principal towns lA the inferior are, Seville^ on the Gua- 
 dalquivir, once the first town in Spain in cooimerce and popu- 
 lation, and still containing 100,000 inhabitants ; Grari«rfa, east 
 of Seville, in the midst of a fertile and delightful country ; Sara- 
 gossa^ on the Ebro, memorable for the siege by the French in 
 1809 ; Badajos. on the Guadiana, near the frontiers of Portu- 
 gal, a strong fortress, which was taken by storm by the British, 
 under Lord Wellington, in 1812 ; Toledo, on the Tagus, S. of 
 Madrid ; and Salamanca, 100 miles N. W. of Madrid. 
 
 Universities. The university of Salamanca has 61 professors, 
 and formerly had 1 5,000 students ; that of Saragossa had 2000 
 students. There are many other universities, but there is so 
 much bigotry in the management of them, that they are com- 
 paratively of little value. 
 
 Language. The Spanish language, like the French and Ita- 
 lian, is derived from the Latin. It is gj-ave, sonorous, and me- 
 lodious. The dialect of Castile is the purest. 
 
 Religion. The Spaniards are bigoted Catholics. The inqui- 
 sition, a diabolical institution, which punishes heretics with the 
 most excruciating tortures, was in full force for three centuries, 
 but has recently been abolished. 
 
 Government. The government is an absolute monarchy. 
 
 Population. The population is 10,350,000. 
 
 Character. The Spaniards are of an olive complexion. In 
 their manners they are grave and polite ; in their dispositions, 
 proud and revengeful ; in their habits, sober and temperate. 
 
 Soil and Productions. The soil in many parts is fertile, 
 especially in the provinces on the Mediterranean. The pro- 
 ductions are the oUve, the vine, figs, lemons, and various kinds 
 of graftn in abundance. The northern and central provinces 
 contain millions of merino sheep. 
 
 Manufactures and Commerce. The principal manufacture 
 13 silk. The exports are silk, wool, wine, figs, raisins, lemons^ 
 
 Q2 
 
186 PORTUGAL. 
 
 &c. The imports are manufactured goods from England, and 
 fish from Newfoundland. 
 
 Curiosity. Montserrat, 20 miles N. W. of Barcelona, is a 
 Steep solitary rock, several thousand feet high, in which there is 
 a miraculous image of the Virgin Mary, which attracts hither 
 an immense number of pilgrims. A convent has been built 
 here inhabited by 60 monks ; and higher up the mountain are 
 13 hermitages, each having a small chapel, a cell, and a little 
 garden. The hermits are chiefly persons of family and fortune, 
 who have retired from the world, and devote themselves here 
 to meditation and silence. 
 
 The fortress of Gibraltar belongs to Great Britain. It is built 
 upon a rock at the southern extremity of Spain, and is so well 
 defended by nature and art that it is considered impregnable. 
 
 Islands. The islands are Majorca, iVIinorca and Ivica. 
 
 PORTUGAL. 
 
 Situation. Portugal is bounded N. and E. by Spain,' S. and 
 
 W. by the Atlantic. 
 
 Divisions. Portugal is divided into six provinces. 
 
 Provinces. Population. Chief Towns. 
 
 Entre Duero e Minho, 907,965 Oporto. 
 
 Tras OS Montes, 318,605 Bragsinza. 
 
 Beira, 1,121,695 Coimbra. 
 
 Estremadura, 826,680 Lisbon. 
 
 Alentejo, 380,480 , Evora. 
 
 Algarve, 127,615 Faro. 
 
 3,683,000 
 
 Mountains. The mountains of Castile, the mountains of 7b- 
 ledo^ and the Sierra Morena, come from Spain and run across 
 Portugal to the Atlantic coast. 
 
 Rivers. The Minko, the Duero, the Tagus and the Guadi- 
 ana come from Spain, and empty themselves into the Atlantic. 
 
 Chief ToTinns. Lisbon.^ the capital, is at the mouth of the 
 Tagus. It has a large, deep, safe, and convenient harbour, and 
 is one of the most commercial cities in Europe. Lisbon wine 
 comes from this city. The greatest and best part of the city 
 was destroyed by an earthquake in 1755, but has since been re- 
 built. Population 230,000. 
 
 Oporto^ the second city in the kingdom in commerce and 
 population, is on the Duero, 5 miles from its mouth. The 
 wine, called Port wine, takes its name from this city ; about 
 80,000 pipes are exported annually. Population, 70,000. 
 
ITALY. ^ST 
 
 Cape. Cape St. Fine ent is the southwest extremity of Europe, 
 
 University. There is a university at Coimbra, and within a 
 few years measures have been taken for the establishment of 
 common schools in every part of the kingdom. 
 
 Religion^ fee. In religion, language, and character, the Por- 
 tuguese strongly resemble the Spaniards. 
 
 Government, The government is an hereditary monarchy, 
 and formerly the king possessed absolute power, but on the 
 <ieath of John VI. in 1826, his eldest son and heir, Don Pedro, 
 presented his subjects with a very liberal constitution. By it, 
 toleration in matters of rehgion is estabhshed ; the legislative 
 power is confided to a House of peers, and a chamber of depu- 
 ties chosen by the people ; trial by jury is established, and many 
 other provisions made for . the happiness and improvement of 
 the people. 
 
 Population. The population of Portugal is 3,683,000. 
 
 Soil and Productions. The soil is generally fertile, pro- 
 ducing the vine, the oUve, oranges, figs and other fruits in 
 abundance. 
 
 Manufactures and commerce. There is a celebrated hat 
 manufactory at Braga ; salt in abundance is manufactured at 
 St. Ubes, near Lisbon, and silk at Oporto. The principal ex- 
 ports are wines, salt, wool, and fruits ; and the imports are 
 hardware, fish, and woollen goods from England, and gold, 
 diamonds, cotton, cofiee, sugar, &.c. from Brazil. 
 
 ITALY. 
 
 Situation. Italy has natural boundaries on all sides. The 
 Alps on the N. separate it from France, Switzerland, and Ger- 
 many ; the gulf of Venice is on the E. ; and the Mediterra- 
 nean on the S. and W. In shape Italy resembles a boot. 
 
 Divisions. Italy is divided into 9 states. 
 
 States. Subdivisions. Population. 
 
 1, Lombardy or j Venetian territories, ) ^ni^nriA 
 
 Austrian Italy, } Milan, and Mantua, f 4,ui4,uw 
 
 2.Kin,doa.of l^Z^J^^r^' \ 3,994,000 
 Sardinia, ^ inland of Sardima, S 
 
 3. Dutchy of Modena, 370,000 
 
 4. Dutchy of Lucca, ]38,000 
 6. Dutchy of Parma, 377,000 
 
 6. Grand Dutchy of Tuscany, l,lS0,0rX) 
 
 7. States of the Church, 2,3.46,000 
 
 8. Republic of St. Marino, 7,000 
 
 "•''^oTiciLt^ Naples and Sidir, ^.^^^^ 
 
 19,04-1,00 
 
its ITALY. 
 
 Situation of States. Lombardy or Austrian Italy, is in the 
 N. E. ; the kingdom of Sardinia, in the N. W. ; the king^dom 
 of the two Sicihes in the S. ; and the six smaller states in the 
 middle. 
 
 Gulfs. The gulf of Venice or Adriatic sea is on the E. ; 
 the gulf of Taranto on the S. ; and the gulf of Genoa on 
 the N. W. 
 
 Straits. The strait of Messina is between the southern ex- 
 tremity of Italy and the island 6f Sicily ; and the strait of 
 Bonifacio between the islands of Corsica and Sardinia. 
 
 JVlountains . The Alps., which form the northern boundary 
 appear on the map like an arch, with one end resting on the 
 gulf of Venice, and the other on the gulf of Genoa. Mont 
 Blanc and Mont Rosa, the highest summits of the Alps, are in 
 Italy, on the borders of Switzerland. The Appennines are a 
 branch of the Alps. They run round the gulf of Genoa, and 
 proceed S. E. to the southern extremity of Italy. 
 
 Rivers. The Po is the principal river. It drains nearly 
 the whole of the country in the north of Italy, between the 
 Alps and the Appennines. It rises in the Alps, on the bor- 
 ders of France, and flows east to the gulf of Venice. The 
 Adige and the Brenta enter the gulf of Venice north of the Po. 
 The Arno and the Tiber discharge themselves into the Medi- 
 terranean west of the Appennines. 
 
 Cities. The principal cities in Lombardy are Milan, 
 Venice, Verona, Padua and Mantua. 
 
 In the kingdom of Sardinia are Turin., the capital of Pied- 
 mont, a strongly fortified city on the Po, near the foot of the 
 Alps, with a population of 88,000 ; Genoa., the birth-place of 
 Columbus, at the head of the gulf of Genoa, with a population 
 of 76,000 ; and CagUari., at the southern extremity of the 
 island of Sardinia, with a population of 35,000. 
 
 In the kingdom of the Two Sicilies are Naples, Palermo, 
 Messina, Catanea, and Syracuse. Naples is the fourth city in 
 Europe in point of populatJ'^n. It is delightfully situated, on 
 one of the finest bays in the world. The country for many miles 
 around the bay, is ornamented with mulberry, olive and orange 
 groves, with extensive vineyards, with dehghtful villas, and 
 flourishing villages. The approach to the city from the sea is 
 exceedingly beautiful. Population, 3.^)0.000 Palermo., the 
 capital of Sicily, is on the N. W. side of the island. It is a 
 rich and beautiful city, has an extensive commerce, and a popu- 
 
ITALY. 189 
 
 -ulation of 130,000. Messina^ on the east end of the island, 
 has one of the best harbours in the Mediterranean, Catania^ 
 60 miles S. of Messina, is at the foot of mount Etna, and has 
 frequently suffered by its eruptions and by earthquakes. Syra- 
 cuse is 35 miles S. of Catania. 
 
 In the states of the Churchy are Rome and Bologna. Jtoine^ 
 once the mistress of the world, and still the residence of the 
 Pope, and the centre of the Catholic church, is on the Tiber, 
 15 miles from its mouth. The city abounds with splendid 
 monuments of ancient magnificence, such as columns, temples, 
 amphitheatres, aqueducts, baths, statues, &.c. The church ©f 
 St. Peter is the largest and most beautiful church in the world, 
 and tlie most superb edifice of modern times. It is 730 feet 
 long, 530 broad, and, to the top of the cross, 450 high. The 
 Vatican is a vast palace containing 4000 apartments. The 
 library of the Vatican has more than 600,000 volumes, and is 
 the largest in the world. In the days of her highest glory, Rome 
 is said to have contained 6,800,000 inhabitants. At present it 
 lias only 130,000, Bologna^ famous for its university, and its 
 beautiful paintings, has 63,000 inhabitants. 
 
 In the Grand Dutchy of Tuscany are Florence, Leghorn, 
 and Pisa, Florence is on the Arno, at the foot of the Appen- 
 nines. Next to Rome it is the most beautiful city in Italy. 
 It abounds with elegant paintings and statues. Population 
 80,000. Leghorn is on the coast, 12 miles S. of the Arno. 
 It is one of the most commercial towns in Italy, and is particu-^ 
 larly famous for its straw hats. Population, 58,000. Pisa is 
 on the Arno, 4 miles from its mouth. JVIodena, the capital of 
 the dutchy of Modena, is thirty miles S. of Mantua. Parma 
 is a little west of Modena, on a branch of the Po. Lucca is 
 10 miles N. E. of Pisa. 
 
 Governments. Lombardy is a part of the Austrian dominions. 
 St. Marino is a republic. The rest of the states are indepen- 
 dent, each under its own sovereign. 
 
 Universities. The university at Bologna has 70 professors 
 and 500 students. There are universities also at Caghar i, 
 Catania, Florence, Mantua, Milan, Padua, Turin, and other 
 places. 
 
 Religion. The religion is Roman Catholic. 
 ^ Population. The population, including the islands of Sar- 
 ^iriia and Sicily, is more than 19,000,000. 
 
190 TURKEY IN EUROPE. 
 
 Climate. The climate is esteemed the finest in Europe, but 
 varies in different parts. 
 
 Soil. The soil is very fertile, and generally under high culti- 
 vation. Lombardy in particular has for centuries been, styled 
 the garden of Europe. 
 
 Productions. Italy abounds in productions of the richest 
 kind ; fruits, wine, corn, silk and oil. These articles constitute 
 its principal exports. 
 
 Character. Italy was the country of the Romans, the con- 
 querors of the world : but the modern Italians bear no resem- 
 blance to the Romans. They are effeminate, superstitious and 
 slavish. 
 
 Curiosities. Mount Etna^ on the east end of the island of 
 Sicily, and Mount Vesuvius, 6 miles E. of Naples, are celebrated 
 volcanoes. The sides of Mount Etna are fertile, and covered 
 with towns and villages, which i^re constantly liable to be de- 
 stroyed by the eruptions of the volcano. The artificial curiosi- 
 ties of Italy are too numerous to be mentioned. Amphitheatres, 
 bridges, aqueducts, the ruins of temples, triumphal arches, 
 statues, fine paintings and other monuments of ancient magnifi- 
 cence abound in the principal cities, particularly in Rome. 
 
 Islands. Corsica., north of Sardinia, belongs to France ; 
 Elba is between Corsica and the coast ; the Lipari islands are 
 north of Sicily. Malta., south of Sicily, belongs to Great 
 Britain. It has a rocky surface and contains 74,000 inhabit- 
 ants. 
 
 IONIAN REPUBLIC. 
 
 This republic consists of the seven following islands, lying 
 near the coast of Turkey ; Corfu, Cephalonia. Zante, St. iWaMro, 
 CerigOf Tbeaki, and Paxu. The population is 787,000. The 
 republic is under the protection of Great Britain. 
 
 TURKEY IN EUROPE, 
 
 Situation. The Turkish empire lies in the centre of the 
 Eastern continent, embracing a portion of Europe, Asia, and 
 Africa. Turkey in Europe hes between Hungary on the N. 
 and the Mediterranean on the S. and between the Black sea 
 ©n the E. and the gulf of Venice on the W. Russia is on 
 the N. E. 
 
TURKEY IN EUROPE. 191 
 
 Divisions. Turkey in Europe is divided into 9 provinces. 
 
 Provinces. Papulation. Provinces. Population^ 
 
 1. Moldavia, 400,000 6. Rumelia, 2,200,000 
 
 2. Wallachia, 950,000 7. Albania, 1,920,000 
 
 3. Servia, 960,0(X) 8. Province of the ) ^ ^^ 
 
 4. Bosnia, 860,000 . Captain Pacha, f -w,uuu 
 
 5. Bulgaria, l,800,OOo|9. Candia, 281,000 
 
 Total, 9,600,000 
 
 Seas. The Black sea. the sea of Marmora^ and the Archi- 
 pelago^ separate Turkey in Europe from Turkey in Asia. 
 
 Straits. The straits of ConstandnopU connect the Black sea 
 with the sea of Marm<jra, and the Durdanelles connect the sea 
 of Marmora with the Archipelago. 
 
 Peninsula and hlhinus. The Moreu^ in the south, is a large 
 peninsula, connected with the main land by a narrow isthmus, 
 called the isthmus of Corimh. 
 
 Gulfs. rhe gulf of Lepanto is on the N. side of the Mo- 
 rea. The guif^ of En^^ia is on the east side of the Morea, and 
 separated from the gulf of Lepanto by the isthmus of Corinth. 
 The gulf of (S'a/onzca is the north-western arm of the Archi- 
 pelago. 
 
 Mountains. The Carpathian mountains form part of the 
 boundary between Turkey and Hungary. The chain oi' Hemus 
 is south of the Danube, and divides the waters which flow into 
 that river from those which flow into the gulf of Venice and the 
 Archipelago. There are also many short ranges and single 
 mountains in the south, which have been rendered famous by 
 the Greek poets ; such as Mount 0/?/m/m.v, Pelion^ Ossa^ Par- 
 nassus and Helicon. 
 
 Rivers. The Danube and its branches drain the provinces 
 lying between the Carpathian mountains and the chain of 
 Hemus. The principal branches are the Pruth., which forms 
 the boundary between Turkey and Russia, and the Save., which 
 is the boundary between Turkey and Hungary. The Marissa 
 empties itself into the N. E. extremity of the Archipelago, and 
 iheVardar iwio the head of the gulfof Salonica. 
 
 Cities. Constantinople^ the capital of the Turkish empire, 
 is on the Bosphorus, or strait of Constantinople, which con- 
 nects the Black sea with the sea of Marmora. It is tb miles 
 in circumference, and is surrounded by walls. The harbour is 
 deep, capacious, and convenient, and the commerce is exten- 
 sive. There are about 300 mosques or Mahometan temples. 
 
1102 TURKEY IN EUROPE. 
 
 the most magnificent of which is that of St. Sophia. The 
 S )raglio is an assemblage of palaces and gardens occupied by 
 the Sultan and the officers of government, and surrounded by 
 a wall. The part of the sQraglio occupied by the wives and 
 concubines of the Sultan is called the Harem. Constantinople 
 is built principally of wood, and frequently suffers from desolating 
 lires. The city is also visited almost every year by the plague, 
 which makes dreadful havock. The population is estimated at 
 600,000. 
 
 Jldrianople^ on the Marissa, is in a fertile country, and has 
 considerable commerce, and 130,000 inhabitants. Salonka, 
 on the head of the gulf of Salonica, has always been distinguish- 
 ed for its commerce. Bucharest^ the capital of Wallachia, is 
 on a branch of the Danube, and contains 70,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Belgrade is at the confluence of the Save and the Danube, 
 on the frontiers of Turkey and Hungary. It is finely situated 
 for commerce, having an easy communication with Vienna and 
 the Black sea. It is strongly fortified, and as it commands the 
 Danube, and is the key of Hungary, it has been frequently an 
 object of fierce contention between the Austrians and the 
 Turks. Athens, the principal city of ancient Greece, is on the 
 northeast side of the gulf ofEngia. Here are still to be seen 
 the ruins of the ancient walls, the temple of Minerva, and nu- 
 merous other monuments of her ancient magnificence. 
 
 Population. The population of Turkey in Europe is esti- 
 mated at 9,600,000, consisting principally of Greeks and Turks. 
 
 Religion. The Turks are Mahometans. They believe that 
 Mahomet was a greater prophet than Jesus Christ, and that 
 the Koran is the word of God. They are a very superstitious 
 people, and place great confidence in omens and dreams. 
 They are bigoted in their attachment to their own faith, and 
 treat all other denominations as dogs. The Greeks are Chris- 
 tians, and are suffered to enjoy their religion, and to retain 
 their priests, bishops, archbishops, and patriarchs. 
 
 Government. The government is despotic. The Emperof , 
 who is also styled Sultan, or Grand Seignor, has absolute power 
 of life and death, and sometimes exercises it with brutal 
 cruelty. His prime minister is called the Grand Vizier. The 
 provinces are governed by pachas or bashaws, who frequently 
 rebel against the Sultan. The Sultan is sometimes deposed 
 by the soldiers called Janizaries. 
 
 Mctnners and Ctisloms, The Turks differ greatly in their 
 
TURKEY IN EUROPE. 19S 
 
 manners from other European nations. Polygamy is practised. 
 Every Mussulman is allowed to have four wives and as many 
 concubines as he pleases. The concubines are usually slaves, 
 purchased in the market. In eating, the Turks make no use of 
 knives and forks, but divide their food with their fingers. They 
 are extravagantly fond of opium and tobacco, and spend a 
 great deal of time in chewing and smoking. Their dress con- 
 sists of loose flowing robes, and the men use turbans instead of 
 hats. 
 
 The Greeks. Greece which embraces all that part of Tur- 
 key in Europe l3dng below the parallel of 40o N. lat. was for- 
 merly inhabited by a free, brave and enlightened people ; but 
 after the Turks conquered the country, every thing became the 
 prey of ignorance and bigotry. The modern Greeks, oppress- 
 ed for centuries by a despotic government, discovered little of 
 the spirit of their ancestors, till in 1820 they threw off the 
 Turkish yoke, and have ever since been fighting for inde- 
 pendence. 
 
 Climate^ Productions^ &c. Turkey has a mild and delicious 
 climate : the air is pure and healthy. The soil is fertile, yield- 
 ing corn, wine, and oil in abundance ; but the indolent Turks 
 suffer extensive tracts of fine land to lie uncultivated. The 
 northern provinces are principally level ; but the southern, em- 
 bracing all ancient Greece, are diversfied with hills, valleys, and 
 lofty mountains. 
 
 Manofactures and Commerce. The principal manufactures 
 are Turkey carpets, muslins, crapes, gauzes, brass cannon, 
 muskets, pistols, and swords, all of which are held in great esti- 
 mation by foreigners. The exports, besides these manufac- 
 tures, are corn, wine, oil, figs, currants, wool, camel's hair, 
 &c. The merchants are principally Jews, and Armenians, 
 and the sailors are Greeks. 
 
 The natural advantages of Turkey for agriculture, conunerce 
 and manufactures, are not surpassed by those of any country 
 on the globe. The climate, the soil, and the situation are un- 
 equalled ; but under the present despotic government there are 
 no motives to exertion, the hopes of industry are blasted, and 
 every thing languislies. 
 
 Islands. The islands are very numerous. The largest are 
 Candia^ anciently called Crete, JVegropont^ Lemnos^ Milo, 
 JVaxia and Paros, 
 
 R 
 
J 94 ASIA. 
 
 ASIA. 
 
 Situation. Asia is bounded N. by the Arctic or Frozen 
 ocean ; E!. by the Pacific ocean ; S. by the Indian ocean : and 
 W, by Europe, the Mediterranean sea, and Africa, from the last 
 of which it is separated by the Red sea. 
 
 Divisions, The following are the principal countries in 
 Asia. viz. 1. Russia in Asia, 2. Chinese Empire, 3. Farther 
 India, 4. Hindoostan, 5. Independent Tartary, 6, Persia^ 
 7. Turkey in Asia, 8. Arabia, 9. Japan, 
 
 Seas^ Bays^ or Gulfs. In the south are the Red sea^ between 
 Asia and Africa ; the Persian gulf^ between Arabia and 
 Persia ; and the hay of Bengal., between Hindoostan and the 
 Birman empire. All these communicate with the Indian ocean. 
 On the east coast there are four seas, the China sea in the south, 
 the Eastern sea and the sea o^ Japan in the middle, and the sea 
 of Okhotsk in the north. All these communicate with the Pacific 
 ocean. The gulf of »Smm and the gulf of Tonquin are arms of 
 the China sea, and the Yellow sea is an arm of the Eastern sea. 
 The sea of Kara and the sea of Oby^ in the northwest, commu- 
 nicate with the Arctic ocean. 
 
 Straits, The straits of Bdbelmandel connect the Red sea 
 with the Indian ocean : the straits of Ormus connect the Per- 
 sian gulf with the Indian ocean ; the channel of Tartary con- 
 nects the sea of Japan with the sea of Okhotsk. 
 
 Isthmus, The isthmus of Suez is the narrow neck of land 
 between the Red sea and the Mediterranean. 
 
 Lakes. The Caspian sea is a large salt water lake, lying 
 east of the Black sea. It is more than 600 miles long, and has 
 no outlet. The sea of Aral., east of the Caspian, is 200 miles 
 long. 
 
 JSlountains. The two principal ranges are the Altay and 
 • fie Himmaleh. The Altay range commences near the sea of 
 Aral, and under various names, runs N. E. to the Pacific ocean, 
 separating Russia in Asia fi-om the Chinese Empire. It is 6000 
 miles long, and except the great American range, is the longest 
 ,tn the globe. The Himmaleh range runs from S. E. to N. W. 
 between Tibet and Hindoostan. It is the highest range on 
 Uie globe. The western extremities of the Altay and Himma- 
 idi ranges are connected by branches or spurs, proceeding 
 from one to the other. 
 
ASIA. ISa 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers of Asia may be divided into 
 three classes. , 1. Those which flow into the Arctic Ocean. 
 They drain the country north of the Altay mountains. 2. 
 Those which flow into the Pacific Ocean . They drain the 
 country between the Altay and Himmaleh mountains. 3. 
 Those which flow into the Indian Ocean. They drain the 
 country south and west of the Himmaleh mountains. 
 
 To the first class belong the Oby^ the Enicei, and the Lena,, 
 all of which rise in the Altay mountains, and flow north to the 
 Arctic Ocean. They are great rivers ; the Oby is 2400 miles 
 long, the Enicei, 1700, and the Lena, 2000. 
 
 To the second class belong the Amour^ Hoang-Ho^ Kian- 
 Zfc'M, and Japanese rivers. The Amour rises on the south side 
 of the Altay mountains, and flowing east empties itself into 
 the sea of Okhotsk, under the name of Saghalien. The 
 Hoang-Ho and the Kian-Ku both rise near the same spot, in 
 the central part of Asia, and both empty themselves near the 
 same spot in the Eastern sea. In their course, the Hoang-Ho 
 winds to the north and the Kian-Ku to the south. The Ja- 
 panese rises in the mountains of Tibet, and flows S. E. to the 
 China sea. All these rivers are about 2000 miles long. 
 
 To the third class belong the Ganges., the Indus., and the 
 Euphrates. The Ganges rises in the Himmaleh mountains, 
 and flowing S. E. empties itself into the bay of Bengal. The 
 Indus rises in the Himmaleh mountains, and flowing S. W. 
 empties itself into the Indian Ocean. The Euphrates rises 
 near the Black Sea, and flowing S. E. empties itself into Ihe 
 Persian gulf. All these rivers are more than 1000 miles long. 
 
 Religion. The prevaihng religions in Asia are Paganism 
 and Mahometanism. The English have settlements in various 
 parts, and are now making great exertions, by means of mis- 
 sionaries, to spread the blessings of Christianity over these 
 populous countries. 
 
 Population. The population of almost every country and 
 city in Asia is unknown, and the statements which are made on 
 this subject are usually mere conjecture. The conjectures re- 
 specting the whole population of Asia have varied from 
 250,000,000 to 600,000,000. 
 
196 TURKEY IN ASIA. 
 
 TURKEY m ASIA. 
 
 Situation. Turkey in Asia is bounded N. by the Black 
 Sea and Russia ; E. by Persia : S. by Arabia ; and W. by 
 the Mediterranean, and the Archipelago. 
 
 Divisions. Turkey in Asia is divided into 17 pachalicks. 
 It occupies the position of 4 celebrated countries. The 4 
 countries are, 
 
 Asia Minor, Armenia, 
 
 Syria, Mesopotamia. 
 
 Asia Minor is in the i^. W. It embraces the peninsula 
 included between the Black sea, the Mediterranean, and 
 the Archipelago Syria is in the S W It extends from 
 the Arabian desert and the* river Euphrates on the east, to 
 the Mediterranean on the vrest. The southern part of Syria 
 is Palestine or the Holy land. Armenia is in the N. E. 
 It extends nearly to the Caucasian mountains. Mesopotamia 
 is in the S E. It embraces the extensive country between 
 the Euphrates and the Tigris. The first three of these 
 names are still in common use. 
 
 Rivers. The Euphrates rises in Armenia near the Black 
 sea, and flows S E. to the Persian gulf It is a boundary 
 river during nearly the whole of its course, separating Asia 
 Minor from Armenia, Mesopotamia from Syria, and i urkey 
 from Arabia The Tigris is the principal branch of the 
 Euphrates. It rises also in Armenia, and flows S. E. The 
 river Jordan., so often mentioned in the Bible, is a small river 
 in Palestine, which runs south into the Dead sea. 
 
 Mountains. The Mount Taurus range runs alpng the 
 southern shore of Asia Minor, and stretches east towards 
 the Caspian sea, separating Asia Minor from Syria. The* 
 Caucasian mountains, which run from the Black sea to the 
 Caspian, were formerly the boundary between the dominions 
 of Russia on the north, and those of Persia and Turkey on 
 the south, but the Russians are now in possession of a narrow 
 district on the south of these mountains. Several branches 
 or spurs proceed from the Caucasian range S. E. into Persia, 
 and S. W. into Turkey, 
 
 Cities. Aleppo, in the north of Syria, has a very exten- 
 sive commerce. Caravans loaded with goods, go from this 
 city to Egypt, Arabia, and Persia ; and through the Medi- 
 
TURKEY IN ASIA. 137 
 
 terranean it has intercourse with Europe. Business is trans- 
 acted principally by Armenians, Jews, and Greeks. It is 
 one of the best built cities in the Turkish dominions, and 
 has 250,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Damascus, south of Aleppo, has manufactures of silk and 
 cotton, and formerly was celebrated for the best swords and 
 sabres in the world, which were made of steel, of so fine a 
 quality, that they would bend to the hilt without breaking ; 
 but the art is now lost. The silk cloth called damask takes 
 its name from (his city, as also the species of plum called 
 damson^ which is a contraction of Damascene, The city is 
 situated in a pleasant country, and has 200,000 inhabitants, 
 and a very extensive commerce by means of caravans. 
 
 Smyrna is on the western coast of Asia Minor, on a very 
 large and commodious bay or harbour of the Archipelago 
 sea. It carries on a very extensive trade with Europe, par- 
 ticularly with England. Many European merchants reside 
 here, and live in a part of the city by themselves. The 
 plague frequently makes dreadful ravages, and earthquakes 
 sometimes do great injury. Population, 150,000. 
 
 Erzerum, the capital of Armenia, is at the foot of a moun- 
 tain, near the head of the Euphrates. The houses are built 
 of stone, with flat roofs, covered with earth and grass, and 
 strange as it may seem, sheep are pastured there. The city 
 has an extensive trade with Persia and India, and 150,000 
 inhabitants. Diarbekir,, on the Tigris, has extensive manu- 
 factures, and 100,000 inhabitants. Bassora^ near the mouth 
 of the Euphrates, is a place of great commercial conse- 
 quence, being frequented by merchants and vessels from 
 various parts of Europe and Asia. The city is in a great 
 ijpieasure independent of the Turks. 
 
 Ancient cities. This country was once the seat of many 
 celebrated and flourishing cities, which are now in ruins. 
 On the Euphrates, near the modern Hillah, stood Babylon^ 
 the great city, with its walls 60 miles in circumference, and 
 350 feet high, and its 100 gates of solid brass ; but it has 
 passed away, and the place where it stood is scarcely known. 
 Nineveh was on the Tigris, and its ruins may still be seen 
 opposite Mosul. Troy was in the north-west part of Asia 
 Minor, near the Dardanelles, which connect the Archipelago 
 with the sea of Marmora. Balhcc and Palmyra were in 
 
 R2 
 
198 TURKEY IN ASIA. 
 
 Syria, and their ruins are more magnificent than those of 
 Greece or Italy. 
 
 Bagdad, once the seat of the caliphs^ and the scene of 
 many eastern fables, is on the Tigris. It has some com- 
 merce, but retains little of its ancient splendour. Jerusalem^ 
 the Holy City, is still trodden down by the Gentiles. It is 
 S. W. of Damascus, and is the resort of numerous pilgrims. 
 jfWe. whose merchants were once princes, is now a desolate 
 rock where the fisherman dries his net. It is on the coast of 
 Syria, west of Damascus 
 
 Inhabitants. The number of inhabitants is estimated at 
 10,000,000. They are composed of various nations and re- 
 ligious denominations, "i he Armenians are principally mer- 
 chants. '1 hey are intelligent, industrious, and economical, 
 and remarkable for their enterprise. They emigrate in great 
 numbers from their native country, and are found scattered 
 in all the principal cities of Asia, engaged in the most exten- 
 sive commercial undertakings. They may be styled the yan- 
 kees of Asia. The Armenians profess Christianity. '1 he 
 Curds are a wandering race, who inhabit the eastern parts of 
 Turkey, and the neighbouring districts in Persia. They 
 live chiefly on plunder, and are not subject either to the 
 Turks or Persians ; they own great numbers of cattle, which 
 they drive with them from place to place. 
 
 Climate^ Soil^ (S^c. The climate of Asia Minor and Syria 
 is delightful, and the soil naturally fertile, producing rich 
 fruits, corn, wine, and oil ; but the people are in a wretched 
 condition, oppressed by the I urks, and without motives for 
 exertion, so that agriculture is in a low^ state. 
 
 Islands. 1 he principal islands are Cyprus and Rhodes, 
 formerly the richest and most flourishing islands in the world; i 
 now, the inhabitants are oppressed, and the population is re- 
 duced, agriculture neglected, and every thing wears the ap* 
 pearance of poverty and desolation. 
 
 Curiosity. I'he Dead sea or sea of Sodom is in the south- ■ 
 ern part of Palestine. It is supposed to occupy the place 
 where Sodom and Gomorrah stood before they were destroy- ! 
 ed. The waters are salt and bitter, the shores abound with i 
 brimstone, and the air is so loaded with sulphurous and bitu- 
 minous vapours, that no plant can grow there, and the coun- i 
 try around the lake wears a deadly and desolate aspect. ' 
 
RaSSIA IN ASIA. 199 
 
 RUSSIA IX ASIA. 
 
 Situation. This immense country extends from the Pacific 
 ocean on the east, to Europe on the west ; and from the Fro- 
 zen ocean on the north, to the Chinese Empire, ; artary, 
 Persia, and '^lurkey, on the south. It is about twice as large 
 as all Europe, 
 
 Dimsions. The country in the south-west, bordering on 
 European Russia, is divided into 8 or 10 governments. 'F he 
 rest of the country is called Siberia, and is divided into two 
 governments, i obolsk and Irkutsk, each of them nearly as 
 large as Europe. 
 
 Mountains. The Altay chain is the great natural boundary 
 between the Russian and Chinese empires. It has various 
 names, as Altay, Sayan sk, and Yablonnoy, and towards its 
 eastern extremity, sends forth a branch to the north, called 
 Stanovoy, which runs almost to the Arctic ocean. The Vral 
 mountains form part of the boundary between European 
 and Asiatic Russia. The Caucasian mountains, between the 
 Black sea and the Caspian, were formerly the boundary on 
 the side of Turkey and Persia. 
 
 Rivers. The great rivers are the Oby. the Enicei, and the 
 Lena, alJ of which rise in the Altay mountains, and flow north 
 into the Arctic ocean. The Selenga. one of the head branches 
 of the Enicei, rises on the Chinese side of the mountains, 
 and crossing the frontier, empties itself into the great lake 
 Baikal. The Irtish, the great western branch of the Oby, 
 rises also on the Chinese side of the mountains. The Vitima 
 is the principal branch of the Lena. I'he Ural rises in the 
 Ural mountains, and flows into the Caspian sea. 
 
 Face of the Country. This country is made up of vast 
 plains, covered with almost perpetual snow, and pervaded by 
 enormous rivers, which, under masses of ice, pursue their 
 dreary way to the Arctic ocean, i hese plains are called 
 steppes, and are principally sandy and barren In the north- 
 ern half of Siberia, where the winters are long and severe, 
 there are no trees ; but in the south, along the Altay moun- 
 tains, there are immense forests. 
 
 Population. The population is variously stated from 
 3,000.000 to 10,000,000. The reason is, that geographers 
 are not agreed upon the boundary between European and 
 Asiatic Russia ; some including many provinces in Euro- 
 
200 RUSSIA IN ASIA. [ 
 
 pean Russia which others consider as belonging to Asia. 
 Siberia, or the country east of the Ural, contains less than 
 2,000,000. 
 
 Tartars. Under the general name of Tartars are compre- 
 hended all the wandering savages of Siberia, the Chinese 
 empire, and Independent I'artary ; but they consist of many 
 different tribes and several distinct races. The Tartars live 
 a wandering life, and subsist principally on their herds of 
 horses, oxen, sheep, and goats In summer they live in tents, . 
 and remove from place to place for pasturage. In the north- 
 ern parts of Siberia, they form huts, partly under ground, for \ 
 their winter residence, and spend the cold season in smoke ' 
 and filth. 
 
 Government. This immense country is under the dominion 
 of Russia ; but the tribes are at such a distance from the 
 capital, that the Emperor has little Control over them, and . 
 they are almost independent. The chief mark of subjection I 
 is the annual tribute. 
 
 Soil and Productions. In the south-western provinces, 
 between the Ural on the east, and the Volga and Don on the 
 west, the land slopes to the south, the climate is mild, and 
 the soil is good, producing vines, figs, almonds, peaches, &c. ; 
 but the greater part of Siberia lies sloping to tie north, and 
 exposed to uninterrupted blasts of the north wind, feels a 
 rigorous cold. Here ihe oak dwindles to a dwarfish size, 
 and none but the most hardy plants can flourish. ^ 
 
 Animals, i he reindeer is found in most parts of Siberia, ^ ^ 
 and performs the office of the horse, the cow, and the sheep. 
 Beavers live in the great rivers, and seals inhabit the shores 
 of the Frozen ocean. Wolves, foxes, bears, and sables, are 
 hunted for their ^kins. Many ingenious methods are used to 
 destroy the bear. Sometimes they lay a rope in his path, 
 with a heavy block at one end and a noose at the other, con- 
 trived in such a way that the bear becomes entangled, and 
 then is either exhausted in dragging so great a weight, or 
 attacking the block with fury, he throws it down some pre- 
 cipice, where it seldom fails to drag him after it to destruc- 
 tion 
 
 Chief Towns. Mtrachan. near the mouth of the Volga, 
 is the largest city. By means of the Volga and the Caspian 
 sea, it has an extensive trade with St Petersburgh and Per- 
 sia. The principal articles of commerce are salt, which is 
 
ARABIA. 201 
 
 I made in prodigious quantities in its neighbourhood, and fish, 
 ! which abound in the Caspian. It has 70,000 inhabitants. 
 i Orenburg, on the Uial, has considerable trade. Tobolsk, at 
 I the conflux of the Irtish and Tobol has 20.000 inhabitants, 
 I and is the largest town in Siberia, and the centre of the Rus- 
 ! sian fur trade. The inhabitants are principally Russian 
 exiles, or the descendants of exiles, banished hither for their 
 I crimes. 
 
 I Kolhyvan is on the Oby, near some rich silver mines. 
 Irkutsk is on the river which issues from lake Baikal, and is 
 the principal seat of the commerce between Russia and China. 
 Yakutsk is on the Lena, and Okhotsk is on the sea of Okhotsk. 
 Religion. The Greek religion and Mahometanism prevail 
 in the south-west. The wandering tribes of Siberia are prin- 
 cipally Pagans. Missionaries have recently been sent to 
 this country from Great Britain, and are stationed at Astra- 
 chan, Orenburg, Irkutsk, and other places. 
 
 Peninsula. Kamtschatka in the eastern part of this coun- 
 try, is a peninsula. The inhabitants are small, with little 
 hollow eyes, flat noses, and tawny complexion. Their prin- 
 cipal employment is catching fish and seals, and instead of 
 reindeer, they use dogs to draw their sleds over the snow and 
 ice. 
 
 ARABIA. 
 
 Situation. Arabia is in the southwest of Asia ; bounded 
 N. by Turkey; E by the Persian Gulf and the Indian 
 ocean ; S. by the Indian Ocean ; and W. by the Red sea, 
 which separates it from Africa. 
 
 Face of the Country. The whole interior of Arabia is an 
 immense desert of burning sands, interspersed with some few 
 fertile spots, which appear like islands in a desolate ocean. 
 A hot and pestiferous wind, called the Simoom, frequently 
 blows over the desert, and instantly suftbcates the unwary 
 traveller ; and whole caravans are sometimes buried by 
 moving clouds of sand raised by the wind The edges of 
 the country on the seacoast, contain some flourishing pro- 
 vinces and settlements ; but in all parts they suffer for want 
 of water, there being no river of any consequence in all 
 Arabia, and no rain for months, and sometimes a year to- 
 gether. 
 
 Divisions. Arabia is commonly divided into three parts *. 
 
202 ARABIA, 
 
 Arabia Felix, or Happy Arabia, bordering on the Persian i 
 gulf, the Indian ocean, and the southern part of the Red sea ; 
 
 Arabia Peiroea. or Stony Arabia, lying on the Red sea north I 
 
 of Arabia Felix ; and Arabia Deserta, or the Desert, inclu- i 
 
 ding all the interior and northern parts of the country. ! 
 
 Chief Towns. All the towns in Arabia are near the coast 
 
 JHeccaisaboutadays journey from the Red sea. It was the | 
 birth-place of Mahomet. The Mahometans regard it as a 
 
 holy city, and pilgrims resort to it from distant parts of Asia | 
 
 and Africa. It has "20,000 inhabitants. Medina^ 180 miles i 
 
 ]V. of Mecca, contains the tomb of Mahomet, around which ' 
 
 300 silver lamps are continually burning, and his coffin is | 
 
 covered with cloth of gold under a silver canopy. The other ■■ 
 towns are Jidda^ a seaport near Mecca ; Mocha^ near the 
 
 straits of Babelmandel, famous for its coffee ; Sana, north of i 
 
 Mocha, and Mascat, on the eastern coast. None of these , 
 cities are populous. 
 
 Language. The Arabic is one of the most extensively , 
 
 diffused languages in the world. It is spoken not only in ; 
 Arabia, but in Syria, Persia, Tartary, part of India, and of 
 
 China, half of Africa, all the seacoastof the Mediterranean, ; 
 
 and Turkey. I 
 
 Makometanism. Arabia was the birth-place of Mahomet, i 
 
 and is still the centre of his religion. The Mahometans are ' 
 
 called also Uussulmans. Every true Mussulman believes \ 
 
 that there is one God, and that Mahomet is his prophet. He i 
 
 sa.ys his prayers five times every day, at day break, at noon, i 
 
 middle of the afternoon, at sunset, and at twilight ; he ab- | 
 
 stains from pork and spirituous liquors ; at one season of the ] 
 
 year, he neither eats, drinks, nor smokes, between sunrise and { 
 
 sunset, for 30 days in succession ; and once in his life he j 
 
 performs a pilgrimage to iViecca. ! 
 
 Manners. The Arabs of the desert are called Bedouins, j 
 
 They are a roving, lawless race of robbers, who traverse the | 
 
 Gauntry in troops on horseback, and plunder travellers and j 
 caravans; yet they have some noble qualities. They are 
 
 hospitable and generous, and if a Bedouin Arab consents to : 
 eat bread and salt with a guest, he would not for the world 
 
 betray him. 1 
 
 Government. Arabia is governed by numerous petty chiefs ■ 
 
 called imams, emirs, or sheiks, most of whom are elected by j 
 
 the people, and must consult them in all important transact j 
 
PERSIA. 203 
 
 tions. The Arabs are a people of great spirit and valour, 
 and resolute in defence of their liberty. They alone of all 
 Asiatic nations have never been subdued, but keep alive at 
 this day the sacred flame of freedom, which was kindled by 
 Ishmael their great progenitor. 
 
 Animals. Camels abound in this country. This animal 
 is wonderfully fitted by Providence for traversing the hot 
 and parched desert. The camel can travel 6 or 8 days 
 without water, and usually carries 800 pounds upon his back, 
 which is not taken oif during the whole journey. When 
 weary, he kneels down to rest, and sleeps with his load upon 
 his back. His feet are made of a hard fleshy substance, well 
 fitted to resist the heat of the sands. . The Arabian horses 
 are the best in the world. They are swift, yet docile, and 
 will live whole days without food, and bear incredible fa- 
 tigue. The English give great prices for Arabian horses. 
 
 Caravans. The inland trade of Arabia, Persia, Turkey, 
 Tartary, and Africa, is carried on principally by caravans, 
 consisting of large companies of merchants, travellers, and 
 pilgrims, who march with their camels over the sandy deserts. 
 They carry their provisions and drink with them. Their 
 water is carried in skins by the camels. ; hey go armed, 
 and travel in company to defend themselves from the wan- 
 dering Arabs. This mode of travelling and trading has sub- 
 sisted from the earliest antiquity, for it was to a caravan that 
 Joseph was sold by his brethren. 
 
 Antiquities. Near the north end of the Red sea is Mount 
 Sinai, where God delivered to Moses the ten commandments, 
 and near it is Mount Horeh., where the angel appeared in the 
 burning bush. These mountains are now inhabited • by 
 monks, who pretend to show the very spot where the mira 
 cles happened. 
 
 PERSIA. 
 
 The name of Persia has been commonly applied to the 
 whole country between the Tigris on the west, and the Indus 
 on the east, but the eastern part of this territory has been 
 for some time included in the new kingdom of Cabul, and the 
 independent state of Beloochistan. Persia, therefore, is now 
 bounded N. by Russia, the Caspian sea, and Independent 
 Tartary ; E. by Cabul and Beloochistan ; S. by the Persian 
 gulf, and W. by Turkey in Asia. 
 
204 CABUL AND BELOOCHISTAN 
 
 Divisions. Persia is divided into tlie following provinces : 
 
 Provinces. Provinces. 
 
 1. Azcrbijan. 6. Khuzistan. 
 
 2. Krivan or Persian Armenia. 7. Fars. 
 
 3. Ghilan. 8. Laristan. 
 
 4. Mazanderan. 9. Kerman. 
 , 6. Irak. 10. Khorasan. 
 
 Face of the Country. The northern and western frontiers 
 are skirted by lofty chains of mountains, but the interior 
 consists of an immense, dry, salt plain. Persia suffers for 
 want of water. There is no considerable river in the whole 
 country. 
 
 The most noted single mountain is mount Ararat, near 
 Erivan. in the north-west, supposed to be the mountain on 
 which Noah's ark rested after the flood. 
 
 Population. The population is estimated by Hassel at 
 18,000,000. It consists partly of Persians settled in towns 
 and villages, and partly of Iliats, a race of warlike and 
 wandering shepherds, whose habits resemble those of the 
 Tartars. 
 
 Government. The government is an absolute despotism. 
 The wandering tribes, however, are ruled by their own 
 khans, who are independent in the management of their 
 internal concerns, and merely pay military service when 
 required. 
 
 Religion. The Persians are Mahometans of the sect of 
 Schiites or followers of Ali, and the Turks on that account 
 look upon them with more abhorrence than they do upon 
 Christians. 
 
 Chief Toivns. Ispahan, the largest city, is about half 
 way between the Caspian sea and the Persian gulf. *It con- i j 
 tains 400,000 inhabitants, and is surrounded by a mud wall. ' 
 Shiraz, 160 miles S of Ispahan, is delightfully situated in a 
 fertile valley, and contains 40,000 inhabitants. Teheran, 
 the present capital, is 300 miles N. of Ispahan, and contains 
 60,0u0 inhabitants. j j 
 
 CABUL AND BELOOCHISTAN. | ( 
 
 Cabul or Cabulistan is a modern kingdom, comprising the '' 
 
 eastern provinces of ancient Persia, the western provinces i '} 
 
 of Hindoostan, and the province of Balk in Tartary. The [ " 
 
 population is estimated at 14,000,000, of which number about I 
 
 one-third are Hindoos, one-third Afghans, and the remainder i '' 
 
INDEPENDENT TARTARY. i^5 
 
 Tartars, Beloochees, and Parsees. The Afghans are the 
 raiing people, and the khan of their principal tribe is the 
 king of the whole country. 
 
 Chief Towns. Cabul, the capital, and the chief city of the 
 Afghans, is in the northeast, near a branch of the Indus. 
 It contains about :Ot),OOU iahabitants. Candahar is S. W. of 
 Cabul, on the great road from Ispahan to Delhi in Hindoos- 
 tan, and is a place of considerable commerce. Herat and 
 Meschid he between Cabul and the Caspian sea Balk, north 
 of Herat is a large and populous city, the centre of trade 
 between Independent Tartary and Hindoostan. 
 
 Beloochistan. Beloochistan is bounded N. by Cabul ; 
 E. by Hindoostan ; S. by the Indian Ocean ; and W. by 
 Persia. Very little is known of the country, as it has 
 scarcely ever been traversed by Europeans. So far as it 
 has been explored it is mountainous and barren. The in- 
 habitants consist principally ot two tribes, the Belooches, a 
 race of robbers, resembling the Arabs ; and the Brahooes, 
 a peaceable and industrious people, inhabiting the mountain- 
 ous districts, and subsisting chiefly on their flocks. Some 
 of the Belooches are subject to the king of Cabul. Kelat, 
 the capital, is a well-built town, containing about 4,U00 houses* 
 
 INDEPENDENT TARTARY. 
 
 Situation. Independent Tartary is in the interior of Asia ; 
 bounded N. by Russia ; E by the Chinese empire ; S. by 
 Cabul ; and W. by the Caspian sea. 
 
 Dimsions. This country comprehends Great Bucharia 
 in the southeast, Karasm in the southwest, and Turkestan 
 in the north. 
 
 Inhabitants. The number of inhabitants has been esti- 
 mated at 2,000,000. They consist principally of two tribes 
 of Tartars, the Kirgees in the north, and the Usbecks in the 
 south. The Kirgees Tartars are divided into three hordes, 
 two of which are within the Russian dominions, but the 
 Great Horde is in Independent Tartary. The Usbecks are 
 in the south. They are the most civilized of all the Tartars. 
 They live in towns and villages in winter, though they reside 
 in tents in summer. 
 
 Mountains. The chain of Belur Tag forms part of the 
 eastern boundary of Independent Tartary, separating it from 
 
HINDOOSTAN. 
 
 the Chinese empire. This chain is connected with the Al- 
 taian chain on the north, and the Himmaleh chain on tlie 
 south. 
 
 Rivers The Amu or Oxus rises among the mountains in 
 the S. E. and flows in a N. W. course 900 miles to the sea 
 of Aral. The Sir or Sihon rises in the mountains of Belor 
 Tag, and flowing N. W. 550 miles, empties itself into the 
 sea of Aral from the eastern shore. 
 
 Chief Towns. Samarcand, an ancient and celebrated city, 
 is on the Sogd, a branch of the Oxus. It is famous among- 
 the Mahometan cities as a seat of learning, and is resorted 
 to from all the neighbouring countries. It carries on an ex- 
 tensive commerce with Persia, Hindoostan, and the Chinese 
 dominions. Bokhara, also on the Sogd, 100 miles W. of 
 Samarcand, has a celebrated school for the study of Maho- 
 metan theology and law. It is said to contain 100,000 in- 
 habitants. Khieva, on the west of the Oxus, and JV. W. of 
 Samarcand, carries on considerable trade with Orenburg in 
 Russia. 
 
 Religimi. The religion is Mahometanism. 
 
 Climate, &c. This country enjoys a fine climate and in many 
 parts has a good soil. In ancient times many districts were 
 highly cultivated, and in any other hands but those of Tar- 
 tars, the country would be now abundantly productive. 
 
 HINDOOSTAN. 
 
 Situation, Hindoostan is bounded Ts. by Tibet, from 
 which it is separated by the Himmaleh mountains ; E. by 
 the Birman empire ; S. E. by the bay of Bengal ; S. W. by 
 the Indian ocean ; and N. W. by Persia. On the S. it 
 comes to a point. Except a short space on the east, it has 
 natural boundaries on all sides, viz. the bay of Bengal, the 
 Indian ocean, the river Indus, and the Himmaleh mountains., 
 
 Divisions. Hindoostan may be divided into 4 parts, viz* 
 1. Gangetic Hindoostan, or the provinces drained by the 
 river Ganges. This division is in the north east, and in- 
 cludes the provinces of Bengal, Bahar, Allahabad, Oude, 
 Agra, Delhi, Agimere, Malwa, Bootan, ana Nepaul. 2. 
 Sindetic Hindoostan, or the provinces drained by the river 
 Sinde or Indus. This division is in the northwest, and 
 includf the provinces of Cashmere, Lahore, Moultan, and 
 Sinde. 3. S^mthern Hindocshm. or the provinces south of 
 
HliNDOOSTAN. s>07 
 
 the river Kistna. This division includes Mysore, the Car- 
 natic, &c. 4. Central Hindoostan. This division lies be* 
 tween the other three, and includes the remaining provinces^ 
 Guzerat, Candeish, Berar, Orissa, Golconda, VisiapooFj 
 Dowlatabad, Concan, &c. 
 
 Mountains. The Himmaleh mountains, which form the 
 northern boundary, are the highest in the world. There 
 are 21 peaks, each of which exceeds 20,0» feet in height, 
 and the highest, called Dawalageri, is 27,677 feet above the 
 level of the sea. There is another range of mountains, a 
 little south of the Himmaleh chain and parallel with it. 
 The provinces of Nepaul and Bootan are included between 
 the two. The Gauts are a range of mountains which extend 
 along the western coast, with few interruptions, from cape 
 Comorin to the city of Surat. 
 
 Rivers The Ganges rises in the Himmaleh mountains, 
 and flowing S. E. 2000 miles, empties itself into the bay of 
 Bengal by many mouths. It has numerous large tributaries. 
 The Burrampooter, the largest tributary of the Ganges, rises 
 on the north side of the Himmaleh mountains under the 
 name of Sanpoo river, and running first east and then south- 
 west, joins the Ganges 40 miles from its mouth. The Indus 
 or Sinde rises in the Himmaleh mountains, and running S. 
 W. empties itself into the Indian ocean by many mouths. 
 The Indus has numerous branches in the upper part of its 
 course. 
 
 The Godavery and Kistna rise in the Gauts near the 
 western coast, and flow east into the bay of Bengal. The 
 Nerbudda rises in the eastern part of Hindoostan, and flows 
 ivest into the gulf of Cambay north of Surat. 
 
 Cities. The cities of Hindoostan are in general built on 
 one plan, v/ith very narrow, confined, and crooked streets, a 
 great number of reservoirs for water, and numerous gardens 
 interspersed. The houses are variously built, some of brick, 
 others of mud, and still more of bamboos and mats. 
 
 We will first mention the towns in Gangetic Hindoostan. 
 Calcutta, one of the largest cities in the world is on the 
 Hoogly, an outlet of the Ganges, about 100 miles from the 
 sea. It is a place of immense commerce in sugar, silks, 
 muslins, calicoes, &c. The h©uses of the natives are gene- 
 rally mud cottages, but those of the English are splendid 
 brick pal? res. The population of Calcutta is estimated at 
 
1>08 HINDOOSTAN. 
 
 650,000. Patna is on the Ganges, 250 miles N W. of Cal- 
 eutta, and has 500,000 inhabitants. Benares is on the 
 Ganges, 120 miles west of Patna, and has 600,000 inhabit- 
 ants. Allahabad is on the Ganges west of Benares, at the 
 confluence of the Jumna with the Ganges. Agra is on the 
 Jumna N. W. of Allahabad. It is a very large city contain- 
 ing 600,000 inhabitants Delhi on the Jumna, N. W. of 
 Agra, was formerly the capital of Hindoostan and the seat 
 of the Mogul empire, but is now greatly reduced from its 
 former grandeur. 
 
 The following towns are in Sindetic Hindoostan. Lahore 
 is N. W of Delhi, on a branch of the Indus, and contains 
 15^ ',000 inhabitants ; Cashmere is north of Lahore, in a de- 
 lightful valley, called by the Moguls the paradise of the 
 Indies, and contains 150,000 inhabitants, Moultan is on a 
 branch of the Indus S. W. of Lahore. 
 
 The following towns are in Central Hindoostan. Camhay 
 is near the gulf of Camhay, and Jimedahad is 50 miles north. 
 Surat is south of Camhay. It is a place of great trade, and 
 has 500,000 inhabitants, Bombay, on a small island, south 
 of Surat, has an extensive commerce with Europe, America, 
 China, and Persia. The island contains 40* >,000 inhabitants. 
 Juggernaut, the seat of the famous Hindoo idol, is on the 
 eastern coast, 42 miles south of Cattack. More than 
 1,000,000 Hindoos, from all parts of India, annually visit the 
 temple at this place Multitudes perish on their journey, 
 and the country for 50 miles round is strewed with human 
 bones and sculls. 
 
 The following towns are in Southern Hindoostan. Madras, 
 in the Carnatic, or country lying along the Coromandel 
 coast, is the principal commercial city in southern Hindoos- 
 tan. It has a poor haibour and a disagreeable situation, 
 yet contains 30(},0U() inhabitants. Arcot lies S W. of Mad- 
 ras. Seringapatam is 29'.> miles west of Madras. This city 
 was taken by the British in 1799, after a short siege, by 
 assault. Goa, on the western coast, is a Portuguese settle- 
 ment, and was once the seat of a noted inquisition. Its har- 
 bour is one of the best in Hindoostan. 
 
 Population. The whole population of Hindoostan is 
 100,u00,000. The Hindoos constitute the great mass of the 
 population. Parsees, Mahometans, and Europeans are nu- 
 merous. 
 
HINDOOSTAN. m9 
 
 History, This country has been repeatedly conquered. 
 Ale36ander the Great conquered the northwestern part more 
 than 2000 years ago. It was next conqi ered by the Ma- 
 hometans, and afterwards by the Mogul Tartars. Within 
 the last 50 years it has been conquered by the British, who 
 now have under their dominion or influence nearly the 
 whole country, except the northwestern provinces, which 
 are in the possession of the Afghans, the Sikhs, and several 
 independent Rajahs. 
 
 Government The government of the British possessions 
 is divided into the Presidencies of Bengal^ Madras, and 
 Bombay. 
 
 Hindoos, The Hindoos are a tame, timid, half-civilized 
 and supe^ stitious race of men. All their customs and fashions 
 are regulated by their religion, and remain unaltered from 
 age to age. They have the same manners jgad customs 
 now, which they had 2<'00 year:S ago. They are divided 
 into four castes or classes. 1. The Brahmins or priests. 
 2. Soldiers : 3. Those devoted to agriculture and commerce : 
 4. Sooders or labourers. These castes are all kept distinct, 
 and are not permitted to interrmary, or even to eat or drink 
 with each other. 
 
 Religion. The Hindoos are idolaters. Their temples 
 are filled with idols of wood and stone, ot monstrous shapes, 
 and every family has its household god or image of brass^ 
 which is placed at the door of the house, and honoured by 
 offerings of rice, flowers, and fruit, i he sacred books of 
 the Hindoos are called vedas, and the shaster is a commen- 
 tary on the vedas. 
 
 Religious Customs. The Hindoo believes that if he 
 voluntarily drowns himself in the Ganges, or buries himself 
 alive, he shall be happy for ever, and thousands have de- 
 stroyed themselves with this expectation. Formerly they 
 sawed themselves to death. The saw was so constructed, 
 that the person wishing to sacrifice himself, viould set it in 
 motion with his feet, and instantly tear himself to pieces. 
 It is a very common custom for women to burn themselves 
 to death, on the funeral pile of their husbands. Self torture 
 is also practised in various ways. Sometimes the man 
 stretches himself on a bed of spikes, or of burning coals, 
 and sometimes he hangs in the air, suspended on an iron 
 hook, plunged through the flesh of his back, Infants are 
 
 S2 
 
i^iO HINDOOSTAN. 
 
 frequently thrown into the Ganges, and are there devoured 
 by crocodiles. All these things are done to obtain blessings 
 from the sfods 
 
 Christian Missionaries. Since the British have had pos- 
 session of this country, numerous missionaries have been 
 sent out by societies in Enofland. to instruct the Hindoos in 
 Chistianity. The principal missionary station is at Seram- 
 pore, near Calcutta The Baptist miss onaries at this station 
 have translated parts of the Bible into 27 different langruaojes. 
 
 Face of the. Cowntrv Hindoostan consists chiefly of ex- 
 tensive plains, fertilized by numerous rivers and streams. 
 The only considerable mountains are the Himmaleh moun- 
 tains, on the northern frontier, and the Gauts, alono" the 
 western coast. In the north-west there is a sandy desert 500 
 miles lonff, and 100 broad. There are extensive forests in 
 various places, particularly between the mouths of the 
 Gansres 
 
 Soil and Climate. A more fertile soil, and a climate bet- 
 ter adaoted \o hrinsr the fruits of the earth to perfection, 
 cannot be found in the world. There are double harvests of 
 grain, and two crops of fruit from many of the trees 
 
 Productwnf}. Rice is the strain chiefly cultivated, and the 
 principal food of the people Indian corn, the susfar cane, 
 and cotton, are also raised in ijreat quantities The fruits 
 and plants are too numerous to be specified : but almost all 
 that can delisrht the eye. or srratify the taste of man. are pro- 
 duced in the richest abundance. Here ffrow the lofty palm, 
 with a simple trunk, without branches, but terminated by a 
 simple tuft of leaves • the cocoa-nut free, with its nutritious 
 fruit, whose fibrous coverins: is formed into the most elastic 
 cables ; and a species of palm, bearing leaves so lar^e, that 
 a single one will cover ten or a dozen men, and two or three 
 of them are sufficient to roof a cottage. Among the mineral 
 productions are gfold and diamonds. 
 
 Mamifactures Cotton and silk croods, of the finest qual- 
 ities, are manufactured in largre quantities ; and althouc^h the 
 Hindoos derive no aid from machine y. the cost of labour is 
 so little, that they are sold at a very low price. The shawls 
 of Cashmere are highly esteemed. 
 
 Commerce The exports consist of cotton goods, rice, 
 sugar, diamonds, silk, and saltpetre ; and the principal arti- 
 cles received in return are silver and gold. 
 
FARTHER INDIA. ^U 
 
 Animals, The most terrible animals are the royal tigers 
 of Bengal. Some of them are 5 feet his^h, and so strong 
 that they will carry off bullocks They abound in the vast 
 forests near the mouths of the Ganges Parties of pleasure 
 OB the islands in this river, have often been shockingly in- 
 terrupted by the fatal sprin? of the tisrer, which is said to 
 extend to a hundred feet If disappointed in the first leap, 
 he couches his tail and retreats. The rhinoceros with one 
 horn, also inhabits the swamps in the Delta of the Ganges. 
 Bengal produces fine elephants, which are used for carrying 
 the camp equipage of the army, and by the opulent Hindoos 
 for riding. I he o^her animals are apes, monkeys, leopards, 
 panthers, bears, wolves, &c, 
 
 Ceylon. This island belongs to Great Britain. The first 
 European settlements on the island were made by the Por- 
 tuguese, more than three centuries ago. The Portuguese 
 were expelled by the natives, assisted by the Dutch, and in 
 1795, the Dutch were expelled by the English. The island 
 is principally valuable for its cinnamon, and spices, and the 
 pearls which are taken upon its coast. The principal tovfns 
 are Columbo, the capital, on the western coast ; Candi, in 
 the centre of the island ; and Trincoraale, on the eastern 
 coast, whose harbour is of great consequence to the British, 
 because there is none on the eastern coast of Hindoostan. 
 
 The population is estimated at 1.500,000. The religion is 
 idolatry ; but there are several stations occupied by Chris- 
 tian missionaries, sent out by the Knglish and Americans, 
 The climate is not so hot as that of southern Hindoostan, 
 being tempered by the sea breezes. 
 
 FARTHER INDIA, OR INDIA BEYOND THp 
 GANGES. 
 
 Situation. India beyond the Ganges includes all the coun- 
 tries between Hindoostan and China. It is bounded N. by 
 Tibet and China ; E. by the China sea ; and W. by Hin- 
 doostan, and the bay of Bengal. On the S, it comes to a 
 point. 
 
 Divisions. India beyond the Ganges comprehends 9 dis- 
 tinct countries, viz. I. The Birman Empire, which includes 
 the 4 ancient kingdoms of Ava, Pegu, Aracan, and Cassay. 
 
FARTHER INDIA. 
 
 2. Assam. 3. Malaya. 4. Siam. 5. Cambodia. 6. Cochin 
 China. 7. Tonquin. 8. Laos. 
 
 Situation of the Divisions. The Birman Empire, mucli the 
 largest divisiou, is in the west, bordering upon Hindoostan 
 and the bay of Bengal. Malaya is a long, narrow penin- 
 sula, south of the Birman Empire. Siam. Cambodia, Cochin 
 China, and Tonquin, are on the coast of the China sea, be- 
 tween Malaya and China. Laos is in the interior, between 
 Tonquin and the Birman Empire, and Assam is in the norths 
 between the Birman Empire and Tibet. 
 
 Population. The population is uncertain, but may he es- 
 timated at 32,000,000, of which the Birman Empire contains 
 7,000,000; Laos, 3,000,000 , Siam and Malaya, 2.000,000 ; 
 Assam, ,000,000; and the remaining countries, 18,000,000. 
 
 Political condition. The political condition of this country 
 is very fluctuating. The Birman Empire is of modern 
 growth, being made up of the four ancient kingdoms of Ava, 
 Pegu, Aracan, and Cassay. The Birmans are frequently at 
 war with the Siamese, and have sometimes almost conquer- 
 ed them. There is an inveterate enmity between the two 
 nations. The four provinces east of Siam and the Birmatt 
 Empire are said to be now united in one kingdom, called the 
 kingdom of Anam. For several years past, the British and 
 Birmans have been at war with each other, and the British 
 have succeeded in conquering extensive districts on the coast 
 of the Birman Empire, and it is believed that they will even- 
 tually be masters of the whole country 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers are the Japanese, the Mei- 
 nam, and the Irawaddy The Japanese is one of the largest 
 rivers in Asia. It rises in the mountains of ? ibet, and pass- 
 ing through the S. W part of China, and through the coun- 
 tries of Laos and Cambodia, empties itself into the China 
 sea. It is 2000 miles long ; and in different parts of its 
 course has different names, as Cambodia, Mecon, Kioulong, 
 &c. The Meinam rises also in the mountains of Tibet, and 
 running through the Birman Empire and Siam, empties itself 
 into the gulf of Siam. The Irawaddy rises in the same 
 mountains, and passing through the Birman Empire, dis^ 
 charges itself into the bay of Bengal, by many mouths. 
 
 Chief Towns. The following are the principal towns in 
 the Birman Empire. Ummerapoora, the capital, is on the 
 Irawaddy, 400 miles from its mouth . It was founded in 
 
FARTHER INDIA. 213 
 
 1783, and in 1800 the population was estimated at 176,000. 
 ^a, the former capital, is 4 miles from Ummerapoora. Pegu^ 
 on a branch of the Irawaddy, was formerly one of the most 
 splendid cities in Asia, but was destroyed by the Birmans, 
 when they conquered this country in 1757 Rangoon, the 
 principal seaport, is on Ranjujoon river, one of the outlets of 
 the Irawaddy. It is a modern city, and promises to become 
 a place of importance. Aracan is near the coast, 240 miles 
 S. E, of Calcutta 
 
 Siam. the capital of Siam, is on an island in the Meinam, 
 several leagues from its mouth Malacca, the principal town 
 on the peninsula of Malaya, is situated on the straits of the 
 same name, and contains 12, '00 inhabitants. Cambodiay 
 the capital of the country of the same name, is on the Ja- 
 panese. Singapore on a small island at the southern extre- 
 mity of the peninsula of Malaya, was founded by the English 
 in 1819, and has increased in commerce and population with 
 such astonishing rapidity, that it is now one of the most im- 
 portant ports in the East indies. 
 
 Character. The Birmans are a lively, passionate, and in- 
 telligent race of men, very different from their neighbours 
 the Hindoos. The Malays are ferocious and restless, fond 
 of navigation, war, plunder, and desperate enterprises. 
 They are pirates, and often attack European ships. These 
 savages will sometimes seize a vessel by surprise, and mur- 
 der all the crew The inhabitants of the remaining pro- 
 vinces, in many respects, resemble the Chinese. 
 
 Punishments, The mode of punishing crimes among the 
 Birmans is of the most horrid kind. Among the modes of 
 inflicting capital punishments are, beheading, crucifying, 
 starving to death, ripping open the body, sawing it in two, 
 pouring red hot lead down the throat, plunging into hot oil, 
 and roasting to death by a slow fire. The milder punish- 
 ments are putting out the eyes, cutting off* the tongue, the 
 hands, feet, ears, nose, &c. 
 
 Religion. The Birmans and Siamese adhere to the Hin- 
 doo faith and worship They have numerous temples and 
 idols. The American Baptists have sent missionaries to this 
 country, who have made considerable progress in translating 
 the Bible into the Birman language. 
 
 Productions. Rice is very extensively cultivated, and is 
 the principal food of the inhabitants. Cotton, sugar-cane^ 
 
14 CHINA PROPER. 
 
 ginger, cinnamon, oranges, lemons, figs, and numerous other t 
 exquisite fruits, are produced in abundance in this fayoured 
 region. The forests yields trees of the most useful and 
 beautiful kind in rich abundance Here are also found 
 rubies, and many other precious stones. 
 
 Islands. The Andaman and JYicobar islands are in the 
 bay of Bengal, west of the peninsula of Malaya. Here are 
 found birds' nests, made of a viscous substance, resembling 
 isinglass, which, when dissolved in broth, becomes a jelly of 
 delicious flavour. The Chinese eat these nests, and esteem, 
 them a great delicacy. 
 
 CailVESE EMPIRE, 
 
 Situation. The Chinese Empire is that immense trian- 
 gular country, lying between the Aitay mountains on the 
 north, and the Himmaleh mountains on the south ; and be» 
 tween Independent Tartary on the west, and the China sea, 
 and sea of Japan, on the east. It is bounded by Russia on 
 the N, ; Independent Tartary on the W. ; and Hindoostaa 
 and Farther India on the S 
 
 Divisions. The Chinese Empire consists of China Proper, 
 Chinese Tartary, and Tributary States. 
 
 CHINA PROPER. 
 
 Situation, China is bounded N. by Chinese Tartary; B. 
 hy the sea ; S. by the sea and Farther India; and W. by 
 Tibet. 
 
 Divisions. China is divided into 16 provinces, viz. r 
 Peche-Ie, Kiang-nan, Kiang-si, Tche-kiang, Fo-hien, Hou-pe, 
 Hou-nan, Shan-tong, Shan-see, Sig-nan, Kan- sou, Se-chuen> 
 Quan-tong, Quan-see, Yun-nan, Koei-tcheou. 
 
 Seas The seas bordering on the eastern coast of China 
 are, the Yellow sea in the north, the Eastern sea in the mid- 
 dle, and the China sea and gulf of Tonquin in the south. 
 
 Rivers. The two principal rivers are the Hoang-Ho, and 
 the Kian-Ku, or Yang^tse-Kiang, both of which rise in the 
 mountains of Tibet, and discharge themselves into the East- 
 ern sea. The Hoang-Ho runs through the northern pro- 
 vinces, and the Kian-Ku through the centre of the country. 
 
 Population. China is the most populous country in the 
 world. The population has been variously estimated from 
 150.000,000 to 333,000.000. The first estimate is probably 
 
CHINA PROPER. 216 
 
 nearest the truth. China is so crowded with people, that 
 multitudes live coifstantly in boats upon the rivers. When 
 the harvests are small, many perish with famine ; and cats, 
 rats, dogs, frogs, and snakes, are constantly sold in the mar- 
 ket for food. 
 
 Chief Tovms. Pekin, the capital, and residence of the 
 emperor, is in the northeast, within 50 miles of the great 
 wall. The population has been estimated at 3,000,UU0. It 
 is surrounded by a wall 30 feet high. The streets are wide, 
 straight, and constantly thronged with foot passengers and 
 carriages. The "houses are of one story. The imperial 
 palace consists of many elegant edifices, and magnificent 
 gardens, surrounded by a wall two miles in extent. 
 
 JVankin, the former residence of the emperor, is near the 
 ^anks of the Kian-Ku. The population is estimated at be- 
 tween 1 and 2,000,000, but it has lost much of its ancient 
 splendour. Among the public buildings is a tower 200 feet 
 high, covered with porcelain. The cotton cloth called nan- 
 Jceen, comes from this city. 
 
 Canton is a large commercial city in the south of China, 
 and is the only port to which European and American ves- 
 sels are admitted. The population is estimated at 1,5^0,000^ 
 of which number 300,000 \i\e constantly in boats upon the 
 water. T he boats are regularly ranged in the form of streets. 
 Vast quantities of tea are shipped from this port for Europe 
 and America. 
 
 Canals. China surpasses all other countries in excellent 
 roads and canals. The great canal connecting Pekin with 
 Nankin is 50CU miles long, and is said to have been com- 
 menced in the tenth century, and to have employed 30,o00 
 men for 43 years. 
 
 The great wall. The Chinese wall is the most stupendous 
 tvork of art in the world. It runs along the whole northern 
 frontier, and was designed as a barrier against the incursions 
 of the Tartars. It is 1500 miles long, and is carried over 
 rivers upon arches, over valleys and mountains. It is built 
 of brick and stone, 25 feet high, and so thick that 6 horse- 
 men can ride abreast on the top. 
 
 Religion. The Chinese are idolaters. There is a Chris- 
 tian missionary at Canton, and the New Testament has beeft 
 translated into Chinese, and extensively distributed 
 
216 CHINA PROPER. 
 
 Government and Army. — The emperor is an absolute mono 
 arch, but the government is usually administered with much 
 of the patriarchal spirit. The emperor regards his people as 
 his children, and not as his slaves. The officers oi govern- 
 ment are called Mandarins, and are regularly educated fur the 
 offices which they fill. The Chinese army contains 800,000 
 men, of whom 600.000 are infantry, and ^00,000 cavalry, 
 
 jyianners and Customs, The excessive populuusness of this 
 country has given rise to the cruel custom of exposing infants. 
 Parents who cannot support their female children, are allowed 
 to cast them into the river ; but they fasten a gourd to the 
 child, that it may float on the water; and there are often rich 
 people of compassion, who are moved by the cries of the 
 children to save them irom death. A practice prevails of 
 binding the feet of female children in tight bandages till they 
 cease to grow. This is done that they amy have handsome 
 feet, for a small foot is deemed very beautiful. The foot of a 
 full sized Chinese woman is not more than six inches long. 
 
 It is not allowed to bury the dead in towns, but the sepul- 
 chres are commonly on barren hills and mountains. — Mourn- 
 ers clothe themselves in white. — The Chinese treat their pa- 
 rents with great reverence, /To strike a parent is punished 
 with death in all cases. Every Chinese man keeps in his 
 house a table, on which are written the names of his father, 
 grandfather, and greatgrandfather, before which he frequently 
 burns incense and prostrates himself. 
 
 Character. The Chinese are highly cultivated, mild, affa- 
 ble, and very ceremonious. They are remarkably vain, timid, 
 artful, and jealous. Foreigners are carelully excluded from 
 the country. Polygamy is permitted, and the women are in 
 the most abject degradation. 
 
 Face of the country, &c. China is principally a level coun- 
 try, with a fertile soil. The climate is very different in differ- 
 ent parts. In the north, the winters are cold and severe ; in 
 the south, the temperature is warm at all seasons. 
 
 Agriculture. This country is in a state of high cultivation. 
 The population is so crowded, that every method must be 
 adopted to raise food for their support, and agriculture is car- 
 ried to the highest perfection. Even steep hills and moun- 
 tains are cultivated. They are converted into terraces, one 
 above another, each supported by a mound ol stone, and re- 
 servoirs are made on the top, in which rain water is collected. 
 
CHINESE TART ART, SIT 
 
 and conveyed down the sides to water the plants. Old men. 
 Women, and children, are constantly employed, with a basket 
 in one hand and a small rake in the other, in collecting from 
 the roads and canals every particle of maoure. 
 
 Productions. The most celebrated production is the tea 
 tree, whose leaves are the principal article ol export from 
 China. Among other productions are the camphor tree, from 
 which that fragrant substance, camphor, is obtained by dis- 
 tillation ; the tallow tree, from the fruit of which a green wax 
 is procured^ that is made into candles ; and the paper mul- 
 berry tree, from the bark of which a species of paper and cloth 
 are made. 
 
 J\lanufactures and commerce. China has been celebrated 
 from remote ages, for that beautiful porcelain ware, commonly- 
 called China. Silk is also manufactured in great quantities, 
 and these articles together with tea, are the principal exports. 
 
 Islands. The principal islands beFonging to China are For- 
 mosa, Hainan, and the Leoo Keoo isles. 
 
 CHINESE TARTARY. 
 
 Situation. Chinese Tartary includes the central parts of 
 Asia, and stretches on the east to the sea of Japan. It is 
 bounded N. by Russia ; E. by the sea of Japan ; S. by China 
 and Tibet ; and W. by Independent Tartary. 
 
 Face of the Country. The Allay mountains skirt this coun- 
 try on the north, the Belur Tag on the west, and the moun- 
 tains of Tibet on the south, while the interior is a vast ele- 
 vated plain, intersected by an immense desert, called the de- 
 sert of Shamo or Cobi. 
 
 Rivers and Lakes, The principal river is the Amour, or 
 Saghalien, which rises in the Altay mountains, and flows east 
 into the sea opposite the island ol Saghalien. The principal 
 lakes are Balkash in the west, and Koko Nor, near China, in 
 the east. 
 
 Inhabitants, The principal tribes which wander over this 
 vast region, are the Monguls and the Mandshurs. llie Eluts 
 and the Kalkas, are branches of the Monguls. The whole 
 population of Chinese Tartary is estimated at only 3,000,0U0, 
 
 Island. Saghalien islaad, which is separated from the coast 
 by the channel of Tartary, is 6U0 miles long, and is but little 
 known. 
 
 T 
 
1Ei8 JAPAN. 
 
 TRIBUTARY STATES. 
 
 Tibet. Tibet is one of the tributary states of China, and 
 lies between Chinese Tartary on the N. and Hindoostan on 
 the S. It is a high mountainous country, and is the source 
 of all the largest rivers in the southern half of Asia, as the 
 Hoang-Ho, the Kian-Ku, the Japanese, the Burrampooter, 
 the Ganges, and the Indus. 
 
 Religion. The Grand Lama is the sovereign and princi- 
 pal priest, and is worshipped not only in Tibet, but in Chi- 
 nese Tartary and Siberia. When the Lama dies, it is believed 
 that his spirit passes into his successor. The palace of the 
 Grand Lama is ar Lassa, which is the capital of the country* 
 
 CoREA. The kingdom of Corea is a peninsula, lying N E. 
 of China. It bas Chinese Tartary on the N. the sea of Japan 
 on tlie E. and the Yellow sea on the W. — Vhe population is 
 estimated at 1 ,500,000. It is but little known. 
 
 JAPAN. 
 
 Situation. The empire of Japan consists of one large island 
 and several smaller ones, lying off the eastern coast of Asia, 
 and separated from Corea and Chinese Tartary by the sea of 
 Japan. The large island, called JViphon, is 700 miles long. 
 
 Face of the Country. All the coasts of these islands consist 
 of high, craggy and inaccessible mountains, washed by shal- 
 low boisterous seas ; and the Creeks and bays are for the most 
 part choked up with rocks and sands, so that Japan seems 
 excluded from the rest of the world. The country within, is 
 as pleasant as the approach to it is frightful. 
 
 Inhabitants. Japan, like China, is very populous, contain- 
 ing, it is supposed, at least 15,000,000 inhabitants. They 
 are as highly civilized as the Chinese,^ and even excel them 
 in several manufactures, particularly in silk and cotton goods, 
 and in Japan and porcelain ware. — Agriculture also is carried 
 to the same perfection as in China. The Japanese cultivate 
 literature and the useful arts. 
 
 Government and Religion. The emperor of Japan is an 
 absolute monarch, and his oflSce is hereditary, but the empire 
 is divided into provinces, each of which is governed by a 
 prince, whose office is also hereditary. — The religion is po- 
 lytheism, resembling in many points that ni the Hindoos and 
 
ASIATIC ISLANDS. 219 
 
 Chinese, particularly in the doctrine of the transmigration 
 of souls. They believe that the souls of wicked men, after 
 death, occupy the bodies of animals, till they are purged from 
 their sins. 
 
 Chief Towns. Jeddo, the capital, is at the bottom of a large 
 bay, on the south side of the island of Niphon. The har- 
 bour is so shallow that European ships cannot approach within 
 several leagues. The city contains many splendid houses, 
 belonging to the lords, giandees, and princes of the empire, 
 all of whom reside here during the greater part of the year. 
 The emperor's palace is the most superb edifice in the em- 
 pire. It is embraced in several enclosures, the whole more 
 than 10 miles in circumference. The population of Jeddo is 
 estimated at 1,000,000. 
 
 Meaco is in the interior, about 160 miles S. W. of Jeddo. 
 It was formerly the capital ef the empire, and is still the first 
 commercial city, and the grand storehouse of all the manufac- 
 tures of Japan. The population is estimated at more than 
 500,000. 
 
 Nangasaki, on the island of Kiusu, is the only habour where 
 foreigners are permitted to enter. 
 
 ASIATIC ISLANDS. 
 
 Situation. The term Asiatic islands is applied by way of 
 distinction, to those islands which lie between New Holland 
 «nd New Guinea on the S. E. and Asia on the N. \% They 
 include 5 groups, viz. 1. The isles of Sunda, the principal of 
 which are Sumatra, Java, Banca, and Timor. 2. Borneo, 
 and the small islands adjacent. 8. The Philippine islands, 
 the principal of which are Lucon and Magindanao. 4 Cele- 
 bes. 6. The Spice islands, the principal of which is Gilolo. 
 
 Situation of the groups. Borneo and Celebes are in the 
 centre, the Philippine islands in the north, the Spice islands 
 in the east, and the isles of Sunda in the south. The China 
 ^a separates these islands from Asia. 
 
 1. The Isles op Sunda. 
 Sumatra is separated from the peninsula of Malaya by the 
 Straits of Malacca it is 930 miles long, and a chain of moun- 
 tnins runs through the whole isle. Mount Ophir, the highest 
 pummit in the range, is 13,842 feet above the level of the sea. 
 Although this island lies directly under the equator, the cH- 
 mate isnot very hot. the thermometer seldom rising above 86^, 
 
220 ASIATIC ISLANDS. 
 
 The production of most value is pepper. Other productions 
 Bre silk, cotton, camphor, tin, gold, &c. The only British 
 settlement is at Bencnnlen ; and the principal article of export 
 is pepper. The population is estimated at 4,500,000. The 
 inhabitants of the coast a. e Malays. Those in the interior 
 are cannibals of the most savage character. Among their 
 horrid custoim is that of eatinsT each other. When a man be- 
 comes aged and infirm, he invites his children and friends to 
 come and eat him. He ascends a tree, round irhich his 
 friends assemble, arid join in a funeral dirge, the import of 
 which is *' The season is come, the fruit is ripe, and must 
 descend." After this the old man descends, and is eaten by 
 his children. 
 
 Java lies S. E. of Sumatra, and is separated from it by the 
 straits of Sunda. It is 650 miles long, and belongs to the 
 Dutch. In the interior, the face of the country is mountain^ 
 ous, and the climate, salubrious; but the coasts are low, 
 marshy, and very unhealthy. The productions are similar to 
 those of Sumatra; the most valunble is pepper. The popu* 
 Iktion is estimated at 5,000,000. The prevailing religion is 
 Mahometanism. 
 
 Biifavia, on the N. W. side of the island, is a place of im- 
 mense trade, and the capital of the Dutch East India posses- 
 sions. It is extremely unhealthy, and within a few years the 
 populatipi}^ has very much diminished. It once contained 
 160,000 inhabitants, but now only 47,000. 
 
 Timor lies far to the east of Java. Between them are 
 Sumbawa^ Florez^ and several smaller islands. 
 
 2. Borneo. 
 
 Borneo, the largest island in the world except New Hol- 
 land, is in the centre of the Asiatic islands, bordering on the 
 China sea. It is 800 miles long and 700 broad. The coasts 
 are low and swampy. The interior is very little known to 
 Europeans. The principal exports are gold, diamonds, birds' 
 sests, pepper, and camphor. The commerce is principally in 
 the hands of the Chinese, there being no European settle- 
 ments on the Island, 
 
 The population is estimated at 3,000,000. The Ourang 
 Outangf an animal very much resembling man, abounds in 
 Borneo. The principal town is Borneo, on the north coast. 
 
ASIATIC ISLANDS. 221 
 
 It consists of about SOOO houses which are built on rafts, and 
 can be moved from place to place according to the conve- 
 nience of the inhabitants. 
 
 3. Philippine Islands or the Manillas. 
 
 These islands lie N. E. of Bt)rneo, and border on the China 
 sea. They belong to the Spaiiiaids. The productions are 
 rice, cotton, sugar cane, cocoa trees, bread fruit, ijold^ cop- 
 per, and iron. The population is estimated at 3,1)00,000. 
 There are several volcanoes, and earthquakes are frequent. 
 
 Lucon, the principal island, is 500 miles long. The prin- 
 cipal city is Manilla, on the S. W. coast, which contains 12,00p 
 Christian Inhabitants, besides Chinese and Japanese who are 
 much more numerous. 
 
 Wagindanao, the next island in size, is S. E. of Lucon. 
 
 4. Celebes. 
 
 Celebes lies under the equator, east of Borneo. It is about 
 600 miles long, but very crooked in its shape. The popula- 
 tion is estimated at 3,000,000. The productions are rice, 
 cotton, pepper, and camphor. The island is sometimes called 
 Macassar^ from a town of that name in the southern part of 
 the island, which is the principal settlement belonging to the 
 Dutch. 
 
 5. Spice Islands. 
 
 The Spice islands He east of the Celebes. They are some- 
 times called Moluccas, They belong to the Dutch, and are 
 celebrated, as their name indicates, for the production of the 
 richest spices. Cloves, nutmegs, citrons, oranges, lemons, 
 and pepper, are among the precious productions of these 
 islands. — The rich produce of the Spice islands has given 
 rise to much contention among the principal European na- 
 tions; the Spaniards, Portuguese, Dutch, and English, having 
 successively claimed and fought for the possession of them.— 
 The names of the principal islands are Giloio, Ceram, Am- 
 boyna, Ternate, and Ban da. 
 
 AUSTRALASIA. 
 
 Situation. Australasia consists of several large islands 
 lying southeast of the Asiatic islands. The principal is Ne^\' 
 
2m AUSTRALASIA. 
 
 Holland, which is so large that many geographers call it a 
 continent. The other islands are New Guinea, New Britain, 
 New Ireland, Solomon's islands, New Hebrides, New Cale- 
 donia, Vew Zealand, and Van Dlemen's land. New Guinea, 
 is separated from the northern coast of New Holland by Tor- 
 res* straits, and Van Diemen's land from the southern coast 
 by Bass's strait. The rest of the islands lie E. of these and 
 of New Holland. 
 
 New Holland is equal in size to the whole of Europe ; 
 yet very little is known of this vast country. Even the shores 
 were never explored by Europeans till within a few years, 
 and little is known of the interior. The eastern coast is 
 called New South Wales, and was explored by captain Cook 
 about oO years ago, and taken possession of in the name of 
 the king of Great Britain. The British now have a settle- 
 ment at Port Jackson, on the S. E. side of the island, and to 
 this place they transport their criminals. 
 
 The natives of New Holland, so far as they are known, are 
 among the most <legraded of the human species. They are 
 ugly and dirty. Their noses are flat, their lips thick, their 
 mouths stretch almost from ea^ to ear; they eat worms and 
 caterpillars, and rub their bodies all over with fish oil, which 
 in hot weather makes an int»)lerable stench. They have no 
 religion, but are a poor superstitious race, believing in ghosts 
 and ivitches. 
 
 New Guinea, sometimes called Papua, is north of New 
 Holland. It is about as large as Borneo, but much longer, 
 being more than 1200 miles In extent from N. W. to S. E. 
 There is no European settlement upon it, and very little is 
 known about it. The shores abound with cocoa trees, and 
 in some parts with nutmeg trees, and as far as it is known, it 
 appears to be a beautiful fertile country. The inhabitants 
 are black, and have most hideous countenances. 
 
 New Britain, Nkw Ireland, and Solomon's Islands, lie 
 E. of New Guinea; New Hebrides and New Caledonia 
 are S. E. of the same island. Very little is known about any 
 of these islands, as they were not discovered till lately, and 
 contain no European settlements. 
 
 New Zealand consists of two large islands, lying east of 
 Van Piemen's land. The most valuable production is a spe- 
 cies of 6ax, which has a beautiful silky appearance, and seems 
 to be peculiar to this island. The natives of New Zealand 
 
POLYNESIA. 1^23 
 
 are a noble race of men. They are as tall as the tallest Eu- 
 ropeans ; their features are regular ; they have uncommon 
 strength of mind and sagacity ; they are warlike, naturally 
 kind, affectionate, and generous. Yet they are cannibals, 
 and when provoked are very ferocious, but under proper cul- 
 tivation they will make one of the finest people in .he world. 
 An English settlement has recently been made here, for the 
 purpose of introducing the blessings of civilization, and the 
 knowledge of Christianity. 
 
 Very little is known about Van Diemen's land. 
 
 POIiYNESIA. 
 
 J^hme and Situation. Polynesia is derived from two Greek 
 words signifying many islands. It embraces the numerous 
 islands in the Pacific ooean, lying east of the Philippine islands 
 and Australasia. The principal groups are the Pelew islands, 
 the Caroline islands, the Ladrones, and the Sandwich Islands, 
 lying north of the equator ; and the Friendly Islands, Navi- 
 gator^s Islands, the Society Islands, and the Marquesas, south 
 of the equator. 
 
 The Pelew islands lie east of the Philippine islands. Capt, 
 Wilson was shipwrecked here in 1783, and describes the na- 
 tives as mild, and simple in their manners, and hospitable, 
 but they have no religion, though they appear to believe that 
 the soul survives the body. 
 
 The Caroline islands lie east of the Pelew islands, and are 
 about 30 in number, but are little known. The Ladrones are 
 16 in number, and lie north of the Caroline islands. 
 
 The Sandwich islands are 11 in number, and are in the 
 northeast extremity of Polynesia. Owhyee, the largest 
 island in the group, is 85 miles long. The population of the 
 Sandwich islands is- estimated at 400,000. The climate is 
 rather more temperate than that of the West India islands, 
 which lie in the same latitude. Among the productions are 
 bread fruit and sugar cane. 
 
 .The inhabitants are a mild, affectionate, and docile race. 
 They discover a good share of ingenuity, and are very desi- 
 rous of improvement. The worship of idols, and the sacrifice 
 of human victims were formerly universally prevalent, but in 
 1819 a most astonishing revolution took place; the govern- 
 ment and people almost unanimously renounced idplatry, and 
 
224 AFRICA. 
 
 committed their gods to the flames. Soon after this the 
 American missionaries arrived, and most of the chiefs under 
 their instruction have embraced Christianity. Several of 
 the natives of these islands have been educated at the school 
 for heathen youth at Cornwall in Connecticut. 
 
 The Friendly islands lie east of the New Hebrides, and are 
 inhabited by a friendly people. JS'avigator s islands are east 
 of the Friendly islands, and are inhabited by a ferocious 
 people. 
 
 The Society islands lie still farther east. Otaheite is the 
 largest of this group, and has attracted much attention. It is 
 about 120 miles in circumference. The country is beautiful, 
 and the soil is fertile, producing bread fruit, sugar cane, cocoa 
 nuts, and bananas in abundance. The people are mild, affa- 
 ble, and polite. In 1815 the inhabitants of several of these 
 islands renounced their gods and embraced Christianity, anel 
 since that time several others have followed their example. 
 
 The Marquesas islands lie N. E. of the Society islands. 
 They are five in number, and the inhabitants are said to be 
 the handsomest people in the world. 
 
 AFRICA. 
 
 Situation. Africa is bounded N.by the Mediten*anean, E. 
 by the Red sea and the Indian ocean ; W. by the Atlantic? 
 ocean. On the S. it comes to a point. 
 
 Isthmus and Straits, The isthmus of Suez lies between the 
 Red sea and the Mediterranean, and connects Africa with 
 Asia. The straits of Gibraltar connect' the Mediterranean 
 with the Atlantic, and separate Africa from Europe. The 
 straits of Babelmandel connect the Red sea with the Indian 
 ocean, and separate Africa from Asia. 
 
 Capes. Cape Chiardafui is the eastern extremity of Africa, 
 cape Serra the northern, and cape Verde the western. The 
 cape of Good Hope is in the south, and cape Bojador is north 
 of cape Verde, 
 
 Mountains. The two principal ranges are the mountains 
 of the Moon, and the mount Atlas chain. The moimtmns of 
 
AFRICA. ^i2g 
 
 the Moon commence near cape Verde, in the western ex- 
 tremity of the continent, and run east almost to cape Guarda- 
 fui, a distance of nearly 3000 miles. The mount Atlas chain 
 commences north ot cape Bojador, and runs northeast along 
 the coast to cape Serra. 
 
 Rivers. There are few large rivers in Africa. The largest 
 is the Mle, which rises in the eastern part of the mountains 
 of the Moon, and runs N. to the Mediterranean, a distance of 
 more than 2500 miles. The JViger rises neat the west ex- 
 tremity of the mountains of the Moon, and flows east for a 
 very great distance, but how far is not known. Some suppose 
 that it is lost in the sands ; others, that it empties into a great 
 inland sea ; others, that it turns to the S. W. and discharges 
 itself into the gulf of Benin, and others still, that it is a branch 
 of the Nile. To determine the course of this river, is a grand 
 geographical problem, and several European travellers have 
 attempted to penetrate the interior of Africa for this purpose, 
 but hitherto without success. 
 
 The Senegal f the Gambia^ the TUo Grange, and the Mem- 
 rado, all rise in the western extremity of the mountains of the 
 Moon, near the sources of the Niger, and flow west into the 
 Atlantic, 
 
 Shape. The part of Africa, south of the mountains of the 
 Moon, resembles a sugjjrlonf, or a pyramid with its apex to- 
 wards the south; the part north of these mountains is of a 
 semicircular shape, somewhat resembling an Indian bow. 
 
 Deserts. A:frica is distmgui^hed from the other quarters of 
 the world, by its immense sandy deserts. The Sahara or 
 Great Desert, occupies a large proportion of Africa north of 
 the mountains of the Moon. It extends with few interrup« 
 tions completely across the continent, from the Atlantic to the 
 Red sea, a distance of more than 3000 miles, and its breadjth 
 in some places is more than 800. This desert appears like 
 an immense ocean of scorching sand, interspersed with va- 
 rious islands, or fertile spots, called oases, which serve as 
 resting and watering places for the caravans in their journeys 
 over the desert. When the caravans are disappointed in 
 Elding water at these places, they frequently perish from 
 thirst. In 1805. a caravan of 2000 men and 1800 camels pe- 
 rished in this way. 
 
 Unknown parts. Very little is known about the interior of 
 Africa. Few travellers have penetrated that burning region. 
 
226 EGYPT. 
 
 Our knowledge is principally confined to the countries Ijing 
 directly upon the coast. 
 
 Divisions. Africa is divided into a great many petty king- 
 doms and states ; but they may be classed under five divi- 
 sions. — 1. Northern Africa, or the countries north of the 
 tropic of Cancer ; 2. Southern Jlfrica^ or the countries south 
 of the. tropic of Capricorn ; 3, Eastern Africa, or the coun- 
 tries lying on the east coast, between the tropic of Cancer 
 and the tropic of Capricorn ; 4. Western Africa, or the coun- 
 tries on the west coast, between the tropics. 6, Central Af- 
 rica, or the countries in the interior between these four divi- 
 sions. 
 
 Northern Africa comprehends Egypt and the Barbary 
 
 States. 
 
 EGYPT. 
 
 Situation. Egypt is in the northeast part of Africa, It is 
 bounded N. by the Mediterranean; E. by the isthmus of 
 Suez, and the Red sea; S. by Nubia; and W. by a desert. 
 It lies on both sides of the Nile, from its mouth to Syene ia 
 lat. 23°, 
 
 River. The Nile is the great river of Egypt. It rises in 
 the mountains of the Moon, and passes through Abyssinia 
 and Nubia before it enters Egypt. Alter entering Egypt, it 
 runs north for 600 miles, and then divides into two branches, 
 one of which flows N. E, and the other N. W. to the Medi- 
 terranean. The country included between the two branches 
 is called the Delta, 
 
 Face of the Country. The only habitable part of Egypt is 
 the long narrow tract, which is watered by the Nile. This 
 river runs between two chains of mountains, which are usually 
 at the distance of 8 or 10 miles from the banks. The coun- 
 try beyond the mountains, both to the east and west, is a 
 desert. 
 
 Divisions, Egypt is divided into two parts, Upper and 
 Lower. Upper Egypt extends from Syene to Cairo ; and 
 Lower Egypt, from Cairo to the Mediterranean. 
 
 Canals. The Delta of the Nile is intersected by canals 
 punning in almost every direction. It is supposed that a canal 
 might be formed across the isthmus of Suez, connecting the 
 Red sea with the Mediterranean ; and opening an easy com- 
 paunicatian between Europe and India, 
 
EGYPT. 227 
 
 Climaie. The climate of Egypt is much hotter than that of 
 other countries in the same latitude. During one season of 
 the year, scorching winds blow from the desert, and bring 
 with them particles of fine dust, which are very injurious to 
 the eyes. It seldom rains in this country. The most com- 
 mon diseases are the plague, the colic, and the optbalmia, a 
 severe disease affecting the ey&s, 
 
 Soil and Agriculture. The soil on the banks of the Nile is 
 a black fat loam, which is exceedingly productive. The most 
 fertile district is the Delta, in Ldwer Egypt, which is annually 
 overflowed, and enriched by the deposit of mud and slime. 
 In Upper Egypt the water is conveyed to the lands by ma- 
 chinery. This country has been celebrated in all ages for its 
 liertility. The principal productions are rice and wheat* 
 
 Population^ Religion^ <ind Government. The population is 
 estimated at 3,500,000. They are composed of Arabs, Copts, 
 Turks, and Jews. The Arabs are much the most numerous, 
 constituting about two thirds of the whole. The Copts pro- 
 fess Christianity. All the other classes, except the Jews, 
 are Mahometans, Egypt is subject to Turkey, and is go- 
 verned by a pacha. 
 
 Cities, Cairoy or Grand Cairo, the metropolis of Egypt, is 
 near the Nile, about 10 miles above the angle of the Delta- 
 It carries on an extensive commerce, by means of caravans, 
 with Syria, Arabia, Abyssinia, the Barbary States, and the 
 interior of Africa. Here are collected the merchandise of 
 Africa, and the richest productions of the east. The city con- 
 tains 300 mosques, all adorned with lofty minarets, and 
 300,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Alexandria, once a splendid city, but now in ruins, stands 
 on the Mediterranean, 1^6 miles N. VV. of Cairo. When in 
 its glory, it is said to have contained 600,000 inhabitants ; 
 now, the population is 10, or 15,000. Rosetta is on the west 
 branch of the Nile, about 6 miles from its mouth. It is a 
 place of considerable commerce, and has 8 or 10,000 inhabit- 
 ants, Damietta is on the eastern branch of the Nile, about 
 2 miles from its mouth. It has a large commerce, particu- 
 larly with Syria, and contains 80,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Suez is on the gulf of Suez, at the northern extremity of 
 the Red sea. Jt is in the midst of a desert. From the tops 
 of the houses the eye cannot discern a single tree, or the 
 smallest spot of verdure ; yet it is a place of considerable 
 
228r BARBARY STATES. 
 
 commerce, being visited by the caravans, and contains 5000 
 inhabitants. The principal towns in Upper Egypt are Siut, 
 GirgCy and Syene, all on or near the Nile. 
 
 Antiquities. The celebrated pyramids, reckoned by the 
 ancients among the seven wonders of the world, are still stand- 
 ing. They are square piles of stone rising to a point. There 
 are 3 large ones opposite Cairo. The largest is 500 feet high, 
 and each side of the base is 600 feet long. The catacombs 
 are long subterranean galleries, commonly cut out of the solid 
 rock, where dead bodies were anciently deposited. The most 
 celebrated are those of Alexandria, and Thebes, and are still 
 to be seen. Many other splendid monuments of antiquity are 
 found in various parts of Egypt. 
 
 Animals. Crocodiles are found in great numbers on the 
 banks of the Nile. Rats and mice are so numerous that they 
 would render the country uninhabitable, were it not for the 
 annual deluge. Scorpions, cameleons and lizards are also 
 found here. 
 
 Commerce. Before the discovery of the passage to In^a 
 round the cape of Good Hope, the C()mmerce between Europe 
 and India was carried on through Alexandria and Cairo. The 
 latter is still the centre of the trade to Egypt, and has inter* 
 course by caravans with a large part of Africa and Asia. 
 
 BARBARY STATES. 
 
 Situation. The Barbary states occupy that long narrow 
 country, lying along the Mediterranean sea on the N. and the 
 Sahara, or Great Desert, on the S. and extending from Egypt 
 on the E. to the Atlantic on the VV. 
 
 Divisions. The Barbary States are Tripoli, Tunis, Algiers 
 and Morocco. 
 
 Face of the country. The eastern part of this country is a 
 desert, connected with the Sahara or Great Desert. The 
 western part is divided by the chain of Mount Atlas, which 
 runs from N. E. to S. W. The tract between the Atlas range 
 and the Mediterranean, is from 50 to 200 miles wide, and is 
 mostly a level, well watered, and fertile country* The tract 
 between the Atlas range and the desert is mountainous, sandy, 
 and barren ; but produces dates in such abundance, that it is 
 called the country of dates. 
 
 Inhabitants, The inhabitants may be divided into 4 classes. 
 1. The Moors, who are the ruling people, and constitute the 
 
BARBARY STATES. 220 
 
 mass of the population in all the cities, 2. The Jews, who 
 are the principal merchants, and are continually insulted, and 
 most cruelly oppressed by the Moors. 3. The Arabs, who 
 wander with their flocks and herds in the interior districts, on 
 the borders of the desert. 4. The Brebers, who are descen- 
 dants of the ancient natives, and inhabit the mountainous 
 regions. 
 
 Climate. The climate is temperate and pleasant, —The 
 plague, however, occasionally visits this country, and is aw- 
 fully destructive in its ravages. The leprosy is very common. 
 There are many other dreadful diseases, whicharise not from 
 the climate, but from the abominable vices of the inhabitants. 
 
 Religion, The Mahon\etan risligion prevails in all the Bar" 
 bary States. The Jews, however, are numerous, but are 
 most cruelly oppressed. 
 
 Manners and Customs. The Moors are among the moBt 
 vicious and profligate people upon the earth. — They are pi- 
 rates, and formerly committed great depredations on the com° 
 merce of Christian nations in the Mediterranean. The Arabs 
 live in tents, and wander near the deserts in independent 
 tribes. They are a lawless and turbulent race, and are fre- 
 . quently at war with each other. The Brebers live also in 
 tents, and pay little respect to regular government. 
 
 Animals. Lions, leopards, and other fierce animals abound 
 ih the forests. Venomous serpents of an enormous size are 
 also common. The buska is a black venomous serpent, 7 or 8 
 feet long, which coils itself up, and then darts to a very great 
 distance. In a iew minutes after the bite, the sufierer tnrn9 
 black and expires. The boa constrictor, or serpent of the desert, 
 called also the anaconda, is often 80 feet long, and as thick as 
 a man's body, but it is not venomous. It moves with such 
 swiftness that it is impossible to escape from it. It will twist 
 itself round an ox, and after crushing its bones, will swallow 
 it gradually, and then lie supinely on the ground for two or 
 three days, unable to move. 
 
 Soil and Productions. The country between the moun- 
 tains and coast is very fertile and well watered, and produces 
 wheat, olives, almonds, and the most delicious fruits in abun- 
 dance. Between the mountains and the desert the soil is 
 barren, but produces great quantities of dates, which consti- 
 tute the chief food of the inhabitants. 
 
 CarriTnerce. This cotint'ry has an extensive conrm^rce with 
 
 y 
 
250 35ARBARY STATES. 
 
 the interior of Africa, and with Egypt and Arabia, by means 
 of caravans. 
 
 TRIPOLI. 
 
 Situation. Tripoli extends on the Mediterranean, frohi 
 the gulf of Cabes to Egypt, 1100 miles. It is bounded N. 
 by the Mediterranean ; E. by Egypt ; S. by the Desert ; 
 and W. by^ Tunis. 
 
 Population. The population is estimated at 1,000,000. 
 
 Chief Towns. Tripoli, the capital, is on the coast of the 
 l^Iediterranean, and is surrounded with high walls. The 
 population is estimated at 40,000. 
 
 Barca. The eastern half of Tripoli is called Barca, and 
 is sometimes considered as a province of Tripoli, and some- 
 times as a tributary state. It is principally a desert. Gene- 
 ral Eaton, with a small body of American troops, took Derne, 
 the capital of Barca, in 1805. 
 
 TUNIS. 
 
 Situation. Tunis lies west of Tripoli, and is bounded N. 
 by the Mediterranean ; S. by the Desert ; and W. by Al- 
 giers. 
 
 Population. The population is variously estimated from 
 1 to 3,000,000. I 
 
 Chief Cities. Tunis, the capital, is on the bank of a salt f 
 water lake, about six miles from the head of the gulf of 
 Tunis. The lake is connected by a narrow passage with the 
 sea. The city is enclosed by a miserable mud wall. The 
 population is about 120,000. The ruins of Carthage, once 
 the rival of Rome, are still to be seen 15 miles N. E. of 
 
 ALGIERS. 
 
 Situation. Algiers is bounded N. by the Mediterranean ; 
 E by Tunis ; S. by the Desert ; and W. by Morocco. 
 
 Population. The population is estimated at 1,500,000. 
 
 Chief Towns. Algiers, the capital, is on the coast of the 
 Mediterranean, about 300 miles W. of Tunis. It is built on 
 the side of a mountain, and the houses rise gradually one 
 above another. The city and harbour are strongly defend- 
 ed with walls, forts, and batteries. The Turks call it Algiers 
 
BARBARY STATES. 231 
 
 ike Warlike. This city was bombarded by an American fleet 
 under Commodore Decatur in 1816; and afterwards, the 
 same year, by a British fleet under Lord Exmouth. The 
 population is variously estimated from 100,000 to 200,000. 
 
 Constantina is a stronvr city, 160 miles E. of Algiers. 
 Or an is a strong town, 170 miles S. W. of Algiers. In 1790 
 it was almost destroyed by an earthquake. 
 
 Biledulgerid. he southern parts of '\uiis and Algiers, 
 or those parts which lie between the mountains and the 
 Great desert, are called Biledulgerid, which signifies the 
 Country of Dates. ? his country is inhabited by tribes of 
 Arabs, some of which are entirely independent. 
 
 MOROCCO. 
 
 Situation. The empire of Morocco extends on the coast 
 from Algiers to the Great desert. It is bounded N. by the 
 Mediterranean; E. by Algiers and Biledulgerid; S, by the 
 Great desert ; and W. by the Atlantic. 
 
 Divisions. The empire of Morocco comprehends the 
 former small kingdoms of Fez, Morocco, Tarudant, and Ta- 
 filet. The first three border on the sea coast ; Fez in the N. : 
 Morocco in the centre, and arudant in the S. Tafiletis in 
 the interior, on the east side of the Mount Atlas chain. 
 
 Population, i'he population of this empire is variously 
 estimated from 5,000.000 to 14,000,000. 
 
 Government, 'i he government of Morocco is the most ab- 
 solute despotism on the face of the earth. here is no check 
 whatever upon the will of the sovereign. Life and property 
 are disposed of according to tlie caprice of the moment. 
 Some of the monarchs have even considered an adherence 
 to their engagements as an unlawful check upon their power, 
 "lakest thou me for an infidel," said one of them to a fo- 
 reigner, *' that I must be the slave of my word." 
 
 Chief Cities Morocco is situated in a pleasant plain, at 
 the foot of Mount Atlas, 120 miles from the sea. It is sur- 
 rounded by a wail, and is said to have once contained 700,000 
 inhabitants, but the population at present is estimated at only 
 30,000. It still retains nutnerous temples, splendid mosques^ 
 and other vestiges of its ancient grandeur. 
 
 Fez, the capital of the ancient kingdom of Fez, is 200 
 miles N . E, of Morocco, and 160 S. of Gibraltar. It is the 
 
2S2 WEST AFRICA. 
 
 most splendid city in the Barbary States. The mosques are 
 very numerous, and some of them magnificent. The popu- 
 lation is more than 100,000. 
 
 Mequinez is in a beautiful valley, 35 miles S. W. of Fez. 
 It is surrounded with walls, and contains 110,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Mogador is a seaport, on the Atlantic, 80 miles S. W. ot 
 Morocco. The country around it for several miles is a me- 
 lancholy desert. Considerable commerce is carried on from 
 this port with various parts of Europe. One of the princi- 
 pal exports is goat skins. The population is about 10,000. 
 
 Manufactures. The most celebrated manufacture is mo 
 rocco leather. The gun- powder made by the Arabs is of a 
 quality far superior to that of Europeans. 
 
 WEST AFRICA. 
 
 Situation. West Africa includes all the countries lying on 
 the coast of the Atlantic Ocean, between the Great desert 
 and the tropic of Capricorn. 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers north of the equator, are the 
 Senegal, the Gambia, the Rio Grande, and the Mesurado, all 
 of which rise in the mountains of the Moon, near the sources 
 of the Niger. The Senegal flows N. W. and enters the At- 
 lantic north of Cape Verde ; the Gambia and the Rio Grande 
 flow W. and the Mesurado S. W. The principal river south 
 of the equator, is the Congo or Zaire. 
 
 Divisions. West Africa is divided between numerous iu- 
 dependejit tribes of negroes. The principal tribes between 
 the Senegal and the Mesurado, are the Foulahs, the Jaloffs, 
 the Feloops, and the Mandingoes. The country east of the 
 Mesurado is called the coast of Guinea, and comprehends 
 the Grain coast, the Ivory coast, the Gold coast, and the king- 
 dom of Benin. Back of the Ivory coast is Ashantee, said to 
 be the most powerful and civilized kingdom in West Africa. 
 East of Ashantee is Dahomey. South of the kingdom of 
 Benin are the countries of Biafra, Loango, Congo, Angola, 
 and Benguela. 
 
 Climate. West Africa lies wholly within the torrid zone, 
 and the climate is very hot, and during the rainy season, very 
 fatal to Europeans. 
 
 Slave Trade. This country was the seat of the slave trade. 
 For three centuries the ships of European nations carried oft 
 
SOUTH AFRICA. 233 
 
 annually thousands of negroes, and sold them to American 
 planters. This abominable trafl&c is now abolished. 
 
 Character. The inhabitants are negroes. They are a 
 very degraded and superstitious race. They believe in 
 witchcraft, and offer sacrifices to devils. 
 , European Settlements. The most important European set- 
 tlement is the colony of Sierra Leone^ on a river of that name, 
 between the Kio Grande and the JNIesurado. This colony 
 was established in 1791, with a view to introduce agriculture, 
 and the useful arts, into this part of Africa, and to facilitate 
 the abolition of the slave trade. The colony is now in a 
 flourishing condition, containing 12,000 inhabitants, most of 
 them negroes. Here are numerous schools, where all the 
 children in the colony are taught to read and write, and there 
 are churches where they assemble regularly on the Sabbath 
 to attend divine worship. The principal town in the colony 
 is Freetown, which is about 6 miles from the mouth of the 
 river, and contains 4000 inhabitants. 
 
 The Dutch and English have several small forts and set- 
 tlements on the Gold coast ; and the Portuguese, on the coast 
 of Benguela. The American Colonization Society planted 
 a^mall colony of free blacks in 1820 at cape Mesurado, south 
 of Sierra Leone, which has since been much increased. The 
 colony is called Liberia, and the principal town is Monrovia. 
 
 Productions, The country yields all the fruits of hot cli- 
 mates in abundance, sugar cane, indigo, cotton, rice, Indian 
 corn, &c. 
 
 SOUTH AFRICA. 
 
 , Situation. South Africa includes the whole of the conti- 
 nent south of the tropic of Capricorn. 
 
 Divisions. 1 his country may be divided into two parts. 
 The southern part belongs to the English, and is colled the 
 colony of the cape of Good Hope. The northern part is 
 called Caffraria, and is possessed by various tribes of natives. 
 
 1. Colony of the Cape of Good Hope. 
 
 Situation, This colony is bounded on the N. by a long 
 range of mountains ; on the E. by Fish river ; and on the S, 
 and W. by the Ocean. It is 50U miles long jfrom east to 
 west, and on an average about 200 broad. 
 
 V 2 
 
2S4 SOUTH AFRICA. 
 
 Face of the country. There are three ranges of mountains, 
 all of which run from east to west, parallel with the southern 
 coast, and then turn north, and run parallel with the western 
 coast. The country between the lower range and the coast 
 is fertile, and well watered ; between the lower and middle 
 range, are barren hills and naked plains, interspersed with 
 some fertile spots ; between the middle and upper range is i\ 
 dry desert, inhabited by no human creature. 
 
 Population. In 1810, the population was 8 1,000^ one-third 
 of whom were slaves. The free inhabitants are divided into 
 four classes, viz. the inhabitants of the capital, wine growers- 
 corn-farmers, and graziers. The wine growers and corn- 
 farmers live in the neighbourhood of the capital ; the graziers 
 are in the most distant parts of the colony, and are less ad- 
 vanced in civilization than the other classes. 
 
 Chief Towns. Capetoivn, the capital, is in the southwest- 
 ern part of the colony, on Table bay, about 30 miles N. of 
 the cape of Good Hope. The harbour is safe during 8 months 
 of the year ; but during the remaining four, when the N. W. 
 winds prevail, ships are obliged to resort to False bay, on 
 the other side of the cape. Capetown contained in 1810, 
 about 1 7,000 inhabitants. 
 
 2. Caffraria. 
 
 Situation. All that part of South Africa which lies N. of 
 the colony of the cape of Good Hope, is included in Cafr 
 fraria. This name is sometimes made to include also the 
 southern part of Central Africa. 
 
 Face of the Country. The eastern parts of this country 
 are fertile, but in the west there are extensive deserts. " 
 
 Inhabitants. The country is occupied by many savage 
 tribes, the principal of which are the Hottentots and CafFres. 
 
 Chief Toum. The principal town is Lattahoo, which is 
 said to contain 12,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Missionary statio7is. Christian missionaries have beeii 
 employed for many years among the Hottentots and other 
 savages of this country, with very good success. The Lon- 
 don Missionary Society have now 20 missionary stations in 
 South Africa, 
 
EAST AFRICA. 235 
 
 EAST AFRICA. 
 
 Situation, East Africa includes all the countries on the 
 coast between Egypt and the tropic of Capricorn. 
 
 Divisions. Very little is known about East Africa ; but 
 it may be divided into Nubia, Abyssinia, and the countries 
 south of Abyssinia, 
 
 1. JVubia. 
 
 Situation. JSTubia is bounded N. by Egypt ; E. by the 
 Red sea ; S. by Abyssinia ; W. by the interior of Africa, 
 It is almost surrounded by deserts. 
 
 Divisions. Nubia is divided into several kingdoms, the 
 principal of which are Sennaar and Dongola. 
 
 Face of the Country. The greater part of the country is 
 a barren sandy desert ; but the Nile and several of its 
 branches pass through the country, and the lands on their 
 banks are fertile. 
 
 Chief Towns. Sennaar, the capital of the kingdom of the 
 same name, is on a branch of the Nile, and is said to contain 
 100,000 inhabitants, Suakem, a port on the Red sea, has 
 considerable trade with Arabia, Egypt, and the East Indies. 
 Dongola, the capital of the kingdom of Dongola, i^ on the 
 Nile, 280 miles S. of Syene. 
 
 Climate. The climate of this country is hot and unheal- 
 thy. The simoom, or poisonous blast from the desert, often 
 proves fatal to those who are overtaken by it. The only 
 resource for the traveller, when he sees it coming, is to fall 
 flat upon the ground, with his face to the earth, till the nox- 
 ious wind has gone by. AnDther curious phenemenon of 
 the desert is the lofty pillars of sand, which sometimes move 
 across tlie desert with such rapidity, that the swiftest horse 
 would in vain attempt to escape them. When they pass be- 
 tween the traveller and t)ie sun, they have the appearance of 
 pillars of fire. 
 
 Situation. Abyssinia is bounded N. by Nubia ; E. by the 
 Red sea ; S. by several kingdoms bordering on the moun- 
 tains of the Moon ; and W. by the Nile. 
 
 Rivers. The eastern brandi of fhe Nile rises in the monn- 
 
236 EAST AFRICA. 
 
 tains of Abyssinia, and tlie country is well watered by seve- 
 ral other large streams, all of which empty themselves into 
 the Nile. 
 
 Religion. The Abyssinians profess Christianity, but in a 
 very corrupted form. They are very ignoiant of its doc- 
 trines, and unmindful of its precepts. They practise cir- 
 cumcision and several other Jewish rites, and keep the 
 seventh day as well as the first. 
 
 Manners and Customs. The manners of the Abyssinians 
 are characterized by a peculiar barbarism and brutality. 
 They kill each other on very trifling occasions, and leave the 
 dead bodies in the streets to be eaten by dogs. They eat 
 the raw flesh of animals immediately after they are slain, 
 while the blood is warm ; and they sometimes cut steaks 
 from living animals, and leave the wound to close up. Mar- 
 riage in Abyssinia is a very slight connexion, formed and 
 dissolved at pleasure. 
 
 Government. The government is despotic, but for several 
 years has been in a very unsettled state, owing to the feuds 
 of various chieftains, who aspire to supreme power. 
 
 Population. The population is variously estimated from 
 2 to 3,000,000. 
 
 Chief Towns. Gondar, the capital, is near lake Dembea, 
 on a hill surrounded by a deep valley, and contains about 
 50,000 inhabitants. The houses are chiefly of clay, with 
 thatched roofs, in the form of cones. Axum, the ancient 
 capital, is 140 miles N. E. of Gondar. It is now a mere 
 heap of ruins. 
 
 3. Countnes south of Abyssinia. 
 
 Divisions. The countries south of Abyssinia may be di- 
 vided into two parts. 1. The countries on the coast of Ajan, 
 including the powerful kingdom of Adel and several others, 
 and extending from Abyssinia to the equator. 2. The coun- 
 tries on the coast of Zanguehar, including Mosambique, and 
 many others, and extending from the equator to the tropic of 
 Capricorn. 
 
 Portuguese Possessions. The Portuguese formerly had 
 possession of all the principal places on the coast of Zangue- 
 fear, and carried on an extensive commerce with the natives. 
 But all their possessions north of cape Delgado, have been 
 
CENTRAL AFRICA. 237 
 
 Tnrested from them by the Arabs and the natives, and they 
 now own only two or three places of importance, lying be- 
 tween cape Delgado and cape Corrientes. 
 
 Chief Towns. The principal town on the coast of Ajan 
 is Magadoxa, a place which carries on considerable com- 
 merce with the Arabs, and the people of Adel. The princi- 
 pal towns on the coast of Zanguebar are Melinda, Mombaza» 
 Quiloa, Mosambique, and Sofala, all of which were formerly 
 in the hands of the Portuguese ; but they now retain only 
 the two last. Mosambique is now the capital of the Portu- 
 guese possessions in Eastern Africa. It contains about 3000 
 inhabitants, one half of whom are negroes. 
 
 Inhabitants. The inhabitants of the coast of Zanguebar 
 are negroes, very much resembling in appearance, manners,, 
 and customs, those on the western coast of Africa, 
 
 Commerce. The same articles are exported from this coast 
 as from West Africa. The principal are gold, ivory, and 
 slaves. The slave trade has much diminished within a few 
 years, in consequence of the exertions of the English. 
 Myrrh and frankincense are exported from the country be- 
 tween cape Guardafui and the straits of BabelmandeL 
 
 CENTRAIi AFRICA. 
 
 General Remark. We know very little about Central 
 Africa. South of the mountains of the Moon, every part of 
 it is wholly unknown, and north of those mountains there 
 are extensive districts, which have never been visited by 
 Europeans. 
 
 Rivers. The two principal rivers are the Niger and the 
 Wad-el- Gazel. The JViger rises in the western part of the 
 mountains of the Moon, and flows east ; how far, is not 
 known. The Wad-el Gazel rises west of the sources of the 
 Nile, and flows N. till it is lost in the sands of the desert. 
 
 Divisions^ The principal kingdoms which have been visit 
 ed by Europeans are Bambarra, Tombuctoo, Houssa, Kas- 
 sina, Bornou, Bergherme, Bergoo, Fezzan, and Dar-Fur, 
 
 Situation of the kingdoms. Bambarra is a powerful negro 
 kingdom on both sides of the Niger, near its source. Tom- 
 buctoo is on the Niger, east of Bambarra. Houssa is on the 
 Niger, east of Tombuctoo. Kassina is on the Niger, east of 
 Houssa. Bornou is a very powerful kingdom on the Wad- 
 
238 AFRICAN ISLANDS. 
 
 el-Gazel. Bergkerme and Bergop are tributary to BorndUy 
 and lie south of it. Dar-Fur is still tiarther south, and ex- 
 tends east to the confines of Nubia. Fezz.m is in the north, 
 between Bornou and Tripoli, and surrounded by the ii^reat 
 Desert, like an i&land by the ocean. Fezzan is tributaiy to 
 Tripoli. 
 
 Chief Cities, Sego, the capital of the kinifdom of ^Baoi- 
 barra, is on the Niger, and contains 30,000 inhabitartis. 
 Tombvctoo^ a. famous city, capital of the kingdom of Tooi- 
 buc.too, is 1:2, miles N. of the Nig«r. It carries on commerce, 
 by means of caravans, with Morocco, the BnrbRry States, and 
 Egypt. Houssa lies east of Tombuctoo, and is said to hasre 
 more trade and pc-pulation than To!nbut:to{h 
 
 The city of Bornou is near the Wadel-Gazel river. Mour- 
 zouky the capital of Fezzan, is the centrfr^.of commerce be- 
 Uveen Egypt on the east, Morocco and the Barbary States on 
 the west, and the interior of Africa on the south. It contains 
 20,000 inhabitants. 
 
 Inhabitants and Religion. The inhabitants of Central 
 Africa- ate principally Negroes, Moors, and Arabs, and their 
 religion is Mahometanism. 
 
 Commerce, Mourzouk is the centre of commerce. The 
 principal articles carried to Mourzouk are gold, slaves, ostrich 
 feathers, tiger skins, &c. and the articles received in exchange 
 are East India goods, fire arms, sabres, knives, looking-glasses, 
 red worsted caps, &c. 
 
 AFRICAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Situation. The principal islands are Aladeira and the Ca- 
 nary islands in the northwest ; cape Verd islands lying ofi 
 cape Verd in the west ; St. Helena in the southwest ; Mada- 
 gascar, the isle of Bourbon, and Mauriti'is, or the isle of 
 France^ in the southeast; and Socotra, off cape Guardafui, 
 in the east. To these may be added the Azoies, or Western 
 islands, lying in the Atlantic, midway between Europe, Afri- 
 ca, and America. 
 
 Owners. The Azores, Madeira, and cape Verd islands be- 
 long to Portugal ; the Canaries to Spain ; St. Helena and 
 Mauritius to the English ; the isle of Bourbon to the French ; 
 and the rest to the natives. 
 
 Madeira. Madeira is a small island, only 64 miles long, 
 and 21 broad, consisting of a coiiecljon of lofty mountains. 
 
AFRICAN ISLANDS. 239 
 
 the highest of which rises upwards of 6060 feet above the 
 level of the sea. Oq the declivity of these mountains the 
 vine is cultivated, which produces the iamous Madeira wine. 
 The commerce of the island consists almost entirely in the 
 export of its wine, the annual amount of which is about 
 16,000 pipes. The population is estimated at 90,000. 
 
 Canaries. The Canaries are a group of islands lying south 
 of Madeira, near the African coast. The principal are Tene- 
 riffe, Grand Canary, and Palma. The climate is delightful, 
 and the productions are wine, sugar, grain, and fruits. The 
 celebrated peak of Teneriffe is more than 12,000 feet hjghj 
 and visible at sea at the distance of 120 miles. 
 
 St. Helena is a small island, 10 miles long, and 6 broad. 
 The shores are lined with high steep rocks, and the interior 
 is accessible only through a few narrow passes, which are 
 strongly fortified. This island is celebrated as the prison of 
 Napoleon Buonaparte, from August, 1813, till his death in 
 1821. 
 
 Madagascar is more than 800 miles long, and is one of the 
 lai'gest islands in the world. It is separated from tl\e east- 
 ern coast of Africa by the channel of Mosambique. The 
 population is variously estimated from 1,500,000 to 4,000,000, 
 
 The isle of Bourbon lies east of Madagascar. It enjoys a 
 fine climate, and produces corn, coffee, rice, tobacco, aloes, 
 &c. in abundance. The population in 1810 was 90,000, of 
 whom 70,000 were slaves. 
 
 Mauritius, or the isle of France, lies still further east. It 
 13 strongly fortified, and was formerly the chief naval station 
 of the French in the Indian seas. It vras captured by the 
 British in 1810, and they still retain it. 
 
 The Azores consist of 9 islands, the principal of which are 
 St. Michael and Fayal. The Azores enjoy a delightful cli- 
 mate, and are fertile in corn, wine, and fruits. The greatest 
 inconvenience is that they are subject to violent earthquakes, 
 as well as to the fury of the waves, which frequently rush 
 over the low grounds, and sweep off whole fields of grain, 
 and folds of cattle. 
 
:i4: 
 
 GENERAL AND COMPARATIVE VIEWS 
 
 Of the Extent, Population, Rivers, Canals, Commerce, 
 Religions, S^^c. of different countries. 
 
 I. OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 EXTENT AND POPULATION. 
 
 The first coluxnn of figures m the followmg /table sliows the s/ic 
 of the diiferent states ; the second shows the population in 1820 ; 
 the third, the density of population, or the average number of in- 
 habitants on every square mile; and the fourth, the numher of slaves 
 in 1820. 
 
 States. 
 
 Square 
 miles. 
 
 Population in 
 1320. 
 
 Fop. on 
 a sq. m. 
 
 Slaves in 
 1820. 
 
 1. Maine 
 
 31.750 
 
 298,335 
 
 m 
 
 None. 
 
 2. New Hampshire 
 
 9,491 
 
 244,161 
 
 26 
 
 None. 
 
 3. Vermont 
 
 10,212 
 
 235,764 
 
 23 
 
 None. 
 
 4. Massachusetts 
 
 7,250 
 
 523,287 
 
 72 
 
 None. 
 
 5. Rhode Island 
 
 1,5 SO 
 
 83.059 
 
 53 
 
 48 
 
 <). Connecticut 
 
 4,7G4 
 
 275,248 
 
 58 
 
 97 
 
 7. New York 
 
 46,000 
 
 1,372,812 
 
 30 
 
 10,088 
 
 8. New Jersey 
 
 8,320 
 
 , 277,575 
 
 33 
 
 7,557 
 
 9, Pennsylvania 
 
 46,000 
 
 1,049,398 
 
 23 
 
 211 
 
 10. Delaware 
 
 : 2,120 
 
 72,749 
 
 34 
 
 4,509 
 
 11. Maryland 
 
 13,959 
 64,000 
 
 407,350 
 
 29 
 
 107,398 
 
 12. Virginia 
 
 1 ,065,36() 
 
 17 
 
 425,153 
 
 13. North Carolina 
 
 48,000 
 
 •638,829 
 
 13 
 
 205,017 
 
 14. South Carolina 
 
 ■ 24,000 
 
 490,309 
 
 20 
 
 251,783 
 
 lo. Georgia 
 
 60,000 
 
 340,989 
 
 6 
 
 149,676 
 
 16. Alabama 
 
 44,000 
 
 127,901 
 
 3 
 
 39,879 
 
 17. Mississippi 
 
 45.000 
 
 75,448 
 
 2 
 
 32,814 
 
 18. Louisiana 
 
 48.000 
 
 153,407 
 
 3 
 
 69,064 
 
 19. Tennessee 
 
 40,000 
 
 422,813 
 
 11 
 
 80,097 
 
 20. Kentucky 
 
 42,000 
 
 564,317 
 
 13 
 
 126,732 
 
 21. Ohio 
 
 39,000 
 
 .581,434 
 
 15 
 
 None. 
 
 22. Indiana 
 
 33,000 
 
 147,178 
 
 3 
 
 19li 
 
 23. Illinois 
 
 52,000 
 
 55,211 
 
 1 
 
 917 
 
 24. Pflissouri 
 
 60.000 
 
 66,586 
 
 1 
 
 10,222 
 
 ^icestions on the Table. 1. Which is tiie lar2:e:it state iu the Union? 2. AVliich is the 
 smallest ? 3. Which states coatjim less than 10,000 square miles ? l. How many con- 
 tain more than 30,000 ? o. What are their names ? ti. Which state contains the great- 
 est population ? 7. Which next ? 8. Which next ? 9. Wliich of the states is mo.-t 
 Iliickly settled ; that is, which contains the greatest number of inhabitants on a square 
 mile? 10. Which is next to Massaclmsetts ? 11. AVJiich next? 12. Which is most 
 thinly settled ? 13. How many contain less than ten on a square mWe, and what are 
 theiruames? 14. Which state has most slaves? 15. Which next ? 16. Which next ? 
 17. How many states have more than 100,000 slaves, and what are their names ? is. 
 Which states have no s!u'.c? ? • 
 
 W 
 
^: 
 
 'GESHiAL A:\JJ CUMrAllATlVi:: VIKW 
 
 INCREASE OF POPULATION* 
 
 In tlie following table, the first column of figures shows the po- 
 pulation of the United States in 1790 ; the second, the population. 
 m 1820; the third, the increase between 1790 and 1820; and the 
 fourth, how many per cent, each state gained between 1810 and 
 1820, and of course, shows which states increased fastest in pro- 
 portion to their population. 
 
 States. 
 
 PopulationlPopulation 
 in 1790. in 1820. 
 
 Increase in 
 30 years. 
 
 Rate of inc. 
 from 181j0 
 <ol820. 
 
 Maine 
 
 96,540j 298,335 
 
 201,795 
 
 30.4 pr. ct. 
 
 TSew Hampshire 
 
 141,885 244,161 
 
 102,276 
 
 13.8 
 
 Vermont 
 
 85,539 235,764 
 
 150,225 
 
 8.2 
 
 Massachusetts 
 
 388,787: 523,287 
 
 144,500 
 
 10.9 
 
 Rhode Island 
 
 68,825! 83,059 
 
 14,234 
 
 8.0 
 
 Connecticut 
 
 237,9461 275,248 
 
 37,302 
 
 5.1 
 
 New York 
 
 340,120; 1,372,812 
 
 1,032,692 
 
 43.1 
 
 New Jersey 
 
 184,189 
 
 277,575 
 
 93,386 
 
 13.0 
 
 Pennsylvania 
 
 434,373 
 
 1,049,398 
 
 615,025 
 
 29.5 
 
 Delaware 
 
 59,094 
 
 72,749 
 
 13,655 
 
 0.1 
 
 Maryland 
 
 319,728 
 
 407,350 
 
 87,622 
 
 7.0 
 
 Virginia 
 
 747,610 
 
 1,065,366 
 
 317,756 
 
 9.3 
 
 North Carolina 
 
 393,751 
 
 638,829 
 
 i 245,078 
 
 11.4 
 
 South Carolina 
 
 240,073 490,30^ 
 
 250,236 
 
 18.1 
 
 Georgia 
 
 82,548! 340,989 
 
 258,441 
 
 35.1 
 
 Tennessee 
 
 35,691 1 422,818 
 
 387,122 
 
 61.0 
 
 Kentucky 
 
 73,6771 564,317 
 
 490,640 
 
 39.0 
 
 Ohio 
 
 3,0(J0| 581,434 
 
 578,434 
 
 152.0 
 
 United States 
 
 3,929,328 
 
 9,625,734 
 
 5,696,406 
 
 32.9pr. ci 
 
 Remarks. From the table it appears that the population of tlie 'i. 
 United States increased between 1810 and 1820, 32.9 per cent. At I 
 this rate, as the increase resembles that of money at compound in- 
 terest, it will double in about 25 years. 
 
 q^uestitms. Which state contahied tlie greatest population in 1790 ? which, in 1S20 ? 
 2. Which state increased ?nos< between 1790 and 1820? 3. Which, next? 4. Which, 
 next ? o. Which stale increased least ? 6. Wliich, next ? 7. Wliich state increased 
 sZoifest between 1810 and 1S20 ? 8, Which, next ? 9. Which, next ? 10. Whuii, next ? , 
 11. Which state increased /asfesi/' 12. Which, next? 13. Which, next ? 14, Which, 
 next ? 15. Which states increased less than 10 per cent. ? 16. At what rate did the po - 
 pUlation of the United States increase between 1810 and 2520 r 1-7, How lon^ wi!' ; 
 ^.ake to double at this ra^e ? 
 
OF THE UNITED bTATES, 
 
 ORIGIN AND rosiTION OF THE INHABITANTS. 
 
 i The population of the United States consists of three distintr 
 j classes, viz. Whites, Ne2;ioes, and Indians. The number of 
 i whites is about 10,000,000; of negroes, 2,000,000; and of Iii- 
 ; dians, 500,000. 
 
 ; All the ivhites are of European origin ; principally English. 
 i The New Englanders, and the Virgmians and Carolinians, except 
 those west of the Blue Ridge, are almost jmrely English. Next 
 I to the English are the Gerjjians, who are very numerous in ilie 
 Middle States, and particularly in Pennsylvania, where they con- 
 stitute more than one fourth part of the population. Next "to thv 
 j Germans are the Dutch, who are most numerous in the vicinity of 
 j the Hudson and Mohawk in New York, of which state they were 
 • the original settlers. The French were the original settlers of 
 i Louisiana, and they still form nearly one half of its population. 
 I The Scotch-Irish, or emigrants from the north of Ireland, form the 
 mass of population in the western parts of Virginia and North 
 Carolina. The Irish and Scotch are found scattered in Pennsylva- 
 nia, New York, and New Jersey, and in all the principal cities o! 
 the Union. — The inhabitants of the Western States are made up 
 of emigrants from every state in llie Union, and from almost every 
 -country^ in Europe. 
 
 The negroes are all the descendants of Africans, who were force<l 
 from their native country and sold to the American planters. Of 
 ilie 2,000,000, about 1,800,000 are now slaves, all of whom reside in 
 the states soudi of Fennsylv:mia and Ohio. Of the free blacks, 
 about 100,000 are in the states north of Maryland and Kentucky. 
 Tlie Indians are tiie desceridants of the aboriginal inhabitants of 
 file country. The principal tribes east of the Mississippi aje the 
 Crec/:5, who once occupied the v^estern part of Georgia and the 
 eastern part of Alabama, but the greater part of the tribe have re- 
 cently removed to the country on the Arkansas west of the Missis- 
 sippi ; the Cherokees, in the N. W. part of Georgia and the a<ija- 
 cent parts of Alabama and Tennessee ; the Choctaivs and Chickasau^, 
 in Mississippi ; the Sacs and Potoivatamies, in the northern p;u i 
 •of Illinois ; the Chippewas and Ottmoas, in Michigan ; the Menc- 
 ■minees, near Green bay, in the N. W. territory, and the tVivneha^oes 
 in the same territory, on Fox and Ouisconsin rivers. — The tnbes 
 best known to us on the west of the Mississippi are the Sioux, who 
 occupy nearly all the country between the Mississippi and Missouri 
 south of 46*^ N. lat. : the usages, on the Missouri and Arkansas 
 rivers ; and the Pmtmees, between the Missouri and the Platte. 
 
 ^ttestion^. 1. From what European nation are the New Englanders descend*-.] ? i. 
 the Virginians and Carolinians ? 3. the Virginians west of the Blue Ridge ? 4. ~Win-:<- 
 are the Germans most numerous ? o. tlie French ? 6. the Scotch-Irish ? 7. H<>v, 
 myny whites in tlie United States ? 8. How many negroes ? 9. How many Indians r 
 JO. Wht-redotlie negroes reside r 1!. Wflero. the Chgrok-et? r 1-2, tlie Chinpewuh : 
 iS. the WinnHiaiTOPS ? &.r. 
 
244 
 
 li CO^ii'ARATi V E ■Vi£\\'i 
 
 The following table suo\vs, at one view, the length, width, depth, 
 cost, and amount of lockage, ov whole ascent and descent, of the 
 principal canals in the United States. 
 
 ^'AMES. 
 
 miles 
 
 Middlesex 
 
 Blacks tone 
 
 Hampshire & Hampden 
 
 Farmington 
 
 Champlain & Hudson 
 
 Hudson & Erie 
 
 Hudson & Dela-iVare 
 
 Morris 
 
 Delaware & Raritan 
 
 Union 
 
 Delaware & Chesapedve 
 
 Dismal Swamp 
 
 Santee 
 
 Louisville & Portland 
 
 Ohio & Miami 
 
 Ohio & Erie 
 
 40 
 
 29 
 58 
 64 
 
 360 
 64 
 80 
 84 
 71 
 14 
 22 
 22 
 2 
 67 
 
 306 
 
 vnAth 
 
 Aej,& 
 
 feet, 
 
 Icet 
 
 30 
 
 3 
 
 34 
 
 4 
 
 36 
 
 4 
 
 40 
 
 4 
 
 40 
 
 4 
 
 36 
 
 4 
 
 32 
 
 4 
 
 60 
 
 8 
 
 36 
 
 4 
 
 60 
 
 8 
 
 38 
 
 5 
 
 35 
 
 4 
 
 68 
 
 16 
 
 40 
 
 4 
 
 40 
 
 4 
 
 feel 
 
 Coat 
 Dollars 
 
 Whencmnplf 
 ted, 01- to, h 
 completed. 
 
 136 
 
 298 
 
 218 
 
 197 
 
 660 
 
 616 
 
 1627 
 
 213 
 
 510 
 
 10 
 
 32 
 
 108 
 
 22 
 
 308 
 
 1185 
 
 528,000 
 
 600,000 
 
 290,000 
 
 350,000 
 
 875,000 
 
 8,250,000 
 
 1,000.000 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 2,000,000 
 
 1,200,000 
 
 1,250,000 
 
 460,000 
 
 650,667 
 
 370,0001 
 
 643,520 
 
 3,081,879 
 
 1804 
 1828 
 1828 
 1827 
 1822 
 1325 
 1826 
 1828 
 uncertai; 
 1826 
 1828 
 1822 
 1802 
 1827 
 1827 
 1829 
 
 Remarks.— Middlesex caual connects Boston harbour with Merrirnnc river. Black- 
 stone canal connects Providence, R. I. with Worcester, Mass. Hampshire and Hampden 
 canal, in Massachusetts, extends from Northampton, on the Connecticut river, in a 
 southerly direction to the boundary line of the state, where it meets Farmington canal, 
 which continues on to New Haven. Champlain and. Hudson canal connects Whitehall, 
 at the southern extremity of lalie Champlain, witli the Hudson, above Albany. Hudson 
 and Erie, or Grand ca'oal, connects Albany, on the Hudson, with BufTalo, on lake Eri(.'. 
 Hudson and Delaware c/mai extends from tlte Hudson, near Kingston, in a S. W. dircr- 
 tion to the Delaware, whence it is to be continued in aN. W. direction 17 miles, alonic 
 the banks of that stream, to the mouth of the Lackawaxen, and up tiie Lackawaxen to 
 tlie vicinity of the coal mines, in Wayne couiky, Pennsylvania. Morris canal cnm- 
 mences at the moutli of the Hudson, opposite the cJty of New York, and extends acro.-s 
 the state of New Jersey to the Delaware river, opi)osite Easton, at tlie mouth of the 
 Lehigh, and, when coinpleted, will open a passage for tlie Lehigh coal to the New York 
 market. The Dslaware and Raritan canal will connect the Raritan, near New Bruns- 
 wick, with the Delaware, near Trenton. Union canal unites the Schuylkill, at Read in L^ 
 with the Susquehannah, below Harrisburg. Delaviare and Chesapeake canal extend- 
 across the isthmus v/hich separates the Chesapeake from Delaware bay. Dismal swam r 
 canal connects Chesapeake hay with Albemarle sound. Santee canal connects Santee 
 river with Charleston harbour. Louisville and Portland canal extends around the falls 
 of the Ohio, at Louisville. Ohio and Miami canal extends from Dayton, on the Miami , 
 to Cincinnati. Ohio and Erie canal extends from the Ohio, at the mouth of the Scioto, 
 to Cleaveland, on lake Erie. 
 
 q,uestlons. 1. Wliich is the longest canal in the United States.' 2. Which, ne.vt ; 
 3. Which is the widest ? 4. Which, the deepest .' 5. Which are 60 feet wide and over ; 
 G. Which has the greatest amount of lockage r 7. V/liich was finished first .? 8. Which 
 were finished before 1830 ? 9. Which cost the most.' 10. Wluit places are connect'- . 
 hy Middlesex canal r 11. Blackstone canal ? 12. Hampshirp and Hampd '>n and Far; ; ^ 
 iiigton.' 13. r'namplain and ITndsnn r t:.f.^c. 
 
OF THE UMTED .STATES. 2];} 
 
 The great rivers of the United States, in respect to the general 
 course in which they run, may be divided into five clar"?es. 1. Those 
 which enter the Atlantic from the eastern and middle states. 
 2. Those which enter the Atlantic from the southern states, o'. 
 Those which flow into the gulf of Mexico. 4. Those whicii join 
 the Mis^issijDpi from the east; and, 5. TJiose which join the Mis- 
 sissippi from the west. 
 
 The ^rsf class includes the Penoibscot, Kennebeck, Connecticut, 
 Hudson, Delaware, and Susquehannah ; all of which run from N. 
 to S. The second class includes the Potomac, James, Roanoke, 
 Cape Fear, Pedee, Santee, Savannah, and Alatamaha ; all of whicli 
 run from N. W. to S. E. The third class includes the Appa- 
 lachicola, the Mobile, and the Mississippi, all of which run from 
 N. to S. ^hefmirth class includes the Yazoo, Ohio, Kaskaskia, 
 Illinois, and Ouisconsin, all of which run from N. E. to S. W. 
 The Jifth class includes Red river, the Arkansas,, ?>IissourL 
 Moines, and St. Peter's, all of which run from N. W. to S. E. 
 
 The following table shows liow far some of the principal rivers 
 arc navigable for sloops. 
 
 RiL-er. 
 
 Placr. , 
 
 1 River. 
 
 PJacc. 
 
 Tcnobscot to Bangor. i 
 
 James, to 
 
 Richmond. 
 
 Kennebeck, 
 
 Augusta. 1 
 
 Savannah, 
 
 Savannah. 
 
 Connecticut, 
 
 Hartford. ] 
 
 ! Alabama, 
 
 Fort Claibnmp. 
 
 Hudson, 
 
 Troy. i 
 
 1 Mississippi, 
 
 St. Anthony's i 
 
 Delaware, 
 
 Trenton. j 
 
 Ohio, 
 
 Pittsburg 
 
 Totomac, 
 
 Washington. 1 
 
 t Missouri, 
 
 Great faUs. 
 
 ■Questions. 1. In what direction do the great rivers of the eastern and middle staie.s 
 iTin .'* 2. the rivers of the Southern Atlantic states ^ 3. the rivers which empty themselves 
 into the Mississippi from the east ? 4. thoae which empty themselves into the Missiis- 
 sippi from the west r 5. those which flow into the gulf of Mexico .' 6. To what place is the 
 Connect) cut navigable for sloops .' the Delaware ? the Penobscot .-' the Mississippi ? the 
 Savannah.^ &c. 
 
 ROADS. 
 
 The following table shows the principal towns on several of tlie 
 great roads of the United States. The towns are arranged ia 
 geographical order. 
 
 From Eastport to New OrZeoms.— Eastport, Wiscasset, Bath. PociJand, PcrtsinouU'. 
 T^ewburyport, Salem, Boston, Worcester, Hartford, New Haven, New York, Trentor', 
 Philadelphia, Baltimore, Washington, Fredericksburg, Richmond, Petersburg, Ralii<.'\ 
 Fayetteville, Columbia, Augusta, Milledgeville, Fort Hawkins, Fort Stoddart, llolnie, 
 Ifew Orleans. 
 
 From Boston to Detroit.— Boston, Worcester, Northampton, Pittsfield, Albany, Utica, 
 Auburn, Canandaigua, Buffalo, Cleaveland, Frenchtown, Brownstbwn, Detroit. 
 
 Philadelphia to St. iowis.^Philadelpbia, Lancaster, Harrisburg, Pittsburg, Zanesville, 
 Chillicothe, Lexington, Henderson, Shawneetown, Kaskaskia, Cahokia, St. Louis. 
 
 Sew York to q,iuhec.—Ne\v York, Hudson, Albany, Plattsburg, Montreal, Quebec. 
 
 Boston to JMontireal.— 'Boston, Concord, Hanover, Haverhill, Montpelier, Borlingtcn, 
 Montreal. 
 
 Q,uestions. 1. Mention m order the principal towns on the main road from Eastport 
 to New Orlefflis ? 2. What towais do you pass in travelling from Boston to Detroit ? 3- 
 Jrom Philadelphia to St. Louis ? 4. from New York city to Qiiebec ? 5. from Bostop t« 
 
 Jitontreal ? 
 
 W2 
 
^46 
 
 GENERAL AND COMPAE-ATIVE VIEW 
 
 BOUNDARY LINES. 
 
 The river Mississippi is a boundary of six states and three territo- 
 ries. The Ohio is a boimdary of five states. The Delaware is 
 a boundary of four states- The Potomac and the Savannah, are 
 boundary rivers tlirough their whole comse. Tlie parallel of 36** ' 
 30' is a boundary of five states and one territory. The parallel of 
 35*^ is a boundary of six states. The parallel of 42° is the nor- 
 thern boundary of two states, and not far from the northern boun- 
 daries of three more. 
 
 Q,uestlons. 1. Whet states and territories border on the Mississippi ? 2. on the Ohio? 
 3. on the Delaware ? 4. on the Potomac? 5. on the Savannah ? 6. What states are bound - 
 edhy the parallel of 36° 30' ? 7. K the parallel of 35° ? 8. by the parallel of 42" ? 
 
 The navy of the United States on the 1st of January, 1826, con- 
 sisted of 12 ships of the line, including 5 on the stocks ; 14 frigates, 
 including 4 on the stocks ; 2 corvettes ; 7 sloops of war, including 
 3 on the stocks, and 10 smaller vessels. The navy yards of the 
 United States are at the following places ; 1. Portsmouth, N. H. : 
 2. Charlestown, Mass.; 3. Brooklyn on Long island, opposite Ncm 
 York city; 4. Philadelphia ; 5. Washington city; 6. Gosport, near 
 Norfolk, in Virginia. 
 
 ^wslions. 1. How many ships of the line in tlie 17 
 3. Where are the r>»uvv vards of the U. States : 
 
 ;. navy? 2. How many frigatfi; 
 
 EXPLNJi; OF SHIPS OF WAR. 
 
 The following table shows the exnense of building and com- 
 pletely equipping vessels of war, of different rates, together with 
 the animal expense of each when in actual service, according to 
 the estimate of tlie Secretary of the Navy of the United States. 
 
 1 
 Rate. 
 
 Expense of Building. 
 
 Annual 
 Expense. 
 
 Per Gnn. 
 
 Cost of each rate. 
 
 
 Dollars. 
 
 Dollars. 
 
 Dollars. 
 
 74 
 
 4,500 
 
 333.000 
 
 211,784 
 
 60* 
 
 4,500 
 
 270,000 
 
 140,000 
 
 50 
 
 4,500 
 
 225,000 
 
 115,214 
 
 44 
 
 4,500 
 
 198,000 
 
 110,000 
 
 36 
 
 4.500 
 
 162,000 
 
 102,000 
 
 32 
 
 ■ 4,000 
 
 128.000 
 
 82,000 
 
 20 
 
 3,500 
 
 70,000 
 
 50,202 
 
 Remarks. — All vessels of more than 50 guns are called ships of 
 the line. Vessels of from 30 to .50 guns are'usually called frigates ; 
 vessels of less than 30 guns are sloops of war, &c. 
 
 Q,uestlons. 1. Wliat is the expense of building a seventy -four gun ship ? a.Wliatdoes 
 it cost to maintain her in actual service one year ? 3. What is the cost of a fortv-four gun 
 frigate ? 4. What, the expense of maintaining her f-iie vear r n. "^Vlmtis the expense v' 
 maintaining a sloop of war oi'20 guns ? 
 
IHE UNITED STATE: 
 I ■ = 
 
 24: 
 
 RELIGIOUS DENOMINATIONS. 
 
 The following table shows the number of congregations of the 
 principal religious denominations. 
 
 Baptists 
 
 Methodists 
 
 Presbyterians 
 
 3,103 
 
 2,500 
 1,679 
 
 Friend; 
 
 Universal ists 200 
 
 Reformed Dutch 150 
 Christ-'mns 118 
 
 512 
 
 Episcopalians 500 
 
 German Luther. 500 
 
 Congieg'lists 1,200 Germ. Calvinists 400 Roman Catholics 90 
 
 Remarks. — The Baptists and Methodists are found in all parts of the United States; 
 the Congregationalists, principally in New England ; the Presbyterians, in the middle, 
 southern and western states ; tlie Friends or Q^uakers, chiefly in Pennsylvania and the 
 adjoining states ; the Episcopaiians, in New York, Connecticut, Marj'laud and Virginia: 
 the German Lutherans and German Calvinists in the middle states, particularly in' 
 Peimsylvania ; the Reformed Dutch, in the middle states, particularly in New York; and 
 the Roman Catholics in Maryland. Louisiana and the large cities. 
 
 Questions. 1 . WTiat are the principal denominations of Christians in the United States? 
 2. Where are the Congregationalists chiefly found ? 3. Friends ? 4. Episcopalians? Sec. 
 
 RELIGIOUS CHARITABLE SOCIETIES. 
 
 The following table shows the principal religious charitable 
 societies in the United States. 
 
 American Board of Foreign Missions 
 American Baptist Bo-ard of do. 
 American Education Societ}- 
 American Bible Society 
 American Colonization Society 
 American Sundav School Union 
 American Tract Society 
 Amer. Home Missionary Society 
 
 When 
 
 Seat of 
 
 Income m 
 
 founded. 
 
 operations. 
 
 1S27. 
 
 1810 
 
 Boston 
 
 $92,380 
 
 1814 
 
 Boston 
 
 19,748 
 
 1815 
 
 Boston 
 
 17,000 
 
 1816 
 
 New-York 
 
 64,764 
 
 1817 
 
 Washington 
 
 15,963 
 
 1824 
 
 Philadefphia 
 
 30,000 
 
 1825 
 
 New-York 
 
 .';0,413 
 
 1826 
 
 New-York 
 
 20.031 
 
 I §290,299 
 
 Remarks. — TheJltvericaji Board of Foreign Missions support more than 200 mission- 
 aries and assistant missionaries at Bombay and Ceylon in India, Leyroot in gyna, 
 Malta in tlie Mediterniiiean, the Sandwich islands in the Pacific ocean, Hayti in the 
 West Indies, and among the Cherokces, Choctaws.Osnges, Senecas, Tiiscaroras, and the 
 Indians of Ohio and Michigan territoiy of our bwn continent. The Board are contempla- 
 ting new missions to the N. W. coast of America, to West Africa, and to Armenia. Tlie 
 Baptist Board of Missions support missionaries in Eurmah, West Africa, and among the 
 Creeks, Cherokees, Senecas, and other Inthans of our own country. The American Edu- 
 cation Society have assisted more than GOO indigent pious young men in their education 
 for the Christian ministry-. The American Bible Society print about 80,000 Bibles and 
 Testaments annually, and the American Tract Society 3,000,000 religious tracts. The 
 Colonization Society have established a flourishing colony of more than 600 free black-s at 
 Liberia in West Afrca. The American Siznday Scho^.i Union have under their care 
 2,500 Sunday schools, and 160,000 scholars. The American Home Missionary Society 
 employ more than 170 missionaries in the destitute S( ttlemenis of our own ccuutry. 
 
 Questions. 1 . When was tlie American Boanl of Foreign YAsHions founded .^ -2. When, 
 the Baptist Board ? 3. the Amer. Educa. Soc. ? &c 4. Where is tlie seat of operations ot 
 the American Board ? Baptist Board ? &c. 5. How many missionaries have the American 
 Board, and where are they stationed ? 6. Where are the missionaries of the Baptist Board 
 employed? T.How many young men have the Amer. Educa. Soc. as.sisted ? 8. How 
 many Bibles and Testaments are printed annually by the Amer.Bib. Soc. ? 9. How many 
 tracts by the Amer. Tract Soc. ? 10. How many scliolars have the Amer. Sund. School 
 Union? II. How many free blacks at Liberia ? 12. How many missionaries do the Amer- 
 Home Miss. Soc. support? 13 How many 74 gun ships could be built with the annual in- 
 come of an the chief religious charitable societies of llie United States^ 
 
248 
 
 GEXERAL .i.\D i;OJiirARATl VE VlliWS 
 
 ARTICLES OF EXPORT. 
 
 The following are the principal articles of domestic produce ex- 
 ported from the United States in 1817, in the order oj their value. 
 Articles Exported. Value. 
 
 1. Cotton - - _ - 522,628,000 
 
 2. Wheat, flour, and biscuit - - 18,432,000 
 
 3. Tobacco - - - . 9,230,000 
 
 4. Lumber (viz. boards, staves, shingles, hoops, hewn 
 
 3,196,000 
 2,379,000 
 1,967,000 1 
 1,329,000' ' 
 1,328,000 I 
 845,000 I 
 688,000 ( 
 627,000 1 
 537,000 ! 
 432,000 
 358,000 
 357,000 
 345,000 
 343,000 
 278,000 
 
 timber, masts and spars) 
 
 5. Rice - - - - 
 
 6. Pot and pearl ashes - - 
 .7. Indian corn and meal 
 
 8. Dried and pickled fish 
 
 9. Beef, tallo^v, hides and live cattle 
 
 10. Skins and furs _ _ _ 
 
 11. Rye and meal _ _ _ 
 
 12. Pork, bacon, lard and live hogs 
 
 13. Horses and mules _ - _ 
 
 14. Soap and tallow candles 
 
 15. Gunpowder _ _ _ _ 
 
 16. Tar, pitch, rosin and turpentine 
 
 17. Whale oil, whale bone and spermaceti candles 
 
 18. Flax seed - 
 Remarks. The 'cotton was raised almost entirely in tJie states 
 
 .south of Virginia and Kentucky. The wheat was raised principally 
 in the middle aiul western states; and the tobacco in Maryland, 
 Virginia and Nort]i Carolina. The lumber was cut chiefly in the 
 forests of Maine and the low country of the Carolinas. The rice 
 grew undoubtedly in tlie swamps of the Carolinas and Georgia. 
 The pot and psarl ashes came from the new countries, where they 
 were burning woods to clear thf^ lands for cultivation. The Indian 
 corn came from every part of the Union. The dried jish are cod 
 fish, the pickled jish are herrings, shad, salmon and mackerel. 
 Almost all of them were caught by the fishermen of Massachusetts. 
 The I'te/, talhw, hides and cattle were raised principally in the 
 pastures of Tse.v England. The skins and furs were purchased 
 iVom the Indi' *^ himters. Tlie rtje, pork, horses, mules, soap and 
 iefly from New England. The tar, pitch and tur- 
 ained from the Carolina pines. The lohale oil and 
 e tlie fruits of the enterprise of the Nantucket 
 
 candles came c 
 pentine were o) 
 whale hone, v> 
 whalemen. 
 The princip; 
 
 €f.-;io;i, $u 
 
 Tobacco, 
 Flonr, &c. 
 Lumbier, '. 
 
 article? exported in 1826, were, 
 
 Beef, &c. $733,450 
 
 Soap and Candles, 722,417 
 Lrather maniif. 697,404 
 Manuf. of Wood, 631,060 
 
 035,214 Ric«, $1,917,446 
 
 ,317,'20S Porli, &C. 1,892,429 
 
 ,41LS70 Cotton ^i)odR, l,13)s,12.5 
 
 ,330,903 Indian corn, &c. 1,067,321 
 C>uestit»u. 1. AVhat is the principal article of export from the United Statas? 2. 
 \Vhai is next to cotton ? 3. Mention the seven next in their order. 4. Where is the cot- 
 ton raised ? 4. Where is tlio wheat raisefl ? (5. the tobacco ? 7. the lumber .' 8. tha 
 rice? 9. AVhere did the pot and p.arl ashci! rt>:>\'.i from? 10. Who caught the fish? 
 n. Where were 'ho ratt'e rait/ed. &r. 
 
OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 249 
 
 DESTINATION OF THi: EXPORTS. 
 
 
 The followhig table 
 of 1817 were carried. 
 
 shows tlie counlries to which 
 
 the exports 
 
 Whither exported. 
 
 Amount. 
 
 HliithKr exported. , 
 
 Amowni. 
 
 Eagknd 
 
 $27,894,013 
 
 Portnguese colonies 
 
 639,942 
 
 Scotland and Ireland 
 
 5,138,722 
 
 Russia 
 
 (v40,S93 
 
 British West Indies 
 
 3,871,567 
 
 Swedish and Danisli dominions 2,632,947 
 
 British American colonies 
 
 3,718,819 
 
 Netherlands 
 
 4,494,471 
 
 Otlier British coloniei? 
 
 2,845.121 
 
 Dutch colonies 
 
 1,290,847 
 
 France 
 
 8,819,767 
 
 Germany 
 
 3,345,631 
 
 French colonies 
 
 3,615,051 
 
 Northwest coast 
 
 1,110,839 
 
 Spain 
 
 745,062 
 
 Italy and Malta 
 
 1,433,714 
 
 South America and Cuba 
 
 7,034,039 
 
 China 
 
 548,660 
 
 Portugal 
 Brazil 
 
 3|^8& 
 
 611^95 
 
 All other countries 
 
 6,607,023 
 $87,671 ,56& 
 
 Remarks. The amount of exports to the various countries is 
 very different in different yeurs ; but the British dominions always 
 receive the largest portion of our domestic produce, particularly 
 cotton. France is usually next to England. 
 
 Q,uestion. Whattlu'ee countries received the largest amount of the exports of the Uni- 
 ted States in 1817 .' 
 
 INCREASE AND DECREASE OF EXPORTS. 
 
 The following table shows the quantity of cotton, flour, tobacco 
 and rice exported at different periods. 
 
 CottonT 
 
 1790 
 1795 
 
 1804 
 1817 
 
 Flour. 
 
 Tobacco. 
 
 Rice. 
 
 Barrels. 
 724,623 
 
 Hhds. 
 
 Tierces. 
 
 118,460 
 
 80,845 
 
 887,369 
 
 61,050 
 
 138,526 
 
 633,052 
 
 73,680 
 
 112,056 
 
 810,008 
 
 83,342 
 
 78,835 
 
 1,479,798 
 
 62,365 
 
 79,296, 
 
 857,820 
 
 64,098 
 
 111.0631 
 
 Remarks. It is worthy of remark, that the amount of cotton ex- 
 ported has increased regularly from 100,000 pounds to more than 
 204,000,000 ; so that it is now tlie principal article of export from 
 the United States. This prodigious increase was owing to the in- 
 vention, by Mr. ^Vhitney, of a machine for cleansing upland cotton 
 from its seeds. Before the invention of that machine, it was so 
 difficult to cleanse the cotton, that the cultivation of it was not 
 profitable. But now it is cultivated in all the country south of 
 Virginia, where the land will admit of it. The third, fourtli and 
 fifth columns show that the amount of flour, tobacco and rice has 
 either decreased, or remained nearly stationary. This was owing 
 to the increase in the amount of cotton ; for when the cultivation 
 of cotton became profitable, the planters neglected tobacco, rice, 
 indigo, and every other crop, and employed their slaves almost 
 exclusively in raising cotton. 
 
 Cluestions. 1. Which of the exports of the Uaiied States has increased most sinre 
 1790, cotton, flour, tobacco, or rice ? 2. "Which, next ? 3. Which hns decreased ? 4. 
 What occa.«ioned the increase in the culiivriion ofr-nUnTi ? 5. Y/hfit, orrasinned tbe ilc 
 rrease in 'h^' cnltivarion of tobarrn - 
 
IqO 
 
 GENERAL AliD CO.UPARATtVE VIKWIJ 
 
 EXPORTS AND SHIVPISQ Oy THK DIFFEHENT STATES. 
 
 i^The following table shows the amount of domestic and forei^ai 
 produce exported from the difieretst States in 1823. The f-fth 
 column shows the number of tons of shipping owned in 1816. The 
 amount has not materially varied since. - 
 
 States, 
 
 Domestic 
 produce. 
 
 Foreign 
 
 produce. 
 
 Total 
 
 Shipping. 
 
 New Hampshire 
 
 182,94.-; 
 
 54,760 
 
 237,705 
 
 30,41] 
 
 Vermont 
 
 236,140 
 
 %4.55 
 
 236,140 
 
 
 Maine 
 
 865,046 
 
 895,501 
 
 1 452,273 
 
 Massachusetts 
 
 3,944,98-) 
 
 9,738,254 
 
 13,683,239 
 
 Rhode Island 
 
 520,614 
 
 4i2,r.00 
 
 9.33,114 
 
 32,758 
 
 Connecticut 
 
 480,941 
 
 1,120 
 
 482,061 
 
 53,64- 
 
 New York 
 
 11,362,995 
 
 7,675,995 
 
 19,038,990 
 
 309,29(; 
 
 New Jersey- 
 
 26,064 
 
 
 
 26.064 
 
 33,2] 1 
 
 Pen asylvania 
 
 3439,809 
 
 6,477,aS3 
 
 9,617,192 
 
 102,474 
 
 Delaware 
 
 3.5,724 
 
 18,113 
 
 53,837 
 
 9,207 
 
 Maryland 
 
 3,173,112 
 
 1,857,116 
 
 5,030,223 
 
 156,062 
 
 Dist. of Columbia 
 
 779,502 
 
 21,793 
 
 801,2^5 
 
 18,650 
 
 Virginia 
 
 4,000,914 
 
 5,374 
 
 4,006,788 
 
 70,3<j1 
 
 North Carolina 
 
 432,417 
 
 
 482,417 
 
 36,556 
 
 t^outh Carolina 
 
 6,671,9.98 
 
 226,816 
 
 6,898,814 
 
 37,614 
 
 Georgia 
 
 4,279,885 
 
 13,781 
 
 4,293,66^3 
 
 14,741 
 
 Alabama 
 
 200,387 
 
 
 200,337 
 
 mi 
 
 Xiouisiana 
 
 6,769,410 
 
 1,009,662 
 
 7,779,072 
 
 13,299 
 
 Michigan TeiTritory \ 
 
 1,010 
 
 
 1,010 
 
 1 1,092 
 
 Florida i 
 
 1,510 
 
 
 1,510 
 
 1 
 
 ^47,155,408 
 
 27,543,622 
 
 74,699,030 
 
 1,372,218 
 
 Remarks. — Neiv Jersey has a very small amount of exports, bo- 
 cause almost all her produce is exported from New- York and Phi- 
 ladelphia. Louisiana has a large amount, because it includes thtc 
 produce of all the western states, which is floated down the Missis- 
 sippi, and exported from New Orleans. The exports of New York 
 include the produce not only of that state, but of large parts of 
 New Jersey, Nev/ England, and the southern Atlantic states. The 
 exports of Massachusetts are the produce of Massachusetts and 
 parts of New Hampshire and Vermont. The produce of North 
 Carolina is carried principally to Norfolk and Charleston. Nctv 
 England and Neiv York own about two thircfs of all the shipping of 
 the United States. The states south of the Potomac own only 
 one eighth part. 
 
 Questions. 1. Which state is Oie first in the amount Oi" exports? .2. Mention the «!Vi.!i 
 next? 3. Which state owns most shipping? 4. Which, next ? S. Which, next ? c 
 How large a portion is owned in New JEngland and New York ? 7. How L'ir<;e a poi- 
 lion is owned south of the Potomac ? 8. From what port is the produce of K(^nti!(k- 
 and Tennessee exported? 9. From what port, the prfdnre of North rar.-iTin.i .- iu 
 
Oi' THE. UMTEJJ aTATES- 
 
 !5i 
 
 iiviroaTS OF each state. 
 
 The foUov/ing table shows the value of the merchandize imported into 
 the several states in 1825, and the proportion of each state. 
 
 STATES, ice. 
 
 Maine 
 
 N. Hampshire 
 
 Massachusetts 
 
 Vermont 
 
 Rhode Island 
 
 Connecticut 
 
 New York 
 
 New Jersey , 
 
 Pennsylvania i 
 
 Value im- 
 
 Propor- 
 
 ported. 
 
 tion-. 
 
 Dollars. 
 
 percent. 
 
 1,169,940 
 
 1.2 
 
 331,244 
 
 .3 1 
 
 15,845,141 
 
 16.4 ; 
 
 109,021 
 
 .1 i 
 
 907,906 
 
 .9 
 
 707,478 
 
 .7 
 
 49,639,174 
 
 51.5 
 
 27,688 
 
 .02 
 
 15,041,797 
 
 15.6 
 
 STATES, &ZC. 
 
 Maryland 
 Columbia D. 
 j Virginia 
 { N. Carolina 
 I S. Carolina 
 I Georgia 
 : Louisiana 
 i Alabama 
 
 Value im- 
 ported. 
 
 Dollars. 
 
 4,751,815 
 277,297 
 553,562 
 311,308 
 
 1,892,297 
 343,356 
 
 4,290,034 
 113,411 
 
 96,340,075 
 
 Remarks. — AD foreign goods imported into the Uaited States, are entered at some pori 
 jn which tlie government have a custom honse, where the duties are paid. In Maine 
 and Massachusetts, and some other states which have a long sea coast, there are several 
 siich porta of entr>', while in New York, Pennsylvania, and Louisiana, there are but one 
 in each. From the above table it appears, that 51.5 percent, or more than half of all the 
 merchandize imported into the United States in 1825, was entered, and paid duties, in tlie 
 city of New York; and that of the remainder, nearly the whole was entered in Massa- 
 ciuisetts, PennsylvsMBia, Marjiand, South Carolina, and Louisiana, and chiefly, doubtless, 
 at the five great ports of these stales, viz. Boston, Philadelphia, Baltimore, Charleston, 
 and Jfew Orleans. 
 
 Questions. 1. Of tlie foreign goods imported into the United States, what portion is 
 entered and. pays duties in New York? 2. What portion in Mn-isncimsclts ? 3. Penn- 
 
 sjlvania ? 4. Marj'land i 
 
 Louisiana f 6. South Carolina : 
 NAVIGATION. 
 
 The following table shows the number of tons of shipping owned in 
 the United States at different periods, distinguishing the amount em- 
 ployed in the foreign trade, coasting trade, and fisheries. 
 
 ! 
 
 Foreign trade. 
 
 Coasting trade. ! Fishei'ies. j Total. ; 
 
 1790 
 1800 
 1810 
 
 1824 
 
 346,254 103,775 
 669,921 272,491 
 984,269 405,346 
 669,972 641,563 
 
 28,348 478,377 \ 
 30,077 972,492 | 
 35,166 1,424,783 ! 
 77,627 1 1,389,163 i 
 
 Remarks.— The shipping of the Uhitcd States increased with astonishing rapidily 
 from 1790 to 1810, when it arrived at its maximum, and amounted to 1,424,783 tons ; an 
 amount far greater tliau that owned by any other comitry ii> the world, except Greut 
 Britain. The tonnage employed in Uie coasting trade has advanced verj- steadily and 
 very rapidly, and will, doubtless, continue to advance as rapidly in future years. The 
 tonnage employed in \X\e fisheries has been much slower, and more unequal in its pro- 
 gress, there not being the same room here for enlargement. The amount of shipping in 
 the foreign trade depends ver>' much on the political state of Eumpe, and tlie commercial 
 regiiintions of foreign nations, and hence is ver>- fluctuating. 
 
 Qv^siions. 1. Which species of our tonnage increases most steadily and rapidly .' 2. 
 \Vhi(ii is most fluctuating ? 3. Why is the amount of tonnage in the foreign trade fluc- 
 tuating .' 4. How does the sliipping of the rniTbil States compare, in aipount. with that 
 "'■ other H'^'lpn^ ^ 
 
GE.NEllAL A-VD COMFAIIA'JL'IVK ViiiW.S 
 
 ARTICLES IMPORTEC. 
 
 The first column in the following table shows the principal arti- 
 cles of foreign produce imported into the United States in 1826, ar- 
 ranged in the order of their value, wliich is given in the second column. 
 The third column shows the value of what was re-shipped and ex- 
 ported to other countries, and the fourth shows the balance left, or 
 the amount consumed in this country. 
 
 ARTICLES. 
 
 Vvliole import.' R,e-exi>ovted. jVeJue consumed. 
 
 1. Cotton goods 
 
 ;g8,348,034 
 
 -^•2,226,090 
 
 ^6, 121,944 
 
 2. Silks 
 
 8,104,837 
 
 3,234,720 
 
 4,870,117 
 
 3. Woollens 
 
 7,886,820 
 
 441,382 
 
 7,445,444 
 
 4. Specie and bullion 
 
 6,880,996 
 
 4,098,678 
 
 2,782,288 
 
 5. Iron and iron-ware 
 
 5,451,243 
 
 435,976 
 
 5,015.267 
 
 6. Sugar 
 
 5,311,631 
 
 1,742,034 
 
 3,569;597 
 
 7. Coffee 
 
 4,159,558 
 
 1,449,022 
 
 2,710,536 
 
 8. Teas 
 
 3,752,281 
 
 1,308,694 
 
 2,443,587 
 
 9. Linens 
 
 2,937,026 
 
 1,453,72] 
 
 1,533,305 
 
 10. Molasses 
 
 2,838,728 
 
 10,419 
 
 2,822,309 
 
 11. Hides and skins 
 
 2,825,526 
 
 364,672 
 
 2,460,854 
 
 12. Hempen cloths 
 
 1,787,755 
 
 472,344 
 
 1,315,421 
 
 13. Wines 
 
 1,781,188 
 
 36(3,485 
 
 ^ 1,414,703 
 
 14. I*orcelaiii, &c.* 
 
 1,634,.581 
 
 {,59,881 
 
 ] ,474,700 
 
 .15. Spirits 
 
 1,587,712 
 
 296,523 
 
 1.291,189 
 
 16. Copper 
 
 1,087,930 
 
 133,040 
 
 954,890 
 
 Remarks. — More than three fourths of tlie cotton goods, nine 
 tenths of the ivoollens, two fifths of the iron and iron-ivare, two 
 thirds of the linens, one fourth of the ker.ipen goods, and nearly all 
 the porcelain, japanned, plated and gilt icares, came from Great 
 Britain. The specie and hullion were principally from Mexico. 
 The sugar, coffee, molasses ?ini\ spirits were from the West Indies, 
 and chiefly from Cuba and Ha;^^^' particularly Cuba. The teo.'i 
 were wholly from China. The silks were mostly from France and 
 other countries in the south of Europe. Russia sent the greatest 
 part of the hempen cloths and some of the iron. The wines came 
 partly from Madeira and the Canaries, and partly from the south of 
 Europe. 
 
 (luestions. 1. What are the ten priiicipa] articles imported into the U. States from ibr- 
 eigu countries ? 2. Wliicii oiUif\se btood first iu order ill 1826 ? S. Which next ? 4. Whicli 
 jiext ? 5. How many million dollars worth of cotton broods were imported in 1826 ? 6. 
 How much of this was re-exported ? 7J-Iow nuich then remained Ibrhcmie consumption? 
 S. How many million dollars worth of silk goods were imported ? 9. How much was re- 
 exported? 10. How much was consumed in the country ? 11. Wliich was the principal 
 article of foreign produce re-exported in 1826 ? 12.Which next ? 13. What was the value 
 of the foreign sugar consumed in the United States in 1826 ? 14. What was the j>rincip-ril 
 foreign article consumed in 182S ? lo. Of which article did we consume the most in 1826, 
 foreign sugar or teas ? 16. Of which the most, teas or wine ? 17. From what country do we 
 get the greater part of our imported v/oollens? 18. From what countries, our cofiee? l'». 
 ica ? 20. sugar ? 21. hempen cloths ? 22. cotton goods ? 23. porcelain ? 21. specie and 
 ^ullIo^ ' 
 
 '■ Vi/,, Japanned, plated. n„J gili \v:tr'.'«. 
 
 
OF THE UNITED aTAT£;5, 
 
 2.^3 
 
 IMPORTS AND EXPORTS. 
 
 The following table presents a view of the commerce of the Uni- 
 ted States for the year ending Sep. 30, 1826, exhibiting the value of 
 import3 from, and the value of exports to, each foreign country. 
 
 COUNTRIES. 
 
 Imports from 
 
 Exports to 
 
 1. England 
 
 1(34,271,510 
 
 S34,127,576 
 
 2. France 
 
 10,964,182 
 
 10,878,402 
 
 3. Cuba 
 
 7,556,412 
 
 5,120,702 
 
 4. China 
 
 7,533,115 
 
 5,570,515 
 
 5. Mexico 
 
 4,044,647 
 
 6,470,144 
 
 6. Germziny, &c. 
 
 2,739,526 
 
 3,121,033 
 
 7. British West Indies 
 
 2,437,122 
 
 1,647,046 
 
 8. Brazil 
 
 2,156,707 
 
 2,393,754 
 
 9. Russia 
 
 2,067,110 
 
 287,401 
 
 10. Hayti 
 
 11. Colombia 
 
 2,065,329 
 
 i2,054,614 
 
 1,837,050 
 
 2,239,255 
 
 12, Scotland 
 
 1,829,464 
 
 1,707,183 
 
 13. British East indies 
 
 1,756,484 
 
 991,079 
 
 14. Danish West Indies 
 
 1,492,765 
 
 1,849,425 
 
 15. Italy and Malta 
 
 1,454,022 
 
 645,039 
 
 16. Sweden and Norway 
 
 1,335,896 
 
 334,542 
 
 17. Netherlands 
 
 1,253,369 
 
 3,793,307 i 
 
 Remarks. — The principal articles which we import from Englandr 
 as will be seen by the table on the opposite page, are woollen goods, 
 cotton goods, iron and iron ware, and porcelain. The great article 
 which we export lo Er.gland is cotton. We send also considerable 
 quantities of tobacco, rice, skins and furs, and small quantities of 
 many other articles. From France we obtain silks, merino cloths 
 and other manufactured goods, also wines and brandy, and seruJ in 
 return cotton, pot and pearl ashes, rice and tropical produce. To 
 Cuba we send flour, fish and other provisions, and receive sugar, 
 coffee, and other articles of tropical produce. From China we 
 iuiport teas, silks and nankeen cloths, and give in return specie, 
 together with sandal wood from the Sandwich islands and furs 
 from the N. W. coast. From Mexico we receive specie and bullion, 
 and send in return manufactured goods. From Germany we ob- 
 tain wool, looking-glass plates andother manufactured goods, and 
 pay for them chiefly with tropical produce. To the fVest India 
 Islands and to Brazil and CoIomJna we send provisions and lum- 
 ber, and receive in return sugar, coflee, molasses, or other articles 
 of tropical produce. The merchants of Russia send us iron and 
 hemp, and those of Sweden and Norivay send us iron, but they re- 
 ceive very little of our produce. 
 
 Questions. 1. From what country do w rc^sice tke largc>:t ^imount offoreipi prdduce ? 2. 
 From what country, next to England "? 3. Whiit two countries, next to i ranee 1 4. W7iat do we 
 ?>/«;£>/•« frojn England'.' 5. What, from France? 6. from Cubal 7. from China? &c. 
 
 8. To what country do wr send tite lar^rest amomit of produce ? 9. To what country, next to 
 England? 10. To 'vhat three countries, next to France ? 11. What articles of merchandise do 
 wese,vf to ^ „,<tiiU? 12. to France? 13. to China? &c. &c. 
 
 14. Hov/ mucii fe'reater are the imports from England than those from France? 15. Which 
 ii! greatest, Aeanioimt of imports from England, or the amount fioia Fri'-nce, Cuba, Chhia. 
 Mexico, and Germany, taken collectively ? 
 
254 
 
 GENERAL AND COMPARATIVE VIEWS 
 
 REVENUE. 
 The following table shows the total revenue of the United States for 
 26 years, from 1789 to 1815. 
 
 RECEIPTS. 
 
 Total amount. 
 
 vmiual average. 
 
 Proportion. 
 
 From the customs 
 
 1222,530,374 
 
 8,558,860 
 
 90.05 percent. 
 
 " internal revenue 
 
 9,016,342 
 
 346,782 
 
 3.65 
 
 '' direct taxes 
 
 4,476,826 
 
 172,185 
 
 1.81 
 
 " postage 
 
 747,388 
 
 28,745 
 
 .30 
 
 " sales of public lands 
 
 8,658,369 
 
 333,014 
 
 3.50 " 
 
 *' miscellan s sources 
 
 1,590,001 
 
 61,154 
 
 .64 
 
 Total 
 
 247,010,;i02 
 
 9,500,742 
 
 
 Remarks. — From this table it appears, that more than 90 per cent., or 
 nine tenths^of the revenue of the U. States is derived from the customs, 
 that is, from the duties paid by our merchants on foreign goods import- 
 ed. Every pound of coffee imported into the United States yields five 
 cents to the treasury ; every pound of brown sugar, three cents ; every 
 pound of loaf sugar,12 cents ; every gallon of Madeira wine, |1, &c.* 
 
 The internal revenue., and the direct taxes on houses and lands, have 
 yielded very little, because t) e\ have been resorted to only in cases ot 
 emergency. In England and France, these branches are much more 
 productive than the customs. In France, one third of the revenue is 
 derived from a direct tax on houses and lands. 
 
 The annual revenue of the United States at the present time, may be 
 estimated at $25,000,000 ; or, on an average, about two dollars for each 
 man, woman and child in the country. 
 
 The amount received from loans is not included in the table. 
 
 Qitestions. I What is the principal source of the revenue of the U S. government ? 2. 
 How large a portion of the revenue has been derived from the customs ? .3 What are the 
 other sources of income ? 4 How much of the revenue is paid, on an average, by each in- 
 dividual .'' 
 
 * These duties are paid by the importing merchant, who of course charges a higher 
 price for his anicles in proportion to the duty which he pays, and thus the people who buy 
 the goods really pay the tax. 
 
 PUBLIC DEBT. 
 The following table shows the amount of the debt of the U. States 
 at different periods. 
 
 In 1791 175.463,467 In 1820 $91,680,090 
 
 1812 36,656,932 1824 90,177,962 
 
 1816 123,016,377 1827 73,000,000 
 
 Remarks. — The original debt of $75,463,467 was contracted in the 
 support of the war of Independence, which lasted from 1775 to 1783. 
 During the long peace between 1783 and 1812, the country was pros- 
 perous, and the debt was gradually reduced to less than onehalf of the 
 original amount. The war of 1812 — 13 and '14,increased it again more 
 than three-fold ; but it has since been very rapidly reduced, and can be 
 entirely paid in sr?ven or eight years, without increasing the taxes. The 
 present debt is very small, consid'>rhig our population and resources. 
 In 1791 it was twenty dollars for each man, woman and child in the 
 country ; now, it is only six dollars. 
 
 Questions. I . What v as the an)ount of the U. S. debt in 1791 ? 2 What was tjie amoimt 
 in 1812 ? 3. How much was it increased by.the war with G. Britain in 1812? 4. What was 
 <^ach citizen's share of the debt in 1791 f 5. What ia his shure of the present debt ? 
 
OF THE UMTED STATES. 
 
 255 
 
 EXPE VDITURES. 
 
 The following table shows the total expenditures of the United States 
 for twenty-six years, from 1789 to 1815. 
 
 Expenditures. 
 
 Total amount. 
 
 An'l average. 
 
 Proportion. 
 
 For the Military department, 
 
 197,628,979 
 
 13,753,351 
 
 27.68 iw-ct. 
 
 „ Naval do. 
 
 47,818,303 
 
 1,839,165 
 
 13.56 ,. 
 
 „ Indian do. 
 
 1,338,040 
 
 51,463 
 
 .38 „ 
 
 „ Foreign intercourse. 
 
 10,678,015 
 
 410,693 
 
 3.03 .. 
 
 ,, Barbary powers, 
 
 2,405,322 
 
 92,512 
 
 .68 „ 
 
 ., Civil list, 
 
 24.9:>0,673 
 
 955.795 
 
 7.05 „ 
 
 ., Public debt, 
 
 167,524,588 
 
 6,443,253 
 
 47.52 ,. 
 
 „ Miscellaneous expenses. 
 
 316,268 
 
 12,164 ; 
 
 .01 „ 
 
 Remarks. — The expenses of the military department include the sup- 
 port of the aruiy, erecting fortifications, the purchase of arms. &c. The 
 sums paid for the Indian department., are principally for lands sold by 
 the Indians to the United States government. The expenditures for 
 foreign intercourse^ include the salaries of our ministers to foreign courts, 
 of consuls, and other agents. To the Barbary powers we formerly paid 
 annuities, to prevent them from committing depredations on our com- 
 merce in the Mediterranean. The expenses of the civil list include the 
 salary or compensation of the president and his secretaries, members of 
 congress, judges of the United States' courts, and all inferior officers of 
 the government ; also, the sums paid for the public buildings at Wash- 
 ington, &c. &c. 
 
 Questions. I. How large a portion of the expenditure of the United States' govern- 
 ment has been on account of the public debt .' -2. How large a portion on account of the 
 military establishment ? 3. naval establishment ? 4. civil list ? 5. What items are 
 included under the expenses of the military establishment ? 6. of the Indian department ? 
 7. of the civil list.? 
 
 POPULATION OF CITIES IN 1820. 
 
 1 New York, 123,706 
 
 2 Philadelphia, 108,116 
 
 3 Baltimore, 62,738 
 
 4 Boston, 43,298 
 
 5 New Orleans, 27,176 
 
 6 Charleston, 24,780 
 
 7 Washington, 13,247:13 Cincinnati, 
 
 8 Salem, 
 
 9 Albany, 
 
 10 Richmond, 
 
 11 Providence, 
 
 12 Pittsburg, 
 
 12,731 14 Portland, 
 12,630115 Norfolk, 
 lv,067il6 New Haven, 
 ll,767|l7 Savannah, 
 II, 629; 18 Portsmouth, 
 
 Q,uestions. i. Which city in the United States had the greatest population 
 2. Mention the next five, in the order of their nopulatiou. 3. Whai six were 
 10 and 15,000 ? 
 
 9,642 
 8,581 
 8,478 
 8,327 
 
 7,523 
 7,327 
 
 in 18-20? 
 between 
 
 SHIPPING OP THE CITIES IN 1821. 
 
 Tons. Tons, I Tons, 
 
 231,215 5 New Orleans, 38,851 9 Norfolk, 23,809 
 
 126,323 6 Portland, 33,619 10 Portsmouth, 23,335 
 
 83,225 7 Salem, 33,046 11 Providence, 20,575 
 
 68,674 8 Charleston, 28,403|12 Savannah, 10,856 
 
 Questions. 1. What city in the United States has the most shipping ? Q. Mention 
 
 the next three, in their order. 3. What others had more than •'•o.non tons ' 
 
 1 New York, 
 
 2 Boston, 
 
 3 Philadelphia. 
 
 4 Baltimore, 
 
25a 
 
 GENERAL AND COMPARATIVE VIEWS 
 
 COLLEGES. 
 
 The following table contains the names of the principal literary 
 institutions in the United States, the place where they are located, 
 and the time when they were incorporated. 
 
 Names. 
 
 Where located. 
 
 inco. 
 
 1 Names. 
 
 Wliere located. 
 
 inco. 
 
 Harvard c. 
 
 Cambridge, Mass. 
 
 1638 
 
 Middleb'ryc. 
 
 Middleburj', Vt. 
 
 1800 
 
 Win. & Mary c. 
 
 WiUiamsburg, Va. 
 
 1691 
 
 iJefferson c. 
 
 Canonsburg, Pa. 
 
 1801 
 
 Yalec. 
 
 N«iW-Haven, Conn. 
 
 1700 
 
 iWashingt. c. 
 
 Lexington, Va. 
 
 1801 
 
 New-Jersey c. 
 
 Princeton, N. Jersey. 
 
 1738 
 
 '■'S Cfiro. c. 
 
 Columbia, S. C. 
 
 1801 
 
 Columbia c. 
 
 New- York city. 
 
 1754 
 
 iOhio U. 
 
 Athens, Ohio. 
 
 1801 
 
 Pennsylvania U. 
 
 Philadelphia. 
 
 1755 
 
 IJefferson c. 
 
 Washir.gt. Missi. 
 
 1802 
 
 Brown U. 
 
 Providence, R. Island. 
 
 1764 
 
 IWashiiigt. c. 
 
 Washington, Pa. 
 
 1602 
 
 Dartmouth c. 
 
 Hanover, N. H. 
 
 1769 
 
 jCumb«rl'd c. 
 
 Nashville, Tenn. 
 
 1806 
 
 Rutgers c. 
 
 New Brunswick, N.J. 
 
 1770 
 
 'Baltimore c. 
 
 Baltimore, Md. 
 
 1807 
 
 Hampden Sidney c. 
 
 Prince Edw'd co. Va. 
 
 1774 
 
 ;Mia)r;i U. 
 
 Oxford, Ohio. 
 
 1809 
 
 Dickinson c. 
 
 Carhsle, Penn. 
 
 1783 
 
 iRamilton c. 
 
 CUmon, N. ¥. 
 
 1812 
 
 Georgetown c. 
 
 Georgetown, D. C. 
 
 1784 
 
 jMarj'land U. 
 
 Baltimore. 
 
 1812 
 
 Charleston c. 
 
 Charleston, S. C. 
 
 1783 
 
 JAlIeghany c. 
 
 Meadville,Pa. 
 
 181T 
 
 Franklm c. 
 
 Athens, Geo. 
 
 1785 
 
 jVirginia U. 
 
 Charlottesville, Va. 
 
 1817 
 
 N.. CaroUna U. 
 
 Chapel Hill, N. C. 
 
 1789 
 
 jWatervJlle c. 
 
 WaterviUe, Me. 
 
 1818 
 
 Vermont IT. 
 
 Burlington, Vt. 
 
 1791 
 
 ; Cincinnati c. 
 
 Cincinnati, Ohio. 
 
 1819 
 
 Williams c. 
 
 Williamstovvn, Ms. 
 
 1793 
 
 1 Columbian c. 
 
 Washington, D C. 
 
 1S21 
 
 Union c 
 
 Schenectady, N. Y. 
 
 1794 
 
 iKnoxville c. 
 
 Knoxville, Tenn. 
 
 18-21 
 
 Greenville c. 
 
 Greenville, Tena. 
 
 1794 
 
 i Centre c. 
 
 Danville, Ken. 
 
 182i 
 
 Bowdoin c. 
 
 Brunswick, Me. 
 
 1795 
 
 Amherst c. 
 
 Amherst. Mass. 
 
 1824 
 
 Transylvania U. 
 
 Lexington, Kentucky. 
 
 1798 
 
 IWashingt. c. 
 
 Hartford, Conn. 
 
 1824 
 
 JVofe. — U. stands for university and c. for college. 
 
 Remarks.— There are several other seminaries of learning in dif- 
 ferent parts of the United States which are called colleges, but they 
 have not yet acquired sufficient reputation to entitle them to a rank 
 with the first class of literary institutions. Indeed, several of those 
 in the table are of very little importance. Harvard college, or as 
 it is now called, the University at Cambridge, is the best endowed 
 literary institution in America. Yale College has the largest num- 
 ber of students. 
 
 Q,uestions. When was Harvard college incorporated .' 2. How many of the colleges of 
 the United States are a century old ? 3. How many are fifty years old ? 4. How many are 
 less than 30 years old .' 5. Where is Yale college f 6. Brown university ? 7. Franklin 
 college ? 8. North Carolina university ? 9. Transylvania university ? 10. the Columbian 
 college ? 11. Cumberland college .' 
 
 THEOLOGICAL SEMINARIES. 
 
 The Congregationalists have theological seminaries at Ban- 
 
 for, Me., Andover and Cambridge, Mass., dLud New- Haven, Ct. ; the 
 reshyterians, <it Aiiburn, N.Y., Princeton, N. J., Alleghany-fown, 
 Penn., Prince Edward co. Va., and Maryville, Tenn. ; the Baptists, 
 at WaterviUe, Me., Newton, Mass., Hamilton, N. Y., and Washing- 
 ton, D.C; the German Lutherans at HartwicJc, N. Y. and Get- 
 tysburg, Penn. ; the Episcopalians, in New York city, Aletandfixi, 
 D. C, and Worthington, Ohio; the Reformed Dutch, at New 
 Brunswick, N. J. ; and the German Calvinists, at Carlisle, l*a. 
 
 Q,%iestions. 1. At what places have the Congregationalists theological seminaries ? ■;!. 
 the Presbyterians ? I ^. the Baptists ? kc. 
 
OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 257 
 
 RE1»11S:SENTATIVES IN CONGRESS. 
 
 The following table shows the number of representatives in Congress 
 to which eaeh state is entitled. 
 
 New York 34 , Kentucky 
 Pennsylvania 26 j S. Carolina 
 Virginia 22 ! Tennessee 
 
 Ohio 141 Maryland 
 
 N. Carolina 13 ; iSiame 
 Massachusetts 13 1 Georgia 
 
 Connecticut 
 New Jersey 
 New Hamp. 
 Vermont 
 Indiana 
 Louisiana 
 
 6 I Alabama 
 R. Island 
 Delaware 
 Mississippi 
 M ssouri 
 Illinois 
 
 Remarks.— The Congress of the U. States consists of i Senate and 
 House of Representatives. The Senate is composed o two me!j:bers 
 from each state, chosen by its legislature for six years. he Represen- 
 tatives are chosen by the people bieiuially, each state be .g entitled to 
 a number proportionate to its free population; and besi es this, in the 
 slave-holding states every fiv'e slaves are allowed to cou t the same as 
 three freemen. Thus Massachusetts, where there are n slaves, sends 
 one representative for every 40,000 inhabitants ; while Virginia, where 
 there are slaves, sends one for every 40.000 free inhabitants, and one 
 for every 66,666 slaves. 
 
 The number of inhabitants which shall entitle a state to send one rep- 
 resentative, is fixed by Congress every tenth year, immediately after 
 taking the census. 
 
 ^ut.iiiuns 1 Which state has the greatest number of represeiitutives in Oongxesp? 2. 
 Which iieit ? 3. Which uf xt ? 4 Whfit other states have more than twelve? 5. W litft states 
 have less than three : 6. Ro\v many free inaabilants entitle a state to one representative 
 imder the present law of Congress ? 7 How many stetjes entitle, &c. ? 
 
 ORDER OF ADMISSION INTO THE UNION. 
 
 The following tai>ie shows w.Sen each of the new states Vi/as admitted 
 into the union. The thirteen first named are the original states, which 
 formed the confederacy in 1709. 
 
 IN.H. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 7 Penn. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 13 Geo. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 19 Tnd. 
 
 1816 
 
 2 Mass. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 8 Del. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 14 Verm. 
 
 1791 
 
 20 Missi. 
 
 1817 
 
 3R.I. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 9M. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 15 Kent. 
 
 1792 
 
 21 lliin. 
 
 1818 
 
 4 Conn. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 10 Virg. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 16 Tenn. 
 
 1796 
 
 22 Alab. 
 
 1819 
 
 5N.Y. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 1 1 N. Car 
 
 Orig. 
 
 17 Ohio 
 
 1802 
 
 23 Maine 
 
 1820 
 
 6 N.J. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 12 S. Car. 
 
 Orig. 
 
 18 Lou. 
 
 1811 
 
 24 Misso. 
 
 1820 
 
 Remarks. — Kentucky, before its admission into the Union, was a part 
 of Virginia; Tennessee, a part of N.Carolina ; Maine, a part of Massa- 
 chusetts ; Mississippi and Alabama, a part of Georgia ; Ohio, Indiana, 
 and Illinois, a part of what was called " the territory of the U. States 
 N. W. of the Ohio ;" and Louisiana and Missouri, a part of the im- 
 mense territory, called ••' Louisiana," which was purchased of France 
 in 1803, and embraced all the country now belonging to the U. States 
 west of the Mississippi. 
 
 Q,uestions. 1 . M c-ntion in order the 1 3 original states, beginning in the north 2. How 
 many new states have been admitted since tiie adoption of the constitution ? 3 How many 
 of these are in New England, and which are they ? 4 How many in the middle states ? 5. 
 How many in th^ western states .' 6. Name the new states in the order in which they were 
 admiiied. 7 When was Vermont admitted into the union ? Kentucky .' &c. 8. To what 
 Ktafe did Kentuckv fbrmerlv belong ? 9. To what state, Tennessee .' &c. 
 
2.d8 
 
 GENERAL ANi]) COMPARATIVE VIEWS 
 
 OCCUPATIONS. 
 
 The followiRg table shows the number of persons engaged in 
 agriculture, commerce and manufactures respectively, in each of 
 the United States •, together with the proportion which each class 
 forms of the whole population of each state. 
 
 
 AGRICULTURE. 
 
 COMMERCE.. 
 
 MAKUFACTURES. 
 
 STATES. 
 
 Number. 
 
 per cent. 
 
 Number. 
 
 per centi 
 
 Number. 
 
 per cent. 
 
 Maine 
 
 55,031 
 
 18.5 
 
 4,297 
 
 1.5 
 
 7,643 
 
 2.5 
 
 N. Hamp. 
 
 52,384 
 
 21.4 
 
 1,068 
 
 .4 
 
 8,699 
 
 3.5 
 
 Massachu. 
 
 63,460 
 
 12.1 
 
 13,301 
 
 2.5 
 
 33,464 
 
 6.4 
 
 R. Island 
 
 12,559 
 
 15.1 
 
 1,162 
 
 1.4 
 
 6,091 
 
 7.3 
 
 Connecticut 
 
 50 ,.51 8 
 
 18.4 
 
 3,581 
 
 1.3 
 
 17,541 
 
 6.4 
 
 Vermont 
 
 50,951 
 
 21.6 
 
 776 
 
 .3 
 
 8,484 
 
 3.6 
 
 New York 
 
 247,648 
 
 18.0 
 
 9,113 
 
 .66 
 
 60.038 
 
 4.3 
 
 New Jersey 
 
 40,812 
 
 14.4 
 
 1,830 
 
 .66 
 
 15,941 
 
 5.7 
 
 Pennsylva. 
 
 140.801 
 
 13.4 
 
 7,083 
 
 .67 
 
 60,215 
 
 5.7 
 
 Delaware 
 
 13,259 
 
 18.2 
 
 :\S-4 
 
 .73 
 
 2.821 
 
 4.0 
 
 Maryland 
 
 79,135 
 
 19.4 
 
 4,771 
 
 1.2 
 
 13:640 
 
 4.5 
 
 Virginia 
 
 276,422 
 
 25.9 
 
 4,.509 
 
 .4 
 
 32.336 
 
 3.0 
 
 N. Carolina 
 
 174,196 
 
 27.3 
 
 2,551 
 
 .4 
 
 11,84! 
 
 1.8 
 
 S. Carolina 
 
 161, "►60 
 
 32.9 ■ 
 
 2,. 588 
 
 .5 
 
 6,488 
 
 IM 
 
 Georgia 
 
 101,185 
 
 29.6 
 
 2,139 
 
 .6 
 
 3,;;.o7 
 
 1.0 
 
 Alabama 
 
 30,642 
 
 24.0 
 
 4.52 
 
 .3 
 
 1,412 
 
 f.l 
 
 Mississippi 
 
 22,033 
 
 29.2 
 
 294 
 
 .4 
 
 6r}U 
 
 •^ 
 
 Louisiana 
 
 .53,9U 
 
 35 1 
 
 6,251 
 
 4.1 
 
 6,0- n 
 
 4.0 
 
 Tennessee 
 
 101,919 
 
 24.1 
 
 882 
 
 2 
 
 7,8i^'0 
 
 1.8 
 
 Kentucky 
 
 132,161 
 
 23.4 
 
 1,617 
 
 ^3 
 
 11,779 
 
 2.0 
 
 Ohio 
 
 110,991 
 
 19.0 
 
 1,459 
 
 2 
 
 18,956 
 
 3.3 
 
 Indiana 
 
 31,074 
 
 21.1 
 
 429 
 
 .3 
 
 3,229 
 
 2.2 
 
 Illinois '• 
 
 12,-395 
 
 22.5 
 
 233 
 
 .4 
 
 i,007 
 
 .1.8 
 
 Missouri 
 
 14,247 
 
 21.4 
 
 495 
 
 .8 
 
 1,952 
 
 3.0 
 
 Michigan 
 
 1,468 
 
 16.6 
 
 392 
 
 4:.4. 
 
 196 
 
 2.0 
 
 Arkansas 
 
 3,613 
 
 25.4 
 
 79 
 
 .5 
 
 179 
 
 1.2 
 
 Colum. Dis. 
 
 853 
 2,065,499 
 
 2.6 
 
 512 
 
 1.6 
 
 2,184 
 
 6.6 
 
 U. States 
 
 21.4 
 
 72,397 
 
 .75 
 
 349,247 
 
 3.5 
 
 Remarks. — From this table it appears that in the United States 
 there are 2,065,499 persons, equal to one fifth of the whole popu- 
 lation, or nearly two thirds of all the males over ten years of age, 
 are engaged in agriculture. 
 
 The slave-holding states are most agricultural, tiie proportion in 
 those states being usually from one quarter to one third part of the 
 whole population, while in the other states it generally falls below 
 20 per cent, or one fifth part. 
 
 Massachusetts has a much larger number engaged in com- 
 merce than any other state, but Michigan Territory has the largest 
 
or THE UNITED STATES. 2o^ 
 
 proportion. This uncommon proportion in Michigan is owing to 
 fhe number of persons in that territory engaged in tlie fur trade. 
 Louisiana has also an uncommon proportion ; which is to be as- 
 cribed to the great number of merchants in New Orleans, where 
 the business of a large portion of the western country is transact- 
 ed. 
 
 In tlie states south of Maryland and Ohio, it vvill be perceived, 
 the proportion of manufacturers is very small, not half as great on 
 an average as in the eastern and middle states. The reason of this 
 is, that the laborers in those states are negro slaves, who are incapa- 
 ble of any employmeat which reqnires much skill or care. All the 
 great manufacturing establishments are in the northern and middle 
 states. 
 
 Rhode Island has a greater proportion of population engaged in 
 manufactures and the mechanic arts, (for mechanics are counted as 
 manufacturers,) than any other state; and next to Rhode Island 
 are the District of Columbia, Massachusetts, and Connecticut. 
 Pennsylvania and New Jersey also rank high as manufactu- 
 ring states. The District of Columbia shows a large proportion of 
 manufacturers, because it is composed almost wholly of cities. For 
 the same reason it has scarcely any persons engaged in agricul- 
 ture. 
 
 The number of merchants in the United States is very small — 
 only 72,397 — less than one per cetit. of the whole population. 
 
 The merchants, mechanics and manufacturers, taken togethei 
 are only 421,644, while those engaged in agricultural labour are 
 2,065.499 — nearly five times as many ! — This result is very differ 
 ent from that of the census of England. In 1811 there were in 
 that kingdom 1,789.531 persons employed in trade, manufactures 
 and the mech'-^nic arts, and only 1,524,227 in agriculture. — There 
 are more farmers in the United States than in England; but there 
 are four times as many manufacturers in England as in the United 
 States. Hence we see Avhy it is that the great articles of expoH 
 from the United States are agricultnra! produce, such as cotton, 
 flour, tobacco, rice, &c. while the principal exports from England 
 are maimfactured articles, such as v/oollen and cotton goods. Hard- 
 ware and earthenware. 
 
 ^tiestions. 1. What proportion of the population of the United States is enga^red in 
 agriculture ? 2. Which state is most agricultural, that i.s. which has the l.irgest ;7roj>or- 
 <ion of population engaged in agricultui'e ? 3. Which, next? 4. Which, nfxt? 5. 
 Which state or district is least agricultural .' 6. V/hich, next ? 7. Which state has the 
 laxgestnumber of merchants.' 8 Which has the largest pr(fporfro7i i^ 9 WlilchjUext? 
 10. Which state has the largest number of mani(facfurers J" 11 Which has the largest 
 proportion.'' 12. Which, next ? 13. Wtiich, next ? 14. "V^Tiich are most numerous in 
 the United States, merchants, mechanics, and manufacturers, taken collectively, or 
 farmers .'' 15. How much more numerous are the farmers ? 16. Which of these classes 
 are most numerous in England .' 17. Which are most numerous, the manufacturers ot 
 England or those of the United States ? 18. How much more numerous are the manu- 
 facturers of England ? 19. Are there more agiicultural lalrorers in this counti-y than in 
 England ? 20. From which country- is agricultural produce exported in greatest quanti- 
 ' ■<. England or the United Stnte's = 21. From vhi^h eoimiry. mannff'.ctured nrtirieis r 
 
260 
 
 GEJSERAL AND COMPARATIVE VIEWS 
 
 INCREASE OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 The following table siiows the number of tons of shipping em- 
 ployed in the coasting trade, the value of domestic produce export- 
 ed, the revenue of the government, the population of the linited 
 States, and the extent of post roads, every fifth year, from 1790 
 to the present time. 
 
 \ 
 
 Coasting Trade 
 
 T/.n^ of Ship'g. 
 
 17901 10.i,77.5 
 
 17951 184,396 
 
 1800 272,491 
 
 1805 332,662 
 
 1810 405,346 
 
 1815, 475,664 
 
 1820 590,000 
 
 18251 650,000 
 
 Domes. Exports 
 Value. 
 
 ^14,000,000 
 18,, 100,000 
 31,000,000 
 42,000,000 
 42,000,000 
 46,000,000 
 .52.000,000 
 67,000,00<> 
 
 Revenue. 
 
 t 2,410,320 
 6,.00 0w0 
 1 ,000, .00 
 13.';j0,000 
 9, =00,000 
 Ki.OOO.OOO 
 l.s,0MAiJOO 
 25,000,000 
 
 Popalation. 
 
 3,929, :i2fi 
 4,..00 
 5,3Uo,0i;6 
 6.180,000 
 7,239,903 
 8,400,000 
 9,6^5,73? 
 11,000,000 
 
 FostRoads. 
 M;ies 
 
 1,875 
 13,207 
 20,817 
 31,076 
 36,406 
 43,966 
 73,492 
 90,000 
 
 Remarks. — No nation, either in ancient or modern times, has 
 increased so steadily and so rapidly, in every thing which mdicates 
 national wealth and prosperity, as the people of the United States. 
 From the table, it appears, that during tliirty five years which have 
 elapsed since the formation of our present government, the pojni- 
 lation has increased about three-fold ; the value of domestic proaicce 
 erported, Jive-fold ; the shipping employed in the coasting trade, 
 sixfold ; the revenue of the government, ten-fold ; and the extent 
 of post roads, fifty fold- 
 
 Q,uestions. 1, rfow inany tons of shipping in llie coasting trade of the United Stat-s 
 in 1790 ? 2. How many in 1825 ? 3. "What was the vahie of tfic art eles of doini stie pro- 
 duce exported fron"! the United States in 1700 ? 4. Whai was the value in l^ \'o i o. Wh ;' 
 was the revenue of the U. States in 1790 ? 6. What, in 1SJ3 ■ 7. Wiiat was the iHipui <- 
 tion of the U. States in 1790 ? 8. Wliat, in 1825 ? 9. How much lias the revenue of the 
 United States increased since the establishment ftf the present government: iO. H-n/ 
 much, the population ? 11. the coasting trade ? 12. the post roads .= 
 
 II. OF AMERICA. 
 
 EXTENT AND POPULATION. 
 
 The following table shows the extent and population of the pi 
 cipal countries in America. 
 
 Countries. 
 
 Sq. Miles. 
 
 Population. 
 
 Pop. on 
 sq. m. 
 
 Chii'f Towns. 
 
 
 Canada, 
 
 600,000 
 
 600,000 
 
 1 
 
 Quebec. 
 
 
 Nova Scotia, 
 
 15,000 
 
 100,000 
 
 7 
 
 Halifax. 
 
 
 New Brunswick, 
 
 25,000 
 
 80,000 
 
 3 
 
 Frederickton. 
 
 
 Newfoundland, 
 
 35,000 
 
 70,900 
 
 2 
 
 St. John's. 
 
 
 United States, 
 
 2,000.000 
 
 1 1 ,000,000 
 
 6 
 
 Washington. 
 
 
 Mexico, 
 
 1,500,000 
 
 7,000,000 
 
 5 
 
 Mexico. 
 
 
 Guatimala, 
 
 300,000 
 
 1,800,090 ■ 
 
 6 
 
 Guatimala. 
 
 
 AVest Indies, 
 
 95,000 
 
 2, 126,000 
 
 22 
 
 Havana. 
 
 
 Colombia, 
 
 1 ,500,000 
 
 2,500,000 
 
 2 
 
 Caraccas. 
 
 
 Peru, 
 
 1,600,000 
 
 1,080,000 
 
 2 
 
 Lima. 
 
 
 Brazil, 
 
 2,2.50,000 
 
 2,000,000 
 
 1 
 
 Rio Janeiro. 
 
 
 Buenos Ayres, 
 
 1,200,000 
 
 1,200,000 
 
 I 
 
 Buenos Ayres. 
 
 
 Bolivia, 
 
 200,000 
 
 500,000 
 
 3 
 
 potosi. 
 
 
 Chili, 
 
 180,000 
 
 1.200.000 
 
 7 
 
 St. Jago. 
 
 ^ 
 
OF AMERICA. 
 
 '261 
 
 Remarks. — The extent and' population of most of the countries 
 in America has never been ascertained with much accuracy, and 
 for this reason we have made the statements in round numbers. 
 About one half of the territory of the United States, two thirds of 
 Mexico, and perhaps the same proportion of Colombia, Brazil 
 and Buenos Ayres, are in the possession of independent tribes of 
 Indians, whose numbers are wiiolly unknown. The total popula- 
 tion of America, including the independent Indians, is now com- 
 monly estimated at 3.",000,000. 
 
 Questions. 1 . Which country in America contains the greatest population ? 2. Whicli 
 next ? 3, tf^hat is the population of Peru ? 4. Newfoundland ? 5. Brazil ? 6. Which country 
 contains the greatest number of square miles ? 7. Whicii next ? 8. Whi«di next ? 9. How 
 many square miles in the United States ? 10. What is the chief toivn in Canada Ml. in 
 Kova Scotia ? 12. in the West Indies? 13. in Colombia ? 
 
 POPULATION OF CITIES. 
 
 New York, 
 
 - 168,932 
 
 Guanaxuato, 
 
 60,000 
 
 St. Fe de Bogota, 30,000 
 
 Mexico, 
 
 - 137,000 
 
 Buenos Ayres, - 
 
 60,000 
 
 New- Orleans, 
 
 27,126 
 
 Philadelphia, 
 
 - 108,116 
 
 Boston, - 
 
 53,281 
 
 Kingston, Jam. 
 
 26,000 
 
 Rio Janeiro, 
 
 - 100,000 
 
 Lima, 
 
 52,000 
 
 Montreal, - 
 
 35,000 
 
 Potosi, 
 
 - 100,000 
 
 St. Jago de Chili, 
 
 46,000 
 
 Charlciiton, 
 
 24,780 
 
 Puebla, 
 
 80,000 
 
 St. Jago de Cuba, 
 
 40,000 
 
 Ctimana, - 
 
 24,000 
 
 Havana, - 
 
 70,000 
 
 Q,ueretaro, 
 
 35,000 
 
 Oaxaca, 
 
 24,000 
 
 St. Salvador, 
 
 70,000 
 
 Zacatecas, 
 
 33,000 
 
 Guatemala, 
 
 20,000 
 
 Quito, 
 
 . 65,000 
 
 Cusco, 
 
 32,000 
 
 Quebec, - 
 
 15,257 
 
 Baltimore, 
 
 . 62,738 
 
 Caraccas, 
 
 30,000 
 
 Halifax, - 
 
 15,000 
 
 Questions. 
 
 1. Which is 
 
 the largest city in 
 
 America . 
 
 2. How many have 100,000 
 
 inhabitants ? 
 
 3. What is the 
 
 population of New York ? 
 
 4. Of Mexico ? 5 
 
 Of Phila- 
 
 delphia ? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 SETTLEMENT OF AMERICA. 
 
 The following table shows the order of time in which the princi- 
 pal countries of America were settled by the European nations. 
 
 Countries. 
 
 IVTien 
 settled. 
 
 By whom. 
 
 Countries. 
 
 When 
 settled. 
 
 By whmn. 
 
 Mexico, 
 
 1521 
 
 Spaniards. 
 
 New York, 
 
 1614 
 
 Dutch. 
 
 Peru, 
 
 1532 
 
 Spaniards. 
 
 New England, 
 
 1620 
 
 Eng, Puritans. 
 
 Buenos Ayres, 
 
 1535 
 
 Spaniards. 
 
 Marj'land, 
 
 1634 
 
 Irish Catholics. 
 
 Chili, 
 
 1540 
 
 Spaniards. 
 
 Guiana, 
 
 1634 
 
 English. 
 
 /Brazil, 
 
 1547 
 
 Portuguese. 
 
 Carolina, 
 
 1663 
 
 English. 
 
 Virginia, 
 
 1607 
 
 English. ! 
 
 Pennsylvania, 
 
 1682 
 
 Eng. Quakers. 
 
 Canada, 
 
 1608 
 
 French, 1 
 
 Louisiana, 
 
 1699 
 
 French. 
 
 Remarks. — The Spaniards began to settle on the continent of 
 America in less than thirty years after its discovery ; but more than 
 a century had elapsed before the English had made a single per- 
 manent settlement. 
 
 It may be observed that the language, religion, customs and 
 character of the little bands who made the first settlements in these 
 countries, are, with few exceptions, the language, religion and 
 character of the great nations to which they have given birth. 
 Hence we see how important it is, that the first settlements in all 
 parts of the world not yet occupied by civilized nations should be 
 made by men of correct religious and political principles. 
 , Questions. 1. What European nation made the first permanent settlement on the 
 American continent ? 2. Where did the Spaniards first settle ? 3. Where did the English 
 first settle.' 4. What European nation first settled Canada? 5. New Englanrl ? 6. Bra, 
 y.il' 7. Louisiana.' 8. Marvland ? 0. Nev.' York - 
 
262 
 
 GENERAL AND COMPARATIVE VIEWS 
 
 III. OF KITROPE. 
 
 EXTENT AND POPULATION. 
 
 The following table shows the extent, population, density of po- 
 pulation, and chief towns of the principal countries in Europe. 
 
 Countries. 
 
 Sqtiare 
 Miles. 
 
 Population. 
 
 Pop. 
 
 2^. 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 Norway 
 
 160,000 
 
 l,00tJ,152 
 
 Bergen 
 
 Sweden 
 
 183,433 
 
 2,407,000 
 
 13 
 
 Stockholm 
 
 Russia 
 
 1,891,000 
 
 41,77«,000 
 
 22 
 
 St. Petersburg 
 
 Deinnark 
 
 21,615 
 
 1,:>65,000 
 
 72 
 
 Copenhagen 
 
 Great Britain 
 
 83,.573 
 
 12,552,144 
 
 141 
 
 London 
 
 Ireland 
 
 32,000 
 
 6,500.000 
 
 203 
 
 Dublin 
 
 Netlierlandg 
 
 25,56=) 
 
 5,23.>,0fJO 
 
 206 
 
 Amsterdam 
 
 France 
 
 200,000 
 
 29,290.370 
 
 146 
 
 Paris 
 
 Switzerland 
 
 19,000 
 
 1,750 000 
 
 92 
 
 Geneva 
 
 Austria 
 
 267,674 
 
 27,972,0 
 
 105 
 
 Vienna 
 
 Prussia 
 
 105,770 
 
 9,1)04.5 i9 
 
 94 
 
 Berlin 
 
 Bavaria 
 
 31,966 
 
 3."=60,0;)0 
 
 111 
 
 Munich 
 
 Wirtemberg 
 
 8.118 
 
 1,395,463 
 
 172 
 
 Stuttgard 
 
 Hanover 
 
 15,004 
 
 1,305,351 
 
 87 
 
 Hanover 
 
 Saxony 
 
 7,436 
 
 1,200.000 
 
 161 
 
 Dresden 
 
 Baden 
 
 5,984 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 167 
 
 Carlsruhe 
 
 Sardinia 
 
 27,400 
 
 3,994.000 
 
 146 
 
 Turin 
 
 Two Sicilies 
 
 43,600 
 
 6,618,0:30 
 
 152 
 
 Naples 
 
 States of the Church 
 
 14,500 
 
 2,346,000 
 
 162 
 
 Rome 
 
 Tuscany 
 
 8,500 
 
 1,180,000 
 
 139| Floience 
 
 Parma 
 
 2,280 
 
 .377,000 
 
 165 Parma 
 
 Modena 
 
 2,060 
 
 370,000 
 
 180, Modena 
 
 Lucca 
 
 420 
 
 138,000 
 
 328 
 
 Lucca 
 
 St. Marino 
 
 40 
 
 7,000 
 
 175 
 
 St. Marino 
 
 Spain 
 
 182,000 
 
 10,350,000 
 
 57 
 
 Madrid 
 
 Portugal 
 
 40,875 
 
 3,683.000 
 
 90 
 
 Lisbon 
 
 Ionian islands 
 
 987 
 
 206.000 
 
 208 
 
 Corfu 
 
 Turkey 
 
 206,000 
 
 9,60J,OOO 
 
 46 
 
 Constantinople 
 
 Q^uestions. I. Which state in Europe has tlie largest territory ? 2. Wliat states con- 
 tfiin more tlian 200,000 square milf s ? 3. What states contain between 100,000 anrt 
 200,000.'' 4. „How many square miles in Prussia? o. How many in Sjiain ? 6. How' 
 many in Great Britain ? 7. How many in Ireland r 8. Which four states have the great 
 est population .'' 9. What is the population of Great Britain and Ireland, taken together. 
 10 What is the population of the Netherlands ? 11. What states have more inhabilam.- 
 t'mn the Netherlands ? 12. What is the population of Swe<len ? 13. of Denmark? 14. 
 of Ireland? L"). of Switzerland ? 16. of Portugal? 17. of France? 18. of Prussia? 19. 
 ot Austria ? 20. Which is the most thickly settled country in Europe ? 21. Which is most 
 iJiinly settled ? 22. What states have less than 100 on a square mUe ? 23. What states 
 lirive less than 20 on a square mile ? 24. What is the capital of Norway ? 2-5. of Sweden.' 
 ?tj. of Russia? &c. Sec 
 
OF EUROPE. 
 
 it>3 
 
 RELKJION AND GOVERNMENT. 
 
 The following table shows the religion 
 various states of Europe. 
 
 and government of tlie 
 
 States. 
 
 Religion. 
 
 Russia 
 
 Sweden 
 
 Norway 
 
 Denmark 
 
 Great Britain 
 
 Ireland 
 
 Prussia 
 
 Saxony 
 
 Hanover 
 
 VVurtemberg 
 
 Bavaria 
 
 Austria 
 
 Netherlands 
 
 Switzerland 
 
 Baden 
 
 France 
 
 Spain 
 Portugal 
 
 Sardinia 
 
 Two Sicilies 
 
 States of the Church 
 
 Tuscany 
 
 Parma 
 
 Modena 
 
 Lucca 
 
 Ionian isl. and Greece 
 
 Turkey 
 
 Greek Church 
 Lutheran > 
 Lutheran ) 
 Lutheran 
 Protestant ) 
 Catholic > 
 Lutheran 
 Lutheran 
 Lutheran 
 Prot. and Cath. 
 Cath. and Prot. 
 Cath. and Prot. 
 
 Cath. and Prot. 
 
 Prot. and Cath. 
 
 Cath, and Prot. 
 
 Catholic 
 
 Catholic 
 
 Catholic 
 
 Catholic 
 
 Catholic 
 
 Catholic 
 
 Catholic 
 
 Catholic 
 
 Catholic 
 
 Catholic 
 
 Greek 
 
 Mahometan 
 
 Government. 
 
 Monarchy 
 Limited JVIonarchy 
 Absolute Monarchy 
 Limited Monarch^ 
 
 Absolute Monarchy 
 Limited Monarchy 
 Limited Monarchy 
 Limited Monarchy 
 Limited Monarchy 
 Monarchy 
 Limited Monarchy 
 Federal Republican 
 Limited Monarchy 
 Limited Monarch^y 
 Absolute Monarchy 
 Limited Monarchv 
 Absolute MonatCiiy 
 Limited Monarchy 
 Absolute Monarchy 
 Absolute Monarchy 
 Absolute Monarchy 
 Absolute Monarchy 
 Absolute Monarch}^ 
 Republican 
 Absolute Monarcjiy 
 
 Remarks.— It will be seen from this table, that if we except 
 Russia, and the Ionian islands, where the Greek religion prevails, 
 and Turkey where the Mahometan religion is established, the most 
 north'^rn countries of Europe are Protestant, the most southern, 
 Catholic, and those in the midule, partly Protestant and partly 
 
 Catholic. -,. . • T .u *i ^ 
 
 In Prussia, although the prevailing religion is Lutheran, tne 
 royal family are Calvuiists, and about one third of the inhabitants 
 are Catholics. In Saxony, the great majority of the mhabitants 
 are Lutherans, but the royal family are Catholics. 
 
 The countries where most liberty is enjoyed are, Great Untam, 
 Netherlands, France, and Switzerland. The people are most op- 
 pressed in Spain, Turkey, and the Italian states. 
 
 Chtestions. 1. What four forms of religion are most prevalent in Europe ? 2. Where does 
 th?Maho.netan religion prevail? 3.Where,the Greek? 4. WLere.the Protestant? 5- Where, 
 the Catholic? 6. What is the religion of Sweden? T.of Denmark? S.of Spam? 9.of 1. r'^ncer 10. 
 of Turkey? ll.ofPnisaia? 12.of Austria? IS.What is the government of 5 ranee? 14.nt Su.t- 
 wrland? 15.of Great Bntain? 15.ofTurkej-? 17. of Sweden? 
 
264 
 
 GENERAL AND COMPARATIVE VIEWS 
 
 MILITARY AND NAVAL FORCE OF THE EUROPEAN STATES. 
 
 STATES. 
 
 Military force. 
 
 Naval force. 
 
 In war. 
 
 In peace. 
 
 Ships of 
 the Line. 
 
 Frigates. 
 
 -20- 
 
 Sailors & 
 Marines. 
 
 ^,000 
 
 Russia 
 
 773,000 
 
 450,000 
 
 30 
 
 Austria 
 
 535,894 
 
 2^)3,400 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 France 
 
 .500,<j00 
 
 2-0,000 
 
 40 
 
 40 
 
 14,340 
 
 Great Britain 
 
 330,000 
 
 70,000 
 
 255 
 
 258 
 
 70,000 
 
 Spain 
 
 350,000 
 
 117,000 
 
 5 
 
 10 
 
 5,000 
 
 Prussia 
 
 250,00<f 
 
 175,000 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 Turkey 
 
 300,000 
 
 110,000 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 i5,eoo 
 
 Netherlands 
 
 62,000 
 
 40,000 
 
 12 
 
 20 
 
 12,000 
 
 Sweden 
 
 121,800 
 
 53,560 
 
 12 
 
 8 
 
 15,000 
 
 Portugal 
 
 60,000 
 
 16,000 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 
 Denmark 
 
 76,000 
 
 26,000 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 4,000 
 
 Two Sicilies 
 
 51,800 
 
 24,000 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 6,000 
 
 Sardinia 
 
 60,000 
 
 15,000 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 
 Remarks. — The naval force of Great Britain is superior to that 
 of all other nations, taken collectively ; for the above table includes 
 all the principal navies in the world, except the navy of Brazil, which 
 does not exceed 10 ships of the line and 14 frigates, and the navy of 
 th'e United States of America, which contains 12 ships of the line 
 and 14 frigates. The Asiatic and African nations have no large 
 ships of war, except a few frigates belonging to the Barbary powers ; 
 and the naval estabUshmen'ts of the new repubhes of North and 
 South America are on a very small scale. 
 
 As a naval power, if we regard merely numerical strength, the 
 United States rank with Turkey, Netherlands, and Sweden, and 
 are not greatly excelled, except by Great Britain, France and Rus- 
 sia; but as success in maritime warfare depends pre-eminently on 
 the skill and experience of seamen and officers, her proper rank 
 is perhaps next to Great Britain. 
 
 (Itiestions. 1. Which t'lree of the European states rank highest as militaiy powers ? 
 2. Which three, as naval powers? 3. How does the navy of Great Britain compare 
 with that of all other nations, taken collectively ? 4. Which of the European poweic 
 excel the United States in numerical naval strength ? 5. Which are of the same rank ? 
 
 POPULATION OF CITIES. 
 
 The following table shows, at one view, all the cities of Europe 
 which contain more than 100,000 inhabitants : 
 
 London 1,200.000 
 Paris 715,000 
 
 Cons'tinople 500,000 
 Naples 330,0^0 
 
 Moscow 300,0!JO 
 
 St.Petersburg 285,000 
 Vienna 240,000 
 
 Lisbon 230.000 
 
 Amsterdam 230,000 
 
 Dublin 137,9.39 Palermo 130,000 
 
 Berlin ^182,387 Adrianople 130,000 
 
 Madrid 168,000 Liverpool 120,000 
 
 Glasgow 1+7,000 Lyons 120,000 
 
 Edinburgh 137,000 Hamburg 115,000 
 
 Manchester 134,000 Marseilles 110,000 
 
 Barcelona 130,000 Venice 109,000 
 
 Milan 130,000 Copenhagen 105,000 
 
 _ Rome 130,000 Birmingham 105,000 
 
 Q,uestions. I. Which is th'e most populous city in Europe.-' -i. Which cities have 
 more than 200,000 inhabitants ? 3. Which have 300,000 and upwards ? 4. Which have 
 500,000 and upwards ? 5. How many have more than 100,000 ? 6. Which has the greatest 
 oopulation, Lisbon or Madrid ? 7. St. Petersburg or Glasgov; ? S. Vienna or Rome .' 
 
OK EUROPE. 
 
 265 
 
 REVENUE AND DEBT. 
 
 The following table exhibits the revenue and public debt of the 
 several European states ; together with the portion of the revenue 
 and debt which falls to the share of each individual, in each state. 
 
 REVENUE. 
 
 _ 
 
 PUBLIC DEBT. 
 
 
 
 Dolls. D. C.\ 
 
 Dolls. ',Do[. 
 
 1. G. Britain 
 
 270,000,00014 20 
 
 1. G. Britain 
 
 3,500,000,000184 
 
 2. France 
 
 160,000,000 5 30 
 
 2. France 
 
 800,000,000! 27 
 
 3. Russia 
 
 90,000,000 1 80 
 
 3. Netherl. 
 
 621,000,000;12& 
 
 4. Austria 
 
 60,000.000 2 10 
 
 4. Austria 
 
 600,000,000 
 
 21 
 
 5. Netherl. 
 
 31,000,000 5 80| 5. Spain 
 
 200,000,000 
 
 20 
 
 6\ Prussia 
 
 27,000,000 2 70| 6. Prussia 
 
 180,000,000 
 
 15 
 
 7. Spain 
 
 8. Turkey 
 
 27,000,000 
 
 2 70j 7. Russia 
 
 180,000,000 
 
 4 
 
 10,000,000 
 
 1 601 8. Denmark 
 
 60,000,000 
 
 40 
 
 9. Naples 
 
 12,000,000 
 
 1 75! 9. Portugal 
 
 50,000,000 
 
 13 
 
 10. Bavaria 
 
 10,000.000 
 
 2 80110. Bavaria 
 
 46,000,000 
 
 13 
 
 11. Denmark 
 
 7,000,000 
 
 4 4011. Sweden 
 
 16,000,000 
 
 5 
 
 12. Portugal 
 
 7,000,00(^ 
 
 2 00 12. Sardinia 
 
 not ascert'd. 
 
 5 
 
 13. Sardinia 
 
 7,000,000 
 
 1 75 13. Naples 
 
 do. 
 
 
 14. Sweden 
 
 6,000,000 
 
 1 75 14. Turkey 
 
 very small. 
 
 
 Remarks. — The debt of G. Britain divided among the population, 
 gives ^184 for each man, woman and child in the kmgdom; and tlie 
 snare of each family of six individuals is more than one thousand 
 dollars ! The taxes of each individual are ;^14.20, and of each fa- 
 mily more than eighty dollars annually ! How different the con- 
 dition of our own country, where each man's share of debt is less 
 than six dollars, and his share of national taxes less than two dollars i 
 
 (iuestions. 1. What is the amount of the public debrof G. Britain ? 2. How mudi 
 does this make lor each imiividual in the kingdom? 3. How much for each family of six 
 persons ? 4. What is the annual revenue of G. Britain ? 3. How much are the taxes upon 
 each individual in G. Britain? 6. In what countries are the annual taxes less than two 
 dollars for each person ? 7. In which, more tlian five ? 8. Which country in Europe has 
 the heaviest debt ? 9.Which, the heaviest in proportion to its population? 10. Which next? 
 • UNIVERSITIES AND LIBRARIES. 
 
 There are about 100 universities in Europe, of which 30, and those 
 among the most flourishing, are Protestant, 8 or 10 belong to the 
 Greek church, and the remainder are in the hands of the Catholics^ 
 
 The most celebrated Protestant universities are at Cambridge and 
 Oxford, in England; Glasgoiv and Edinburgh, in Scotland; Dublin, 
 in Ireland ; Upsal, in Sweden ; Halle and Berlin, in Prussia ; Leip- 
 slc, in Saxony ; Leyden and Utrecht, in Holland ; Gottingen, in 
 llanover; Jena, in Saxe Weimar; and Geneva, in Switzerland. 
 
 The most celebrated Catholic universities are at Vienna, Paris, 
 Bologna and Pisa. 
 
 The most famous libraries in Europe, are the Vatican at Rome, 
 which contains 500,000 volumes ; and the Royal library at Paris, 
 the Imperial libraries at Vienna and Petersburg, the Bodleian at 
 Oxfora, the Royal at Munich, and the library of Gottingen univer- 
 sity, each of which contains about 300,000 volumes, 
 
 Questions. How many universities in Europe ? 2. How many Protestant ? S. Which 
 are most celebrated ? 4. Which, of tlte Catholic? 5. Where is ihe la',-gest library in Europe? 
 
 Y \ 
 
266 UEiNERAL AXL» CO.MPARATiVK ViE\V^ 
 
 FOREIGN POSSESSIONS OF EUROPEAN NATIONS. 
 
 The following table shows at one view the principal Foreign 
 Possessions of the European nations. 
 
 Great Britain. — 1. hi Europe, Malta, Gibraltar. 
 
 2. In Asia, Hindoostan, Ceylon, and part of Sumatra. 
 
 3. In Australasia, New South Wales, Van Diemen's land. 
 
 4. In South Africa, colony of the cape of Good Hope. 
 
 5. In West Africa; colony of Sierra Leone and several forts- 
 on the Gold coast. 
 
 G. African islands, J\Tauritius or the isle of France, and 
 the island of St. Helena. 
 
 7. In North Ameriea, the Canadas, Nova Scotia, New Bruns- 
 wick, Newfoujulland, and Bermudas islands. 
 
 8. Ih the West Indies, Jamaica, the Bahamas, Barbadoes, 
 Antigua, Dominica, Trinidad, Grenada, St. Ghristoplief, 
 Nevis, St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Tobago, &c. 
 
 i). In South America, English Guiana. 
 Netherlands. — 1. //i^sia, the Spice islands, Banca, part of Java; 
 
 2. In the West Indies, St. Eustatiaand Caracoa. 
 
 3. In Soiiih America, Dutch Guiana. 
 France. — 1. African islands, the isle of BOurbon. 
 
 2. In West Africa, several small settlements near tl;C< 
 Gambia. 
 
 3. hi the West Indies, Guadaloupe, Martinico, &:c. 
 
 4. In South America, French Guiana. 
 Spain. — 1. In Asia, the rhi]ip])ine islands. 
 
 2. In Polynesia, the Carolhie islands. 
 
 3. African islands, the Canaries. 
 
 4. In the West Indies, Cuba, and Porto Kico. 
 Portugal. — 1. In Africa, several forts and factories on the coasts 
 
 of Congo and Mo?:ambique. 
 
 2. African islands, xvladeira, cape Verde islands, and the 
 Azores. 
 Denmark. — 1. In Europe, Iceland and the Faroe islands. 
 
 2. In North America, Greenland. 
 
 8. In the West Indies, Santa Cruz, St. Thomas, &c. 
 Sweden. — 1. In the West Indies, St. Bartholomew. 
 Russia. — 1. In Asia, Asiatic Russia. 
 
 2. In North America, tlie liussian settlements. 
 TuRKKk'. — 1. Li Asia, Asiatic Turkey. 
 
 2. In .Africa, Egypt. 
 
 Questions. 1, IVJiut possessions has Greal Brilain in I'ionh America :' 2. Souia 
 America? 3. the West Indies ? 4. Africa? 5. Europe ? 6. Asia aud Australasia ? 7. What 
 possessions has Spain in the West Indies ? 8. Asia ? Polynesia ? 9. What possessio7fi 
 has France in the West Indies ? 10. in South America ? 11. What possessions has the 
 kins of the Netherlands in Asia ? 12. in South America ?^ 13. To what nation does Ice- 
 )aud heloncr? 14. Ceylon? 15. Newfoundland ? 16. Martinico and Guadaloupe ? 11. Cuba? 
 1 -i. the rhilippine islands ? 19. Mauritius ? '20. Malta ? 21 . Gibraltar ? 91. J'avii " ':•'.■■ 
 •ii-e^nlanu? grr. ?;-: 
 
QF THE WORLD. 
 
 26- 
 
 IV. OF ASIA. 
 
 EXTENT AND POPULATION. 
 
 
 Countries. 
 
 Sq. miles. 
 
 Population. 
 
 l:i:^.\ Chiefcities. 
 
 Russia in Asia 
 
 6,000,000 
 
 10,000,000 
 
 2 
 
 Astrachan 
 
 China Proper 
 Chinese Tartary 
 
 1,500,000 
 
 160,000,000 
 
 106 
 
 Pekin 
 
 2,500,000 
 
 3,000,000 
 
 1 
 
 
 Farther India 
 
 aoo,ooo 
 
 30,000,000 
 
 40 
 
 Ummerapoora 
 
 Hindoostan 
 
 1,500,000 
 
 100,000,000 
 
 66 
 
 Calcutta 
 
 Independent Tartary 
 
 750,000 
 
 3,000,000 
 
 4 
 
 Samarcand 
 
 Persia and Cabul 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 12,000,000 
 
 12 
 
 Ispahan 
 Aleppo 
 
 Turkey in Asia 
 
 500,000 
 
 11,000,000 
 
 22 
 
 Arabia 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 10,000,000 
 
 10 
 
 Mecca 
 
 .Japan 
 
 189,000 
 
 15,000,000 
 
 80 Jeddo 
 
 Remarks. — Very little is known respecting the population of the 
 countries and cities of Asia. Geograph<;rs vary in their estimates 
 of the population of the Chinese emp"^re, from^ 150,000,000 to 
 333,000,000, and they are not better agreo d respecting several other 
 countries. 
 
 q^uestions. 1. What nation has the largest territo^ y^ in Asia ? 2. What countries in 
 Asia are the most thickly settled ? 3. What countrit s have the least population on a 
 square mile .* 
 
 POPULATION OF CITIES. 
 
 Pekin 
 
 Nankin 
 
 Canton 
 
 Jeddo 
 
 Calcutta 
 
 Qftestions. 
 
 3,000,000 
 1,500,000 
 1,500,000 
 1,000,000 
 650,000 
 
 Agra 
 
 Benares 
 
 Surat 
 
 Meaco 
 
 Patna 
 
 600,000 
 500,000 
 500,000 
 500,000 
 500,000 
 
 Ispahan 
 Madras 
 Aleppo 
 Bombay 
 
 400,000 
 300,000 
 250,000 
 200,000 
 
 1. Which is the most populous city in Asia? 
 
 3.*How many contain 500,000 and upwards, and what are their names ? 
 
 Ummerap'ra 175,000 
 2. Which three ataad next .' 
 
 V. OF THE WORLD. 
 
 EXTENT AND POPULATION. 
 
 The following table shows the extent, population, and density of 
 |)opulation of the grand divisions of the earth, according to Hassel. 
 
 1 Square miles. 
 
 Population. 
 
 Pop. sq. mile. 
 
 Europe, 
 
 Asia, 
 
 Africa, 
 
 America, 
 
 Australasia, &c. 
 
 3,387,109 
 16,728,002 
 11,652,442 
 16,504,254 
 
 4,164,420 
 
 180,000,000 
 
 380,000,000 
 
 99,000,000 
 
 21,000,000 
 
 2,000,000 
 
 53 
 32 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 1-2 
 
 Earth, 
 
 52,436,420 
 
 682,000,000 
 
 13 
 
 Q,uestions: 1 . Which id the largest (livibion of the globe ? 2. Which next ? 3. Which 
 is the smallest ? 4 Which contains the greatest potkilalion? 5. Which is most thickly 
 settled ? 6. Which is most thinly settled ? 7. Which next .' S. What is the population of 
 riie world according to Hassd i" 9. What is the populo.tiou of Europe? 10. How nmuy 
 million square miles in Kurope ? 11. How many in Aaia ? 12. How many in America ? 
 13. How many inhabitar.tj are there, nn an nven'-irtr-, on eath s'-;ii.:ir*^ iniK'. t}iro>i<:lu>n.t 
 
268 
 
 fiENEKAL AND COjVIPABATIVE VIEWS 
 
 MISSIONARY, BIBLE, AND TRACT SOCIETIES/ 
 
 The following table presents, at one view, the principal missionar}', 
 bible, and tract societies in the world. 
 
 1 Christian Knowledge Society, - - 
 
 2 Gospel Propagation Society, - - 
 
 3 United Brethren, ------ 
 
 4 Wesleyan Missionary Society, - - 
 
 5 Baptist Missionary Society, - - - 
 Q London Missionary Society, - - " - 
 
 7 Scotch Missionary Society, - - ~ 
 
 8 London Tract Society, - - - - 
 5 Church Missionary Society, - - - 
 
 10 British and Foreign Bible Society, - 
 
 11 London Jews Society, - - _ - 
 
 12 American Board of Missions, - - 
 
 13 American Baptist Board, - - - - 
 
 14 American Bible Society, - - - - 
 
 15 American Tract Society, - - - - 
 
 Seat of ope- When Income tor 
 mtions. cstab. 182&— '27. 
 
 London 
 
 London 
 
 Germany 
 
 London 
 
 London 
 
 London 
 
 Edinburgh 
 
 London 
 
 London 
 
 London 
 
 London 
 
 Boston 
 
 Boston 
 
 New York 
 
 New York 
 
 1698 
 1701 
 1732 
 1786 
 1792 
 1795 
 1796 
 1799 
 1800 
 1804 
 1808 
 1810 
 1814 
 1816 
 1825 
 
 ^147,407 
 273,987 
 
 205,031 
 47,176 
 
 166,494 
 26,731 
 56,617 
 
 208,125 
 
 367,858 
 60,117 
 92,380 
 19,748 
 64,764 
 30,413 
 
 Remark3. — The Christian Knowledge society is engaged in distribu- 
 ting religious books, and supporting missionaries in various parts of the 
 world. 
 
 The GospeZ Propagation society employ in the British North Ame- 
 rican possessions alone, 103 missionaries, and more than 100 Bchool- 
 masters. 
 
 The United Brethren^ and the missionary societies in Great Britain 
 and America support, in all, about 1200 missionaries and native assist- 
 ants, in various parts of the heathen world, particularly among the 
 natives of Hindoostan and Ceylon, in India, the negroes of the West 
 Indies and West Africa, the Hottentots and CafFres of South Africa, the 
 North American Indians, the inhabitants of the Society and Sandwich 
 islands, the Tartars of Asia, the savages of New Zealand, the Green- 
 landers, and the Esquimaux of Labrador. 
 
 The British and Foreign Bible society have distributed more than 
 4,000,000 bibles and testaments, in many different languages, and in 
 all parts of the world. If we add to this what has been done by the 
 Russian Bible society, which is not now in operation, and by the other 
 Bible societies in Europe and America, it will make the whole number 
 more than 5,000,000 copies, u> about 150 different langtjages and 
 dialects. 
 
 The London Tract society circulate now about ten millions of books 
 and tracts annually, in all parts of the world ; and the whole number 
 printed since they commenced their operations, is about 100,000,000, in 
 forty-two different languages. The number printed by tract sociq- 
 ties in the United States during the last twelve or fifteen years, is not 
 far from 20,000,000. 
 
 The LondonJpfr.t socififij support about thirtv mipsionivries. who nr<^ 
 
OF THE WORLD. 26'J 
 
 labouring among the Jews in Poland, and other parts of Europe, in Pa- 
 lestine, and India. They have also distributed a considerable nu«vber 
 of Hebrew bibles and tracts. 
 
 For a summary account of the operations of the American societies, 
 see the table on p. 247. 
 
 Besides the societies mentioned in the table, there are numerous other 
 benevolent institutions in England and America, particularly societies 
 ibr the education of the poor. More than 200,000 dollars are contri- 
 buted in England annually, for the education of the poor in Ireland 
 alone. There are benevoltint societies, also, among the Protestants in 
 France, Germany, and othor European countries, but they are on a very 
 small scale compared with those of Great Britain and the United States. 
 
 Q,uestions. I. Which of ther'-Usious benevolent societies in the world has the largest 
 income ? 2. When was the Bri) and For. Bib. Soc. founded ? 3. Where is the seat of 
 its operations ? 4. How many NUes and testaments has it distributed ? 5. How many 
 bibles and testaments have been liistributed by all the bible societies hi the world, and in 
 how many languages ? 6. JIow many of the benevolent societies mentioned in the table 
 have their seat of operations in London ? 7. How many, at other places ? 8. How many 
 of the London societies were established before 1810 ? 9. How many, before 1790 ? 10. 
 How many of the American societies were established before 1810 ? 11. When did the 
 society of United Brethren begin their labours ? 12. How many Christinn missionaries 
 are sent to the heathen, by all tlie missionary societies in Europe and America ? 13. In 
 what parts of the world are tliese missionaries labouring .'' 14. How many tracts have 
 been distributed by the London Tract Society since its formation ? 15. How many does 
 it distribute annually at the present time ? 1(5. How many tracts have been distributed 
 by societies in the United States in the last twelve or fifteen years ? 
 
 REL1GI0^'S. 
 
 The numbers attached to the different religions may be estimaled as 
 follows. 
 
 Pagans, - - - 400,000,000 Mahometans, - 65,000,000 
 
 Christians, - - 212,000,000 | Jews, - - - - 5,000,000 
 
 Total, 682,000,000 
 
 Remarks. — Chrutianity is the religion of Europe, and of European 
 settlements in every part of the world. Mahometanism prevails in the 
 northern part of Africa, and the western parts of Asia. The Jews are 
 ;dispersed in every part of the v*'orId. The Pagans, or Heathen, include 
 all savages in every part of the world, together with the half civilized 
 ■nations in the S. E. part of Asia, 
 
 Christians are subdivided into three principal sects, viz.: 1. Roman 
 Catholics, who acknowledge the authority of the Pope, and are there- 
 fore also called Papists. They inhabit the southern parts of Europe, 
 .;and the Spanish, French, and Portuguese settlements in every part of 
 the world. 2. Protestants, or those who have separated trom the church 
 of Rome. They inhabit the northern parts of Europe, the United States 
 of America, and the EngUsh and Dutch settlements in every part of the 
 world. 3. The Greek Church, which prevails in Russia, and Turkey 
 in Europe. 
 
 Qjuestions. 1. Which are most numerous, Pagans or Christians ? 2. Christians or 
 Mahometans? 3. Wliere does Christianity prevail ? 4. Where, Pagr^nlsm .' 5. Wliere, 
 Mahometanism ? 6. Where are the Jews found ? 7. What is the religion of the e'c i' 
 ♦naioritydf mankind ? «. How large a portion of thewcnid is ncTivniilv Christian 
 
 Y 2 
 
i70 
 
 GENERAL A.ND C03irAf^>ATI\ K ViEV, 
 
 HEIGHTS OF MOt^NTAINS, &C. 
 
 The following table shows at one view the height of the mosi 
 celebrated mountains, &c. in the world, above tlie level of the sea. 
 
 Moxmiains, SiC- 
 
 Country. 
 
 Tibet 
 
 Hf.hxhl 
 
 Colombia 
 
 Oolombia - 
 Owhyhee 
 Northwest coast 
 Mexico - 
 Italy . 
 Ita}y 
 
 Northwest coast 
 Sumatra island - 
 
 >iorocco - 
 
 Canaries - 
 France - 
 
 Switaeriaiid 
 
 Sicily - 
 
 Dawalageri , highest peak of Hiramaleh mountains 
 Highest flight of a baloon - - - 
 
 Chimborazo, higliest peak of the Andes 
 
 Highest flight of a Condor 
 
 Highest spot of earth ever attained by man 
 Cotopaxi, a volcano ...... 
 
 Kaah, highest peak in Pacific ocean 
 
 jN'Ibunt St. Elias, highest mountain in N. Araeri<;a - 
 
 Popocatepetl, highest mountain in Mexico - 
 
 Mont Blanc, highest mountain in Europe 
 
 Mont Rosa, a summit of the Alps . . - , 
 
 Region of perpetual snow under the equator - 
 
 Mount Fairweather, in N. America .... 
 
 Mount Ophir 
 
 Highest spot inhabited by man . . - - , 
 Highest summit of the Atlas mountains - 
 Highest limit of pines under tile equatoi 
 
 Peakof Teneriffe 
 
 Mount Perdu, highest in the Pyrenees 
 
 Mount St. Bernard, a summit of the Alps 
 
 Mourit ^tna, a volcano -.--.. 
 
 Highest limit of oaks under the equator - 
 
 Quito 
 
 Mount Lebanon - 
 
 Mount Ararat .----... 
 St. Gothard, a summit of the Alp.s - - - - 
 Peak of Leranitz, highest of the Carpathian mountains 
 Mont Velino, highest of the Appenines - . - 
 
 Mount Pic-o, highest in the 
 
 Dofrafield, highest of the Dofrafield range 
 Mount Washington, highest in the U. States 
 Olympus, famous in fabulous history 
 
 Mount Hecla, a volcano 
 
 Ben Nevis, highest in Great Britain ... 
 
 JNIansfield mountain, highest of the Green mounUiins - 
 
 Table mountain, highest in 
 
 Saddleback, highest in ..--.. 
 
 Otter peak, highest of the B1(!C Ridge 
 
 Vesuvius, a volcano 
 
 Round top, the highest of the Catsl-u'l nioantains 
 
 Snowdon, highest mountain in 
 
 The pyramids . - . - . 
 
 Q,uestions. 1 Which is the highest mountain in the world ? 2 "Whirh is the hii:lif-;t i;i 
 America ? .3 What is the height of Chimborazo ? 4 Which Is the highest mountaiii iu Eu- 
 rope ? 5 What is the height of Mont Blanc ? (i Which is the highest inountaiii in t!ie Unl. 
 ted States ? 7 What is the height of mount Washington ? 8 Which is die Inghcst mouii- 
 tain in Great Britain ? 5 What is tlie height of Ben Nevis? 10 Wiiat, the heiglii of mouru 
 ^tna ? 11 of Vesuvius ? 13 Did a balloon ever ascend as high as rhiin!)on!i-.n r 13 Did :i 
 Condor ever fly as high ? 14 Plow liigli i.^ thf; lii.^hest spot oren.rch ever tro;l Uy man ? 1 ."« 
 Kow high on the sides of monntains will pi:!."-? irrow under the equator ? IG How hi^.^i 
 a')Ove the level ofthe s-r-a ^^^ t')-: r-f.- nf q,-?.- r ■'/ F<'"- ^■■?^ t- ■ t^'' ;i--'A-r!M;s - 
 
 Colombia 
 
 Syria 
 
 Armenia 
 
 Switzerland 
 
 Ilmigary 
 
 Italy . 
 
 .■Azores . 
 
 Norway 
 
 New Hampshire 
 
 Greece 
 
 Iceland 
 
 Scotland 
 
 Vermont. 
 
 Soutl' Carolina - 
 
 M'lHsacliiLsctts 
 
 Viiginiji 
 
 Italy . 
 
 New. York 
 
 Wales - 
 
 Egypt - - 
 
 •21, J 40 
 ■21,0-Jit 
 19,40.) 
 
 )s,s:h 
 
 18,400 
 
 17,710 
 1.5,6'j.'5 
 15,56' 
 15,2(r7 
 
 13,Sl-> 
 13,43G 
 13,000 
 lv!,800 
 12,17:; 
 
 11,011 
 10, 3W 
 10,500 
 9,6;^ 
 
 9 via.? 
 9/m 
 
 8,9.T<? 
 8,G4/J 
 
 8,mj 
 
 7,016 
 7,6-JO 
 6.6r!4 
 6,;>0J 
 5,010 
 4,.ro 
 4/279 
 4.000 
 4,01)^: 
 4,0t)'i 
 
 .3,SUs 
 
OF THE WOULD. ^7) 
 
 COMMERCE. 
 Exports of the various countries of the toarld, arranged in geograpfitcal order. 
 
 Greenland. — Whale oil and whalebone, the produce of the fishery. 
 
 Newfoundland. — Cod-fish, caught near the snore, and on the banks. 
 Canada. — Flour and furs. Nova Scotia. — Lumber and fish. 
 New-England. — Lumber, beef, pork, fish, pot and pearl ashes. 
 Middle States. — Flour, tobacco- Southern States. — Cotton, rice. 
 Mexico. — Silver and gold. Bay of Campeachy. — Logwood. 
 West Indies. — Sugar, rum, molasses, coffee, cotton, and indigo. 
 Caraccas — Cocoa, indigo, and coffee. 
 Guiana. — Sugar, rum, cotton, and coffee. 
 Brazil. — Cotton, sugar, coffee, and tobacco ; gold and diamonds ; 
 
 wheat and cattle; dyewoods. 
 Buenos Ayres. — Silver and gold ; hides, beef, and tallow. 
 Chili. — ^Iver, gold, and copper ; wheat and hemp. 
 Peru. — Silver and gold. 
 
 Columbia river. Northwest coast, ~and Kamtschatka. — Furs. 
 Jayan. — Silk and cotton goods, japan ware and porcelain. 
 China. — Tea, silk goods, cotton goods, and porcelain ware. 
 Asiatic islands. — Pepper, cloves, ginger, nutmegs, and camphor. 
 Hindoostan. — Cotton goods, silk, raw cotton, and diamonds. 
 Persia. — Beautiful carpets. 
 
 Arabia. — Coffee, aloes, rnjrrh, and frankincense. 
 East and West Africa. — Gold, ivory, and negro slaves. 
 Cffpe of Good Hope. — Wine and brandy. 
 Morocco. — Leather, goat-skins, gums, and fruits. 
 Madeira, and the Canaries. — Wine. 
 Algiers. — Ostrich feathers, wax, and hides. 
 Egypt. — Rice, linseed, grain, and fruits. 
 Turkey. — Carpets, muslins, sv/ords, corn, wine, and fruits. 
 Italy. — Silks, wine, corn, oil, and fruits. 
 France. — Silks, woollens, linens, wines, and brandy, 
 Spain and Portugal. — Silk, wool, v/ine, fruits, and salt. 
 Netherlands: — B'ine linen, laces, woollens, and other manufactures. 
 Germany. — Linens, various manufactures, and com. 
 Russia. — Hemp, sail cloth, tallow, iron, corn, and furs. 
 Sweden and Nonvay.—hon, lumber, copper, train oil, and furs. 
 Great Britain. — ^Woollens, cottons, iron waie, tin, porcelain. 
 Ireland. — Linen, beef, tallow, butter, and hides. 
 
 Remarks. Manufactured goods come from thickly settled coiintries, as China, India- 
 Japau, Great Britain, and the Netherlands. Thinly settled countries commonly export, 
 raw materials, the produce of either agriculture, mines, or the forest. The best furs 
 come from cold climates. They are exported from the northern parts of Asia, Europe, 
 and America. Sugar, cotton, coffee, spices, wines, &c. require a hot climate. 
 
 (luestions. 1. What countries export silver.' 2. gold? 3. furs,' 4. sugar, rtmi, 
 and molassea ? 5. cotton ? 6. woollen goods ? 7. cotton goods ? S. laces ? 9. silk 
 goods? 10. sail cloth? 11. beautiful carpets? 12. tin? 13. iron? 14. diamonds? 
 15. lea ? 16. coffee ? 17. wine ? 18. spices ? 19. myrrh and frankincense ? 20. ivory ? 
 21. porcelain ware ? 22. lumber ? 23. Hour ? 24. logwood ? 25. cod fish ? 26. whale- 
 bone and oil ? 27. Whal articles are exported from. Great Britain ? 28. Mexico ? 
 29. China? 30. Kamtschatka? 31. the West Indies? 32. the Cape of Good Hope.? 
 33. Madeira? 34. the Northwest coast of America? 35. Peru ? 3C. Canada? 87. the 
 i=»oufh«5rn States ? 38. New Eirjjland ? 39. the Middle Stales' 40, Russia' 
 
Tin GENERAL AND COMPAll AilVE VlEVkS 
 
 VOLCANOES AND EARTHQUAKES. 
 
 Volcanoes are burning mountains, with apertures, out of wliiclt 
 are thrown, with dreadful explosions, ashes, smoke, mud, fire, red 
 hot stones, and lava. More than 200 volcanoes have been discover- 
 ed, scattered over the surface of the earth, and there are probably 
 many others in parts not vet explored. They may be compared to 
 .chimneys, through which the immense fires which rage in the 
 bowels of the earth find vent. The most celebrated volcanoes are 
 Mount iEtna, in Sicily ; Vesuvius, in Italy; and Hecla, in Iceland. 
 The lofty peaks of the Andes in South America are one row of 
 volcanoes, extending through Colombia, Peru and Chili. In the 
 loftiest of these volcanoes^ at an elevation of more than 15,000 feet 
 above the kvel of the sea, Humboldt observed the remarkable fact 
 that great quantid*^s of fish were frequently ejected during an ' 
 eruption. — Ibe volcano of Stromboli, one of the small islands 
 north of Sicily, is the only one at present known, which is in a 
 state of constant activity. It was burning at least 292 years before 
 the Christian era, and has continued to burn, it is believed, without , 
 cessation, to the present time.— The most terrible eruption of a 
 volcano on record, is that wliich happened in 1815, in Sumbawa, 
 one of the Spice islands. The explosioais were heard at the dis- 
 tance of more than 900 miles, and the ashes fell in such quantities, 
 as to produce utter darkEess at the distance of 350 iniles. 
 
 Earthquakes are the efiect of the same subterranean fires which 
 occasion volcanoes, and usually occur at the same time. They 
 are commonly preceded by a general stillness in the air; the shock 
 comes on with a rumbling noise, like that of carriages orof thunder ; 
 .the ground heaves or rocks from side to side. A single shock 
 seldom lasts more than a minute, but the shocks frequently succeed 
 each other at short intervals for a considerable time. Awtul chasms 
 are often made, from which wate^ bursts forth, and sometimes 
 tlame. The chasms ^re sometimes so wide as to overwhelni 
 whole cities at once. Often the eart'a opeas and closes Jlgain, 
 svvaHowing up s.ome people entirely, and squeezing others to death. 
 Sometimes men have been swallov/ed up in one chasm, and thrown 
 out alive by another. Sometimes bouses and farms are carried 
 to the distance of half a mile, and every thing left standing. Some- 
 times whole islands are sunk in the ocean, and new ones are 
 raised. In 1755, tlie city of Lisbon v/as almost wholly destroyed 
 by a great eartliquake, which extended over a considerable part of 
 the globe. 
 
 (Questions. \. Wlia.t fu'e volcanoes? % Wtat do ihey dischnrge ? 3. How man \ 
 volcanoes have been discovere'cl ? 4. Wjiicli arc ihe most celebrated volcanoes in th(- 
 world? 5. Where was the volcano which produced so terrible an eruption in 1813. 
 ,0. How far were the explosions heard ? 7. How i'ax was total darkness produced by tlis 
 fall of ashes? 6. What are earthquakes occasioned I'v ? !'. How are they usually pre- 
 ceded ? 10. "What does the noise resciuhjt- ? U. n»nv long do the shocks last? 12. 
 What are some of the effects of an earthquake ? l.S. What remarkable fact was observed 
 }rj Humboldt in the American volcanoes ? 14. What volcano is in a state of constant 
 uciivity ? 15. How long has it been burning " 
 
^v 
 
 OF THE WORLD. 
 
 STATE OF SOCIETY. 
 
 Men may be divided, according to tlieir state of improvement 
 and, habits of life, into four classes, the savage, the barbarous, 
 the half-civilized, and the civilized. The following table show« 
 to which class each nation belongs : 
 
 Condition. Nations. 
 
 Savage, American Indiaus, Negiocs, and natives of New-Holland, 
 
 Barbarous, Arabs, Moors, Tartars, Malays. 
 Half-civilized, Chinese, Japanese, HindoDs, Persians, Turks. 
 
 aVillzed, Europeans and their descendants ; particularly, the British, French, araJ 
 
 Gennans. 
 
 Rtnmrks. The characteristics ci the different conditions are as 
 follows : 
 
 1. In the savage state, man subsists almost entirely by hunting, 
 fishing, and the spontaneous productions of the earth. Savages 
 are generally found thinly scattered over a large territory, in small 
 tribes, the members of which are firmly attached to each other, but 
 inflamed with the most unreientin.^ hostility towards all their neigh- 
 bours. The best traits in the character of savages are courage, 
 fortitude, love of liberty, and a high sense of dignity. The worst 
 traits are cruelty and revenge- 
 
 2. In the barbaroiis state, subsistence is derived chiefly from pas- 
 turage, and rude agriculture. Those of this class are generally 
 robbers and pirates by profession. They have great energy of 
 <;haracter, and are sometimes possessed of honourable principles 
 and warm affections. 
 
 3. Among the half-civilized nations, agriculture and some of the 
 finer manufactures are carried to a very high degree of perfection, 
 but science, literature, and foreign commerce, are almost unknown. 
 'The government among these nations is altogether despotic. The 
 people are orderly and industrious, but tame, pusillanimous, and 
 easily conquered by their barbarous neighbours. The Tartars and 
 Arabs have always been conquerors ; the'Chinese and Hindoos have 
 always been conquered. 
 
 4. Among the civilized nations, agriculture is conducted skilful- 
 ly and scientifically ; manufactures exist on a very extensive scale; 
 literature, science, and all the arts, both useful and elegant, are car- 
 ried to a high decree of perfection ; commerce is carried on with 
 ©very quarter of the globe ; and the militaiy art is so well under- 
 stood, that the islands and coasts in almost every part of the world 
 are reduced to colonial subjection. 
 
 Q^uestions. 1. What nations are savages ? 2. What nations are barbarous ? 3. Wliat 
 nations are hall-civilized ? 4. What nations are civilized ? 5. How do savages gain a 
 eubfiistence ? 6. Are savage countries thickly settled ? 7. What are the best traits in the 
 cJiaracter of savages ? 8. What are the bad traits ? 9. How do the barbarous nations 
 subsist? 10. What is their character ? 11. In what occupations are the half-civili^ed 
 nations engaged ? 12. What is the government among the half-civilized nations r }g, 
 VJTixf is fh^ir <'har«f 'pi' ? 14. How are the civ"ili7.ed nations distinguished ' 
 
.274 GE-VEKA-L AM> C.OMPAilAXlVK VIEWS 
 
 METALS AND MINERALS. 
 
 ^Crald. Guld is usually found in a perfectly pure state, at the foot 
 of large ranges of mountains, from which it is washed down by the 
 rivers. The countries which furnish the most gold ^re Brazil, Pe- 
 ru, Mexico, East and \\ est Africa, and the islands of Sumatra. 
 Borneo, and Celebes. 
 
 Silver. By far the richest silver mines in the world are those of 
 Mexico and Peru. In the course of three centuries, it is estimated 
 that they have yielded 316,000,000 lbs. of pure silver. More than 
 nine-tenths of all the silver in the world .comes from the mines jOf 
 Spanish A.merica. 
 
 Iron. This most useful of all metals, is very generally diffused. 
 The most extensive iron mines in the world are in Great Britain, 
 nid France, and it is estimated that about 5,000,000 qumtals are 
 produced by each of these countries annually. Russia and Swe- 
 den produce each about 2,000,000 quintals, and Austria and the 
 United States of America not far from 1,000,000 each. 
 
 Copper. Great Britain produces more copper annually than all 
 the rest of Europe. This metal occoi-s also in- Norway, Sweden^ 
 Austria, and many other parts of the world. 
 
 Lead. Great Britain produces more lead annually than all the 
 rest of Europe. There are lead mines also in France, Germany,, 
 Austria, Spain, and the United States. 
 
 Tin. Tin is of less frequent occurrence. The principal mines in 
 the world, are in Cornwall in Great Britain. It is found also in Saxo^ 
 ny and Spain ; and Banca, a small island near Sumatra, is alnipst 
 entirely composed of it. 
 
 Quicksilver. There are no mines of quicksilver of any import- 
 ance, except those ,of Aimaden in Spain, Idria in Austria, and Gu- 
 ancavelica in Peru. 
 
 Coal. Coal is dug in immense quantities in Great Britain, particu- 
 larly near New-castle, in the north of England. It occurs also in vari- 
 ous parts of France and Germany, in China, in the island of Cape 
 Breton, in th€ country around Pittsburg in Pennsylvpnia, and in 
 other parts of North America. 
 
 Salt. Salt is generally diffused oyer the surface of the earth. The 
 most famous salt mines in the world are those in Austrian Poland, 
 near Cracow. The greatest salt works in the United States are. 
 those at Salina, in New York. Salt is made in large quantities in 
 the West Indies, from the watej of the ocean, by evaporation of the 
 
 SUIJ. 
 
 Questions. 1. Where is gold u.=5ually loiind ? 2. What countries produce it in .^reat 
 abundance.' 3. Where are the richest silver mines in the world .' 1. How large a por- 
 tion of all the silver in the wforld comes from Spanish America f 5. What country con- 
 tains the most extensive iron mines .' 6. What four countries yield the greatest quaiiti- 
 ty of iron ? 7. What country produces most lead ? 8. Where are the principal tin 
 mines in the world ? 9. What island in the East Indies contains tin in great quantities .' 
 10. Where are the quicksilver mines? 11. Whore are the principal coal mini« in 
 Great Britain ? 12. What other countries produce coal ? 13. Where are the mosit fa- 
 .mcus salt mines in the world ? 14. Where are vhe orincipul s-ilf %vort;s in th«r T.'jxited 
 "states ' 
 
OF XH£ \\ OR! 
 
 VEGETABLE KINGDOM. 
 
 , The number, size, and luxo-riance of vegetables are greatest in; 
 die torrid zone, and diminish as you go toward the poles. ' Our 
 hemisphere may be divided, as respects vegetables, into four parts, 
 tlie torrid zone, the soutKern part of the temperate zone, the north- 
 ern part of the temperate zone, and the frigid zone. 
 
 1. Among the most remarkable vegetables of the torrid zone are, 
 the sa^o pahn, which yields a juice so thick and nutritious, that it 
 is used for food; the hread fruit tree and plantain^ which produce 
 a very nutritious fruit resembling bread ; the twk of India, M-hich 
 is used for ship building, and surpasses even the oak in firmness 
 and durability ; the mighty Baobab, which grows on the banks of 
 the Senegal, and attains a circumference of 60 and 70 feet ; and the 
 great fan palm of India, one leaf of which will cover ten or a dozen 
 inen. Mahogany, logwood, the pint apple, the cmiiamon, the c/oi'e, 
 the nutmeg, myrrh, balsam ^nA frankincense grow only in the torrid 
 zone. 
 
 2. The most important vegetables in the soiithern part of the 
 temperate zone are the vine, from the fruit of wlych wine is made ; 
 the mulberry:, on the leaves of which the silk-worm feeds ; the olive, 
 which produces sweet oil and subserves many agreeable purposes ; 
 ivheat and barky, the grains of which yield the most nutritious 
 bread ; and cotton, which is now more extensively used for clothing 
 than any other material. 
 
 3. The northern part of the temper-ate zone comprehends among 
 other regions, Britain, a great part of Germany, of Russia, New 
 EnglancJ, and the adjacent British provinces. V\lieal grows with 
 difficulty in the higher latitudes of this climate; hntoats, Jie7np, and 
 Jla.x,7LYe raised in perfection. The pastures are rich and verdant ; 
 and the forests are fine, yielding the ,xik, the ash, the elm, &c. 
 The appk, the pear, the cherry, \he currant, the gooseberry, and 
 many other berries, are also found here in abundance. This region 
 is less favoured by nature than the countries farther south, but is 
 inhabited by the most active, enterprising, and industrious body of 
 men on earth. 
 
 4. In the frigid zone, and even as low as thp paraMel of 60, na- 
 ture assumes a gloomy and desolate aspect. The pines and frs 
 rear their tall heads, and cover the hills with their constant niantle 
 of dark green. In proceeding towards the north, every species of 
 vegetable which yields food to man entirely fails : and nothing ap- 
 pears but dwarf trees, and a few scattered bushes. 
 
 Questions. 1. In what zone do spices <rrow ? 2. What zone is most favounible for 
 the vine ? 3. Wl it zone is most favourable for wheat and barley ? 4. In what zone are 
 the pastures richest ? 5. In what zone do oats, hemp, and flax flourish ? 6. What zone 
 contains the most enterprising and industrious men ? 7. What vegetables grow in the 
 frigid zone? 8, What is the teakiisrd for, and wlierfe does it grow? 9. AVhatis the 
 sago palm valuable for, and of what zone is it the product ? 10. What tree afibrds the 
 means of making silk ? 11. Where does the baobab grow, arid what is it3 greatest cir- 
 cmnfcrence? 12. In what zone does the cotton plant flourish? 13. From what part off !■.►:■ 
 "ivorH CO we obtain mahogany and logwood ? 
 
27& GRIvKRAL AAD CuMPARATA'£ ViEVV:5 
 
 ANIP-IAL KINGPOM. 
 
 The torrid zone is as luxuriant Ih its animals as in its vegetables- 
 Tlie mighty elephant here tl wells in the depth of ancient forests,- 
 while the rhinoceros and the hippopotamus roll their enormous bulk 
 along the banks of the streams. The most ferocious animals in 
 this zone are the lion, the tiger, the leopard, the panther, the ounce^ 
 and the hytena. Here also is the gentle and beautiful antelope^ 
 and the useful camel, without whose aid the deserts would be im- 
 passable. This burning zone generates swarms of reptiles and 
 serpents of an enormous size. Crocodiles and alligators fill all the 
 great rivers, and are ready to devour the utiwary jpassenger. The 
 iargest birds are the ostrich, the cassowary, and tne condor. The 
 insects are inconceivably numerous. The locusts and^ies move 
 in such close and immense armies as to lay waste the earth, and 
 drive nations before them. Among the marine insects are the 
 coraZs, animals insignificant in themselves, but remarkable for the 
 effects which they produce. They have stony cases which remain 
 after the death of the animal, and gradually accumulating and 
 adhering to each other, at length form large rocks and even islands. 
 The Pacific ocean, from New Holland to the Friendly islands, is 
 entirely a coral sea, and navigators are in perpetual danger of 
 striking against rocks of this substance. New Holland is in a 
 manner walled round with coral rocks, which render the navigation 
 very dangerous. 
 
 Ill the tempertite zone there are few monstrous or ferocious ani- 
 mals; but the horse, the ox, the sheep, and other valuable domestic 
 animals, are found in great perfection nearly to 60° north latitude- 
 
 As we approach the 60th degree of latitude, the country, almost 
 deserted by man, is covered with the elk, the martin, the sahle, the 
 beaver, the ermine, animals protected from the cold with a covering 
 of rich and beautiful fur, which is eagerly sought after by man 
 for purpose* of comfort and luxury, and hence these frozen coun- 
 tries have become the region of an extensive fur trade. The most 
 useful domestic animal in this climate is the reindeer. 
 
 in the frigid zone the quadruped species again assume a fierce 
 and formidable character. The bear stalks horrid amid his frozen 
 solitude, and fiercely defends it against the daring approach of 
 man. But the great scene of life over the Polar regions is in the 
 ocean. It is here that the mightiest of the animal creation, the 
 enormous whale, rolls through the sea, and mingles his frightful 
 roarings with the sound of the tempest. Besides these lords of the 
 ocean, the Northern seas swarm with herrings, which, during the 
 winter, proceed in vast shoals to the seas of the temperate zone, 
 wliere they afford the foundation of valuable fisheries. 
 
 Cluestions. 1. "'iVliat are sonie ol' the largest animals in the torrid zone ? 2. Which 
 are the most ferocious ? 3. Of what use is the camel ? 4. ^Vllat ferocious animals 
 inhabit the rivers of the torrid zone ? 5. Which are the largest birds, and what zone do 
 they inhabit ? 6. AVTiai effect is produced by the locusts ? 7. What effect is produced 
 l^y the corals ? S. What parts of the world are troubled with the coral ? 9. ^Vhat ani- 
 mals flourish in the temperate zone ? 10. What animals are found near the 60th degree 
 oflatir,ude? 11. What parts of the world produce the best furs? 12. What ferocious 
 animals inhabit the irigid zone ? 13. What remarkable fish in the polar seas ' 
 
OF THE WORLD. 
 
 27t 
 
 WINDS. 
 
 ^the temperate and frigid zones the vv'inds are variable, blow- 
 ing irregularly, sometimes from one poi it of the compass, and 
 sometimes from another. But in the torrid zone they are very 
 regular. In all parts of the Atlantic and Pacific oceans which lie 
 in the toirid zone^ except near shore, the winds blow constantly at 
 all seasons of the year from the east. Under the equator they art 
 due east; as you approach towards the northern tropic they in- 
 cline to northeast, and towards the southern tropic to southeast;. 
 These winds are called Trade Winds, because they much facilitate 
 trading voyages. The Spanish flotillas, which sail annually from 
 Acapulco, on the western coast of Mexico, to the Philippine 
 islands, are borne along by the trade winds with iminterrupted 
 prosperity ; no attention, no skill, is required to steer them ; no 
 accident ever befals them ; and this voyage of nearly half the cir- 
 cumference of the globe, is often performed in sixty days, without 
 a change of sails. It is impossible ever to return by the same track. 
 
 In the Indian ocean, the regular trade wind prevails between the 
 southern tropic and the 10th degree of south latitude ; but to the 
 north of this last boundary, begins the empire of the rtwnsoons. 
 For six months, from April to October, a strong wind blows con- 
 stantly from the southwest, bringing witii it rain "and tempest; dur- 
 ing tlie rest ot'the year, a dry and agreeable wind blows from the 
 northeast, 
 panied with violent storms and hurricanes. 
 
 All the islands between the tropics are refreshed by the sea and 
 land breeze. During the day a breeze always blows from the sea ; 
 hut at night it changes, and blows from the laud. 
 
 Q,uestio7is- 1. In whnt parts of the worL! are the winds vP-rlable ? 2. In what parts 
 are they regular? 3. In whnt direction do lihe tnide winds blow ? 4. Where do the 
 trade winds prevail ? 5. Which is the easif r=t voyage, from Mexico to the Philipphie 
 islands, or from the Philippine islands to Mexico ? 6. In what direction do the mon- 
 soons blow ? 7. Where do tlie nioasoons prtvail ? S. 'x'/liat is the state of the weather 
 daring the southwest monsoon? 9. How is the weatiier during the northeast i.-io'i- 
 soon? 10. Wiiat is the weather durng the ' linnge o'the monsoons ? 11. Which v.uv 
 does the wiuil Mow on the islands of t'le ijiiiJ zjne daring ti;e diiy? 1-2. Wiiichway 
 during the niglit ? 
 
 CURHENTSi 
 
 The great currents of the ocean generally run from ea^t to west, 
 following the course of the trade winds. In passing, however, 
 along the shores of continents and islands, they are often diverted 
 from their natural course. Thus the great current which comes 
 across the Atlantic ocean, proceeds between South America ana 
 the West India islands into the gulf of Mexico, and then rushes 
 out with great velocity betv/een Cuba and Florida, and proceeds 
 north along the coast of the United States, and northeast as far as 
 the shores of Iceland and Great Britain. This current is called 
 the Gulf Stream. There is a current v,hich comes from the 
 Frozen ocean between Norway and Greenland, and passes along 
 the western coast of Great Britain, into the English channel. It 
 
 7 
 
278 GEffERAL AND COMPARATIVE VIEWS. 
 
 then turns cast, dnd rushes through the straits of Dover into the 
 North sea. In the Pacific, Indian, and Southern Atlantic oceans, 
 the currents, with few exceptions, run from east to west. 
 
 (luestions. 1. In what direction do the currents of the ocean generally ran? 
 3. What occasions the deviation from this course in some instances ? 3. Describe the 
 course of the Gulf Stream ? 4. What is the course of the current which comes from 
 the Frozen ocean between Norway and Greenland ? 
 
 TEMPERATURE. 
 
 The two leading causes which affect the temperature of any re- 
 gion, are distance from the equator, and elevation above the level 
 of the sea. In proportion as you go from the equator towards the 
 poles, the cold increases ; and in proportion as you ascend above 
 the level of the sea, the cold increases. Hence, under the equator, 
 low countries are excessively hot and unhealthy ; but regions ele- 
 vated 6000 or 8000 feet enjoy a delightful temperature, while at 
 13,000 or 14,000 feet the chmate is the same as in the frozen zone ; 
 and at 15,000 feet is the region of perpetual congelation, where ice 
 never melts, and all mountains are covered above this height with 
 eternal snow. The following table shows the mean temperature 
 at the level of the sea, in all the successive latitudes, and the heigiit 
 at which perpetual congelation takes place. 
 
 Perpetual Congelatimi. 
 
 15,207 feet. 
 
 14,764 
 
 13,478 
 
 11,484 
 
 9.001 
 
 6,334 
 
 3,018 
 
 1,778 
 
 457 
 
 
 
 (liiesiions. 1. What are the two leading causes wliicli afieci Uie temperature of ony 
 place? 2. In ascending a lofty mountain does the climate become warmer or colder.' 
 3. What is the climate of low countries in the torrid zone ? 4. What is the climate of 
 places near the equator, which are elevated 6000 or 8000 feet above the level of the sea ? 
 5. What is the climate at the height of 15,000 feet under the equator ? 6. What is the 
 climate at 9000 feet in latitude 40° ? 7. How high must a mountain rise in latitude 80"^ 
 before its top will be covered with perpetual snow ? 8. What is the mean temperature 
 at the level of tlie sea, under the equator ? 
 
 Latitude. 
 
 Mean Ter7iperature 
 
 
 
 84^2' 
 
 10 
 
 82 6 
 
 20 
 
 78 1 
 
 30 
 
 71 1 
 
 40 
 
 62 6 
 
 50 
 
 .53 6 
 
 60 
 
 45 
 
 70 
 
 38 1 
 
 80 
 
 33 6 
 
 90 
 
 32 
 
«:tUESTIONS ON THE MAPS. 
 
 MAP OF THE WORLD. 
 
 1 On "Which side of the equator is there the most land ? 
 
 2 WTiich continent contains the most land, the eastern or western ? 
 
 3 Which is the largest, Asia or Africa ? 4 Africa or South America ? 5 South America or 
 
 Europe ? 6 New Holland or South America? 
 7 What grand divisions of the globe are crossed by the equator ? 8 What islands ? 
 9 What erand divisions are crossed by the tropic of Capricorn i' 10 What»l«nd« ? 
 
 11 What gmnd divisions are crossed by the tropic of Cancer? 
 
 12 What grand divisii-ns are crossed by the Arctic Circle ? 
 
 13 Through how many zones does America run ? 
 
 14 la what zones does Africa lie ? IS In what zones, Asia ? 16 In what zenea, Sorfh Aaie 
 
 rica ? 17 In what zom-s. South America ? 18 In what zones, Europe ? 
 19 In what zone, the West Indies ? 20 the Asiatic ielands ? 31 the Society ialanda ? Sltha 
 
 Sandwich islands ? 33 Sp tzbergen? 
 24 In what zone is the principal part of Asia ? 25 the principal part of North America ? 
 
 26 the principal part of Europe ? 27 the principal part of Africa ? 28 the principal part 
 
 of South America? 
 29 In what direction from North America is South America? 
 
 50 In what direction from Asia is New Holland ? 
 
 31 In what direction is Africa from Asia ? 32 Africa from Europe ? 
 
 33 Which runs farthest north, Africa or South America ? 34 Which runs fJirthest soufli ? 
 
 35 Vl^ich is farthest north, Newfoundland or Great Britain ? 36 Quebec or London ? 37 
 Boston or Paris ? 38 Brazil or Guinea ? 39 Cape Horn or the cape of Good Hope ? 
 
 40 What straits connect the Pacific with the Frozen Ocean ? 41 the Mediterranean witil 
 the Atlantic ? 42 the Red Sea with the Indian Ocean ? 43 Baffin's bay with the At- 
 lantic ? 
 
 44 What straits separate Patagonia from Terra del Fuego ? 45 New Holland from Van 
 Diemen's land ? 46 New Holland from New Guinea ? 47 Sumatra from Malaya ? 
 
 48 IVhat cape at the southern extremity of America ? 49 the southern extremity of AJOrica? 
 50 the western extremity of Europe ? 51 the western extremity of Africa ? 
 
 52 What sea lies between Europe and Africa ? 53 What great sea, between Europe and 
 Asia ? 54 What sea, between Asia and Africa ? 55 What gulf between Persia and Ara- 
 bia ? 56 What buy between Hmdoostan and Farther India ? 57 What sea between 
 the West Indies and South America ? 
 
 58 Which is the largest, the Mediterranean or the gulf of Mexico ? 59 the Caspian sea or 
 lake Superior ? 60 Borneo or Great Britain ? 61 Hudson's bay or the Baltic ? 
 
 62 Which is the largest island between Asia and New Holland ? 
 
 €3 In what direction from Borneo are Sumati-a and Java? 64 Celebes? 65 the Spice 
 islands ? 66 the Philippine islands ? 67 the Pelew islands ? 68 the Ladrone islands ? 
 69 the Caroline islands ? 
 
 TO In what direction from the Society islands are the Marquesas ? 71 the Sandwich islands? 
 7-2 Navigator's islands ? 73 the Friendly islands ? 74 New Zealand ? 75 Pitcaim's 
 island ? 
 
 T8 What islands near the N. W coast of Africa ? 
 
 77 What islands on the S. E. coast of Africa ? 
 
 78 Where is St. Helena ? 79 ^Vhere are Falkland islands ? &i What islands midway be 
 
 tween Europe, Africa, and America ? 
 
 51 What great islands in the Arctic Ocean ? 82 What large island lies south of Hindoostan? 
 
 83 What large island, south of New Holland f 84 What large island, near the moutli 
 of the St. Lawrence? 
 
 85 What are the principal groups of islands in the torrid zone ? 
 
 S6 What seas, straits, channels, and oceans, would you pass through in saiUng from St. 
 Petersburgh to Bombay ? 87 What bodies of water would you pass through in sail- 
 ing from Canton to Quebec ? 88 What, in sailing from New Orleans to Archangel? 
 89 What, in sailing from Pekin to Mocha ? 
 
 S« Which way from the isthmus of Darien is Greenland ? 91 Bdiring's straits ? 92 Cape 
 St. Roque ? 93 Cape Horn ? 
 
 54 What countries border on the Indian Ocean ? 95 on the Mediterranean ? 96 on flte Pa- 
 cfHc Ocean ? 97 on (he Atlanfir ? 98 on the Arctic nrf^v ' 
 
286 atfESTTONS. 
 
 99 Through what countries does the parallel of 60 N. lat. pasa ? the parallel of 50 N. lat.? 
 the parallel of 40 N. lat. ? the parallel of 30 N. lat. ? the paralld of 20 N. l«t. ? 
 
 104 What large peninsula is there in the northeast of Asia? 
 
 105 What peninsula on the west coast of North America? 
 
 106 Which runs farthest west, Africa or Europe ? 
 
 107 In what direction is cape Cod from cape Horn ? 108 Through what places does (he 
 
 meridian of Quebec pass ? 
 109 Which ri^ns farthest south, Africa or New Holland ? 
 
 MAP OF NORTH AMERICA. 
 
 1 What oceans border on North America ? 
 
 2 In what part of iV. America are the British possessions ? 3 the United States ? 4 the 
 
 Spanish possessions ? 5 Greenland ? 6 the Russian settlements? 
 7 In what direction does the western coast of North America run ? 8 the eastern coast? 
 9 the Rocky mountains ? 10 the Alleghany mountains ? 
 
 11 Name the five principal bays or gulfs of North America. 
 
 12 What large islands lie near the mouth of the St. Lawrence ? 
 
 13 What considerable islands on the coast of the United States . 14 What island* in th» 
 
 Atlantic ocean east of Carolina ? 
 
 15 Name the seven principal lakes in N. America ? 
 
 16 IVhich way from lake Erie is lake Superior ? 17 lake Winnipeg ? 18 Slave lake? 
 
 19 Hudson's bay ? 20 the gulf of St. Lawrence ? 
 21 Name the principal river which runs into the Frozen ocean ? 22 into Hudson's bay ? 
 23 into the gulf of St. Lawrence ? 24 into the gulf of Mexico ? 25 into the gulf of 
 CaUfornia ? 26 into the Pacific ocean ? 
 
 27 Through what lakes do the waters of lake Superior pass before they reach the ocean ? 
 
 28 In what general direction does the St. Lawrence run ? 29 In what direction, the Mia- 
 
 sissippi ? 
 30 What river is the outlet of lake Winnipeg ? 31 of Slave lake ? 
 32 What separates Labrador from Greenland ? 33 Labrador from Newfoundland ? 
 34 In what latitude is the mouth of the Mississippi ? 35 the mouth of the St. Lawrence ? 
 
 36 the mouth of Mackenzie's river ? 
 
 37 In what direction from Newfoundland is the Grand bank? 
 
 38 On which side of Newfbundland is St. John's ? 
 
 39 Where is the bj^y pf Fpndy ? 
 
 40 Where is Cape Breton island ? 
 
 41 What bodies of water border on Nova Scotia ? 42 on New Brunswick ? 
 
 43 On which side of Nova Scotia is Halifax ? 
 
 44 Which way from Halifax is Boston ? 45 Quebec ? 46 St. John's in Newfoundland ? 
 
 47 In what direction from Boston is Quebec ? 
 
 48 Ip what direction from New-York is Montreal ? 
 
 49 In what direction from Baltimore is Kingston in Upper Canada ? 
 
 60 In v/hat direction fronj Kingston are Montreal and Quebec ? 
 ^1 In what direction fyom Baltimore are New-York and Boston ? 
 
 52 What is the latitude of the city of Mexico ? 53 of New Orleans ? 64 of Philadelphia ? 
 55 Which way from Mexico is New Orleans ? 56 Vera Cruz ? 57'Acapulco? 58 SantaFe? 
 09 What large island in the mouth of the gulf of Mexico ? 
 ^0 Which way from Cuba is Jamaica ? 
 
 61 Whicli way from Jamaica is the peninsula of Yucatan ? 
 
 62 On which side of the peninsula of Yucatan is the bay of Campeachy ? 63 On which 
 
 side, the bay of Honduras ? 
 C4 What large lake in Guatemala ? 
 65 Where does lake Nicaragua empty ? 
 
 63 Where does the Rio del Norte emptv ? 67 In what direction does it run ? 
 
 §.8 Whicli of the West Intlia islands is farthest south? 69 Which, farthest north ? 70 Which, 
 
 farthest east? 71 Which, farthest west? 
 72 TVhich way from Antigua is Porto Rico ? 73 St. Domingo ? 74 Cuba ? 75 Guadar 
 
 loupe ? 76 Martinico ? 77 Grenada ? 78 Trinidad ? 79 the Bermudas r 
 8& Which way from Cuba is Jamaica ? 81 Which way, the Bahama islands ? 
 
 MAP OF SOUTH AMERICA 
 
 1 What isthmus connects North and South America ? 
 
 2 What cape at the eastern extremity of South America ? 3 at the aoutRern extremity 'i 
 4 Which way Irom the isthmus of Darien to cape St. Roque ? 5 Which way from cape 
 
 ft, Roque to cape Hora / S Which way from cape Horn to the isthmus of Darieii ^ 
 
QFESTIONS. 2S1 
 
 7 In what direction do the Andes nm ? 
 
 8 In what part of South America is Patagonia ? 9 In what part, New Grenada ? 
 
 10 WTiat countries of South America border on the Pacific ? 11 on the Cai-iDoean sea? 12 
 on the Atlantic ? 
 
 13 What country extends from the gulf of Maracaybo to the mouth of the Oronoco ? 14 
 "What country, from the mouth o tlie Oronoco to the mouth of the Amazon ? 15 
 What country, from the mouth of the Amazon almost to the La Plata ? 
 
 16 What desert separates Peru from Chili ? 
 
 17 What separates Chili from Buenos Ajtcs ? 
 
 18 In what latitude is the mouth of the Amazon ? 19 the mouth of the La Plata? 
 
 20 In what direction does the coast of Chili run ? 21 In what direction, the coast of Peru ? • 
 22 In whnt direction from Buenos Ayres is St. Jago, the capital of Chili ? 23 Lima ? 24 
 
 Rio Janeiro ? 25 Montevideo ? 
 26 In what direction from Caraccas is Carthagena ? 27 Santa Fe de Bogota ? 28 Para- 
 maribo ? 
 
 29 WhicJi way from Lima is St. Salvador? 
 
 30 Which are the tliree greatest rivers in S. America? 31 Where do they empty ? 32 
 
 Where does the Magdalena empty ? 
 
 33 Does the Pacific receive any great rivers from South America ? 
 
 34 What separates Terra del Fuego from the main land ? 
 
 35 Where are Falkland islands r 86 Wliere is the island of Juan Femaadez ? 37 In what 
 
 latitude is the island of Trinidad ? 
 38 What bay on the south side of the isthmus of Darien ? 39 What bay on the norlJi side ? 
 40 How da you bound Chili ? 41 Peru ? 42 Buenos Ayres ? 43 Venezuela ? 44 New Gre- 
 
 nada ? 45 Brazil ? 46 Patagonia ? 
 
 47 Which way from Q,uito is Popayan : 
 
 48 Which way from Carthagena is Porto Bello ? €9 Whidl way, Santa Martha ? 
 50 Wliich way from Caractas is Cumana? 
 
 • 51 In what part of Venezuela is lake Maracaybo ? 
 52 On what river is St. Thomas ? 53 On what river is Paramaribo : 
 
 54 Which way from Lima is Cusco ? 
 
 55 Where is lake Titicaca ? 56 Where is lake Parima ? 
 
 S7 In what direction does the Madeira run ? 53 the Paraguay ? 59 the Parana ? 60 the 
 
 61 Which way from St. Jago is Valparaiso ? 62 Which way from Valparaiso ia Concep- 
 
 tion ? 
 63 Which way from Conception is Valdivia ? 64 Which way from St. Jago is Pot»si r 
 65 Which way is Potosi from Buenos Ayres ? 
 
 MAP OF EUROPE. 
 
 1 What sea lies between Em-ope and Africa ? What seas lie between Europe and Asia ^ 
 3 What sea lies between Great Britain and Denmark ? 4 Wliat aea, between Swedeu 
 
 and Russia ? 
 3 Where is the White sea ? 6 Into what ocean does it open ? 
 7 Between what countries is the English channel ? 8 St. George's channel ? S The Cat- 
 
 tegat ? 10 the Skager Rack ? 
 11 What bodies of water are co»n€C/«rf by the straits of Gibraltar? 12 by the straits of Do- 
 ver ? 13 by me Dardanelles ? 14 by the straits of Constantinople ? 
 13 What gull lies between Turkey and Italy ? 16 What bay, between France and Spain ? 
 
 17 What three gulfs in the Baltic ? 
 18 What mountains separate Europe from isia ? 19 France from Spain r 20 S\ritzerland 
 from Italy ? 21 Sweden from Norway ? 22 Hungary from Gaiicia? 
 
 23 What mountains run through Italy ? 
 
 24 Which is the largest river in Europe ? 
 
 25 "WTiere does the Volga enipty ? 26 the Don ? 27 the Dnieper and Dniester f 
 
 28 Where does the Danube empty ? 29 Where does it rise ? SO Through what counftieB 
 
 does it run ? 
 31 Where does the Rhine empty ? 32 Where does it rise ? 
 
 33 Where does the Elbe empty ? 
 
 34 What countries of Europe border on the Mediterranean ? 85 an the Black sea .* 36 on 
 
 the Baltic ? 37 on the North sea ? 38 on the EngUsh channel? 89 on the bay of Biscay? 
 49 Bow do you bound Portugal ? 41 Spain ? 42 Denmark ? 43 France .'' 44 Turkey I 45 
 
 Sweden ? 46 Russia ? 47 Switzerland ? 
 48 What countries of Europe lie ekiify ielnxw the parallel of 45** ? 49 a>JOve the parallel of 
 
 65» ? 50 between 45 and 54<' f 
 
282 QUESTIONS. 
 
 51 In what part of Europe is Lapland ? 
 
 52 What large river empties into the Mediterranean from Spain? 53 Which way does the 
 
 Tagus run ? 54 Where does it eniptj' ? 
 
 55 Which way does the Duero run, and where does it empty ? 
 
 56 In what part of Spain is Madrid ? 57 Cadiz ? 58 Barcelona ? 
 
 50 Which tvayfrom Cadiz is Malaga ? 60 Which way, Gibraltai'? 
 61 On what river is Lisbon r 62 On what river, Oporto ? 
 
 63 What cape in the southwest of Portugal ? 
 
 64 What river separates France from Germany ? 65 What large river in the southeast of 
 
 France ? 66 What large river in the southwest of France ? 
 
 67 Where does the Loire rise and empty ? 
 
 68 What mountains separate France from Italy ? 
 
 69 In what part of France is Paris, and on what river ? 70 In what patt of France is Ly- 
 
 ons, and on what river ? 
 71 Jn v^hat part of France is Bord(58ux f 72 Brest ? 73 Marseilles ? 74 Toulon ? 75 Calais '' 
 76Wliereis the gulf of Tarantor Wliere, the gulf of Genoa ? 
 77 What is the principal river ia the north of Italy ? 73 Where does the Po empty ? 79 
 
 Where does it rise ? 
 80 Which way from Rome is Naples ? 81 Which way, Leghorn ? 
 S-2 How is Venice situated ? 83 How is Genoa situated ? 
 S'4 Where are the straits of Messina ? 85 the straits of Bonifacio ? 
 86 Where is the island of Elba ? 87 M'^hich way from Sicily is Sardinia? 
 88 On which side of Sicily is Palermo ? 89 On which side of Sardinia is Cagliavi ? 
 
 90 WTiat three countries of Europe extend into the frigid zone ? 
 
 91 "WTiat are the capitals of Russia, Sweden, and Norway ? 
 
 92 In what latitude is St. Petersburgh? 93 Bergen ? 94 Stockholm ? 
 
 95 Which way from Bergen is Drontheim ? 96 Christiania ? 97 Christiansand ? 
 
 98 Where is the Malstroni, or great whirlpool ? 
 
 99 Which are tlie largest lakes^in Sweden ? 100 On which coast does lake Wener empty > 
 
 101 On which coast lake Wetter ? 
 
 102 Where does th.e Tornea empty ? 
 
 103 Wfiich way from Stockholm is Gottenburg ? 104 Upsal ? 105 Fahlun ? 
 
 106 How is Tornea situated ? 
 
 107 What island at the mouth of the gulf of Bothnia? 108 What island at the mouth of thje 
 
 gulf of Riga? 
 
 109 On what island is Copenhagen ? 
 
 110 Which way /row Denmark is Iceland ? Ill Whiclx 'WVLy, the Ferro islands ? 
 
 112 On wliich'sIJe of Iceland is mount Hecla ? 
 
 113 What sea borders on Russia in the north ? 114 V/hat seas border on Russia in flie 
 
 south ? 
 
 115 Wliich way from the gulf of Finland is lake Ladoga ? 116 What river connects them? 
 
 1 17 Which way from lake Ladoga is lake Onega ? 118 Where does lake Onega empty ? 
 
 119 Where does the Volga empty ? 120 Which way does it run for the first half of its 
 course ? 121 AVhicIi way, for the last half? <- 
 
 122 Where does the Don empty r 123 the Dwina ? 124 the nortliem Dwina? 125 the Dnie- 
 per and Dniester ? 
 
 126 Where is St. Petersburgh ? 127 Archangel? 128 Riga? 129 Odessa ? 
 
 130 Wliat great city is near the centre of European Russia ? 
 
 131 Which way from Moscow is Astrakhan ? 132 Which way, St. Petersburgn ; 
 133 Which way /ro»n St. Petersburgh is Archangel ? 134 Which way, Riga ? 
 
 135 What large peninsula between the Black sea and the sea of Azof ? 
 
 136 Into what sea do'^s the Vistula empty ? 137 Into what sea, the Oder ? 138 Into what 
 
 sea, the Elbe ? 139 In what dii=ection do these rivers run ? 140 In what direction does 
 the Rhine run ? 
 
 141 On what river are Warsaw, Thorn and Dantzic ? 142 On what river are Breslaw, 
 Frankfort and Stettin ? 143 On what river Dresden, Magdeburg and Hamburgh ? 
 
 144 In Avhat part of Germany are Hanover and Bremen ? 145 In what part, Ulm and Mu- 
 nich? 
 
 146 In what part of Germany does the Danube rise ? 147 Which way doea the Donubf 
 run ? 
 
 148 On what river is Vienna ? 1 49 On what river, Buda ? 
 
 150 WTiich way from Vienna to Prague ? 151 to Buda? 152 to MUBlch ? 
 
 153 Where is Trieste ? 154 Where is Presburg ? 
 
 155 What river empties into the Danube at Bdgrado? 
 
 Jati What mountains separate Huuffary irom Galicia 1 . . . • 
 
QUESTIONS. 283 
 
 157 Which way from Vienna to Cracow ? 158 from Cracow to Lemberg ? 
 
 159 In what part of Hungary is Hermanstadt ? 
 
 160 In what part of Switzerland is lake Constance ? 161 In what part, the lake of Geneva? 
 162 What river runs through lake Constance ? 163 the lake of Geneva ? 
 
 164 Where docs the Rhine emi)ty ? 165 AVhere, tlie Rhone ? 
 
 1 66 \Vliat "jreat bay is there in the north of Holland ? 
 
 167 Which empties farthest north, the Rhine or the Scheldt ? 
 
 168 Wliich ifi the farthest north, Antwerp or Brussels ? 
 
 169 What separates Turkey in Europe from Turkey in Asia ? 170 What seas are eon- 
 
 necled by the straits ')f C onstantinople ? 
 
 171 What seas, by the Dardanelles r 
 
 172 What is the principal river of Turkey in Europe ? 
 
 17^ What river is the boundary between Turkey and Russia ? 
 
 174 What river on the boundary' between Turkey and Austria ? 
 
 175 MTiat mountains separate Turkey from Hungary ? 
 
 176 In what part of Turkey is Constantinople ? 177 On what river is Belgrade ? 
 178 IVhich way from Constantinople is Belgrade ? 179 Adrianople ? ISO Athens? 
 
 ISl Whatgiilfon the north side of the Morea? 182 What gulf on the southeast side? 183 
 On what gulf is Athens ? 
 
 184 Which way from Sicily is Malta ? 
 
 185 Wliich way from Malta is Candia ? 
 166 Wliich way from the Morea is Candia ? 
 
 187 Which way from Sardinia is the island of Majorca ? 
 
 188 Which way from Majorca is Minorca ? 189 Which way, Ivica ? 
 
 190 What countries in Europe extend from the Mediterranean to the Atlantic ? 
 
 191 What country reaches from the Black sc-a to tlie Baltic ? 
 
 192 What countr^r reaches from the Black sea to the gulf of Venice ? 
 
 193 Which way from Paris is London ? 194 Copenhagen ? 195 Rome ? 196 Madrid ? 
 197 Which way from Cracow is Copenhagen ? 198 Rome ? 199 Constantinople ? 200 St. 
 
 Petersburgh ? 201 Paris ? 
 202 What seas ,~ straits, channels, and oceans would you pass through in sailing from Con. 
 
 stantinople to Stockholm ? 
 ■203 If'Tiatseas, &.C. rvould yon pass «^trowgA in sailing from Archangel to St. Petersburgh? 
 
 204 from Tornea to Liverpool ? 205 from Genoa to Venice ? 206 from Liverpool to 
 
 Loudon ? 207 from Bourdeaux to Amsterdam ? 208 from Lyons to Lisbon ? 
 
 MAP OF ASIA. 
 
 1 What oceans border on Asia ? 
 
 2 What sea separates Asia from Africa . 
 
 3 What isthmus connects Asia with Africa ? 
 
 4 On what bodies of water does Arabia border ? 5 Hindoostan ? 6 Farther India ? 7 the 
 
 Chinese empire ? 8 Kamtschatka ? 9 Russia in Asia ? 
 10 Which way from the sea of Japan is the sea of Okhotsk ? 11 Which way, the China sea? 
 
 12 Which way from the Japan islands are the Philippine islands ? Is Which way, Kamt- 
 
 schatka ? 
 14 What straits connect the Red sea and Indian ocean ? 15 the Persian gulf and Indian 
 
 ocean ? 16 the sea of Japan and the sea of Okhotsk ? 
 17 Jf^'hich way from the Caspian sea is the Black sea ? 18 the sea of Aral ? 19 the Persian 
 
 gulf? 
 20 In what direction do the Altay mountains run ? 21 In what direction, the Himmaleh 
 
 mountains ? 
 
 22 What three great rivers empty into the Arctic ocean ? 
 
 23 What four great rivers empty into the Pacific ocean ? 
 
 94 Where does the Ganges empty ? 25 Where, the Indus . 26 Where, the Euphrates ? 
 
 27 What great river empties into the Caspian ? 
 
 28 Into which side of the Caspian does the Volga empty ? 
 
 29 What large rivers empty into the sea of Aral ? 
 
 30 Into which side of the sea of Aral does the Oxus empty ? 
 
 31 V^ere does the Tigris empty ? 32 Where the Burrampooter ? 
 
 33 Which way do the Oby, Enicei, and Lena run ? 34 Which way, the Amour, Hoang< 
 
 Ho, and Kian-Ku ? 3.5 Which way, the Indus ? 36 Which way, the Euphrates ? 
 S7 What country extends from the Black sea to the sea of Okhotsk ' 
 
 13 What countries lie between the bay of Bengal and the Caspian sea 39>Wh«t conn* 
 
 tries, between the Caspian and the Mediterranean ? 40 What countries, between 
 the sea of Japan and the Caspian ? 
 
284 QUESTIONS. 
 
 41 How do you bound Arabia ? 42 Hindoostan ? 43 Farther India ? 44 Persia ? 45 the Chi- 
 nese empire ? 46 Russia in Asia ? 47 Independent Tartary ? 48 Turkey in Asia ? 
 
 49 Which way from Calcutta is Slam ? 60 Madras ? 51 Canton ? 52 Lassa? 63 Surat r 
 54 Delhi.' 
 
 fi5 FFAicA way /r<Mn.)2/e|7po is Constantinople? 56 Astrakhan? 57 Mecca and Med' ? 
 68 Ispahan ? 
 
 69 Which way from Canton is Pekin ? 60 Jeddo ? 61 Siam ? 
 
 62 Which way from Constantinople is Smyrna ? 
 
 63 Which way from Jileppo is Damascus ? 64 Bagdad ? 65 the island of Cyprus ? 
 
 66 "W'Tiere is the Dead sea ? 
 
 67 What mountains between the Black sea and the Caspian ? 
 
 68 Near what lake is Irkutsk ? 
 
 69 Which way from Irkutsk is Tobolsk ? 70 Okhotsk ? 71 Pekin ? 
 
 72 Which way from Astrakhan is Orenburg ? 72 Tobolsk ? 74 Samarcand ? 75 Ispahan ? 
 
 76 Which way from Mecca is Medina ? 77 Mocha ? 78 Muscat ? 
 
 79 Where is mount Sinai ? 80 Are there any large rivers in Arabia ? 
 
 81 Which way from Cabulia Delhi ? 82 Samarcand? 83 Candahar? 84 Ispahan? 
 
 85 Which way does the western coast of Hindoostan run? 86 Which way the eastern coast? 
 
 87 Which way do the Gauts run ? 
 
 88 Where does the Kistna rise and empty ? 89 Where does the Nerbudda empty ? 90 
 
 Which way does it flow ? 
 
 91 What large cities on the Ganges and its branches ? 
 
 92 In what part of Hindoostan is Cashmere ? 
 
 93 Which way from Calcutta is Juggernaut? 
 
 94 What three large towns on the west coast of Hindoostan ? 
 
 95 Which way from Bombay is Surat? 96 Which way, Goa ? 
 
 97 Wliat is the w«'stem coast of Hindoostan called ? 98 What is the eastern coast called .-' 
 
 99 Which way is Ceylon from Calcutta ? 100 Which way, from Madras ? 
 
 101 In what part of Ceylon is Columbo r 102 In what part, Trincomale ? 103 In what 
 
 part, Candia ? 
 104 Which way from Pegu is Siam ? 105 Calcutta ? 106 Ava and Ummerapoora ? 
 107 What river in Farther India empties into the China sea ? 108 What river, into Gie 
 
 gulf of Siam ? 109 What river, into the bay of Bengal ? 
 
 110 Where are the Andaman and Nicobar islands ? 
 
 111 Through what part of China does the Hoang-Ho run ? 112 Through what part, the 
 
 Kian-Ku ? 
 
 113 Where do these rivers empty ? 
 
 1 14 In what part of China is the great wall ? 1 15 la what part of Chinese Tartary is Bal- 
 
 kash lake ? 
 
 116 What large island on the coast of Chinese Tartary ? 
 
 117 What separates the sea of Japan from the Yellow sea ? 
 
 118 In sailing from Okhotsk to Canton, what seas and straits would you para through ? 
 
 119 what islands would you pass ? 
 120 Which way from Japan are the Leoo Keoo isles ? 121 Which way from the Philippine 
 
 islands is Formosa ? 
 122 On which side of Lucon isle is Manilla? 123 Which way from Canton is Hainan 
 
 island ? 
 
 124 What large island in the Arctic ocean ? 
 
 125 What large island in the eastern extremity of tlie Mediterranean ? 
 
 MAP OF AFRICA. 
 1 What sea and straits between Africa and Arabia ? 2 What sea and straitH between Af- 
 rica and Europe ? 
 
 3 What separates the Red sea from the Mediterranean ? 
 
 4 What cape at the eastern extremity of Africa ? 5 at the southern extremity ? 6 at the 
 
 western extremity ? 7 at the northern extremity ? 
 
 8 Where is cape Bajador ? 
 
 9 In what direction do the moimtains of the Moon run ? 10 In what direction the mount 
 
 Atlas chain ? 
 
 11 Where does the Nile empty ? 12 Where does it rise ? 13 In what direction does it nm? 
 
 14 Where does the Niger rise ? 15 Wliich way does it run ? 
 
 16 On which side of cape Verde does the Senegal empty ? 17 On which side, the Gambia? 
 
 18 Which way from the cape of Good Hope to cape Verde ? 19 Which way, to cape Gu- 
 ardafui ? 
 
 SO In what direction does the Red sea ran ? 21 In what direction does the coast of Gui- 
 nea run? 
 
 1 
 
QUESTIONS. 285 
 
 23 Which way from Benin to the cape of Good Hope ? 23 Which way from cape Bojador 
 
 to the straita of Gibraltar ? 
 
 24 WTiich way from cape Guardafiii to the straits of Babelmandel ? 
 
 25 In what part of Africa is Egypt ? 26 lu what part, Morocco ? 
 
 27 On what river does Egypt lie ? 28 "\Vhere are Alexanflria, Rosetta and Damietta ? 
 
 29 Which way from Cairo is Alexandria ? 30 Damietta ? 31 Syene? 32 Suez? 
 
 33 What are the names of the Barbary States ? 34 How far do they extend on the coast? 
 35 Which of the Barbary States is farthest east ? 36 ^Vhich, farthest west ? 
 
 37 AVhich is larthest east, Tunis or Algiers ? 38 What desert between Tripoli and Egypt? 
 
 39 Which way from Tripoli is Ti^nis ? 40 Which way from Tunis is Algiers ? 41 Which 
 . way from Algiers is Morocco ? 42 Which way from Morocco is Fez ? 43 Which way 
 
 is Fez from the straits of G?braltar? 
 44 On which s.de of cape Verde is Sierra Leone ? 45 Which way from Sierra Leone is 
 Sherbro ? 46 Which way from Sherbro is the kingdom of Benin ? 47 Which way 
 from Benin is Benguela ? 4S Which way from Benin are Ashantee and Dahomey ? 
 
 49 On which side of the equator does the Congo empty ? 
 
 50 In what part of South Africa is Capetown ? 51 Which way from Capetownis Lattakoo? 
 52 What country between Abyssinia and Egypt? 53 What river runs through Nabia ? 
 
 34 Wliich way from Syeue is Dongola ? 55 In what part of Africa is Mozambique ? 
 
 56 What are the principal towns on the coast of Zanguebar ? 
 
 57 On what river is the kingdom of Tombuctoo ? 
 
 58 Which way from cape Verde is the city of Totnbuctoo ? 
 
 59 What lies between Tombuctoo and Morocco ? 60 WTiich way from Tripoli is Fezzan. 
 61 JVhich way from Mourzauk is Tombuctoo ? 62 Tripoli ? 63 Cairo ? 
 
 64 What channel between Madagascar and the African coast ? 
 
 65 What islands between Madagascar and the African coast ? 
 
 66 Where is Socotra island ? 67"Where, Bourbon isle ? 
 
 68 Which way from Madagascar is the isle of France ? 69 Which way from the cape of 
 Good Hope is St. Helena ? 70 Wliich way from Benin is St. Helena ? 71 Which way 
 from St. Helena is Ascension island ? 
 
 72 Which way from Gibraltar are the Madeira isles ? 73 Which way from Madeira are 
 the Canary isles ? 
 
 MAP OF GREAT BRITAIN. 
 
 1 What separates Great Britain from Ireland ? 2 Great Britain from France ? 
 
 3 What sea washes the eastern coast of Great Britain ? 
 
 4 What is the southwestern extremity of England called ? 
 
 5 In what part of England does the Thames empty ? 6 In what part, the Severn ? 7 In 
 
 what part, the Mersey ? 8 In what part, the Humber ? 
 9 What are the two principal branches of the Humber ? 
 10 In what part of England does the Trent rise ? 
 n In what part ofEasland, and on what river, is London ? 12 Liverpool 13 Hall ? 14 
 
 Bristol.? 
 
 15 In what part of England is Coventry ? 
 
 16 Which way from London is Bristol ? 17 Liverpod ? 18 Hull? 19 Coventry? 20 Cam* 
 
 bridge ? 21 Oxford ? 22 Portsmouth ? 23 Dover ' 
 24 Which way does the Trent run ? 25 Which way, the Ouse ? 
 
 26 On what river does York stand ? 
 
 27 JVhich way from York are Liverpool and Manchester? 28 Lancaster. 29 Newcastle' 
 
 30 Oh what river does Newcastle stand ? 
 
 31 IVhich way from Newcastle is Berwick upon Tweed ? 32 Durham ? 33 Carlisle ? 
 34 Which way from Liverpool Ls Manchester ? 35 Sheffield ? 36 Leeds ? 
 
 37 Which way from Coventry is Birmingham ? 38 Which way from Bristol is Bath ? 39 
 Which way from London is Windsor ? 
 
 40 In what part of England is Plymouth ? 41 Falmouth ? 
 
 42 How is Wales bounded ? 
 
 43 What river between England and Scotland ? 
 
 44 What rivers run into the sea from the east coast of Scotland { 43 What river, from thQ 
 
 west coast ? 
 
 46 On what river does Glasgow stand ? 
 
 47 Which way from Glasgow is Edinburgh ? 
 43 On what river is Perth ? 49 Aberdeen ? 
 
 60 Which way from Edinburgh is St. Andrews ? 51 Stirling ? 52 Ben Nevis ? 
 .'53 Which way from Glasgow is Loch Lomond ? 
 
 r>4 Whi'-ii wv fin •>'«' <>;Hmpian hills run ' 
 
286 QUESTIONS. 
 
 53 WMc I way does the Loch Ness run ? 56 Which way, Loch Lochy ? 67 Which wa%% 
 Lo a Linne ? 58 Which way from Ben Nevis to Inverness ? 
 
 59 Wlia rivers in Scotland are connected by a canal ? 
 
 60 On wnich side of Scotland are the Hebrides ? 61 On which side, the Orktiey islands ? 
 
 62 Whici way from the Orkney are the Shetland islands ? 
 
 63 On w«iich side of Ireland does the Shannon empty ? 64 On which side, the Barrow \ 
 
 65 On which side, the Liffy ? 
 68 In what part of Ireland, and on what river, is Dublin ? 67 In what part, Londonderry' ? 
 68 In what part, Cork and Waterford ? 69 Galway ? 70 Belfast ? 71 Sligo ? 
 72 "WTiich way from Cork, and on what river, is Limerick ? 73 Which way from Dublin 
 
 is Armagh ? 74 Which way from Waterford is Kilkenny ? 
 
 75 In what part of Ireland is the Giant's Causeway ? 
 
 76 What island midway between Ireland, England and Scotland? 
 
 77 Where is the island of Anglesea ? 78 What large island off the S. coast of England * 
 79 Which way from London is the isle of Wight ? 80 Which way from Liverpool is Dub- 
 
 lin ? 81 Which way from Bristol is Cork? 
 82 Through what rivers, channels, straits and seas, would you pass in sailing from Glas- 
 gow to London r 83 Through what, in sailing from Edinburgh to Bristol ? 
 
 MAP OF THE UNITED STATES 
 
 1 In what direction does the coast of the U. S. run ? 2 In what direction, the Alleghany 
 mouptains ? 3 In what direction, the river Ohio ? 4 In what direction, the St. Law 
 rence ? 5 the Mississippi ? the Connecticut ? the Hudson ? the Delaware ? 
 
 6 What states border on the Atlantic ocean ? 7 What three states, on the gulf of Mexico? 
 8 What six states, on the Mississippi ? 9 What four states, on the Ohio ? 10 What 
 three states, on lake Erie ? 11 What four states, on Lower Canada ? 
 12 What six states are bounded by the parallel of 35<' ? 13 What five states, by the pa- 
 rallel of 36^30'? 
 
 14 What two states lie between the parallel of 35" and 36" SC ? 
 
 15 What four states border on the Delaware ? 
 
 16 What states are separated by the Potomac ? 17 by the Savannah ? 18 by the Con- 
 
 necticut ? 
 
 19 What state reaches from the Atlantic to the lakes ? 
 
 20 What states lie east of the Hudson ? 21 N. W. of the Ohio ? 22 west of the Mississippi.^ 
 
 23 between the Potomac and Delaware ? 24 between the Delaware and Hudson ? 
 25 What are the boundaries of Connecticut ? 26 Of Rhode Island ? 27 Of Vermont ? 
 
 28 Of Alabama ? 36 Massachusetts ? 44 Ohio ? 
 
 29 Of Pennsylvania ? 37 Tennessee ? 45 Missouri ? 
 
 30 Of Maine ? 38 New York ? 46 Dlinois ? 
 
 31 Of Louisiana? 39 North Carolina? 47 Indiana ? 
 
 32 Of Maryland ? 40 New Jersey ? 48 Mississippi ? 
 
 33 Of Georgia ? 41 Kentucky ? 49 Michigan Territory ? 
 
 34 Of New Hampshire ? 42 Delaware ? 60 Arkansaw Territory ? 
 
 35 South Carolina ? 43 Virginia ? 61 Northwest Territory ? 
 
 52 Which way from Louisiana to Maine ? 
 
 53 Which way does the Connecticut run ? 54 Which way, the Hudson ? 65 Which way, 
 
 the Delaware ? 56 Which way, the Susquehannah ? 
 
 57 The Potomac ? 64 Savannah ? 71 Elinois ' 
 
 58 The Rappahannoe ? 65 Alatamaha ? 72 Ouisconsin ? 
 
 59 The Jaaiea ? 66 Mobile ? 73 Red river ? 
 
 60 The Roanoke ? 67 Mississippi ? 74 Arkansaw ? 
 
 61 Cape Fear ? 68 Yazoo ? 75 Missouri ? 
 
 62 Pedee ? 69 Ohio ? 78 Moines ? 
 
 63 Santee ? 70 Kaskaskia ? Ti St. Peters ? 
 
 78 Wliat large rivers empty into Chesapeake bay ? 
 
 79 What large lakes lie wholly in the United States ? 
 
 80 Which way from lake Huron is lake Superior? 81 Michigan ? 82 Erie ? S3 Ontario * 
 
 84 What lake between Huron and Erie ? 
 
 85 Which way from Boston to Quebec ? 86 from New York to Montreal ? 37 from Mon- 
 
 treal to Quebec ? 88 from New York to Boston ? 
 
 89 Which way from Mbany to Montreal ? 90 New York ? 91 Boston ? 92 Detroit ? 
 
 93 Which way from Boston to New York ? 94 New York to Philadelphia ? 95 Philadel- 
 phia to Baltimore ? 96 Baltimore to Washington ? Richmond ? Raleigh ? Colum- 
 bia ? Milledgeville ? New Orleans ? 
 
 97 In what part of Ohio is Cincinnati ? 98 What three states meet near Cinciminti ? 
 
QUESTIOl^S. 287 
 
 99 rVhich way from Cincinnati is Washington ? 100 St. Louis ? 101 Pittsbinrg ' 103 the 
 
 mouth of fhe Ohio ? 103 Michiliraackinac ? 
 104 Which tva^ from the mouth of the Ohio is Pittaburg ? 105 N. Orleans ? 106 St. Louis f 
 107 Which way from Niagara falls ia Quebec .? 108 Boston f 109 Pkiladelphia ? IIC 
 
 Charleston .' 
 Ill What states lie below the parallel of 35° .' 112 Wliat states lie above the parallel of 
 
 42° ? 113 What states are intersected by the paraDel of 40° ? 
 114 What capes at the entrance of Chesapeake bay ? 115 of Delaware bay ? 116 of Massa- 
 chusetts bay ? 
 117 What capea on the coast of N.Carolina? 118 What point at the E.end of Long island? 
 119 What rivers, capes, oceans and hays would you pass in sailing from Philadelphia to 
 
 Baltimore ? 1-20 from Hartford to Albany ? 121 from Wasiiington to New Orieans ? 
 
 122 from Hallowell to Fort Claiborne ? 
 '123 What bay between Maine and New Brunswick ? 124 Into what bay does the Penob. 
 
 scot empty ? 125 Which is farthest east, the Penobscot or Kennebec r 
 126 On which side of Portland is Saco river ? 127 Between what ^ates is Umbagog lake? 
 128 Fn what part of Maine is Portland ? 129 Esstport ? 130 York ? 131 Bath ? 
 
 132 On what river is Hallowell ? 
 
 133 Which way is Portsmouth from Boston ? 134 On what river does Concord stand ' 
 135 Which way from Concord is Portsmouth ? 136 Hanover ? 137 Boston ? 
 
 138 What lake separates Vermont from New York ? 
 
 139 In what part of Vermont is Bennington ? 140 Burlington ? 141 St. Albans ? 
 
 142 Which way from Windsor is Boston ? 143 Montreal ? 144 Montpelier ? 145 Ben- 
 nington ? 
 
 146 What river passes through Massachusetts from N. to S. ? 
 
 147 In what part of Massachusetts is Newhuryport? 
 
 148 Which way from Boston is Salem ? 149 Newhuryport ? 1.50 Plymouth ? 151 New- 
 
 Bedford.' 152 Northampton ? 153 cape Cod? cape Ann? Worcester? 
 
 154 Which way from cape Cod is Nantucket ? 
 
 155 \Vhich way from Nantucket is Martha's Vineyard .- 
 
 156 In what part of Massachusetts is Pittsfleld ? 157 In what part of R. I. is Providence? 
 158 Which way from Providence is Boston ' 159 Newport? 160 Hartford ' 
 
 161 What separates Connecticut from Long island ? 162 On wliat river is Hartford ? 
 163 Which way from Hartford is Boston ? 164 Albany ? 165 New York ? Northampton ? 
 167 What separates New York from Canada ? 168 What lakes are on the boundaries of 
 
 New York ? 
 169' In what direction does the St. Lawrence run ? 170 the Hudson ? 171 the Mohawk ? 
 
 172 What city at the mouth of the Hudson ? 
 
 173 Which way from New York is Boston ? 174 Albany > 175 Philadelphia? 
 
 1 76 On what river is Albany ? 177 Is Albany above or below the mouth of the Mohawk ? 
 
 178 Which way from Albany is Plattsburg ? 179 Seckett's harbour? 180 Buffalo? Nia- 
 gara falls ? 
 
 181 On what lake is Buflfalo ? 182 On what lake, Plattsburg ? 183 On what lake, Sack- 
 ett's harbour ? 184 In what part of New York is Utica ? 
 
 185 IVhich way from Utica is New York city ? 186 Albany ? 187 Plattsburg ? 168 Sack- 
 ett'sharboiu:? 189 Buffalo? 
 
 190 Into what lake does Genesee river empty ? 191 Where does the Genesee rise? 
 
 192 Wliat cape at the southern extremity of New Jersey ? 193 What bay between New 
 Jersey and Delaware ? 
 
 194 Which way from Trenton is Philadelphia ? 195 New York ? 196 Easton ? 
 
 197 In what part of Pennsylvania is Pittsburg ? 198 What two rivers meet at Pittsburg ? 
 
 199 In what state does Alleghany river rise ? 200 In what state, the Monongahela ? 
 
 201 In what part of Pennsylvania is Philadelphia ? 
 
 202 Which way from Philadelphia is New York ? 203 Baltimore ? 204 Pittsburg ? 205 
 
 Harrisburg ? 206 Reading ? 
 207 On what river is Harrisburg ? 208 On what river is Easton ? 
 209 In what direction does the Chesapeake bay run? 210 Through what states does it pass? 
 
 211 On which shore of the Chesapeake is Baltimore ? 
 
 212 Which way from Baltimore is Philadelphia? 213 Washington? 214 Pittsburg ? 215 
 
 Annapolis r 
 216 "WTiat mountains in Virginia ? 217 Which way do they run ? 
 218 What separates Virginia from Ohio ? 219 from Kentucky? 220 frtan Marylan'i ? 
 221 Into what body of water does the great Kanhawa empty? 222 the Roanoke? 233 James? 
 
 224 In what part of Virginia is Norfolk ? 
 
 225 IP7«c A u;cj/ /rornilic.'fwoTirf is Norfolk? 22G Petersburg ? 227 Washington ? 223 
 
 Lvnchbufgr 229 Fredericksburg .- 
 
§88 QUESTIONS. 
 
 230 Which way from Norfolk is Yorktown ? 231 cape CharleB ? 232 cape Henry? 
 «J33 What rivers empty into Pamlico sound ? 
 
 234 In what part of North Carolina is cape Fear ? 
 
 235 On what river is Fayetteville ? 236 Newbern ? 237 Wilmington ? 
 
 238 Which way from Raleigh is Fayetteville ? 239 Newbern ? 240 Plymouth ? 241 Pe- 
 tersburg ? 
 
 242 Which is farthest east, the Santee or Pedee ? 243 Which way from Charleston does 
 the Santee empty ? 
 
 244 Which v>ay from Charleslon is Savannah ? 245 Wilmington ? 246 Columbia ? 247 
 Beaufort f 
 
 248 Which way from Columbia is Fayetteville ? 249 Augusta ? 
 
 250 On what river is Columbia ? 251 Which way from Charleston is Edisto island ? 
 
 252 What river separates Georgia from S. Carolina ? 253 Georgia from Florida? 
 
 254 What rivers unite to form theAlatamaha? 255 On What river does Milledgeville stand? 
 
 256 Which way from Savannah to Augusta ? 257 Milledgeville ? 258 St. Mary's ? 259 
 Sunbary ? ' 
 
 260 What part of Georgia was the country of the Creeks ? 
 
 261 What rivers unite to form the Mobile? 262 What rivers unite to form the Alabama ? ' 
 263 On which side of the Mobile river is the town of Mobile ? 
 
 284 In what part of Alabama is HuntsvUle ? 
 
 265 Which way from Mobile is New Orleans ? 266 Pensacola ? 267 St. Stephens ? 268 
 
 269 What riveiiB separate Mississippi from Louisiana ? 270 On what rivet is Natchez ? 
 271 Does the Yazoo empty above or below Natchez ? 272 What river is the western 
 boundary of Louisiana ? 
 
 273 In what part of Louisiana is New Orleans ? 
 
 274 On what river is Alexandria ? Natchitoches ? 
 
 275 What states are separated by Pearl river ? 276 Into what does the Wachita empty ? 
 277 Which way from New Orleans is Alexandria ? 278 Madisonville ? 279 Pensacola ? 
 
 280 the mouths of the Mississippi ? 281 the mouth of the Sabine r 282 the mouth ot 
 Red river ? 
 283 Which way does the Tennessee run in the first half of its course : 284 Which way in 
 the last half? 2S5 Into what river does the Tennessee empty ? 286 Into what river, 
 the Cumberland ? 
 
 287 On what river is Knoxville ? On wh&t river, Nashville ? On wliat river j ClarksviUe ? 
 
 288 Which way from Nashville is Murfreesborough ? 
 
 289 What rivers empty into the Ohio from Kentucky ? 290 On what river is Louisville ? 
 291 Which way from Frankfort is Louisville? 292 Lexington ? 293 Cincinnati? 
 
 294 JVfiat rivers in Ohio empty into lake Eric ? 295 What, into Ohio river ? 
 
 296 In what part of Ohio is Cincinnati ? 
 
 297 On what river is Columbus ? on what river. Marietta ? on what river, Zanesville ? 
 
 on what river, Chillicothe ? 
 
 298 Which way from Columbus is Cincinnati ? 299 Zanesville ? 300 Chillicothe ? 301 
 
 Cleavelaud ? 302 Marietta ? 
 
 303 What river separates Indiana from Illinois ? 
 
 304 On what river is Vinceunes ? on which side of the river ? 305 In what part of Indi- 
 
 ana is Vevay ? 
 306 Which way from Vincennes ia Cincinnati? 307 St. Louis? 
 308 What river bounds Illinois on tlie east ? 309 on the south ? 310 on the west ? 
 
 311 What rivers empty into the Mississippi from Illinois ? 
 
 312 0nwhat fiver is Kaskaskia? 313 Cahokia ? 314 Shawneetovirn ? 
 
 315 On what river is St. Charles ? 316 St. Genevieve ? 317 cape Girardeau ? 318 New 
 Madrid ? 
 
 319 Which way from St. Louis is St. Charies ? New Madrid ? 
 
 320 Through what straits, rivers and lakes do you pass, in smlirig from lake Michigan to 
 
 lake Erie ? 
 
 321 Between what lakes does Detroit stand ? 322 Which way from Detroit is Michili- 
 
 mackinac ? 323 On which side of kke Michigan is Green bay ? 324 Where does Fox 
 river empty ? Wliere does the Ouiscousin empty ? 
 
 325 Which are the four largest rivers that empty into the Mississippi ? 
 
 326 Which are the three If^rgest rivers that empty into the Missouri ? 
 
 327 On which side of the Missouri does the Yellow Stone empty ? 323 the Platte ? 329 
 
 the Kansas ? 330 the Osage ? 
 S31 Which way does the Missouri run between the Great Falls and Mandan villages ? 
 332 Which way, between Mandan villages and the Great Bend ? 333 Which way, 
 between the Great Beud and the mouth ? 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 THE ancient Greeks and Romans had little knowledge of 
 any portion of the world, except the southern part of Europe, 
 the southwestern part of Asia^ and the northern and north- 
 eastern parts of Africa. In Europe they had no acquaintance 
 with the countries north and east of Germany. In Asia they 
 knew nothing north of the Caspian sea, but they were ac- 
 quainted with India as far east as the Ganges. In Africa 
 they knew little beyond lat. 10'^ N. and little of that perfectly, 
 beyond the immediate coast of the Mediterranean and the 
 banks of the Nile. 
 
 EUROPE. 
 
 Seas. The principal seas were Mare Mediferraneum, or 
 the Mediterranean sea ; Pontus EuximiSi now the Black sea ; 
 Oceanus Germanicus, now the German ocean or North sea; 
 Codanus sinus, now the Baltic sea ; Oceanus Brifannicus, 
 now the British Channel ; jEgeum Mare, now the Archipe- 
 lago ; Propontis, now the sea of Marmora ; and Palus Mceo^ 
 tis, now the sea of Azof. 
 
 Straits. The principal straits were Fretum Gallicum, now 
 the strait of Dover; Fretum Herculeiim, now the strait of Gib- 
 raltar ; the Hellespont, now the Dardanelles ; the Thracian 
 Bosphoi-us, now the straits of Constantinople ; the Cimmeri- 
 an Bosphorus^ now the straits of Jenikale. 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers were Ister, now the Danube ; 
 Padus, now the Po ; Rhodanus, now the Rhone ; Rhenus, 
 iiow the Rhine ; and Alhis, now the Elbe. 
 
 ITALY, 
 
 Name. Italy v/as called Hcsperia by the Greeks, as being 
 West of Greece. It was called Italia, {xom a prince of the name 
 of Italus ; Ausonia, from the Ausones, a people found in La- 
 tium ; (Enoiria, from a prince called OEnotrus ; and Satur- 
 iiia, from haying been the fabled residence of Saturn, after 
 his expulsion from heaven by Jupiter. 
 
 Divisions. The northern part of Italy was styled Gallia 
 Cisalpina. or Gaul on tliis (i. e. tlie Roman) side of the Alps, 
 
 1 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 and the remainder, Italia propria. The southern part was aa- 
 ciently called Magna Gr(Bcia, but this name was not long re- 
 tained. The following table exhibits a comparative view of 
 the ancient and modern divisions. 
 
 tisalpiae Gaul. 
 
 Jincient Divisions. 
 
 Modem Divisions. 
 
 
 ■ Liguria 
 Taurini 
 
 Kingdom of Sardinia. 
 
 
 iKsubres 
 
 
 
 Cenomanni 
 
 
 lul. ' 
 
 Euganei 
 Veneli 
 Carni 
 Hiptria 
 
 ■ Austrian Italy. 
 
 
 Liugones 
 
 Modena, Parma, and part of the 
 
 
 Bou $ church. 
 
 
 'Etruria 
 
 Tuscany and Lucca. 
 
 
 Umbria 
 
 
 
 Picenum 
 
 . States of the church. 
 
 
 Latium 
 
 
 
 Campania 
 
 
 
 Sarnniura 
 
 
 
 Apulia 
 Calabria 
 
 Kingdom of Naples. 
 
 
 Lucania 
 
 
 
 Brulii 
 
 
 of the 
 
 Italy Proper. 
 
 Mountains. The principal range of mountains was Alpes, 
 the Alps, which in dilferent parts of their course, received 
 different denominations, as, Alpes MaritimcB^ Cottits, Graiw, 
 PinnincB, Rk(Btlc(B, and Julim, or Carnicce. The Appen- 
 nines, Appennhms^ commenced at the southern extremity of 
 Italy, and running from S. E. to N. W., through the whole 
 extent of the peninsula, united with the Alps near the shore 
 of the Mediterranean. 
 
 Lakes. The principal lakes were Verbanus^ now Mag- 
 giore ; Ceresius, now Lugano ; Larius, now Como ; and Bc" 
 nacus, now Garda. All these v/ere at the foot of the Alps, 
 near the northern frontier. Tkrasymenus, now Perugia, was 
 in the centre of Italy. Near this lake was one of the memo- 
 rable defeats of the Romans by Hannibal. 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers in Gallia Cisalpina, were the 
 Padusy called also the Eridanus, now the Po ; and the Athe^ 
 sis or Adige. The branches of the Po were the Ticinus or Tesi- 
 no, the outlet of lake^Verbanus; the Mincius or Mincio, the 
 outlet of lake Benacus; and the Trebia, which came from the 
 south, and united with the Po near Placentia, Tlie Rubicon^ 
 which Caesar crossed when he advanced to make himself 
 master of the Roman empire, was a small stream separating 
 Italia propria from Gallia Cisalpina. 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 The principal rivers in Italia propria, were the Amus, or 
 Arno, on which Florence now stands, and the Tiber, which 
 passes by Rome, Below the Tiber were the Liris and the 
 Vultumus. 
 
 Seas, Bays, and Gulfs, The 3fare Hadriaticum, sive su 
 perum, or Upper sea, now the Gulf of Venice, bounded Italy 
 on the east ; the Mare Tuscum, Tyrrhenum, sive inferum, or 
 Lower sea, on ihe west ; and the 3Iare Ionium, or Ionian sea, 
 on the south. The Ligusticus sinus, now the gulf of Genoa, 
 washeti the coast of Li^uria. The other bays were the Crater, 
 now the bay of Naples ; the Pcestanus sinus, now the gulf of 
 Salenio; the Laus sinus, now the gulf of Policastro; the 
 TerinEus sinus, now the gulf of Euphemia ; the Tarentinus 
 sinus, now the gulf of Tarento ; the Urias sinus, now the 
 gulf of Manfredonia, and the Tergestinus sinus, now the gulf 
 of Trieste. 
 
 Cities. The principal cities in Liguriawere Genua, now 
 Genoa, and Niccee, now Nice. The capital of the Taurini 
 was Augusta Taurinorum, now Turin. The chief cities 
 among the Insubres were Medhdanum, now Milan, and Ti- 
 cinum, near the mouth of the Ticinus, now^ Pavia. Among 
 tht Ceiiomanni were Mantua, the birth-place of Virgil, and 
 Cremona, both of which still retain their ancient names. Pa- 
 tavium, now Padua, the birth-place of TJ?y, belonged to the 
 Veneti; and Aqmleia,which was o/ice celebrated for its gran 
 dear, to the Canii. The chief city of Istria was Fola, situa- 
 ted at the head of a deep inlet or creek. Ravenna, on the 
 coast of the Adriatic, was celebrated as the residence of the 
 emperors of the west, while Rome was possessed by barbari- 
 ans, and also for a port and arseral, made there by Augustus, 
 for his fleets. In the interior, west of Ravenna, were Bono- 
 nia, now Bologna ; Mvtina, now Modena; together with Par- 
 ma and Placentia, both of which retain their ancient names. 
 
 The principal cities in Etruria were Pises, now Pisa; Luca, 
 now Lucca ; and Florentia, now Florence. In Umbria, on 
 the shore of the Adriatic, near the Rubicon, was Ariminium, 
 now Rimini ; and below it was Pisaurum, or Pesaro. Inland 
 was Urhinum, now Urbino, Nuceria, at the foot of the Appen- 
 nines; and considerably below, Spoletum, now Spoleto. On 
 the coat of Picenum was Ancona, which still retains its name. 
 In the interior, considerably below, was Ascuhim, now Aseoli 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 Rome, the principal city in Latium, and the capital of the 
 whole Roman empire, was built on seven hills, on the banks 
 of the Tiber, 15 miles from its mouth. Ostia, so called from 
 its situation at the mouth of the Tiber, was the ancient port of 
 Rome. Below it was Circeii, fabled as the residence of the 
 enchaarer, Circe, and now called Monte Circello. About 12 
 miles S. E. of Rome was T^Mscw/Mm, where was Cicero's cele- 
 brated villa, the scene of his Tusculan disputations. Pr<E- 
 neste, the retreat of Horace, was east of this ; and still farther 
 east was Arpinum, the birth-place of Marias and Cicero. 
 Tibur, now Tivoli, was on the Anio, and was famous for the 
 villas in its vicinity. 
 
 The capital of Campania was Capua, celebrated for the 
 luxury of its inJiabitants ; and below it, on the coast, was 
 Neapolis, at iirst called Parthenope, and now Naples, the fa- 
 vorite residence of Virgil, who is said to be buried near the 
 promontoiy of Misenum. Herculaneum and Pompeii were 
 considerable cities, rrear the foot of Mount Vesuvius, a few 
 miles from Naples, and are remarkable for having been over- 
 whelmed by an eruption of the volcano, A. D. 79. Cum(S 
 was the residence of the Cumsean sybil, who conducted ^neas 
 to the shades below. The most noted cities in Samniumwere 
 JBeneventum, nuw Benevento, and Caudium, 
 
 \enusia, now Venosa, in Apulia, was the birth-place of 
 Horace. Northeast of Venusia was CannxB, famous for the 
 fourth and the greatest victory obtained by Hannibal over the 
 Romans. In Calabria, were Brundusium on the Adriatic, 
 now Brindisi, where the Romans usually embarked for Greece; 
 Hydruntum, now Otranto ; and Tarentum, now Tarento. In 
 Lucania were Pccstum, celebrated for roses; MefapOntum,the 
 residence of Pythagoras ; and Syharis, or Thurium, so infa- 
 mous for the effemiimcy of its inhabitants, that a Sybarite was 
 applied, as a term of reproach to a man of dissolute manners* 
 Among the Brutii was Rhegium,, now Regio, quite on the toe 
 of Italy, near the strait which divided it from Sicily. Here 
 St. Paul first landed in his voyage to Italy. 
 
 Roads. The principal Roman roads were the Via Appia, 
 from Rome, through Capua and Beneventum, to Brundusium ; 
 the Via Flaminia, from Rome, in a northerly direction, to 
 Ariminium ; the Via Aurelia, which passed along the coasts 
 of Etruria and Liguria, into Gaul ; the Via Claudia, which 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 branched off" from the Via Flamina, at the Pons Milvius, near 
 Rome, and passing through the more inland part of Etruria, 
 joined the Via Aurelia at Lucca. 
 
 ITALIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Sicily, Sicilia, the largest island in the Mediterranean, 
 anciently called Sicania^ from the Sicani, a people who pos- 
 sessed the island, and Trinacria from its triangular shape, 
 was so fertile, that it was esteemed one of the granaries of 
 the Roman empire. 
 
 Capes. There were three celebrated promontories in Sicily, 
 P^lorum in the east, adjacent to Italy, now Faro ; Fachynum^ 
 at the southern extremity of the island; and LilybcLum, in the 
 west. Each of these promontories had a celebrated temple. 
 At Pelorum was that of Neptune ; at Pachynum that of Apol- 
 lo, and on Mount Eryx, near Lilyboeum, that of Venus, who 
 was hence called Erycina. The ancients fabled, that the gi- 
 ant Tryphoeus was buried under Sicily, Pelorum and Pachy- 
 num being placed on each arm, Lilyboeum on his feet, and 
 Mount iEtna on his head ; and thatthe earthquakes and erup- 
 tions of ^Etna were caused by his attempts to move. 
 
 Scylla and Charyhdis. A little south of the promontory of 
 Pelorum, on the Sicilian shore, was Charybdis, the famous 
 whirlpool, and above it, on the Italian shore, was Scylla^ a 
 dangerous rock, two objects of terror to ancient mariners in 
 passing tiirough the strait, but now little regarded. 
 
 Chief cities. The famous city of Syracusce, still called Sy- 
 racuse, was oil the eastern coast of the island. It was taken 
 by Marcellus in the second Punic war, after a siege of three 
 years, during which it was defended by the ingenuity of the 
 celebrated Archimedes. Agrigentum was a large and splen- 
 did city on the southern coast. Panornms, on the northern 
 coast, occupied the site of Palermo, the present capital of 
 Sicily. Enna, in the centre of the island, was famous as the 
 place from which Proserpine was carried away by Pluto to 
 the infernal regions. 
 
 Islands. North of Sicily were some volcanic islands, called 
 InsulcB JSolicB, VulcanicB^ or LlpartB, from iEolus and Vulcan, 
 who were sup]»osed to have their dwellings here, and from 
 Lipara, the principal island. Here were the forges of Vulcan, 
 described by the poets, particularly by Homer and Virgil. Off 
 1* 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 the western extremity of the island were the jEgades^or j^Egateg 
 Insula, celebrated for the victory gained by the Romans over 
 the Carthaginians, which ended the first Punic war. South 
 of Sicily was Melite, now Malta, the island on which St. Paul 
 was shipwrecked in his voyage to Rome. 
 
 Sardinia, a large island lying N. W. of Sicily, was called 
 by the Greeks Ichnusa. The air was considered very un- 
 wholesome, and the island was noted for the wormwood and 
 bitter herbs which it produced. The principal town was Ca- 
 larisj now Cagliari. 
 
 Corsica was inhabited by a race of men of savage charac- 
 ter, but the Romans planted two colonies here, one called 
 Mariana, from Marius, and the other Aleria, from Sylla. 
 
 Ilva, now Elba, was between the coast of Etruria and the 
 extreme northern point of Corsica. 
 
 BRITAIN. 
 
 The island of Great Britaip was little known until it was 
 invaded by the Romans under Julius Csesar, about 55 years 
 before the birth of Christ. At that time it was divided into a 
 number of independent states, each governed by a separate 
 chief. The northern part was called Caledonia, now Scot- 
 land, and was inhabited by the Picti, or Picts. 
 
 Capes. The principal capes were Bolerium Promontorium, 
 now the Land's end, and Ocrinum, now the Lizard point, at 
 the southwestern extremity of the island ; and Orcas, now 
 Duncansby head, at the northern extremity. 
 
 Rivers and Bays, The principal rivers were the Tamesis, 
 now the Thames, Sabrina, now the Severn, Abus, the Hum- 
 ber, Glota, the Clyde, and in Ireland, Senus, the Shannon. 
 The principal bays were Metaris Aestuarium, now the Wash, 
 Sahrinm .iestuarium,thii Bristol channel, and JBodotria sinus, 
 the Frith of Forth. 
 
 Chief owns. Among the principal towns were Londinum, 
 now London ; Durovernum, now Canterhnry ; Venta Belga- 
 rum, now Winchester ; AqucB solis, now Bath, and Eboracum, 
 now York. 
 
 Islands. The principal islands were Vectis, now the isle 
 of Wi2:ht, near the southern coast ; the Cassiterides, now the 
 Scilly isles ; Mona, now the isle of Anglesea ; Monabia, now 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 the isle of Man ; Hcbudes, now the Hebrides or Western isles 
 of Scotland ; Orcades^ now the Orkneys ; and the Ultima 
 Thule, supposed by D'Anville to be the Shetland islands. 
 Ilibernia, now Ireland, was separated from Britannia by the 
 j\Iare Hibernicum or Verginium mare, now the Irish sea, or 
 St. George's channel. 
 
 SPAIN. 
 
 Name. Spain, in Latin Hispania^was called by the Greeks 
 Iberia, from the river Iberus, and Hesperia, or Hesperia UT- 
 iima, from its remote situation towards the west. 
 
 Divisions. Spain was originally divided by the Romans into 
 Hispania Citerior, or Hither Spain, and Hispania Ulterior^ 
 or Farther Spain. Afterwards Hispania Ulterior was again 
 divided' into two provinces, Boetica and Lusitania, at the same 
 time that Hispania Citerior assumed the name of Tarraco- 
 nensis, from Tarraco, its capital. Tarraconensis corresponds 
 with the northern, central and eastern parts of modern Spain, 
 and Boetica with the souchern. Lusitania nearly agrees with 
 modern Portugal. 
 
 Capes. The most noted capes were Artabrumpromontori- 
 wn, now cape Finisterre ; Sacrum, now cape St. Vincent ; 
 Charidemum, Jiowcape Gata ; and mount Caipe, now the rock 
 of Gibraltar. Opposite to Calpe, on the African side of the 
 Fretum Herculeum, now the strait of Gibraltar, was mount 
 Abyla. These two rocks, according to the fables of antiquity, 
 were once united, until Hercules rent them asunder in order 
 to open a communication between the Mediterranean sea and 
 the Atlantic ocean, whence they are called the pillars of Her- 
 cules. 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers were Iberus, now Ebro ; Bm- 
 tis, now Guadalquivir ; Anas, now Guadiana ; Tagus, which 
 still retains the same name, and Durius, now Duero. 
 
 Towns. The most noted towns in Tarraconensis, were iZcr- 
 da, now Lerido, celebrated for the resistance which it made 
 against Caesar ; Numantia, which resisted the Roman armies 
 fourteen years, and was utterly destroyed by Scipio Africa- 
 nus ; J5i76i/?*s, southeast of Numantia, the birth-place of the 
 poet Mart' a) ; Saguntum, famous for a siege by Hannibal, 
 which was the commencement of the second Punic war ; To- 
 letum, now Toledo ; and Carthago nova, now Carthagena, 
 celebrated for its fine harbour. 
 
8 ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 Among the towns in Boetica were Malaca^ now Malaga ; 
 Gades, now Cadiz ; Hispalis^ now Seville, and not far from 
 it Italica^ the birth-place of the Emperor Trajan ; and CoV' 
 duba, now Cordova, the birth-place of the two Senecas and 
 Liican. In Lusitania, at the mouth of the Tagus, was Olisipf 
 po, now Lisbon, and near the mouth of the Duero, on the site 
 of the present city of Oporto, was the port of Calle, which 
 having been corrupted in Portugal, has given name to the 
 whole country. 
 
 Islands. The islands of Majorca and Minorca were called 
 by the Romans Baleares insulce. Their inhabitants were cele- 
 brated for their skill in the use of the sling. Southwest of 
 these were the PityuscB, now Pine islands, consisting of EhU" 
 sus, now Ivica, and Ophiusa, now Formentera^ 
 
 GAUL. 
 
 Divisions. Gaul, called by the Romans Gallia Transalpina, 
 and by the Greeks Galafia, was originally divided among 
 three great nations, the Belgm^ in the north, the CeltcB, in the 
 middle, and the Aquitaniy in the south. Under the Romans it 
 was divided into four provinces, 1. Gallia Belgica^ compre- 
 heoding the northeastern part of the present kingdom of 
 France, the southern part of the kingdom of the Netherlands, 
 and small portions of Germany and Switzerland; 2. Gallia 
 Lugdunensis, correspoiidiog with the central and western 
 parts of France ; 3. Aquitania, now the southwestern quarter 
 of France ; and 4. Gallia Narbonensis, or Provincia, now 
 the southeastern part of France. 
 
 Bai/s, Sfc. The principal bodies of water which washed 
 the coast, were Oceanus Aquitanicus, now the bay of Biscay; 
 Oceanus Britannicus, now the British channel, which was 
 connected with Oceanus 6'cr»i«77icws, or the German ocean, by 
 Fretum Gallicum, now the strait of Dover ; and on the Medi- 
 terranean, G alliens sinus, now the gulf of Lyons. 
 
 Rivers, Sfc. The principal rivers were EJienus, the Rhine, 
 Mosella, the Moselle, Mosa, the Meuse, Scaldis, the Scheldt, 
 Sequana, the Seine, Liger^ the Loire, Garumna, the Garonne, 
 and Rhodanus, the Rhone, which passed through lacus Lema- 
 nus^ now the lake of Geneva, and afterwards received the 
 Arar, now the Saone. 
 
 Towns, Among the towns in Gallia Belgica, were Aii^sta 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 9 
 
 Trevirorum, now Tieves, Colonia Agrippina, now Cologne, 
 Lugdunum Baiavorum, now Leyden, and Conjluentes, now 
 Cdbleutz. In Gallia Lugdunensis, were Lugdunum,now Ly- 
 ons, at the junction of the Arar and Rhodanus; Bibracte, af- 
 terwards Augustodunum^ and now Autun ; Lutetia Parisio- 
 mm, now Paris, and Rotomagus, now Rouen. In Aquitania 
 were Burdigala, now Bourdeaux, and Avaricum, now Bour- 
 ges. In Gallia IVarbonensis were Tolosa, now Toulouse, iVar- 
 bo, now Narbonne, Vienna, now Vienne, Arelate, now Aries, 
 Mass'dia, now Marseilles, and Foinim Julii, the birth-place of 
 Agricola, and celebrated for its port, which was excavated by 
 art, to contain a Roman fleet. 
 
 Islands. The principal islands were C<Esarea, now Jersey, 
 Sarmia, now Guernsey, Riduna, now Aiderney, Uxantis, now 
 Ushant, Vindilis, now Belle Isle, Uliarus, now Oleron, and 
 in the Mediterranean, Stoecades, now Hieres. 
 
 GERMANY. 
 
 Extent. Ancient Germany extended from the Rhine to the 
 Vistula, and from the Danube to the Baltic. No part of the 
 country south of the Danube was irfcluded in it. 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers were the Vistula, the Viadrus^ 
 now the Oder, Alhis,now the Elbe, Visurgis, now the Weser, 
 Amisia, now the Ems, Mxnus, now the Maine, and Isier^ 
 now the Danube. 
 
 Face of the country/. Germany anciently contained aii im- 
 mense forest, called Hercynia silva, or Hercynian forest, 
 which was so vast that it seemed to cover the whole country. 
 Caesar's army were nine days in crossing it, and men some- 
 tin>es travelled longitudinally sixty days without coming to 
 any boundary. 
 
 Nations. Germany was inhabited by many different na- 
 tions, among which were the Frisii, alonof the coast near the 
 mouth of the Rhine ; and east of the Frisii, the Chauci, dis- 
 tinguished by Tacitus as the most just and noble of all the 
 German nations. The Catti were a great and powerful na^ 
 tion in the west of Germany, and in the southwest comer of 
 the country were the Alemanni, from whom Germany is call- 
 ed by the French Alemagne. The Boii occupied Bohemia, 
 in the centre of Germany, and the Quadi, Moravia. The 
 Lygii were a powerful nation on the Vistula. The wholo 
 
10 ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 coast of the Baltic, was occupied by various tribes of the 
 Vindili, or Vandals. Towards the mouth of the Elbe, in the 
 country now called Holstein, were two illustrious nations ; 
 on one side the Angli, on the other the Saxones. The Suevi, 
 consisted of numerous tribes in the north of Germany. 
 
 GREECE. 
 
 Name. Greece was commonly called by the natives Hellas, 
 and the people were called Hellenes. By the poets, however, 
 the inhabitants are called Achaziy Danui, Pelasgi, Argivi, 
 lones. Dares, JEoles, &c. 
 
 Divisions. Greece was anciently divided into Peloponnesus, 
 Greece proper, Thessaly, Epirus, and Macedonia; but after 
 the Romans conquered the country, they divided it into two 
 provinces, viz, Achaia, which comprehended Peloponnesus 
 and Greece proper, and Macedonia, which comprehended 
 Macedonia, Thtssaly and Epirus. 
 
 Subdivisions. Peloponnesus was divided into Argolis, La^ 
 conia, 3Iessenia, Elis, Ackaia, and Arcadia. Elis was sub- 
 divided into Triphylia in the south, Pisatis in the middle, 
 and Coeele in the north, and Achaia compr*^ bended the dis- 
 tricts of Syconiti and (^orinthm. — Greece proper was divided 
 into Attica, M?garis, Batia, Phoch, Locris, ^Etolia and 
 Acarnania. Locris was divided between three tribes, the 
 Locri Ozolae, inhabiting a district to the southwest of Phoeis, 
 and the Locri Opuritii and Locri EpiCifiemidii to the north- 
 east. — Thessaly vvas divided into Phthiotis, Magnesia, Pe- 
 lasgiotis, Perrhabia, Esii(Zotis, Aperantia, Dolopia, and 
 Tkessaliotis. Epirts comprehended Molossia, Tkesprotia, 
 Chaonia, and Orestvs. Macedonia was possessed by several 
 tribes whose situatiorss are not correctly known. The princi- 
 pal districts in the south were Eli/miotis, Pieria, Mygaonia, 
 and the peninsula of Ckalcidicc, which included the sub- 
 peninsulas of Pallene and Sithonia. 
 
 Bays and Straits. The principal bavs were Corinthiacus 
 sinus, now the ffulf of Lepanto, along the northern coast of 
 Peloponnesus; Saronicus sinus, now the gulf of Engia, be- 
 tween Attica and Argolis ; Argolicus sinus, now the gulf of 
 Napoli, between Argolis and Laconia; Thermaicus sinus, now 
 the gulf of Salonica, s^nd Strymonicus siniis, now the gulf of 
 Contessa. 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 11 
 
 Rivers, The principal rivers in Peloponnesus were Euro* 
 taSf and Alpheus ; in Greece proper, Achelous^ Asopus, JE»c- 
 nus Cephissus, a large river which discharged itself into lake 
 Copais in BcEotia, and Ilissus and Cephissus, two small rivers 
 in Attica, which united below Athens and passed into the sea; 
 in Thessaly, Penevs^ a large river, which received numerous 
 branches, and near its mouth p2issed through the celebrated 
 vale of Tempe, between Mount Ossa and Olympus ; in Epi- 
 rus, Avas, Arethon^ and the celebrated Acheron, which the 
 poets have placed among the rivers of the infernal regions ; 
 and in Macedonia, Haliacmon, Astreeus, Axius, and Strymon. 
 
 Mountains. The nfost celebrated mountains in Peloponne- 
 sus were CyUene^ in the northern part of Arcadia, said to be 
 the birth-place of Mercury, and Li/ccbus, in the southern part 
 of the same district, a favorite residence of Pan and the Syl- 
 van deities. In Attica, near Athens, were Hymc^fMs, celebrated 
 for its honey, and PenteUais, noted for its marble quarries. 
 In the southwest part of Boeotia were Helicon, the famous 
 abode of Apollo and the Muses, and Citharon, on which 
 were performed the sacred rites of Bacchus. In Phocis was 
 the lofty Parnassus, sacred to Apollo and the Muses. In Lo- 
 cris was mount (JEta, on the borders of the Malian gulf. Be- 
 tween the foot of the mountain and the gulf was the famous 
 pass of Thermopylae, only 25 feet broad in the narrowest 
 part, where Leonidas and his 300 Spartans resisted for three 
 days the Persian army, amounting to several millions, under 
 Xerxes. In Thessaly, on the north side of the Peneus, was 
 Olympus, represented in ancient fable as the residence of the 
 gods, and on the south side Ossa, which, as the poets say, 
 the giants, in their wars with the gods, placed upon mount 
 Pe.lion, that with more facility they might scale the battle- 
 ments of heaven. , 
 
 Towns. In Argolis was Argns, near the head of Argolicus 
 Sinus, a little N. E, of which was Mycena, the royal city of 
 Agamemnon, and northwest of Mycenae was Nemea, celebra- 
 ted for the Nemean games, and also for the victory of Hercu- 
 les over the Nemean lion. The capital of Laconia, and one 
 of the most powerful cities of Greece, was Sparta or LacedcB' 
 mon, on the river Eurotas, about 30 miles from its mouth. 
 On the promontory of Taenarus, at the southern extremity of 
 Laconia, was a temple of Neptune, and a deep cavern, which 
 
12 ANCIENT WORLD. ^^ 
 
 according to ancient fable, was the entrance to the infernal 
 regions. The capital of Messenia was Messene. In Elis, on 
 the southern bank of the Alpheus, was Olympiay memorable 
 for the Olympic games, which were celebrated in its neigh- 
 borhood for five days in succession at the end of every fourth 
 year. From these games was derived the Grecian mmle of 
 computing time, by Olympiads. In Achaia were JEjgium, 
 where the states of Achaia used to meet ; Sicyon^ the oldest 
 city of Greece, and the famous city of Corinth^ situated on the 
 narrow isthmus which separates the Saronic and Corinthian 
 gulfs. On this isthmus were celebrated the Isthmian games in 
 honor of Neptune. In Arcadia is the c^ebrated city of Man- 
 tinea, where Epaminondas, the Theban general, lost his life, 
 in the memorable victory which he obtained over the Lacede- 
 monians. 
 
 In Attica, on the coast, was Eleusis, celebrated for the 
 Eleusian mysteries, in honor of Ceres and Proserpine. Oppo- 
 site Eleusis, and separated from it by a very narrow sea, was 
 the island of Salamis, where the Persian fleet was defeated 
 by the Athenians under the command of Themislocles. The 
 capital of Attica was the illustrious city of Athens, the birth- 
 place of many of the most eminent philosophers and poets of 
 antiquity. It was situated between the small rivers Ilissus and 
 Cephissus, and had three ports, the principal of which was 
 more than six miles from the city, and connected with it by 
 high walls. Northeast of Athens was Marathon, celebrated 
 for the defeat of the Persians by the Greeks under Miltiades. 
 
 In Boeotia, a little north of mount Cithseron, was PlatfBa, 
 celebrated for the defeat of 300,000 Persians under Mardo- 
 nius by the Lacedemonians under Pausanias. A little west of 
 Platsea was Leuctra, memorable for the signal defeat of the 
 Lacedemonians by the Thebans ynder Epaminondas. In the 
 N. W. part of Ba3otia was CheroiKsa, the birth-place of Plu- 
 tarch, and memorable for the defeat of the Athenians br 
 Philip, king of Macedon, which put an end to the liberties of 
 Greece. Thebes, the capital of Bceotia, was the birth-place of 
 Pindar, and of the celebrated generals Pelopidas and Epami- 
 nondas, under whom it became for a short time the most 
 powerful city in Greece. 
 
 In Phocis, at the foot of mount Parnassus, and near the 
 Castalian fountain, was Delphi^ famous for the temple and 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 15 
 
 oracle of Apollo. Delphi was also called Pytlio, from the 
 serpent of that name, which was killed by Apollo, in honor of 
 whom the Pythian games were celebrated. In Locris, near 
 the entrance of the Corinthian gulf, was Naupactus^ a cele- 
 brated naval station. In Acarnania, near the entrance of the 
 Ambracian gulf, was Actium^ famous for the naval fictory ob- 
 tained by Augustus over Anthony. Near Pharsalus, in the 
 centre of Thessaly, were the plains of Pharsalia, celebrated 
 for the memorable defeat of Pompey by Caesar. 
 
 In Macedonia were Pydna^ often mentioned by Demos- 
 thenes ; Pella, the capital, and birth-place of Philip and his 
 son Alexander the great; Thessalonica, a city known from 
 the epistles of St. Paul to the Thessalonians ; Potidcea^ cele- 
 brated in the orations of Demosthenes, and Stagira,ihe birth- 
 place of Aristotle. 
 
 Thrace extended from Macedonia to the Euxine sea. 
 Though a barbarous country in the interior, it had many 
 Greek colonies on the coast. Among the towns were Philippic 
 celebrated for the defeat of Brutus and Cassius by Anthony 
 and Augustus ; JSnos, at the mouth of the Hebrus, now the 
 Maritza ; Byzantium^ now Constantinople ; and Adrianopolis, 
 now Adrianople. 
 
 GRECIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 Crete, now Candia, the largest of the Grecian Islands, was 
 celebrated as the birth-place of Jupiter. It was famous also 
 for its hundred cities, the principal of which were Gnosus, 
 Gortyna, and Cydonia. In the centre of the island was mount 
 Ida, where it is pretended that Jupiter was nursed in his in- 
 fancy. 
 
 Euboea, now Negropont, the island next in size, extended 
 along the coast of Attica, Boeotia and Locris. Opposite Aulis, 
 in Boeotia, the channel was very narrow, and had the name 
 ofEuripus. 
 
 The other principal islands in the iEgean sea, near the 
 coast of Greece, beginning in the north, were Thasos, re- 
 markable for its marble quarries, Lemnos, fabled to have re- 
 ceived Vulcan, when he fell from heaven, and Scyros. South- 
 east of Attica and Eubcea was the cluster called the Cyclades 
 consisting of Andros, Tenos^ Delos, Paros, Naxos, Amorgos^ 
 Melos^ Ceos, and several others, spread in a semicircular form 
 
 2 
 
14 ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 - :-"'•-— ^- . " . ■ . .' ■..■ . — ,' ■' ,' , ., ■ v.T'.'.yjnM.i "a 
 
 around Delos as a centre. Delos was the birth-place of Apollo 
 and Diana, Naxos was celebrated for the worship of Bacchus^ 
 and Paros was famous for its fine white marble. 
 
 The principal islands near the western coast of Greece, be- 
 ginning^ in the north, were Corcyra^ now Corfu, memorable 
 for having given occasion to the Peloponnesian wars ; Leu- 
 cadia, at the S. W. extremity of which was the celebrated 
 rocky promontory, where disappointed lovers threw them- 
 selves into the sea ; Ithaca, now Theaki, famous as the resi- 
 dence of Ulysses ; Cephalenia, now Cefalonia ; Zacyntkus^ 
 now Zante ; and Cythera, now Cerigo, sacred to Venus. 
 
 REMAINDER OF EUROPE. 
 
 North of Germany was Chersonesus Cimbrica, now Den- 
 mark, and still farther north, on the opposite side of the Bal- 
 tic, was Scandinavia, comprising Sweden and Norway, a 
 country very little known to the ancients, who appear to have 
 considered it as consisting of a number of islands. 
 
 On the east of Germany was Sarmatia, now Russia. It was 
 inhabited by many barbarous and almost unknown tribes. On 
 the shores of the Baltic were the Venidi ; and on the shores 
 of the Palus Mseotis were the Jazyges. Among the other 
 tribes were the Rozolani, Budini, Agathyrsi, Geloni, and 
 Bastarni. Among the rivers were the Hypanis, now the Bog ; 
 the Borysthenes, now the Dnieper; the T'aw«is,now theDon, 
 and the Rka, now the Volga. 
 
 Immediately below the Danube, from its source to the 
 mouth of the CEnus or Inn, was Vindelicia. In the S. W. 
 part of Vindelicia was Lacus Brigantinus, now the lake of 
 Constance ; and in the angle of two rivers, Vindo and Licus, 
 from which the name of the nation is derived, was Augusta 
 Vindelicorum, now Augsburg. South of Vindelicia was RkcB' 
 tia, bounded on the w<-st by the Helvetii or Swiss, south by 
 Italy, and east byNoricura. It included the southeastern part 
 of Switzerland, and parts of Bavaria and the Austrian do* 
 minions. 
 
 East of Vindelicia, and separated from it by the great river 
 CEnus or Inn, was Noricum. At the junction of the Inn and 
 Danube was Boiodumm now Passau. 
 
 East of Noricum was Pannoma, lying along the Danube 
 ' as far aa the mouth of the river Savus or Save. It included 
 
, ANCIENT WORLD. 15 
 
 the western portion of the present kingdom of Hungary and 
 some other parts of the Austrian dominions. Vindobofia, 
 now Vienna, was in this country. 
 
 South of Pannonia, and bounded west by the Adriatic and 
 east by Moesia, was lUyricum, the two principal divisions of 
 which were Liburnia and Dalraatia. Liburnia forms now a 
 part of Croatia, but Dalmatia retains its ancient name. 
 
 Mcesia was bounded west by Pannonia and lllyricum, south 
 by Macedonia and Thrace, east by the Euxine, and north by 
 the Danube. It occupied the position of the present provinces 
 of Servia and Bulgaria in Turkey. 
 
 On the northern bank of the Danube was the vast province 
 of Dacia, comprehending what is now Wallachia, Moldavia, 
 Transylvania, and a part of Hungary. The Jazyges, a Sar- 
 matian tribe, separated it from Pannonia. The GetcB were 
 associated with the Daci in language and territoiy. 
 
 ASIA MINOR. 
 
 Extent. Asia Minor comprised all the provinces on the 
 peninsula included between the Euxine, iEgean, and Medi 
 terranean seas. 
 
 Divisions. The provinces on the coast of the Euxine were 
 Pontus, Paphlagonia and Bithynia. Along the shore of the 
 iEgean sea were Mysia^ Lydia and Caria. The coast of 
 Mysia was called Troas, and the coast of Lydia, jEolia and 
 Ionia. There were also some Ionian cities on the coast of 
 Caria ; and the southwest coast of Caria was called Doris. 
 East of Caria was Lycia, and east of Lycia was Pamphyliay 
 with Pisidia to the north, and to the northeast Isauria and 
 Lycaonia. East of Pamphylia was Cilicia^ which was divided 
 into two parts, Cilicia Trachea or the rugffed Cilicia, and C'i- 
 licia Campestris or the level Cilicia. Li the interior of the 
 peninsula were the large provinces of Phnygia, Galatia and 
 Cavpadocia. The eastern part of Cappadocia was called ^r- 
 menia Minor. 
 
 ^fountains. The Mount Taurus range commenced at the 
 Sacrum promontorium on the coast of Lycia. The principal 
 chain runs in an easterly direction, parallel with the southern 
 coast, but its branches extended to almost every part of the 
 peninsula. The principal single mountains were Olympus m 
 Bithynia, Ida in Mysia, and Sypylus and Tmolus in Lydia, 
 
16 ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 Rivers. The principal rivers whiclj. flowed into the Euxine 
 were the Halys^ the Lycus and the Sangarius. The Granicus, 
 ■ where Alexander first defeated the Persians, discharged it- 
 self into the Propontis. The Paciolusy whose sands were 
 minified with o-old, tiiid the 31aandei\ce\thvated for its wind- 
 ing course, discharged themselves into the ^Egean sea. 
 
 Cities, Among the principal cities in Pontus were Ama~ 
 sia, the birth-place of Strabo the geographer, and Trapezus, 
 now Trebisond; in Paphlagonia, Sliiope, the birth-place of 
 Diogenes; in Bithyn ia, iVlc^a, famous for the general council 
 which was held here, A. D. 325, and which formed the Ni- 
 cene creed ; and Prusa^ at the foot of mount Olympus. Troy^ 
 the capital of Troas, and famous for the ten years' siege 
 which it sustained against the Greeks, B. C. 1184, was near 
 mount Ida, on a small river which discharged itself into the 
 sea near the entrance of the Hellespont, 4 miles below the 
 city. In the S. W. part of Mysia was Pergamus, the birth-place 
 of Galen, and the seat of one of the seven churches of Asia 
 mentioned in the Revelation. 
 
 The chief cities of Lydia were Smytma, at the eastern ex- 
 tremity of a gulf called Smyrnseus Sinus, and below it, Teos^ 
 the birth-place of Anacreon ; Ephesus, famous for the temple 
 of the goddess Diana, regarded as one of the seven wonders 
 of the world ; Sardis, the residence of Croesus, king of Ly- 
 dia, famous for his riches; Thyatira and Philadelphia. In 
 Caria were Miletus, once a great and flourishing state, and 
 Halicarnassus^ the birth-place of Herodotus, Dionysius, He- 
 raclitus, and many other great men. In \jycva.vfe,Ye Xanthus 
 and Patnra ; in Paraphylia, Perga and Aspendus ; in Pisi- 
 dia, Selgo : m Isnur a, Lystra and l^crJe, mentioned Acts xiv. 
 and in Lycaonia, Iconium. 
 
 In Cilicia was Tarsus, the birth-place of St. Paul, and t?;e 
 rival of Athens and Alexandria in learning and refiiienient, 
 and in the southeast, Tssiis, the scene of the victory of Alex- 
 ander over Darius. In Galatia was Gordium, where Alexan- 
 der cut to pieces the Gordian knot. In the western part o 
 Phrygia were Laodicea^ the seat of one of the seven churches 
 of Asia, and the city of Colosst, to the church in which St. 
 Paul wrote his epistle to the Colossians. 
 
 Islands. Cyprus, a large island off" the coast of Cilicia, was 
 sacred to Venus. Its piincipal towns were Paphos and 8ah- 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. 17 
 
 r.: ^-'".'1- ' '■:,. ' , , . . , ^^s 
 
 mis, Rhodes^ near the coast of Caria, was famous for its ma- 
 ritime power, and for its brazen colossus, 100 feet high. 
 Northwest of Rhodes was Patmos^ to which St. John was 
 banished, and where he wrote the Revelation. Above Patmos 
 were Samos, where Juno was worshipped with peculiar honors, 
 Chios, celebrated for its wines, and Lesbos, the birth-place 
 of Sappho. Off the coast of Troas was the little islatid of 
 Tenedos, where the Grecian fleet retired to await the result of 
 their stratagem for the capture of Troy. 
 
 SYRIA. 
 
 Extent. Syria, including the coasts of Phoenicia and Pal- 
 estine, extended from the Mediterranean on the west to the 
 Euphrates on the east, and from Asia Minor and Armenia on 
 the north to Arabia on the south and southeast. 
 
 Cities. Near the confines of Asia Minor was Alexandria^ 
 now Alexandretta or Scanderoon, and below it, on the river 
 Orontes, was the famous city of Antioch. HeliopoUs, now 
 Balbec, celebrated for a magnificent temple of the sun, the 
 ruins of which still remain, was in a valley between two pa- 
 rallel ridges of mountains called Libanus and Anti-Libanus. 
 South of Heliopolis was Damascus, one of the most famous 
 cities of Asia, both in sacred and profane geography. In the 
 interior, on the Euphrates, was Thapsacus, at the point 
 where there is a celebrated ford in the river. Palmyra, a 
 magnificent city, said to have been founded by Solomon, was 
 situated in the vast desert between Syria and Arabia, and its 
 ruins are still to be seen. On the coast of Pboeiiicia, were Ti/re 
 and Sidon, renowned both in sacred and profane history. 
 
 PALESTINE. 
 
 Extent. Palestine, called also the Land of Canaan, the 
 Land of Israel, the Promised Land, and the Holy Land, ex- 
 tended along the eastern shore of the Mediterranean about 
 180 miles from north to south, between 31^ and 33 * 40' lat. 
 and was about 80 miles broad. 
 
 lyivisions. Palestine was divided in the time of Joshua into 
 12 parts or tribes ; afterwards, into the two king'iloms of Judah 
 and Israel; and lastly, under the Romans, into three provinces, 
 viz. Judcea, in the south, Samaria, in th<; middle, and Galilee, 
 in the north. The whol< count? v easi c.f the Judan *as called 
 2» 
 
18 ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 PercBUy but this name was more particularly applied to the part 
 between the lake of Tiberias and the Dead sea. North of this part 
 were the districts of Galaaditis, Gaulonitis, BatancBa, Tracho- 
 nitis and Iturtsa, and south of it was the land of the Moabites. 
 
 Lakes. The prmcipal lakes were lake Asphaltites, called also 
 the Dead sea, the sea of Sodom, and the Salt sea ; and the sea of 
 Galilee, called also the lake of Tiberias, and the lake of Gen- 
 nesareth. 
 
 Rivers. The Jordan, the principal river, took its rise in the 
 northern part of Palestine, in mount Hermon, and running 
 south, passed through the sea of Tiberias,and discharged itself 
 into the Dead sea after a course of 150 miles. The brook Ke- 
 dron passed near Jerusalem, and flowed into the Dead sea near 
 its northern extremity. The brook Arnon entered the Dead 
 sea at its northeast extremity. 
 
 Cities. Among the cities iii Judaea were Hierosolyma, or Je- 
 rusalem, built on seven hills, the largest of which was Mount 
 Sion; and -Be^A/e/;em, the birth-place of our blessed Saviour, ly- 
 ing south of Jerusalem. Northwest of Jerusalem was Emmaus, 
 and directly north, Bethel. In the south of Judaea were Hebron, 
 originally called Kirjath-Arba, the burial-place of Abraham 
 and his family, Gerar, and Bersabe or Beersheba, often men- 
 tioned in the Bible as the southern limit of the countiy. Along 
 the coast of Philistaea were Gaza and Ascalon, Azotus or As- 
 dod, Ekron and Gath. 
 
 The principal city of Samaria was Ccesarea, situated on 
 the coast, and anciently called Turris Stratonis. It was the 
 seat of the Roman governors, and was made a magnificent 
 city and port by Herod. At a considerable distance below, on 
 the coast, was Joppa, now Jaffa. East of Joppa was Lydda^ 
 called by the Greeks Diospolis. In the interior was Sichem, 
 the original royal city of Samaria, afterwards called Neapolis. 
 It was situated in a valley enclosed between Mount Ebal and 
 Mount f-jTizim. At the foot of Mount Gerizim was the tem- 
 ple of tbf' Samaritans. The city of Samana, afterward called 
 Sebastc, was north of Sichem. 
 
 Near the soutliern extremity of (jalilee were Jezreel, situa-' 
 ted in a spacious plain, called the plain of Esdrelor, and 
 Scythopolis, the chief of the ten confederate cities called De- 
 capolis. On the coast was Ptolemais, anciently called Aco, 
 and now Acre. East of Ptolemai^^, was Cana of Galilee, 
 
ANCIENT WOKLD. 10 
 
 Where the water was made wine, and south of Cana was Naz- 
 areth, Tiberias stood on the west shore of the lake to which 
 it gave name. Capernaum was at the northern extremity of 
 the lake, about midway between Chorazin and Bethsaida, 
 Near the northern confines of Palestine was Paneas^ after- 
 wards called CcBsarea Philippic and a little west of it was 
 Dan., on the northern boundary-of the kingdom of Israel. 
 
 On the east side of the Jordan, in the district called Ga- 
 laaditis, was Ramotk, or Ramoth Gilead, on the brook Jabok, 
 and above it, near the sea of Tiberias, was Gadara^ or the 
 sountry of the Gadarenes. 
 
 Mountains. Palestine was beautifully variegated with moun- 
 tains, hills, vallies and plains. Among the mountains werQ 
 Mount Carmel^ near the coast, between Ptoiemais and Csesa- 
 rea, and Mount Tabor., near Nazareth, thought by some to 
 have been the scene of the transfiguration. On the east side 
 of the Jordan, were Mount Herynon, in the northern part of 
 Palestine, and in the southern part, nearly east of Jericho, 
 Mounts Abarim and Nebo^ from which Moses had a view of 
 the Promised Land. 
 
 REMAINDER OF ASIA. 
 
 Countries. South of Syria was Arabia, consisting of three 
 parts, Arabia Pctrcza., or the Stony Arabia, lying at the top 
 of the Red sea or Sinus Arabicus ; Arabia Felix, or the Fruit- 
 ful Arabia, situated on the eastern shore of the Red sea, and 
 Arabia Deserta, or the Desert Arabia, occupying the rest of 
 the country between the Arabian and Persian gulfs. That 
 part of Arabia Petroea which bordered on Judsea was called 
 Idumea or Edom. East of Arabia, j;iear the mouth of the Eu- 
 phrates, at the top of the Persian gulf, was ChaldcBa, and 
 above Chaldsea was Babylonia, Between the rivers Euphrates 
 and Tigris was Mesopotamia. On the east of the Tigris was As" 
 Syria, now called Kurdistan. East of Assyria was 3Iedia, 
 which extended to the southern shore of the Caspian sea, and 
 south of Media was Persia, which was bounded by the river 
 Tigris and Babylonia on the west, and by the Persian gulf on 
 the south. The countries east of Persia were little known, an5 
 are seldom mentioned in history. North of Mesopotamia was 
 Armenia. Above Armenia, on the east coast of Pontus Euxi- 
 mis, was Colchis, the scene of the fable of the GoIdertFleeee 
 
2% ANCIENT WORLD. 
 
 and the Argonautic expedition ; and on the Caucasian moiin-' 
 tains, east of Colchis, were Iberia and Albania. 
 
 Mountains. In Arabia Petroea were Mounts Sinai and JFTo 
 reo, on the peninsula between the two gulfs of the Red sea. 
 Nephates^ a lofty mountain in Armenia, is supposed to be 
 Ararat, on which Noah's ark rested after the deluge. 
 
 Cities. The principal city of Babylonia was Babylon, the 
 most ancient in the world. It was on the east bank of the Eu- 
 phrates, near a place now called Hellah, about 47 miles south 
 of Bagdad. Ninus or Nineveh, the capital of Assyria, and of- 
 ten mentioned in the BiV)le, was on the Tigris. The capital 
 of Media was Ecbatana. In Persia were Susa, now called 
 Suster, and Persejjolis, which was burnt by Alexander, and 
 the ruins of which are still magnificent. 
 
 AFRICA. 
 
 Countries. The first country in Africa, beginning in the 
 West, was Mauretania, now Morocco. East of it was Numidia, 
 now Algiers, and east of Numidia was Africa Proper, now 
 Tunis, lying along that part of the coast which bends from 
 north to south. The bay formed at the southern part of this 
 bend was called Syrtis Minor, now the gulf of Ca!>es, and 
 considerably farther to the east was Syrtis Major. Between 
 the two Syrtes was Tripolitana, now Tripoli. East of the Syr- 
 tis Major was Libya, which contained the two countries of 
 Cyrenaica and 3larmarica, together with an extensive un- 
 known region in the interior. East of Libya was JEgyptus, 
 or Egypt. Below Numidia was Gatulia, now Biledulgerid, 
 and below Egypt was Ethiopia. 
 
 Cities. Among the cities in Mauretania was Tingis, now 
 Tangier. The capital of Numidia was Cirta, a strong city, 
 now Constantina. The capital of Africa Propria Avas the re- 
 nowned city oi Carthage, fmwowsioY the wars which it main- 
 tained with the Romans, called the Punic wars, in the third 
 of which it was totally destroyed. Utica, the capital of the 
 province after the destruction of Carthage, was memorable for 
 the death of Cato. Thapsus is memorable for Csesar's victory 
 over Metellus Scipio, and Zama for the victory obtained by 
 Scipio Africanus the elder over Hannibal. Tripolitana re- 
 ceives its name from three cities on the coast, Sabrata, CEa, 
 now Tv'v^oW, B.\\^ Leptis Magna. In Libya., near tlie coast, 
 
ANCIENT WORLD. '2x 
 
 were Berenice, Barce, now Barca, Ptolemais, Cyrene, and 
 Darnis, now Derne. In the interior of Libya, on a little fer- 
 tile spot in the midst of a sandy desert, was the celebrated 
 emple of Jupiter Ammon. 
 
 EGYPT. 
 
 Divisions, Egypt is the long narrow country on the banks 
 of the Nile in the lower part of its course. It was anciently 
 divided into ^jgyptus Inferior, or Lower Egypt, toward the 
 sea, Heptanomis, in the middle, and JBg.yptiis Superior, or 
 Upper Egypt, in the south. 
 
 Cities. Alexandria, built by Alexander the Great, before 
 the discovery of the Cape of Good Hope, was the centre of 
 trade between Europe and the East Indies, and was at one 
 time the greatest commercial city in the world. Pelusium^ a 
 strong city on the east branch of the Nile, at its mouth, was 
 one of the keys of Egypt. The renowned city of Memphis, 
 the ancient metropolis of all Egypt, was a few miles S. W. 
 of the modern Cairo. Below Memphis was Ai^sinoe, situated 
 near lake Moeris. Thebes, the capital of Upper Egypt, and 
 celebrated for its hundred gates, was a magnificent city, on 
 both sides of the Nile. Its ruins now occupy a space 27 miles 
 in circumference. 
 
 Ancient Works. Near the site of Memphis are those stu- 
 pendous works, the Pyramids, the largest of which is about 
 500 feet high, and covers eleven acres of ground. Lake Mce- 
 .ris, more than 200 miles in circumference, is said to have 
 been dug by a king of the same name, as a Reservoir for the 
 superabundant water of the Nile during its inundation. The 
 labyrinth was at the south end of lake Mceris, and consisted 
 of 3000 chambers, communicating with each other by innu- 
 merable windinfif passages. Fifteen hundred of the chambers 
 were below ground. 
 
 Near Thebes was the celebrated statue of Memnon, which 
 was fabulously said to utter a sound when struck by the firsf 
 rays of the sun. It was carried to London in 1813. The towei 
 of Pharos, on an island near Alexandria, was built of whit* 
 marble, and could be seen at the distance of 100 miles. 
 
 FmiB. 
 
QUESTIONS 
 
 ON THE ANCIENT MAPS. 
 
 MAP OF THE ROMAN EMPIRE. 
 
 I Wliftt large sea wns situated directly north of As'a Minor ? 2 What sea between Asia 
 Miflwr and Greece ? 3 W\mt sea between the EuxMie and tiie .^gean ? 4 Wliatsea north 
 or the Enxine ? 5 What sea between Italy and riyiicnm ? 6 What sea betwt en Sardi- 
 nia and Italy ? 7 What sea alonp the nurthem coast of Spain and western coast of France? 
 S What was the ancient name of the Baltic ? 
 
 9 AVhat strait conntcied Palus Mifiotus with the Euxine ? 10 What strait between the 
 Enxine and Propont s ? 1 ! What straa between the Propont's and Mgenv am ? 12 What 
 •trait comiected the Mediterranean and Atlantic ? 13 Wliat strait between Britain and 
 Gaul ? 
 
 14 What islands off the eastern coast of Spain ? 15 What island* near the S. W. ex- 
 tremity of Britan ? 
 
 16 What country between the Euxine and Medterranean at-ns ? 17 What country be- 
 tween the JF.gean and Ionian seas? 18 Mention the countries- oil the northern shore of 
 the Mediterranean, beginninff in the west. 19 Ment'on the cou'iT'es on the African shore 
 of tlie Mediten-anean, b; ginning in the east. '20 What couni v between the Euphrates 
 and Tigris ? 21 What countr es between the Euxine and Casj, \n ? 22 What country Pf. 
 of Mesopotamia i: 23 What countries directly S. of Gennany ? c4 What large country E. 
 ofG rmany? 
 
 25 What river formed the southern boundary of Gennany .' ■»■ What river, the eastern 
 boundary r 27 AVhat r ver, the w( stern boundary ? 28 Met'tion the three large rivers 
 between the Rhine and Vistala,with their corresponding modrrn names. 29 Mention tlie 
 five large rivers of Gaul and the'r modern names. 30 What large river flows into the 
 Medterranean from Spain ? 31 Ment on the three large rivers which flow into the Eux- 
 ine with their modern names. 32 What large river flows into Palus Maeotis ? 33 What 
 large river flows into the Caspian ? 
 
 34 Mention tlie ancient divisions of Spain f 35 In what part of Spain was B<Btica ? 
 36 What modem country occupies the place of Lus'tania ? 37 How was Saguntum situ- 
 ated ? 38 Gades .' 39 Hispalis ? 40 Ol'sippo ? 41 Carthago iVova ? 42 the pcrtof Calle? 
 
 43 Mention the ancient dWisions of Gaul. 44 In what part of Gaul was Aquitania ? 
 45 In what part, Narhonensis .' 46 In what part, Lugdunensis ? 47 In what part were the 
 Belgae ? 48 How was Mass lia situated .' 49 Luadunam.' iO Lutetia Parisiorum ? 51 Narbof 
 
 5-2 How was Babylon situated ? 53 Nintveh ? 54 Alexandria in Eg>T)t ? 55 Memphis ? 
 96 Thebes ? 
 
 57 Wh^ch way from Damascus was Palmyra ? 58 Jerusalem ? 59 Antioch ? 60 Tyre 
 and Sidon'.^ 61 Bribylon .' 
 
 62 Which way fvomCarthage was Rome ? 63 Syracuse ? 64 Utica ? 65 Cirta ? 
 
 MAP OF ITALY. 
 
 1 What was the northern part of Italy called by the ancient Romans ? 2 In what part of 
 Italy was L'guria .' 3 In what part, Etruria ? 4 In what part, Lalium ? 5 In what part, 
 CalHbria ? 6 In what part, H stria ? 
 
 7 In what part of Italy was lake Verbsnus ? 8 In what port, lake Thras\-menus ? 9 What 
 was th'^ ancient name of the largpst river in Iinly ? 10 AVhat W( re the princ-pal branches 
 of the Padus from tlie N . .' 11 What considerable river E. of the Pudus ? 12 What was 
 the name of the principal river in Etruria ': ] 2 Wh.^t considerable river S. of the Amus .• 
 14 In what part of Italy v%'as the Rubicon ? 15 What large gulf on the S. E. coast of Italy ' 
 16 What gulf on the coast of Liguria ? 
 
 17 Which way from Rome was Brandusium ? IS Which way, Ariminium ? 19 Which 
 way, Capua ? 20 Which way, Ravenna? 21 In what part of Italy was Rhegium ? 22 In 
 ■what part, Caimte ? 
 
 23 "Where were Scylla and Charybflls ? 24 In what part of Sicily was Syracuse ? 25 In 
 what part, Panormus ? 26 In what part, Messina ? 27 In what part, Enna ? 28 What clus- 
 ter of islands off" the northern coast of Sicily ? 29 What cluster near the western extremi- 
 ty of the island ? 30 What island south ofSi'rily r 31 Which way from Sicily is Sardinia* 
 8? Wh^t large island nyrth •f S.*rd;Ris ? ?8 What island between Corsica and Etrtrria * 
 
qUESi'MA'S. :23 
 
 MAP OF GREECE. 
 
 ' What province was in tlie centre of Peloponnesus ? 2 In what part of Peloponhestis 
 .s Achaia ? 3 In whal part, Arirolis ? 4 Laconia ? S Messenia ? 6 Mention the province* 
 
 f Greece Proper in their order, from S. E. to N. W. ' 
 
 7 What gulf between Attica ami Argolis ? 8 What gulf between Argolis and Laconia ? 
 9 What gulfs on the southern coast of Peloponnesus ? 10 What gulf on Uie northern coast 
 of Peloponnesus : 1 1 What sthinus separated Saronicus Sinus fro'n the Corinthian gulf? 
 12 How was Thessaly hounded ? 13 Wh'ch way from Thessaly was Epirus ? 14 What 
 country immediately N of Thessaly and Epirus ? lo What country, E. of Macedonia ? 16 
 What peninsula between Th ?maicu8 Sinus and Strymonicus Sinus? 
 
 17 What was the principal river in Thsssaiy? 18 Through what vale did the Peneus flow 
 near its mouth ? 19 What celebrated mountains in Thessaly near the mouth of the Pe- 
 lieus ? 20 \Vhere was the celebrated pass or stra't of Thermopylae ? 21 Wbat celebrated 
 mountain in Phocis ? 22 Where was Mount HeUcon ? 23 Name the two principal rivera 
 in Peloponnesus ? 24 Wliat celebrated city stood on the Eurotas ? 25 What city ou the 
 Alpheus ? 
 
 26 In what province was Argos ? 27 How was Corinth s'tuated ? 28 Which way from 
 Corinth was Athens ? 29 Which way, Thebes ? 30 Wh'ch way. Megara ? 31 Which way 
 from Athens was Eleusis ? 32 In what provnce, and ntar what mountain was Delphi ? 
 33 Which way from Tiiehf s was Plat?ea ? 34 Which way from Athens was Marathon ? 
 35 In wliat part of Thessaly was Pharsalus ? 35 Wh' re was Tliessalonica situated ? 37 
 Which way from Theasalonica was Potidata ? 38 Which wav, Philippi ? 49 Whicli way^ 
 Stagira ? 
 
 40 Where was Monnt Athos ? 41 What large island E. of Mount Athos ? 42 What large 
 island near the coast of Boeot a, Attica and Locris ? 43 Which way from Eubcea and Atti- 
 ca were the Cyclades ? 44 What large island S. of the Cyclades ? 45 What large island oflT 
 the coast of Epirus ? a' WTiich way from Actium was the island of Leucadia ? 47 Which 
 way from the Corinthian gulf was Ithaca ? 48 \¥hat island near the coast of Attica, oppo- 
 site Eleusis ? 
 
 MAP OF ASIA MINOR. 
 
 1 What provinces of Asia Minor bordered on the Euxine sea ? 2 Wliat provinces, oa 
 the ^gean sea ? 3 What provinces^ on the Mediterranean ? 4 ^^^lat provinces were ia 
 the interior ? 5 Which was the largest river flowing into the Euxine ? C Where did the 
 Gra,nicus discharge itself ? 7 In what direction did the Mteander flow r 8 What strait con- 
 nected the Euxine witli Propontis ? 9 What strait connected Propontis with ilie ^gean 
 sea? 
 
 10 Where was Troy situated ? 11 What mountain near Troy ? 12 Name the famous 
 cities on the coast of the ^gean sea. 
 
 13 In what province of Asia Minor was Pergamiis ? 14 In what province, Thyatira ? 13 
 Philadelphia? 16Laodicea? 17 Sardis? ISGordium? IQiconium? 20 Halicamassus .^ 
 21 Tarsus ? 22 Nic«a ? 23 Lystra ? 24 Sinope ? 
 
 25 What small island ofif the coast, near Troy? 26 ^Vhich way from Smymavif\& the 
 island of Lesbos ? 27 'SVhich way, Chios r 23 Whiqh way, Samos ? 29 What famous island 
 near the S. W. extremity of Asia Minor ? 30 What large island S. of Cilicia ? 
 
 MAP OF PALESTINE. 
 
 I What large lafee in the S. E. part of Palestine ? 2 What was the principal river of 
 Palestine ? 3 In what part of the country did the Jordan rise ? 4 Through what lake did 
 It pass ? 5 Where did it discharge itself? 6 In what part of Palestine was Judaea ? 7 In 
 ■what part, Galilee ? 8 In what pait, Samaria ? 9 What was the principal city in Judsea ? 
 
 10 Which way from Jerusalem was Jericho? U Which way, Bethlehem ? 12 Which 
 ■way, Emmaus ? 13 Which way, Hebron ? 14 Which way, Joppa ? 15 Name the princi- 
 pal cities in the country of the PhiBstines. 16 Which way from Samaria was Neapolis or 
 Sichem ? 17 Between what mountains was Sichem situated ? 18 What large city on the 
 coast of Samaria ? 19 What celebrated mountain near the coast N. of Caesarea ? 
 
 20 In what part of Galilee was Nazareth ? 21 Which way from Nazareth was Cana of 
 Galilee ? 22 What towns on the S. W. shore of the sea of Galilee ? 23 What town at the 
 northern extremity of the lake ? 24 Which way from Capernaum was Bethsaida ? 25 
 AVhich way. Cborazra ? 26 Which way, Gadara? 
 
./- 
 
 <i^ /i 
 
 ^"' Ji^- 
 
 -^ 
 
 ^d'^^C^- 
 
 '<9'*. 
 
 ':h